Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
B11-0496 Project Manual Volume 3 approved
PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 OF 3 Strata Vail Vail, Colorado 100% Issue For Construction December 20, 2013 OZ Architecture 3003 Larimer Street Denver, Colorado OZ Project No. 17004 B11-0701 Received By Lynne Campbell at 11:04 am, Jan 13, 2014 Reviewed for Code Compliance Code: 2012 International Building Code (IBC) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DOCUMENT 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00220 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00221 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01230 ALTERNATES 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02240 DEWATERING SYSTEM 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02315 LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02754 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02760 PAVEMENT MARKING 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02815 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02900 LANDSCAPING 02901 SOIL AMENDMENT 02922 TOPSOIL DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03542 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT- BASED UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04814 CONCRETE MASONRY 04816 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04851 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04860 STONE MASONRY STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05511 METAL STAIRS 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05530 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05532 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05715 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06150 WOOD DECKING 06160 SHEATHING 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED- LAMINATED LUMBER 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07142 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07180 CONCRETE SEALERS 07182 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07412 METAL SIDING 07413 METAL ROOF PANELS 07460 SIDING 07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07570 TRAFFIC BEARING MEMBRANES 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07812 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 2 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08263 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08334 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08452 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08830 MIRRORS 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08952 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09622 RESILIENT SPORTS- FLOOR COVERINGS 09640 WOOD FLOORING 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09671 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09680 CARPET 09681 CARPET TILE 09770 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09920 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS OZ Product Information - Unit Finishes OZ Product Information – Public Space Finishes STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10310 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10431 SIGNAGE 10440 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10506 WOOD LOCKERS 10508 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11110 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12364 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12375 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13150 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14560 CHUTES STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15030 HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15240 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15500 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15550 BOILERS 15600 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15650 REFRIGERATION 15655 REFRIGERANT AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15750 HEAT TRANSFER 15770 SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15975 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15980 MECHANICAL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16035 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16055 TEMPORARY LIGHTING POWER 16060 IDENTIFICATION 16065 TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16102 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16122 FIRE SEALS 16125 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16132 POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16160 PANELBOARDS 16165 LOAD CENTERS 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16175 MODULAR METER CENTERS 16181 FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS 16400 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) 16403 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16440 SWITCHBOARDS 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16470 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER 16490 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16500 LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES 16601 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16735 CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16858 ROOF, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL 16940 CONTACTORS DIVISION 19 – SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 19591 SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM END OF DOCUMENT 00001 12/20/2013 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Basic requirements common to the work in general of Division 15 and other Divisions and Sections of the Specification where referenced. B. Provide, unless specified otherwise, all labor, materials and equipment necessary for completely finished and operational mechanical systems described and specified under other Sections of this Division 15. C. Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, fittings, and accessories required as part of the work even though not specified or indicated. D. Inspection: Inspect work preceding or interfacing with work of Division 15 and report any known or observed defects that affect the Work to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with the work until defects are corrected or coordination changes have been made. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. 1.3 UTILITIES, EXTENSIONS, CONNECTIONS AND FEES FOR WATER AND SEWER A. Provide all building services extensions and connections to utilities indicated on Drawings. B. Connection charges, membership fees, system development charges and the like, that in principle allow the right to obtain the services from the utility will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. C. Tap fees as they are known to the trade and the charges for actual materials and labor for tapping, inspection and recording of the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Owner. D. In the event that the serving utility company installs their own taps, service, meters, etc., all costs imposed by this action shall be paid for by the Owner. Extensions from termination points to connection with building services and systems will be the responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor. E. When provided and/or installed by the Division 15 Contractor all pads, vaults, manholes, manhole covers, meter enclosures, valves, services boxes, and the like, all in conformance with requirements of the serving utility company. 1.4 REFERENCES BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as the date of the Contract Documents, except when a specific date is specified. C. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: The following is a list of the acronyms of organizations referenced in these Specifications: Abbreviation Referenced Organization AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA American Standards Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CDA Copper Development Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CTI Cooling Tower Institute ETL Environmental Testing Laboratory FM Factory Mutual System IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials IRI Industrial Risk Insurers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBS National Bureau of Standards NCPWB National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electric Code (NFPA) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.5 DEFINITIONS BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc. B. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to describe operations at the Project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations. C. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. D. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or schedules on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate the cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. E. General Contractor: The term "General Contractor" used in Division 15 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents means the party with whom the Owner has executed the Owner-Contractor Agreement. If the General Contractor is identified in this specification or on the drawings as being responsible for certain elements of the work, it is the responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor to verify this arrangement. F. Acceptable Equal 1. Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "acceptable equal" means that any materials, equipment, work procedures and techniques shall be either addressed on the drawing, specifications or addendum by manufacturer or by detailed material description. When brand names are referenced it implies that only the manufacturers listed are acceptable. All acceptable material, equipment, work procedures, and techniques will be noted in the specifications, drawings, or by addendum prior to bid date. Items not acceptable in this manner will not be considered. 2. When providing a product and/or service under the qualification of an "acceptable equal", the Division 15 Contractor shall be entirely responsible for additional costs incurred due to modifications of the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical and landscape design that may be required to accommodate the "acceptable equal". Refer to Product Options and Substitutions in this Section for more clarification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and apparatus required for the work to be new and of highest quality; to be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, an article complying with the highest standard of care. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who will be constantly in charge of the installation of the work, together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, certified welders, plumbers, millwrights, sprinkler fitters, drain layers, helpers, and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system. C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials to be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the appropriate manufacturer. This includes the performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Execute Work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements. B. Comply with latest editions of all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect at the time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to the following: Codes, Ordinances and Regulations Local Building Code Amendments 2003 International Building Code 2003 International Mechanical Code 2003 International Electric Code 2003 International Plumbing Code 2003 International Gas Code 2003 International Fire Code 2003 International Energy Conservation Code National Electrical Code NFPA-70 State Boiler Code State Department of Health Requirements State Energy Conservation Standards National Fire Protection Association Standards Jurisdictional Board of Health or Department Jurisdictional Waste Water Management Division or District Jurisdictional Board of Water Commissioners or Department Jurisdictional Water Conservation Standards C. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply. D. Where hourly fire ratings are indicated or required, provide components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Industrial Risk Insurers, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as required by Owner's insurance company or underwriter. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the provisions of Division 1and the General Conditions of the Contract. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Submit Samples, Shop Drawings and Product Data as required by various Sections of Division 15. 1. The Contractor agrees that these Submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of these Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. 2. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between these Submittals and the Contract Documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after these Submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be followed. C. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 15 showing compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. D. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit printed operating instructions and maintenance data in accordance with Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in this Section. 1.9 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Substitutions and Prior Approvals: Substitutions and prior approvals will be acceptable only when the proposed substitute has been submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved through an addendum or change order. C. Manufacturers not listed must submit three copies of requests in writing to the Engineer for approval to bid not less than ten calendar days prior to bid. D. Some materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The manufacturer and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such equipment and material. Requests submitted without sufficient information will not be considered. E. Review and approval of substitutions signifies only general acceptance of equipment, does not relieve the contractor's responsibility for intended operation, compliance with specifications and codes, necessary changes due to dimensional differences, space requirements, or electrical requirements. F. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, the Division 15 Contractor shall be completely and solely responsible for space requirements, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Notification of General Contractor and other affected subcontractors shall also be the responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Division 15 Contractor shall submit three typed and bound copies of the maintenance manual, 8-1/2" x 11" in size, to the Engineer, Architect, and General Contractor for their approval. These approved copies shall then be transmitted to the Owner. Manuals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Cover shall be printed with the title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and project name. C. The manual shall be enclosed in a stiff-back, three-ring binder and shall have: 1. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24-hour phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year's operation. 2. Identified copies of all test reports required by this Division. 3. Operating instructions for complete system, including emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and long-term shutdown. 4. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists, proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules. 5. Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment, including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and specifications (final shop drawings). c. Parts lists. d. Complete "as-built" wiring and temperature control diagrams. Shop drawings are not acceptable. D. In addition to the maintenance manual, and keyed to it, the equipment shall be identified and tagged as specified on drawings. Insert a copy of this Equipment List in manual. 1. Identify all starters, disconnect switches, and manually operated controls, except integral equipment switches with permanently applied, legible markers corresponding to operating instructions in the "Maintenance Manual". 2. Tag all manual operating valves with 1-1/2" diameter brass tags attached with chains. Tags are to be sequence numbered with legible metal stamps. 3. Provide a typed tag list or schedule stating number, location, and function of each tagged item. Insert a copy of tag list in each "Maintenance Manual". E. Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for the Owner's maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the General Contractor and far enough in advance so that all personnel can be notified. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color. B. Protection: Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials. C. Large Items: Make arrangements with other contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. D. Handling of Materials: Materials shall be handled, sorted and distributed using appropriate handling methods to protect all materials from damage. Damaged, rusted, corroded or otherwise damaged materials shall be removed from the project site. Determination of materials deemed unusable or inappropriate for installation shall be made by the Engineer, Architect or General Contractor. 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Accessibility 1. Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work whose work is in the same space and shall advise the General Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size required. 2. Division 15 Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include (but not be limited to) valves, shock absorbers, traps, cleanouts, motors, controllers, switchgear, and drain points. If required for better accessibility, furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the General Contractor prior to making the change. 3. Division 15 Contractor shall provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access doors for each concealed valve, shock absorber, control damper, or other device requiring service. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. B. Fabrication: Before any ductwork is fabricated and before running and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork, the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work. Refer to the Coordination portion of this Section for conditional requirements. C. Freeze Protection: Do not run lines in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside wall. Insulation of piping alone shall not be considered adequate freeze protection. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting: Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished; remove same from premises when no longer required. 1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Comply with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 5. Field Test Records C. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. D. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". Mark information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. E. Record the following information on Drawings: 1. Dimensioned horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 2. Dimensioned location of internal utilities, equipment, ductwork, piping, controls and other appurtenances installed during construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes by change order or field order. 5. Details not on original contract drawings. F. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above. G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to General Contractor. 1.14 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. B. Coordination with Electrical Work: Section 15050 and Division 1. C. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. D. Cutting and Patching: Section 15050 and Division 1. E. Drawings and Specifications: The Mechanical Drawings indicate the general design and arrangement of lines, equipment, systems, etc. Information shown is BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 diagrammatic in character and does not necessarily indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Do not scale the Drawings for dimensions. Take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc., from the Architectural and Structural Drawings and equipment to be furnished. F. Each Division 15 subcontractor shall coordinate with other contractors to make certain that any of his equipment, piping or ductwork which is mounted on isolators or flexibly connected does not become "grounded" by another contractors work (e.g. walls, ceiling, etc.). G. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. H. Order of Precedence: The precedence of mechanical construction documents are as follows: 1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the original Drawings and Specifications. 2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. 3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted materials over graphic indications. 4. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and Architectural Drawings, notify the General Contractor and/or the Architect so proper resolution can be determined. I. The Division 15 Contractor is responsible for coordinating his work with that of all other construction trades prior to fabrication or installation of any materials or equipment. Notify the General Contractor and the Architect if any conflicts exist so an appropriate solution can be determined. This coordination is to include but not be limited to: 1. Structural members, fireproofing and deflection. 2. Architectural ceiling heights and types, soffits, wall types and thicknesses. 3. Rated assemblies. 4. Expansion joints. 5. Fire sprinkler pipe routing and head locations. 6. Plumbing piping including required slope on drain piping. 7. Height of light fixtures. 8. Access to all equipment and devices for serviceability and maintenance. J. All work install by the Division 15 Contractor under a "Core and Shell" contract is to be coordinated and installed such that adequate clearance has been provided for the work to be installed during "Tenant Finish" construction. This includes but is not limited to: 1. Standard light fixtures with top electrical whip connections. 2. Low pressure ductwork, fittings and diffusers. 3. Fire sprinkler piping. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Plumbing system connections. 5. Ceiling heights as defined in the architectural documents. K. A full set of composite coordination documents is to be produced in accordance with Division 1 that show the structure, the size, location and routing of all Division 15 and Division 16 work to identify potential conflicts prior to proceeding with fabrication or installation. These drawings are to be produced using the most recent version of AutoCAD and each system it to be drawn in its own layer. Submit the completed set with areas of conflict clearly noted to the General Contractor and Architect for review. 1.15 START-UP PROCEDURES A. Before start-up, each piece of equipment comprising a part of the system shall be checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, proper control sequence, and any other condition which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel. B. Insure that all control systems are fully operational in automatic mode. Individually test each control loop to make certain it is operating as intended and is communicating properly with other devices. C. If systems are not to continue in use following the start-up procedures, steps should be taken to insure against accidental operation or operation by unauthorized personnel. Provide padlocks on disconnect switches where applicable. D. Factory personnel shall be notified as appropriate to start systems requiring their services. E. Notify Architect/Engineer at least two weeks prior to the scheduled start-up date of all major mechanical equipment and systems. 1.16 SCHEDULE OF TESTING A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. B. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 15 Contractor in such a manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel. C. All testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor's representative; signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule. D. All testing must be performed in accordance with the procedures set forth in Division 1 and other Sections of the Specifications where referenced. At completion of testing, the schedule shall then be submitted to the Architect. E. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as necessary. F. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment. G. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire protection and health codes. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 H. After test runs have been completed and systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory and ready for permanent operation, all permanent pipeline strainers and filters shall be cleaned, air filters cleaned or replaced, valve and pump packings properly adjusted, belt tensions adjusted, drive guards secured in place, lubrication checked and replenished if required. 1.17 CLEANING AND FINISHING A. Provide cleaning in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1. B. Cleaning shall include but not be limited to removing grease, dirt, dust, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from sight-exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, fixtures and other such items installed under Division 15 of the work. If finishes have been damaged, refinish to original condition and leave everything in proper working order and of intended appearance. C. Clean Domestic Water Systems in accordance with Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems. D. Clean HVAC Piping Systems in accordance with Section 15500 - HVAC Piping and Pumps. 1.18 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection. B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the General Contractor with the appropriate designations for use. 1.19 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra stock as required by the various Sections of Division 15 in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. Deliver to project site as directed by Owner and obtain a signed receipt prior to final payment. B. Spare products and parts shall be in their original packing material, including instructional data, and be tagged to indicate their specific equipment and/or system use. 1.20 WARRANTIES A. Warranty: Provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of two years after Date of Acceptance. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of two years. Submit to the Construction Manager/General Contractor for delivery to the Architect. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. This warranty will be superseded by the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for construction, heat or ventilation. C. Other Sections of this Specification may identify extended warranties from the manufacturer of the equipment in addition to the standard one-year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOT USED END OF SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIRMENTS 15010 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15030 - HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section describes HVAC system commissioning, defined as an organized, methodical review and test procedure performed during construction to ensure that the HVAC systems are capable of meeting the Owner's performance criteria. B. The commissioning process consists of the following stages: Preconstruction Review, Installation, Start-up, Component Testing and Calibration, Functional Performance Testing and Owner Acceptance. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. DDC Control Systems - Section 15975. B. Mechanical Sequences of Operation – Section 15980. C. Test and Balancing - Section 15990. 1.3 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner: Approve commissioning plan, designate representative for all acceptance testing, provide on-site facilities for training. B. General Contractor: Coordinate construction activities to allow commissioning of systems during construction period. C. HVAC Subcontractor: Install all HVAC equipment and control devices as defined in Section 15975, perform pre-Start-up on HVAC equipment, perform start-up on HVAC equipment. D. Electrical Subcontractor: Coordination with the commissioning supervisor to schedule and complete construction activities to allow commissioning of entire systems during the construction period. E. Controls Subcontractor: Pre-submittal review with commissioning supervisor, commissioning plan review, control system installation, control system component testing and calibration, functional performance testing, Owner acceptance testing, training. F. Test and Balance Subcontractor: Setpoints for fan and pump control loops, system performance verification. G. Fire Alarm Subcontractor: Installation of life-safety system interface devices, testing of life-safety device interlocks with the control system. H. Commissioning Supervisor: HVAC system design review, HVAC system submittal review, commissioning plan, coordination with other trades, control system HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 component testing and calibration, functional performance testing, Owner acceptance testing, training, commissioning report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION REVIEW A. Design Review: Review of drawings and specifications to verify the following: coordination between trades; code compliance; equipment selections and capacities; control sequences for all equipment; and control system component specifications. B. Submittal Review: Review of HVAC equipment and control system submittals to verify the following: equipment capacities; type and features; control system architecture; and control system component accuracies, ranges, signal types, ratings, and failure modes. C. Commissioning Plan: Name and telephone numbers for all participants in commissioning process; HVAC equipment pre-start and start-up checklists; analog device testing and calibration sheets; digital device testing and setpoint sheets; functional performance test sheets for all DDC control loops; testing and calibration procedures for all control devices. 3.2 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Commissioning Plan: Refer to the commissioning plan for specific pre-start and start-up date for each major piece of HVAC equipment. B. Pre-Start Activities: Confirm device wired to appropriate voltage source; heater elements installed in motor starter device; shipping restraints removed; device rotates freely; adjust pulleys, belts, couplings; safety devices installed; and disconnect switch installed. C. Start-Up Activities: Adjust pulleys and belt tension; confirm noise and vibration levels acceptable; confirm source voltage acceptable in all phases; record actual and rated motor amperage; and check device rotation. 3.3 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION A. Commissioning Plan: Refer to the commissioning plan for information on the devices to be tested and the test and calibration for each device. B. Analog Input Devices: 1. Temperature devices without transmitters (thermistor type) a. Disconnect sensing element from loop. b. Check for failed signal at system address. HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 c. If system shows failed continue to the next step. If not, check for shorted wiring or a bad software address. d. Connect decade box or suitable resistance simulation device in place of the sensing element. e. Simulate the resistance corresponding to zero, fifty, and one hundred percent of system designed range. f. Adjust control system software offset or slope and intercept as required to ensure reading within stated tolerance. g. Replace sensor element. Make sure the system is receiving the correct signal. 2. Temperature devices with transmitters (RTD style) a. Assemble required equipment: Decade box, digital VOM, trim screwdriver and RTD resistance versus temperature chart specific to the element being tested. b. Adjust the decade box setting so that the transmitter output is 4.00 mA. c. Record the resistance value and the corresponding temperature. d. Adjust the decade box setting so that the transmitter output is 20.00 mA. e. Record the resistance value and the corresponding temperature. f. Subtract the temperature in step b from the temperature in step c. This is the transmitter span. Adjust the transmitter span potentiometer as required to allow the actual span to match the required span. Repeat steps b and c to confirm. g. Set the decade box to the resistance corresponding to a 4.00 mA output. h. Adjust the zero potentiometer as required for the transmitter to produce a 4.00 mA output signal. 3. Pressure transmitters a. Disconnect the sensing element from the transmitter and replace it with a hand-held calibrated pressure simulation device with an accuracy that exceeds the rating of the transmitter to be calibrated. b. Install a VOM meter in line with the negative terminal of the transmitter. c. Determine the following values from the manufacturer's data. (1) PMIN - Pressure at minimum transmitter output. (2) PMIN - Pressure at maximum transmitter output. (3) TMIN - Minimum transmitter output signal (mA or VDC). (4) TMAX - Maximum transmitter output signal (mA or VDC). d. Adjust the pressure until the transmitter output equals TMIN. This value is P1. e. Adjust the pressure until the transmitter output equals TMAX. This value is P2. f. Adjust the span potentiometer until the transmitter output signal equals the following: (1) Transmitter Output (TO) = g. Adjust the pressure to PMIN value. HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 h. Adjust the zero potentiometer until the transmitter output signal equals TMIN. i. Adjust the pressure to (PMIN + PMAX)/2, and confirm that the transmitter output signal is equal to (TMIN + TMAX)/2. j. Repeat steps D through I as required. 4. Relative Humidity Transmitters a. Disconnect the signal wire from the negative terminal of the transmitter. b. Connect a VOM between the sensor and the signal wire to read current output (mA) of the device. c. Using a hand-held relative humidity calibration device, compare the output signal of the transmitter to the expected value. d. Adjust the zero potentiometer of the transmitter as required so that the transmitter output matches the expected value. C. Analog Output Devices 1. Control valve (pump operational during testing) a. Disconnect control signal and record valve position. b. Command valve to 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% positions, and observe valve response. Adjust the control signal output device(s), including the I/P transducer and/or pilot positioners, as required. c. If valve response is non-linear to control system input signal, review actuator sizing or consider the use of a pilot positioner. 2. Control damper (fan operational during testing) a. Disconnect control signal and record damper position. b. Command damper to 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% positions, and observe damper response. Adjust the control signal output device(s), including the O/P transducer and/or pilot positioners, as required. c. If damper response is non-linear to control system input signal, review actuator sizing or consider the use of a pilot positioner. 3. Fan speed control a. Disconnect control signal and record fan speed. b. Command control input signal to 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% positions, and observe fan speed response. c. Adjust the control signal output and/or the variable speed drive set-up parameters as required to achieve a linear relationship between control signal and fan speed. D. Digital Input Devices 1. Remove the control wiring and verify the control system address. 2. Alternatively open and close the control wiring circuit and confirm the corresponding change of stat at the control panel. 3. Record the setpoint(s). HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Digital Output Devices 1. Remove the control wiring at the termination of the digital output wiring (relay, E/P, contact, starter, etc.) and verify the address. 2. Alternatively command the output open and closed from the control system, and confirm the appropriate response at the controlled device. 3.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Overview: Functional performance testing is the method by which the control loop logic is tested for proper performance for each controlled system. This is accomplished by revising setpoints or simulating events and comparing the actual system response to the expected system response. Refer to the commissioning plan for the functional performance test procedures. B. Normal Control Sequences: Perform a step-by-step test of all the various control logic sequences for each HVAC system by revising setpoints or simulating events (contact closure, etc.) and observing the system response. C. Safety Interlocks: Verify that the following interlocks shut down the appropriate equipment when the equipment is operating in either the "Hand," "Automatic," or "Local" control modes: fire alarm, duct detectors, manual safety switches, high or low temperature and high or low pressure. D. Overrides: Verify the proper system response to manual override devices, including: occupant override switches, life safety override switches, control panel digital switches and control panel analog output gradual switches. E. Failure Modes: Remove the control signal and confirm the proper position of the analog and digital controlled devices. F. Loop Tuning: Upon completion of testing and prior to final acceptance testing, adjust the proportional, integral and derivative gains of each DDC control loop as required to provide stable operation. 1. Set the proportional gain (PG) as follows: 4 x % Output Range = PG % Input Range a. Set the integral and derivative gains to 0 (zero). b. Confirm the gain setting produces a repeatable cycle. c. Measure the time (in minutes) between peaks of the cycle. This is the natural period, Pn. 2. Set the integral gain (IG) as follows: IG = 1.2 x Pn. a. Decrease the proportional gain by 50%. b. Change the setpoint and verify stable system response. Adjust per the following table: Response Time Cycle Time Proportional Integral HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Response Time Cycle Time Proportional Integral Slow Acceptable (<2 – 5 minutes) Increase by 150% -------- Fast Acceptable (<2 – 5 minutes) Decrease by 150% -------- Fast Long (>2 – 5 minutes) -------- Increase by 150% 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Upon completion of the functional performance testing, the operation of each control loop shall be demonstrated for the Owner's Representative(s), who will verify proper operation by signing and dating the line entitled "Owner's Acceptance" on the functional performance sheets. B. The Owner's Representative(s) shall include the building engineer(s) assigned to operate this facility, as this test is the first step in Owner training. 3.6 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION A. Final close-out documentation shall consist of the completed commissioning plan documents including: equipment pre-start and start-up reports, control system component testing and calibration data sheets, and functional performance data sheets. END OF SECTION 15030 HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following materials and methods common to the work, in general, of Division 15 and other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications where referenced: 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Valves. 4. Pipe Hangers. 5. Piping Accessories. 6. Access Doors. 7. Mechanical Identification. 8. Expansion Joints and Compensators. 9. Freeze Protection Cable. 10. Mechanical/Electrical Coordination. 11. Prohibited Piping Installations. 12. Welding. 13. Pads, Curbs and Supports. 14. Cutting and Patching. 15. Excavation and Backfill. 16. Painting. 17. Drip Pans. 18. Altitude Correction. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Work furnished but not installed this Contractor: 1. Access doors in accordance with this Section and Division 8. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards, and refer to NEMA Standards for definitions of terminology herein. 2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-70 for electrical installation requirements. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Code Numbers B31 as applicable for welding requirements. 4. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI A13) for identification of piping systems. 5. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI B31.1) Piping Code. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment room, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, un-excavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors, examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by an ASME Certified welder with current certificate in accordance with ANSI B31.1 for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Certificates: Before proceeding with the Work, submit to the Architect/General Contractor, two copies of Certification that the welding work will be done according to ANSI B31 by welders who have been tested and whose qualification test sheets are available, attesting to their ability to weld in accordance with the Standard Procedure Specifications as established by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. C. ANSI/ASME B31 Piping Codes 1. B31.9 Building Services Piping. 2. B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping. 3. B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems. 4. B31.5 Refrigeration Piping. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Valves. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Pipe Hangers/Supports. 5. Dielectric Fittings. 6. Strainers. 7. Thermometers. 8. Pressure Gauges. 9. T & P Test Plugs. 10. Sensing Wells. 11. Unions and Couplings. 12. Access Doors. 13. Mechanical Identification. 14. Expansion Joints and Compensators. 15. Freeze Protection Cable. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1and Operation and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Valves. 4. Strainers. 5. Thermometers. 6. Pressure Gauges. 7. Freeze Protection Cable. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs involved to accommodate any motors which exceed the scheduled horsepower sizes as called for in the mechanical or electrical plans and specifications. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motor Requirements 1. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows: a. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section. b. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified. 2. Motors shall be of the same manufacturer, except those that are an integral part of a factory-assembled packaged unit. These motors shall likewise meet the conditions of the specification in this section except motors which are part of a motor/compressor assembly are exempted from this requirement. 3. Inverter Duty a. Motors powered by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be constructed for specifically operation with VFDs. b. Provide shafting grounding on each motor either as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed option. B. Motor Characteristics 1. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase. 2. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase. 3. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 4. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected. 5. Service Factor: For all three phase motors, provide 1.15 for open drip proof motors or 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. 6. Altitude and Temperature Deration: Motors shall be derated for the effects of attitude and/or high ambient temperature to maintain the specified service factor. 7. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor, and while operating at 90% rated terminal voltage. C. Motor Construction 1. General: All motor wiring and windings shall be copper and designed for continuous operation at 40°C environment. Insulation for motors 1-1/2 horsepower and larger shall be NEMA Class B or F. Insulation on smaller motors and single phase motors shall be NEMA Class A or B. Temperature rise for motors shall not exceed that specified in NEMA MG-1 for the class of BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 insulation, service factor and enclosure type. Where reduced voltage starting is required, the starting method shall be of the part-winding type. Motors shall be constructed accordingly. Other methods of reduced voltage starting shall not be used unless approved by the Architect and Engineer in writing. 2. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, re-greaseable - except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular maintenance. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum L-10 life of 40,000 hours. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in the motor, provide bearings designed to resist the thrust loading. Refer to individual Section of Division 15 for fractional horsepower light-duty motorized equipment where sleeve-type bearings are permitted. 3. Enclosure Type: Except as otherwise indicated, provide open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed during operation, and provide guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or buildings occupants. Provide weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual Sections of Division 15 for other enclosure requirements. 4. Overload Protection: Provide built-in thermal overload protection for each leg of each phase and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping the motor at the starter. Thermal overload protectors shall be sized to accommodate the altitude of the installation. 5. Visible Nameplate: Provide a metal nameplate on each motor, indicating full identification of manufacturer, model number, horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, service factor, power factor and efficiency. 6. Motor Connections: Conduit connections boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide screwed conduit connection in end frame. D. Polyphase Motors 1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor (general purpose) and NEMA M61, Design C, for high starting torque requirements such as low speed starts on fans with two-motor drive arrangements. 2. Power Factor and Energy Efficiency. a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at nameplate rating and rated voltage, of not less than 85%. If a motor draws less than a 1000 watts label rating, it is excluded from the 85% power factor requirement. If through motor design, an 85% power factor is not available, the supplier of that motor shall furnish power factor correction components capable of correcting the non-conforming motor to a power factor of 90% or better. b. Motors 1-1/2hp and larger shall be of the high efficiency type. Motors shall have a nominal efficiency of not less than the following values when motors are tested in accordance with the IEEE Test Procedure 112: Based upon ASHRAE Std 90.1-2004 & EPAct Minimum Nominal Full Load Efficiency (%) Open Motors Enclosed Motors BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Number of Poles 2 4 6 2 4 6 RPM > 3600 1800 1200 3600 1800 1200 HP 1 — 82.5 80.0 75.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 84.0 95.5 2 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 3 84.0 86.5 85.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 7.5 87.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 10 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 15 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2 20 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 91.0 90.2 Based upon NEMA Premium Compliance & Labeling Minimum Nominal Full Load Efficiency (%) Open Motors Enclosed Motors Number of Poles 2 4 6 2 4 6 RPM > 3600 1800 1200 3600 1800 1200 HP 1 77.0 85.5 82.5 77.0 85.5 82.5 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 87.5 2 85.5 86.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 3 85.5 89.5 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.0 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 90.2 91.7 91.0 15 90.2 93.0 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 20 91.0 93.0 92.4 91.0 93.0 91.7 3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. a. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed. 4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Code Letter Designation: a. Motors 15HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G. b. Motors Smaller Than 15HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 9. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5HP and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5HP. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Polyphase Motors with Additional Requirements 1. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. 2. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. a. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. b. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. c. Insulation: Class H. d. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. e. Provide filters to eliminate interference with sensitive equipment, i.e. fire control equipment. 3. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic material. a. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer. 4. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: a. Measure winding resistance. b. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. c. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. d. Perform high-potential test. F. Single-phase Motors 1. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: a. Permanent-split capacitor. b. Split-phase start, capacitor run. c. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 2. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only. 3. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. 4. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single- phase motors. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.2 STARTERS A. General: Furnish starters necessary to operate mechanical equipment motors. Starter manufacturer shall be the same brand for ALL motors furnished under Division 15. Approved manufacturers shall be those listed in Division 16 of this specification. B. Additional submittal requirements shall include a typewritten listing of each starter, its horsepower, the equipment plan code it serves and the features included in the starter panel. C. Characteristics: Comply with NEMA and/or IEC standards and NEC. Furnish Type I general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, and with frames and supports for mounting on wall, floor or panel as required. Furnish the type and size of starter recommended by the motor manufacturer and equipment manufacturer for the applicable protection and start-up condition; refer to individual equipment sections for basic load requirements. All starters shall be by the same manufacturer. Only manufacturers approved by Division 16 will be accepted. All starters shall comply with Division 16 requirements in addition to those listed in this section. D. Manual Control 1. Furnish maintained-contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single-speed or multi-speed operation as indicated. 2. Furnish manual switch and pilot light for motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller, except where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. E. Automatic Control 1. Furnish magnetic starters for motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, and for smaller motors where interlock or automatic operation is indicated. 2. Provide the following features in each starter panel: a. Maximum number of auxiliary contacts available: three or more. b. Rotary "Hand-Off-Automatic" switch through starter cover with legend plate. c. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with the control requirement specified in Section 15975. d. Built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds 240 volts. Control circuit conductors to be protected in accord with the National Electrical Code. e. Thermal overload relays for each phase. f. Automatic restart on loss of power. g. Under-voltage release or protection. Provide add-in module to disconnect starter upon drop below 80% of rated supply voltage. h. Phase failure protection on all legs. Provide add-in module to disconnect starter upon phase voltage unbalance beyond 10% and balanced line voltage below 85%. i. Phase reversal protection on all legs. j. Indicating light with green lens having legend plate reading "Power On". BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Weather Protection: Provide weather-proof mounting of magnetic starters for equipment outside of the building. G. Motor Control Center: Note that some starters are furnished and installed under Division 16 in the motor control center. 2.3 VALVES A. General 1. Provide valves as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings complete with accessories and attachments as required and appropriate. 2. Supply valves for proper pressure ratings determined by the system working pressures at point of use and of proper types for systems and functions indicated. 3. Provide like type valves of one manufacturer only unless specified otherwise. 4. Plainly and permanently mark valves with manufacturer's name or trademark, pressure rating, both Water/Oil/Gas (WOG) and Steam Working Pressure (SWP), as applicable and flow direction when required to prevent improper installation. 5. Mark valves requiring approval by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) with appropriate markings cast into the valve body. 6. Provide extended necks as appropriate for insulation. 7. Pressure Ratings: Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall be suitable for 200 lb WOG and 250°F. 8. Fire Protection valve shall be in accordance with Section 15300 - Fire Protection. B. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: 1. Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Nibco. 2. Gate, Globe and Check Valves: Jenkins, Powell, Stockham, Milwaukee, Crane, Hammond, Marlin, Nibco, Centerline. 3. Gas Valves: AY McDonald, Mueller. 4. Lubricated Plug Valves: Homestead, Nordstrom, Powell, Walworth. 5. Stop & Drain Valves: Nibco, Apollo. 6. Pressure Regulating Valves: Fisher, Watts, Wilkins, Mueller. 7. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: Watts, Cash-Acme, Kunkle. 8. Butterfly Valves: (Hydronic use only) Centerline, DeZurik, Fisher, Victaulic, Keystone, Posi-Seal, Apollo. 9. Balancing Valves: Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Tour and Andersen, Gerard, Griswold, Nibco, FlowDesign, Hays, Nexus. C. Ball Valves (Piping Sizes 1/2" through 2"): 1. Two-piece bronze construction with Teflon seats, standard port, blowout proof stem and positive shut-off, suitable for 150 lbs saturated steam or 600 lb non- shock water pressure. 2. Domestic water valves shall be suitable for 150 lbs saturated steam or 600 lb non-shock water pressure. Valves shall be NSF 61 compliant. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Gate and Globe Valves — Piping Sizes 2-1/2" and Larger. 1. Hydronic System, Steel Pipe: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS&Y, renewable composition disc, flanged ends, screw-in bonnets not permitted. 2. Copper Hydronic Systems: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, flanged or soldered ends. E. Check Valves 1. Swing disc type a. 1/2" through 1-1/2": Bronze body, renewable disc, threaded or soldered ends. Nibco T433, S433 or equal. b. 2" and larger (Hydronic Systems, Steel Piping): Cast iron body, renewable cast bronze disc and seat ring, flanged ends. Nibco F918 or equal. c. 2" and larger (Plumbing Systems & Copper Hydronic Systems): Bronze body, renewable bronze disc and seat ring, flanged or soldered ends. 2. Spring-loaded type a. 1/2" through 2": Bronze body, Type 316 stainless steel spring, TFE seat ring, TFE disc, threaded or soldered ends. Nibco T480, S480 or equal. b. 2-1/2" and larger: (For hydronic piping only) Silent wafer type, iron body, bronze disc and seat, Type 302 stainless steel spring, 125 lb Class. Nibco W910 or equal. c. Check valve vacuum breaker (steam only): Iron body, brass and bronze trim, 15 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, lever and weight or springs, flanged ends. F. Gas Valve: Iron body tee handle gas stop conforming to ASTM A-126 (body) and ASTM S84, Alloy No. 844 (plug). Valve shall be rated to 100 psig. G. Lubricated Plug Valves: Semi-steel, single gland type, wrench operated, threaded or flanged ends, resilient packing. H. Specialty Valves 1. Gauge cocks: Brass "T" handle valve with 1/4" female inlet and outlet, 200 lb SWP. 2. Stop & Drain valve: All bronze construction, Buna-N seat disc, silicone bronze stem, non-asbestos packing, Type 430 stainless steel disc screw, 125 lb WOG and 180°F. Nibco 76, 726 or equal. 3. Drain valve: 3/4" ball valve with nipple, cap and hose thread connection. 4. Needle valve: Sizes 1/8" through 1" high grade steel bar stock body, Type 303 stainless steel valve stem, female inlet and outlet. I. Pressure Regulating Valves: Provide valves with bronze body Y-type separate inlet per the following schedule. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Plan Code Make Model Usage Strainer PRV-1 Watts Series 223HP Domestic water distribution 777S PRV-2 Watts Series 223LP Individual pieces of equipment 77S PRV-3 Cla Valve 90-01 Water Service Entry Yes J. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME/CSA rated, ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze construction, labeled for AGA temperature steam rating, labeled for ASME pressure steam rating and temperature water rating, protective dielectric coating on thermostat tube, test lever. K. Butterfly Valves (Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger, and for hydronic piping only): Full lug type, cast iron, ductile or carbon steel body, 175 lb SWP for 250°F service; bronze, nickel-coated cast iron, or stainless steel disc, stainless steel stem, non-corrosive bearings, elastomer seat, extended neck to allow for insulation thickness. Valve shall be capable of 175 psig shut-off upon removal of a downstream flange. L. Stop Check Valves (2-1/2" through 8"): Iron body, bronze mounted, angle pattern, disc pilot, renewable seat and TFE disc assembly on 2-1/2" and 3", renewable seat and cast iron disc 4" through 8", 250 lbs SWP to 450°F and 500 lb non-shock water to 150°F, Nibco F869B or equal. M. Eccentric Plug Valves (used as Balancing Valves, Piping sizes 2-1/2" and larger): 175 lb WOG for 250°F hot water, cast iron or semi-steel body, isobutene-isoprene resilient plug and stem seals, corrosion resistant bearings, non-incremental adjustable memory stop. DeZurik Series 400 or equal for 2-1/2" through 4" and DeZurik Series 100 with rotary hand wheel or equal for 6" and larger. The installation of test plugs, located upstream and downstream, or a venturi flow measuring device is required to permit an accurate reading of fluid flow. N. Balancing Valves (Piping sizes 1/2" through 2"): Bronze or brass construction, ball or globe valve type, integral differential pressure read-out ports fitted with check or stop valves, calibrated port opening, non-incremental memory stop, valve designed for positive shut-off. O. Valve Operators 1. Provide suitable hand wheels for gate, globe and drain valves, and interior hose bibbs. Ball valves to have quarter-turn coated lever handles. 2. For butterfly valves, provide lever-lock handle with toothed plate for shut-off service, infinitely adjustable handle, lock nut and memory stop. Valves six inches and larger shall be gear-operated with memory stop. 2.4 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS & PROTECTION ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: B-Line or equivalent. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. General 1. Provide hangers, rods, clamps, brackets, attachments, inserts, bracing, nuts, coach screws, eye bolts, clips, plates, and washers as required for appropriate installation for building structure provided. 2. All hangers and accessories shall be manufactured by one manufacturer for compatibility of all components. 3. All hangers, attachments and accessories shall comply with the following: a. Safety factor of five (actual load vs. ultimate load). b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (except as amended by provisions of this Specification for minimums) and as applicable. c. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) as applicable. d. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS). 4. Provide swivel ring hangers similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3170, 3170CT, and 3170C for pipe sizes 1/2" thru 8". 5. Clevis type hangers may, at the Contractors option, be provided when similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3100, and 3100C. 6. Beam and bar joist clamps shall be appropriate for attachment locations, top beam, bottom beam, etc., and provided with retainer rods, clips or straps as required. 7. Riser clamps shall be provided on all vertical risers at each floor and shall conform to materials and protective coatings or pads as specified in Paragraph B of this Article 2.05. Clamps shall be similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3373. 8. Provide concrete inserts where required in flat slab construction similar and equivalent to B-Line B-22-1 Series 2000 lbs. per foot load capacity and spaced per hanger spacing schedule provide all accessories and nuts required. 9. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed of channel similar and equivalent to B-Line Series B-11 thru B-72 as appropriate complete with pipe clamps, nuts, rollers etc., as required. Channel to bear five times actual weight of all piping on trapeze system with minimum deflection (0.01-inch maximum). 10. Wall brackets shall be fabricated "knee" brackets conforming to requirements of sub-paragraph B-12 above and made up with B-Line Series B-11 thru B-72 channel. Angle clips may be used in wood joist construction when similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3060 or 3061. 11. Hangers attached to wood construction shall be attached by use of eye bolts, coach screws or lag bolts when load bearing ratings maintain a safety factory of five. 12. All other means of support i.e., special construction, pipe stands, earthquake bracing, sway bracing, etc., shall be provided as required and in conformance with jurisdictional authority and these Contract Documents, submit all special or required support and bracing systems for review by the Architect/Engineer prior to installing any item. 13. All vertical refrigeration suction and hot gas shall be provided with insulation shields and calcium silicate inserts at each support location. 14. All piping systems exposed to motorized traffic shall be fully protected by installation of concrete-filled pipe bollards. Bollards shall be cleaned and painted as directed by the Architect. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Materials 1. Hangers in contact with steel, iron, cast or ductile iron shall be hot dipped galvanized or cold galvanized with "ZRC" cold galvanized compound only to a thickness of not less than 3.0 mil (0.003 inches). "ZRC" cold galvanizing compound is manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Quincy Mass. 2. Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper clad and provided with heavy density felt (20 oz.) pad permanently attached to the hanger and placed so as to prevent direct contact between pipe and hanger. Felt shall be mildew and moisture rot proof, heavy polyvinyl chloride coating on hanger, 5 mil thickness minimum will be acceptable when so certified in lieu of felt. 3. Hangers in contact with "plastic" or "glass" piping shall be galvanized in accordance with Sub-paragraph C-1, above and padded in accordance with Sub-paragraph C-2, above. D. Insulation Shields 1. Hangers for insulated piping shall be provided on all hot water and cold water piping of this size with insulation shields or insulation saddles* as applicable and appropriate and in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe or Tubing Size Shield Length* Gauge Thickness Shield Material ½” thru 3” 12” 18 Galvanized 4” 12” 16 Galvanized 5” 15” 16 Galvanized 6” 18” 16 Galvanized 8” 24” --- B-Line B3160-3165 saddle 10” Larger 36” --- B-Line B3160-3165 saddle * Non-collapsible inserts between piping and shield hall be furnished by 15250 Contractor for pipe sizes 2” and larger for all insulated piping. 2. As an option, the Contractor may use factory-made pipe insulation shields. 2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Dielectric Fittings 1. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Epco Sales Inc. 2. Schedule: Complete Unions Dielectric Fittings – Complete Unions Model FX GX Sizes ½” – 2” 2-1/2” – 12” Maximum Pressure 250 psi 175 psi Maximum Temperature 210°F 210°F BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Dielectric Fittings – Complete Unions Epconite Gasket #1 #1 End Style FPT x Solder FPT x Solder Type Union Flanged Union 3. Schedule: Companion Flanges Dielectric Fittings – Companion Flanges Model X W H Sizes ½ - 12” 1-1/2” – 12” 1-1/2” – 12” Maximum Pressure 250 psi 175 psi 175 psi Maximum Temperature 210°F 210°F 210°F Epconite Gasket #1 #1 #1 End Style Solder (brass) Weld neck Iron Pipe Thread Face Gasket #2 #2 #2 4. Dielectric fittings may be Victaulic Clearflow dielectric waterways for 1/2" – 4" pipe sizes. B. Strainers 1. Hydronic System, Steel Pipe a. 2" and smaller: Screwed iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y-pattern with 1/32" stainless steel perforated screen. b. 2-1/2" to 4": Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y-pattern with 3/64" stainless steel perforated screen. c. 5" and larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8" stainless steel perforated screen. d. Provide ball-type blow-off valve on all strainers located upstream of automatic control valves, pressure regulating valves, solenoid valves, etc. with threaded and capped hose-end connection. e. Acceptable manufacturers: Not exclusive. 2. Plumbing Systems and Copper Hydronic Systems a. 3" and smaller: Screwed brass body for 250 psi working pressure, Y-pattern, 1/32" (20 mesh) stainless steel perforated screen. b. 4" and larger: Flanged composite bronze body for 150 psi working pressure, Y-pattern, 1/32" (20 mesh) stainless steel perforated screen. c. Provide ball-type blow-off valve on all strainers located upstream of automatic control valves, pressure regulating valves, solenoid valves, etc. with threaded and capped hose-end connection. d. Acceptable manufactures: Watts, Muessco. C. Thermometers: Mercury in glass, red appearing, 9" scale, aluminum frame front, cast aluminum case, brass separable socket, plexiglass window and adjustable joint. Provide socket extensions to clear jacket on insulated piping. Normal operating temperature shall fall approximately in the middle of the scale. Thermometer for BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 measuring air temperatures will be the same as above, except perforated guarded in stem place of separable socket. D. Pressure Gauges: 4-1/2" case dial-type gauges with bronze bourdon tubes, brass sockets, bottom outlets, with gauge cocks and union connections. Accuracy to be 1/2 of 1% of scale range. Provide pressure snubber for each gauge suited to the fluid measured. Steam gauges shall have "pigtail" inlets. E. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs: Test plug and cap to be provided where thermometers and pressure gauges are shown on drawings. Provide two pressure gauge adapters and two testing thermometers. F. Sensing Wells: Brass separable socket machined from solid bar stock, threaded plug and chain, threaded shoulder, extension required to clear jacket when installed in insulated piping. G. Unions and Couplings 1. 2" and smaller: 150 psi malleable iron ground joint for ferrous piping; bronze for copper or brass pipe soldered joints. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: 150 psi forged steel flanges raised face with welding neck for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper or brass piping. Gaskets for water piping to 140°F shall be equal to Garlock premium grade Style 22 red rubber, 1/16" thick. Gaskets for fuel oil, natural gas and water piping above 140°F shall be equal to Garlock Blue-Gard Style 3000 synthetic fiber with nitrile binder, 1/16" thick. 3. Pipe reducers: Provide reducers, not bushings for all changes in pipe sizes. Use flat top eccentric on all horizontal water piping. 2.6 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access doors where shown on Drawings and at all locations where required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, duct access doors and for equipment servicing. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation and provide instructions for their location. B. Standard Doors 1. Frames: 16 ga. steel. 2. Panels: 14 ga. steel. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel. 4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges operable to 175°F angle with removable pins. Provide number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer for door. 5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screw driver operated, cam-type locks. All access doors below 8'-0" above finished floor in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys. 6. Style of doors shall be appropriate to architectural finish at door location. Furnish masonry anchors where required. C. Fire-rated Doors 1. Frame: 16 ga. steel. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Panel: Sandwich type, 20 ga. steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core. 3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel. 4. Hinge: Continuous, steel with stainless steel pin. 5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism. 6. Locking Device: Self-latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys, interior latch release mechanism. 7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. 8. Fire-rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and be UL Listed. 2.7 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Identification Devices 1. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. a. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. b. Location: Accessible and visible. c. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. 2. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. a. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. b. Data: Name and plan number, equipment service, design capacity. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. c. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. 3. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. a. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive. B. Piping Identification Devices 1. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. a. Colors: Comply with color table listed in Part 3, unless otherwise indicated. b. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated on Legend. c. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 d. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full- band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. e. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. 2. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive. 3. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier. 4. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. 5. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. a. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. b. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum. C. Duct Identification Devices 1. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. D. Stencils 1. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions. E. Valve Tags 1. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme. F. Valve Schedules 1. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COMPENSATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Metra-Flex or acceptable equal. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Steel Piping, (4" and smaller): Stainless steel bellows type with anti-torque device, limit stops and internal guide. Metraflex HP, threaded ends 2" and smaller, flanged ends 2-1/2" through 4", axial movement: 1/2" extension and 2" compression. C. Steel Piping, (5" and larger): Refer to Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration for Multi-Arch Pipe Connectors. D. Steel Piping Option: In lieu of expansion joints and compensators, grooved-coupled piping systems may be used per manufacturers latest published recommendations and ASHRAE Systems Manual, Latest Edition. Not applicable for vibration isolation of pumps in piping systems. E. Copper piping (3/4" through 4"): All bronze type with two-ply bronze bellows, anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides and solder joint and suitable for 150 psig working pressure and 250°F operating temperature. Axial movement: 1/2" extension, 2" compression. F. Connections: Provide expansion joints suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size units and provide necessary pipe guides at recommended intervals and pipe anchors. G. Design Criteria 1. Domestic hot water: 0°F installation temperature, 140°F operating temperature, plus 10% safety factor. 2. Heating water: 0°F installation temperature, 230°F operating temperature, plus 10% safety factor. 3. Chilled and condenser water: 0°F installation temperature, 100°F operating temperature, plus 20% safety factor. 2.9 FREEZE PROTECTION CABLE FOR PIPING A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Raychem. B. The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two 16 AWG nickel-coated copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be used directly on plastic pipe, and to be cut to length in the field. The cable shall include a ground braid and protective polyolefin outer jacket. C. In order to provide energy conservation and to prevent overheating, the cable shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90%. The self-regulation factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40°F pipe temperature operation to 150°F pipe temperature operation. D. The cable shall operate on line voltages of 120v/1ph without the use of transformers. E. Provide power connection kits, splice kits, quick disconnect kits, and seals, tape, thermostats and ETL pipe label for circuits involved on project. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Heating cable requirements shall be based on maintaining a 40°F pipe temperature with a -40°F ambient temperature and 1-1/2" fiberglass insulation thickness. Freeze Protection Cable for Piping Pipe Sizes Cables per Pipe Watts per Lineal Foot of Cable Raychem XL-Trace Model No. ½” – 3” 1 5 5XL 4” – 6” 1 8 8XL 8” 2 5 5XL 10” – 20” 2 8 8XL 2.10 HOSE KITS A. General: Hose kits shall be designed for minimum 400 psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211ºF. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. B. Hose: Length shall be sufficiently long enough to make the appropriate connection without kinking or sharp bends. In no case shall the hose be shorter than 24”, longer lengths required where needed. Minimum diameter, equal to water-source heat-pump connection size listed in equipment schedule for run-out pipe size. C. Isolation Valves: Two-piece bronze-body ball valves with stainless-steel ball and stem and galvanized-steel lever handle. Provide valve for supply and return. If balancing device is combination shutoff type with memory stop, the isolation valve may be omitted on the return. D. Strainer: Y-type with blowdown valve in supply connection. E. Balancing Device: Mount in return connection. Include meter ports to allow flow measurement with differential pressure gage. 1. Automatic balancing valve, factory set to operate within 10 percent of design flow rate over a 40:1 differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig. 2. Manual, calibrated-orifice balancing valve. 3. Manual, ventri-type balancing valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise specifically indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, install equipment and materials in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer, including performance of tests as manufacturer recommends. B. Protection: Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Protect fixtures and equipment against damage during mechanical work. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Quiet Operation and Vibration: All work shall operate in accordance with Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control under all conditions of load. Sound or vibration conditions not in accordance with Section 15240 and considered objectionable shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Architect under the Work of Division 15. D. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. When possible, install piping above accessible ceilings to allow access and provide sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. 3.2 VALVES A. Provide valves as shown on Contract Documents and as required for balancing and/or control of flow. B. Provide isolation valves for maintenance and service on each piece of equipment regardless of whether or not shown on Contract Drawings. C. Provide isolation valves for all branch line take-offs that serve more than two items of fixtures or equipment. D. Provide balancing valves for each leg of domestic hot water return piping of two branches or more, all heating/cooling water returns and/or supplies to equipment as indicated on drawings. E. Provide access means for each valve or group of valves either by access panels or utilization of inherent access provided by building methods i.e., lift out ceiling construction or exposed valve installations in non critical areas such as janitors closets, storage rooms, etc. F. Install all valves with valve bonnets or operating stems in vertical (upright) position when possible, valves may be installed with bonnets or stems not less than 35 degrees downward from vertical plane except valves on vertical piping may be 90 degrees from vertical plane. Swing type check valves shall be installed on horizontal piping no more than 45 degrees upward slope from horizontal plane, using lift checks on vertical piping. Lift check valves shall not be used on sewage or sump pump discharge piping. G. Inspect and tighten all bonnet nuts, bolts, packing glands, lubricate all valves requiring lubrication, secure all hand wheels and identification plates, be responsible for all valves having manufacturers name, trade name, working pressure and size stamped or cast into the body of the valve. Perform all maintenance, repacking and inspection prior to installation of valve. H. Provide valves in accordance with the following schedule unless specified otherwise in Contract Documents: 1. Dead-end shut off: Gate, ball, butterfly, plug, stop and drain. 2. Throttling: Ball, plug, globe, diaphragm, needle. 3. Backflow prevention: Check. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Gas piping: Lubricated plug (or ground joint cock up to 1" only). 5. Water flow balancing: Eccentric plug, Balancing valves. I. Removal and Repair Provisions: Provide all valves which are not accessible for repair without removal from piping with union connection immediately adjacent to valve outlet. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Use inserts, anchors, expansion bolts or other approved and acceptable means of attachment to concrete construction. Set inserts in advance of concrete installation, provide required reinforcement rod for all inserts carrying loading equivalent of one 4" pipe or more. All inserts shall be flush with face of slab or wall containing insert. B. Provide flat square washers for rods thru metal decking with nut above washer, when acceptable and approved. C. Cinch hangers to carry appropriate share of loading and slope piping without sags or "pocketing" as appropriate and required. D. Rod offsets, or angle installation, plumber tape or wire will not be accepted. Hanger rods shall be true and plumb. E. Piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment items. Provide attachments to building structure only. Use trapeze, wall brackets, knee brackets, etc., where hanger rods cannot be attached within spacing plumb to structures. F. Hangers for piping shall be isolated per Section 15050 when hanger and piping materials are dissimilar and subject to production of electrolysis or galvanic action. G. Prohibited Pipe Installations 1. Piping shall not be routed through telephone rooms, electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms and elevator shafts. The only exception allowed is fire sprinkler piping terminating in these rooms. 2. Piping installations not complying with this requirement shall be corrected by the Contractor without cost to the Owner or delay in the project construction schedule. H. Minimum Hanger Spacing and Hanger Rod Sizes: All valves, heavy fittings and changes in direction of piping shall be additionally supported with hangers each side of valves and heavy fittings, and one additional support within one foot of the directional change. Where more stringent hanger spacing and rod sizes are required by jurisdictional authority, the more stringent requirements shall supersede the following schedule: Minimum Hanger Spacing Pipe Systems Nominal Pipe Sizing Maximum Support Spacing Center to Center (ft) Hydronic Piping 2” & larger 10 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Minimum Hanger Spacing Plumbing Piping Cast Iron waste and storm 1-1/2” & larger 10 or each point Natural Gas ½” 6 Natural Gas ¾” – 1” 8 Natural Gas 1-1/4” & larger 10 Copper 1-1/2” & smaller 6 Copper 2” & larger 10 Non-Metallic All sizes 4 Hanger Rod Diameter B-Line B-3170 B-Line B- 3170CT B-Line B-3170C B-Line B-3100 B-Line B-3104 CT B-Line B-3100C Steel/CI Copper PVC/Glass Steel Copper PVC/Glass 3/8” ½” – 2” ½” – 2” ½”-1-1/2” ½” – 2” ½” - 2” ½”-1-1/2” 1/2” 2-1/2”–3” 2-1/2”-4” 2” – 3” 2-1/2”-3” 2-1/2”-4” 2”-3” 5/8” 4” – 5” 5” - 6” 4” – 5” 4” – 5” 5” - 6” 4” -5” ¾” 6” – 8” 8” 6” 6” 8” 6” 7/8” N/A N/A N/A 8” – 12” N/A 8” – 12” 1” N/A N/A N/A 14” – 16” N/A N/A 1-1/8” N/A N/A N/A 18” N/A N/A N/A: Not Applicable and/or Not Allowed. 3.4 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Dielectric Fittings 1. Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar metals in all piping systems to control corrosion potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action. 2. Typical locations for dielectric isolation are: water heaters, storage and pressure tanks, water conditioning equipment, pumps, changes in service piping materials, make-up connections to boilers and chilled water systems, valves, deaerators, flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined. 3. Storage tanks shall be isolated from piping and tank stands by use of anti- electrolytic and galvanic isolators. B. Strainers: Provide strainers in piping upstream of pressure reducing valves, backflow preventers, vacuum breakers, pumps, all modulating control valves and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Install strainers to permit maintenance of screen and blow-off valve. C. Thermometers: Provide thermometers with wells on each inlet and outlet pipe of each piece of heat generating water equipment such as water heaters, boilers, hydronic and plumbing heater exchangers, chillers, hydronic heat recovery coils, etc. Install BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 and adjust scale relatively upright, tilted to permit legible readings from a standing position. D. Pressure Gauges: Select gauge so that normal operating pressures read near the mid-span of the daily range. Install gauge upright and readable from a standing position. E. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs: Install accessible T&P test plugs on all inlet and outlet pipe connections for each piece of heat transfer and pumping equipment such as water heaters, boilers, hydronic and plumbing heater exchangers, chillers, hydronic heat recovery coils, circulating pumps, etc. F. Sensing Wells: Wells are to be installed in piping where indicated on drawings in a horizontal or upright position and shall be accessible for installation of any future temperature sensing device, minimum distance equal to one pipe diameter or 12" which is even greater. Trim and finish insulation interfering with chained cap. G. Unions: Install accessible unions on all inlet and outlet piping of each piece of equipment and at each port to automatic control valves, pressure regulating valves, solenoid valves, etc. H. Sleeves and Inserts 1. Division 15 Contractor shall provide and locate pipe sleeves, and inserts required before new floors and walls are built or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required where sleeves and inserts were not installed or where incorrectly located. 2. Provide sleeves for mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs and through concrete, masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction. 3. Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade, provide with Link Seal mechanical sleeving system and make water-tight. 4. Where fire rated separations are penetrated by pipes or ductwork, annular space around the pipe or ductwork shall be caulked with fire rated material. Refer to Architectural Division for material. 5. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass insulated pipes, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe only and the insulation shall be made to butt against the construction, except for pipes requiring insulation having a vapor barrier, in which case, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe and insulation. Check floor and wall construction finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations, make actual lengths to suit the following: a. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. b. In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush with floor. c. In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves 1/4" above finished floor, except in rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 2" above floor and in Kitchens and Mechanical Equipment Rooms, where sleeves shall be extended 4" above floor. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 23 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Sleeves shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints for all sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be constructed of galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. "Crete Sleeve" (plastic type) sleeves are acceptable for concrete construction as manufactured by Sperzel Division, Shamrock Industries. 7. Fasten sleeves securely in floors and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is placed or when other construction is built around them. 8. Provide tight fitting floor and ceiling plates on pipes passing thru walls, ceilings, and floors. Nickel or chrome plated in finished areas, galvanized cast iron in unfinished areas. Provide wall and ceiling flanges for ducts in finished areas. 9. Provide all cutting, patching of holes, openings, notches. Obtain written approval for notching, boring, chipping, burning, drilling, welding to structural members in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. I. Flashing: Coordinate with Division 7 Contractor to accommodate proper waterproof flashing of exterior wall, floor and roof penetrations. J. Pipes embedded in concrete. 1. Plumbing piping is prohibited from embedment in concrete. 2. Pipes and sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within limitations of this paragraph may be embedded in concrete with approval of the Engineer, provided they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete. 3. Pipes of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. 4. Pipes and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. 5. Pipes with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of cross section on which strength is calculated or which is required for fire protection. 6. Except when plans for pipes are approved by the Structural Engineer, pipes embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the following: a. They shall not be larger outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which they are imbedded. b. They shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on center. c. They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. 7. Pipes, and sleeves closer than 3 diameters or widths on center. a. They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration. b. They are uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard Schedule 40 steel pipe. c. They have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 in. and are spaced not less than 3 diameters on centers. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 24 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 8. In addition to other requirements identified, pipes that will contain liquid, gas, or vapor may be embedded in structural concrete under the following conditions: a. Pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist effects of the materials, pressure, and temperature to which they will be subjected. b. Temperature of liquid, gas, or vapor shall not exceed 150°F. c. Maximum pressure to which any piping or fittings shall be subjected shall not exceed 200 psi above atmospheric pressure. d. All piping and fittings except as provided shall be tested as a unit for leaks before concrete placement. Testing pressure above atmospheric pressure shall be 50 percent in excess of pressure to which piping and fittings may be subjected, but minimum testing pressure shall not be less than 150 psi above atmospheric pressure. Pressure test shall be held for 4 hours with no drop in pressure except that which may be caused by air temperature. e. Drain pipes and other piping designated for pressures of not more than 1 psi above atmospheric pressure need not be tested as required in paragraph d above. f. Pipes carrying liquid, gas, or vapor that is explosive or injurious to health shall again be tested as specified above after concrete has hardened. g. No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water not exceeding 90°F nor 50 psi pressure, shall be placed in the pipes until the concrete has attained its design strength. h. In solid slabs, piping, unless it is for radiant heating or snow melting, shall be placed between top and bottom reinforcement. i. Concrete cover for pipes and fittings shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch for concrete exposed to earth, or weather, nor 3/4 inch for concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground. j. Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.0002 times area of concrete section shall be provided normal to piping. k. Piping and fittings shall be assembled by welding, brazing, solder-sweating, or other equally satisfactory method. Screw connections shall not be permitted. Piping shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending, or displacement of reinforcement from its proper location will not be required. 3.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide a reproducible of the architectural reflected ceiling plan indicating location of access doors in walls and ceilings for approval by Architect. B. Deliver access doors to General Contractor for installation. 3.6 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide pipe identification, valve tags, stencils, or engraved name plates to clearly identify the mechanical equipment, piping and controls of the various mechanical systems and direction of flow in piping. B. Methods for identification shall be as follows: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 25 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Metal Tags: Stamp tags with letter prefixes to indicate service, followed by a number for location in system. 2. Engraved Nameplates: Attach nameplates with brass screws. Pressure- sensitive embossed labels are not acceptable. Nameplates shall bear the same identifying legend used on the Contract Documents. 3. Pressure Sensitive Markers: Apply pressure sensitive markers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with complete wrap around. Marker adhesion will be tested for permanence. Any markers showing dog ears, bubbles, or other failings shall be replaced. 4. Semi-Rigid Plastic Identification Markers: Seton Setmark pre-molded (not pressure sensitive) identification markers may be used at Contractor's option on service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations (but not on piping in finished spaces). This type marker shall not be installed on bare pipe when surface temperature exceeds 180°F unless a 1" thick insulation band is first provided under marker for protection from the hot pipe. C. Piping Legend and Color: Contractor shall obtain written approval of colors from Owner's representative prior to starting work and forward copies to Architect and Engineer. Piping Legend and Color Legend Background Color Direction Arrow Pressure Heating Water Yellow Arrow ---- Chilled Water Light Green Arrow ---- Tower Water Light Green Arrow ---- Domestic CW Light Green ---- ---- Domestic HW Yellow ---- ---- Natural Gas Orange ---- ---- Drain Yellow Arrow ---- Compressed Air Light Blue ---- PSI Refrigerant Liquid Yellow Arrow ---- Refrigerant Suction Yellow Arrow ---- Refrigerant Hot Gas Yellow Arrow ---- Fuel Oil Light Brown Arrow ---- D. Identification of Piping: Identify all piping accessible for maintenance, in crawl spaces, tunnels, above ceilings, and access spaces as well as exposed to view utilizing either pressure sensitive markers, semi-rigid plastic markers or stenciled markings according to the following procedures: 1. Use an arrow marker for each pipe-content legend. The arrow shall always point away from the pipe legend and in the direction of flow: color and height of arrow to be same as content legend lettering. 2. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow indication. 3. Apply pipe legend and arrow indication at every point of pipe entry or exit where line goes thru wall or ceiling cut. 4. Apply pipe legend and arrow indication within 3" of each valve to show proper identification of pipe contents and direction of flow. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 26 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. The legend shall be applied to the pipe so that lettering is in the most legible position. For overhead piping, apply legend on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, so that legend can be read at a glance from floor level. 6. For pipes under 3/4" OD, fasten brass tags securely at specified legend locations. 7. Legend on steam piping, condensate return, compressed air, medical air, gas, and vacuum systems shall include working pressure or vacuum. E. Valves: All system service valves, including fire protection gas, medical gas, vacuum and special service valves located inside the building, shall be tagged and identified as to type of service. All valves or cocks controlling branch mains or risers to various portions of the building shall be tagged and identified as to service and location number. F. Controls: All magnetic starters and relays, shall have nameplates or be stenciled to identify connecting or controlled equipment. All manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal over-load switches which have not been specified as furnished with indexed faceplates shall also have nameplates or be stenciled as to "connected" or "controlled" equipment. All automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, pressure electric, electric pressure switches, relays, and starters shall be clearly identified. G. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zones served. Base mounted pumps shall be stenciled or have system served nameplates. Brass tags secured by brass chains may be used on small in-line pumps. H. Storage Tanks, Water Treatment Equipment and Heaters: All tanks and heaters shall be stenciled as to service. The connecting pipes to each shall be identified and the service temperature entering and leaving the tank or heater shall be indicated. I. Fans: All supply and exhaust fans and air handling units and connecting ductwork supplying one or more areas from an equipment room or isolated crawl or furred space shall have nameplate or be stenciled as to plan code number, service and areas of zones served. J. Air Conditioning Equipment: Air conditioning and evaporative cooling equipment such as chillers pumps, condensers, or roof-top equipment shall be identified by stencils, or system nameplates. K. Access Doors: Provide engraved nameplates or painted stencils to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other similar concealed mechanical equipment. Obtain Architect approval before installation on all access doors in finished areas. L. Lift Out Ceilings: Provide engraved nameplates on ceiling tee stem to identify concealed valves, controls dampers or similar concealed mechanical equipment which is directly above nameplate in ceiling space. Obtain Architect's approval before installation. 3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COMPENSATORS A. Install anchors on pipe line to create separate expanding sections. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 27 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Size and select expansion joints after calculating expansion length based on the design criteria indicated in Part 2 of this section. C. When indicated on drawings, expansion loops shall be installed rather than joints or compensators. D. Install expansion joints and compensators prior to pipe system pressure testing, including a minimum of two pipe guides on upstream and downstream side of each expansion joint. Guides shall be rigidly mounted to structure. Spacing and size of guides to be per by manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 FREEZE PROTECTION CABLE FOR PIPING A. Comply with National Electric Code for installation. B. Protect heater cable from damage before, during and after installation. C. Provide all-weather insulation jacket for all heat traced and heat maintained piping, minimum insulation thickness in accordance with Section 15250. D. When installing do not twist buss wires together. E. Test each circuit prior to and immediately after installation of thermal insulation per manufacturer's recommendation. If circuit fails, investigate cause and replace damaged sections - do not repair! F. Install heat cable on lower quadrant of pipe 45 degrees up from vertical, provide fiberglass tape at a maximum of 12" OC. G. Install all accessories and kits per manufacturer's recommendations and standards. Careful attention to manufacturer’s installation instructions as pertains to valves and equipment will be strictly adhered to and enforced. H. Provide freeze protection cable in the following locations: 1. On condenser water piping exposed to outdoor air conditions. This includes supply and return water piping to cooling towers and similar equipment. 2. All storm drain piping located exterior to the building. 3. Where indicated on drawings. 3.9 MECHANICAL/ELECTRIC COORDINATION A. Conform to Division 1. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full capacity at electrical service available. B. All control wiring to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; all wiring shall be color coded to facilitate checking. C. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the schedule contained herein. Contractor should note that the intent of this electric wiring schedule is to have the Division 15 Contractor responsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 28 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 16 for electrical work of this Division 15 which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Division 15 Contractor shall refer to the Division 16 specifications and plans for all power wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding. D. All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Section 15975. MC = Mechanical Contractor Under Division 16 of the Work EC = Electrical Contractor Under Division 16 of the Work FPC = Fire Protection Contractor Notes for the Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule 1. All starters, other than those in Motor Control Centers and noted on the Drawings shall be furnished under Division 16. All starters furnished under Division 16 shall be complete with three overload heaters and shall conform to NEC and NEMA requirements. All starters shall have 65,000 AIC rating. 2. Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished under Division 16 except where furnishing such items are specifically required under Division 16 specifications and/or drawings. 3. Pushbuttons stations carrying full load current are to be wired under Division 16 of the work. 4. Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor under Division 16 of the work will furnish and install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches, and make all connections to motors and controls unless interlocked with other mechanical equipment or exhaust fans in locations indicated. Where exhaust fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle switch will be provided under Division 16. Where exhaust fans are interlocked with other mechanical equipment, the interlock wiring will be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor under Division 16. 5. Electrical contractor shall provide disconnects for all starters and variable frequency drives. Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnects at the equipment if it is not in line of sight of starter disconnect. 6. Electrical contractor provides control wiring to fire alarm panel. Mechanical contractor provides control wiring to mechanical unit. E. All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. All motorized damper equipment shall be furnished and installed under Division 16 and wired under Division 16. F. Control wiring includes all wiring below 120 volts. Mechanical / Electrical Coordination Schedule Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring Equipment Motors MC MC EC --- BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 29 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Mechanical / Electrical Coordination Schedule Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring Motor Starters and Thermal Overload Heaters (See Note 1) MC EC EC MC Fused & Unfused Disconnect Switches EC EC EC --- Manual Operating & Speed Switches (carrying load currents) (See Note 3 & 4) MC EC EC MC Control Relays & Transformer (See Note 2) MC MC EC MC Thermostats (Line Voltage) including Aquastats MC EC EC MC Temperature Control Panels MC MC EC MC Building Fire Alarm System Fire & Smoke Detectors, including Relays for Fan Shutdown EC EC EC EC Motor & Solenoid Valves, Damper Motors, PE & EP Switches, Control Valves, Fan Interlocking Wiring, Low Voltage Thermostats MC MC --- MC Duct Detection (Note 6) EC MC --- MC Pushbutton Stations & Pilot Lights (Manually operated Switches not carrying Load Currents) (See Note 3) MC MC --- MC Boiler Controls including FM gas train & EPO switches MC MC EC MC Water Softener Timeclocks, Timers, Lock-out Devices, Wheatstone Bridges and Meters MC MC EC MC Temporary Heating Connections MC MC EC MC Electric Freeze Protection heat Cable (Snowmelt) EC EC EC EC Freeze Protection Heat Trace MC MC EC EC HVAC Water Treatment Interlocks MC MC --- MC Variable Frequency Drives MC MC EC MC 3.10 WELDING A. Joints between sections of pipe, between pipe and fittings, shall be fusion welded. Use only certified welders. Strength of finished welded joints to be equal to strength of pipe. Width of finished weld to be at least 2-1/2 times the thickness of the part joined. Thickness of weld to be at least 25% greater than the thickness of pipe or fittings. Finished welded joints to present neat and workmanlike appearance. B. Make no direct welded connections to valves, strainers, apparatus, and related equipment. Make connections to flanged valves, and flanged equipment with welded pipe connection flanges. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 30 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Radii of weld ells to be 1-1/2 times nominal diameter of fittings. Fittings used for all branch connections, whether full-size or reducing, to have interior surfaces smoothly contoured. Wall thickness of welded fittings equal to adjacent piping. 3.11 PADS, CURBS AND SUPPORTS A. Concrete foundations, pads and curbs for work under Division 15 shall be provided by the General Contractor. B. All dimensions and exact locations for anchor bolts, foundations, pads and concrete curbs for mechanical equipment in Division 15 shall be determined and located by the Division 15 Contractor. Roof and other supporting curbs provided with Division 15 equipment shall be installed and leveled by the Division 15 Contractor. 3.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. New Construction 1. Conform to Division 1. The Division 15 Contractor shall verify all openings required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 15 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings and shall then meet with and verify same with the General Contractor who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work. 2. Failure on the part of the Division 15 Contractor to make the above arrangements for required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by assigned by the General Contractor or in the form of performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer. 3. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General Contractor shall patch all openings in the new structure. All openings made in fire rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Architect. 4. The Division 15 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the General Contractor for all patching resulting from cutting to accommodate mechanical work. 3.13 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Conform to Division 2. Excavate for all mechanical equipment such as fuel tanks, duct work, sump pumps, manholes and trenches for underground pipelines to required depths. Compact bottoms of excavations. Slope to obtain required grade. Remove rocks, trash and debris before installation of equipment and backfilling. Backfill by hand tamping earth under the haunch of the pipe to specified compaction. Backfill BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 31 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 and compact in thin layers until top of pipe is covered. Complete backfill by methods required or directed for soil characteristics to comply with the Architectural section of these specifications. B. Excavations near footings shall be such that, when nearing building footings, or bearing foundation walls, the excavation bottom shall not be nearer the footing than a normal 45 degree bearing line from edge of footing bottom to bottom of excavation. When it is necessary to perpendicularly cross under a continuous foundation wall, care shall be taken to insure that crossing is clear of the structural foundation and of minimal width. C. Do not place backfill over pipe lines until lines are properly tested. D. When trenching through specially tested areas, such as paving, asphalt, etc., Contractor shall to be responsible for restoring the surface to its original condition, and in a manner approved by the Architect. Repair trenches where settlement occurs, and restore the surface for the period of one year after final acceptance of the project. All cutting of paving, asphalt, etc. shall be by saw cutting. 3.14 PAINTING A. Surfaces of equipment and materials to be thoroughly cleaned and left ready for painting in accordance with Architectural Painting Specifications. B. Duct interiors visible through registers, grilles and diffusers shall be painted flat black. C. All other painting of mechanical equipment and piping, unless otherwise noted, shall be performed under other divisions of the work with the exception of identification of piping and equipment which will be the responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor. 3.15 DRIP PANS A. Drip pan shall not be used as a means of protecting electrical panels, switchgear, etc. Coordinate with Division 16 Contractor to avoid conflicts with electrical equipment under piping. B. Pans: 18 gauge galvanized iron. Pans shall be two-inch deep, with rolled top edges, and shall extend six inches each side of the pipe or group of pipes and six inches beyond the equipment below. Keep pans as close to the underside of the pipes as practicable. All seams shall be soldered, and pans shall be cross-braced as required to prevent sagging and warping. C. Pitch each pan to a drain connection, and pipe a 3/4 inch or larger copper tube drain to discharge over nearest available open drain. 3.16 ALTITUDE CORRECTION A. All air-moving equipment is to be rated, selected and adjusted to deliver air quantities shown at the installed elevation. Fan speeds to be changed as required to deliver CFM quantities shown with new sheaves furnished and installed as required by the Section 15990 Contractor. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 32 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 33 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15240 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes mechanical sound and vibration control of the following equipment and systems: 1. Refrigeration Equipment. 2. Air Compressors. 3. Pumps. 4. Cooling Towers. 5. Fans. 6. Packaged Air Handling Equipment. 7. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units. 8. Ductwork. 9. Piping. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15240 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.3 WORK SPECIFIED BUT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. External Sound Insulation, Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Applications Guide to Noise and Vibration Control, 2007 Edition. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is the intent of the design to comply with the NC levels defined in the table below. Though it is not the Division 15 Contractor’s sole responsibility to meet these levels, the systems shall be installed so that the resulting noise level is as low as possible. If these levels cannot be met, the Engineer, Contractor and Architect will be required to work as a team to resolve the situation. B. Acoustical Criteria: Noise levels due to equipment, ductwork and piping are not to exceed these NC levels as defined in ASHRAE Applications Guide 2007, Chapter 47, page 47.34 Table 42. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Location Noise Criteria Spaces within 15 foot radius from supply and return ducts from shafts NC-45 Commercial Retail Areas NC-40 Garages NC-60 Mechanical Rooms NC-60 Natatoriums (Swimming Pools) NC-50 Hotels Individual rooms or suites NC-35 Meeting/banquet rooms NC-35 Halls, corridors, lobbies, toilets NC-40 Service/support areas NC-45 Kitchen NC-50 Offices Conference rooms NC-35 Private offices NC-35 Public corridors NC-45 Workrooms w/copiers, printers, fax machines, etc. NC-45 Toilet rooms, public NC-40 C. Mechanical Acoustical Performance 1. Air Distribution system equipment terminal device noise: Maximum permissible sound levels in octave bands of airborne transmission through the combination of grille, registers, diffusers, and terminal units or related pressure reducing devices, when operated in installed condition per Construction Documents shall be as per the following table: Octave Band Maximum Sound Pressure Level (dB) Number Hertz NC-35 NC-40 1 62 62 66 2 125 56 60 3 250 49 54 4 500 46 51 5 1000 43 48 6 2000 42 47 7 4000 41 46 8 8000 42 47 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. 1. Bases. 2. Vibration Isolators. 3. Spherical Pipe Connectors. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Flexible Metallic Connectors. 5. Acoustical Pipe Anchors. 6. Non-hardening Caulk. 7. Dampering Compound. 8. Floor and Pipe Seals. 1.7 CERTIFICATES A. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASES A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Mason Industries, Amber-Booth, Vibration Mountings & Control, Kinetics Noise Control. B. Base Type A: No base, isolators attached directly to equipment. C. Structural Steel Base (Base Type B) 1. Rectangular for equipment other than "T" or "L" shaped pump bases. Pump bases for split case pumps to include supports for suction and discharge base ells. Beams for perimeter members minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Depth need not exceed 14 inches if deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits by manufacturer. Provide height saving brackets to provide a clearance of 1". 2. Design Basis: Mason Industries Type WF. D. Concrete Inertia Bases (Base Type C) 1. Rectangular structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Provide bases for split case pumps large enough for suction and discharge base ells supports. In general, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide bases with a minimum depth of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base, but not less than 6 inches not more than 12" unless required for mass or rigidity. Forms to include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2" bars or angles welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2" above the bottom, or additional steel as is required by the structural conditions. Forms furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts. Provide height saving brackets to maintain a 1" clearance below base. 2. Design Basis: Mason Industries Type K. E. Curb-Mounted Base (Base Type D) 1. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum members shall house MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 cadmium-plated springs having a 1" minimum deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4" so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct-like EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. 2. Design Basis: Mason Industries Type CMAB. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Approved manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Mason Industries, Amber-Booth, Vibration Mountings & Control, Kinetics Noise Control. B. Pads (Isolator Type 1) 1. Fiberglass a. Kinetics Noise Control Model KIP. b. Vibration isolators shall be pre-compressed molded fiber glass pads individually coated with a flexible, moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Natural frequency of fiberglass vibration isolators shall be essentially constant for the operating load range of the supported equipment. Vibration isolators shall be color coded or otherwise identified to indicate the load capacity and shall be selected by the manufacturer for each specific application. 2. Neoprene a. Mason Super W or Super WSW. b. Vibration isolators to be made of bridge bearing neoprene meeting AASHO Specifications. Metallic shim plates of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal shall be provided between layers of neoprene pads when deflections are greater than that of a single pad. Shims shall be bonded to pads on both sides to prevent horizontal movements and excessive compression of pad layers. C. Spring Floor Isolators (Isolator Type 2) 1. Mason Industries Type SLF. 2. Free-standing, laterally stable without housing, complete with 1/4 inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between base plate and support and with leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to equipment. 3. Spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Springs with minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent rated deflection. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Spring Hangers (Isolator Type 3): 1. Equipment and Piping a. Design Basis: Mason Industries Type PC30N. b. Spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Neoprene element minimum deflection 0.3 inch. Spring diameter and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated load. Springs with minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Springs shall be pre-compressed to rated deflection to keep piping and equipment at a fixed elevation during installation, and shall have a release mechanism to free the spring once installation is complete and hanger is subjected to full load. E. Restrained Spring Floor Isolators (Isolator Type 4) 1. Design Basis: Mason Industries Type SLR. 2. Spring isolator mounting equal to Isolator Type 2 but with housing that includes vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed from equipment. Provide hot dipped galvanized mountings exposed to weather. F. Thrust Restraints (Isolator Type 5) 1. Design Basis: Mason Industries WB. 2. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described in Isolator Type 2 with the same deflection as specified for the mounting or hangers. The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4" movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of the unit. 2.3 MULTI-ARCH PIPE CONNECTORS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Mason Industries, Mercer, Amber-Booth, Vibration Mountings & Control, Peabody. 1. Neoprene twin-sphere, galvanized female unions on 3/4"-1-1/4" and 150 lb. ASA steel floating flanges on 1-1/2"-12" sizes. Duty up to 150 psi and 220°F. 2. 3/4" - 1-1/4": Mason Industries MFTFU 1-1/2" - 12": Mason Industries MFTNC 3. Allowable movement Multi-Arch Pipe Connectors – Allowable Movement MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Size & Length (Inches) Axial Compression (Inches Axial Elongation (Inches) Traverse Movement (Inches) Angular Movement (Degrees) ¾ x 8 7/8 ¼ 7/8 45 1 x 8 7/8 ¼ 7/8 45 1-1/4 x 8 7/8 ¼ 7/8 45 1-1/2 x 6 ¾ 5/8 ¾ 30 2 x 6 ¾ 5/8 ¾ 30 2-1/2 x 6 1-1/8 5/8 1 30 3 x 9 1-1/8 7/8 1 30 4 x 9 1-1/8 7/8 1 30 5 x 9 1-1/8 7/8 1 30 6 x 9 1-1/8 7/8 1 30 8 x 9 1-1/8 7/8 1 30 10 x 12 1-1/2 1 1-1/2 30 12 x 12 1-1/2 1 1-1/2 30 4. Control rods shall be installed on connector sizes 1-1/2"-10" when pressure exceeds 150 psig and on 12" size when pressure exceeds 100 psig. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONNECTORS (1/2" through 1-1/2") A. Flame-retardant non-toxic synthetic polymer inner tube with braided stainless steel outer covering, swivel-end connectors. Provide insulated covering over outer cover where pipe system is insulated, insulation shall be rated for plenum installations per NFPA 90A and be labeled as such. Connector length shall comply with 2003 ASHRAE-HVAC applications handbook, Chapter 47, Table 43. Pressure and Temperature Ratings Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum Operating Pressure (PSI) Maximum Operating Temperature (°F) Burst Pressure (PSI) ½ 375 230 1500 ¾ 300 230 1200 1 225 230 900 1-1/4 200 230 800 1-1/2 175 230 700 2.5 ACOUSTICAL PIPE ANCHORS A. Approved manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Mason Industries, Korfund, Amber-Booth, Vibration Mountings & Control, Kinetics Noise Control. B. All directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. Mason Industries ADA. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.6 NON-HARDENING CAULKING A. Acceptable Products, subject to compliance with requirements: Tremco, Johns Manville or accepted equal. B. Guaranteed to be permanently elastic. 2.7 VIBRATION DAMPERING COMPOUND A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Kinetics Noise Control KDC-E-162 or equal. B. Viscoelastic latex emulsion, vinyl base, non-asphaltic, flame and smoke rating per NFPA 90A. C. Compound shall effectively damp vibrations for a broad frequency range between 10 Hz to 20 kHz. D. Decay rate geiger plate 48 dB/sec. at 60°F. 2.8 FLOOR AND WALL PIPE SEALS A. Approved manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Mason Industries, Korfund, Amber-Booth, Vibration Mountings & Control, Kinetics Noise Control. B. Provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal if not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240°F, 10# density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. C. Design Basis: Mason Industries SWS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted on the Vibration Isolation Schedule, provide mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators to be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonable uniform deflection. Deflections to be as noted on the Equipment Mounting Schedule included at the end of this section. B. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Inform other trades following the isolation work, to avoid any contact which would reduce the vibration isolation. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, maintain equipment and piping in a rigid position during installation. Do not transfer the load to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational load. D. For restrained spring isolators, use housing as blocking during erection so that installed and operating heights can be the same. Maintain a minimum clearance of 1/2-inch around restraining bolts between housing and spring to avoid interference with spring action. Limit stops to be out of contact during normal operation. 3.2 BASES A. Provide minimum operating clearance between the equipment frame or rigid steel base frame and the housekeeping pad or floor of 1". Provide minimum operating clearance between concrete inertia base and the housekeeping pad or floor of 1". B. Closely coordinate curb-mounted base with curb supplier to provide an accurately constructed base. 3.3 FLOOR ISOLATORS A. Bolt through each base plate mounting hole into floor or support. 3.4 SPRING HANGERS A. Install hangers where indicated in Vibration Isolation Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Install the isolators with the isolator hanger box attached to or hung as close as possible to the structure. C. Suspend the isolators from substantial structural members, not from slab diaphragm unless specifically accepted. D. Align hanger rods to clear hanger box. 3.5 SPHERICAL PIPE AND FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONNECTORS A. Provide flexible connectors for equipment that is supported by or mounted on vibration isolators. B. Flexible metallic connectors shall be installed, where indicated on drawings, on the equipment side of the shut-off valves and horizontally. Provide connectors on 1/2"-1-1/2" piping connections to equipment having external isolators to accommodate thermal expansion, misalignment and vibration. C. Provide spherical pipe connectors at pump suction and discharge, chillers, cooling towers and elsewhere as required to accommodate thermal expansion, misalignment and vibration. MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Connectors to be aligned, centered, and shall not bear weight of pipe, fittings, or pipeline accessories such as valves. Piping shall be supported both sides of horizontal or vertical connectors. 3.6 NON-HARDENING CAULK A. Clean areas for application of caulk and apply during temperatures suggested by caulk manufacturer. 3.7 DAMPENING COMPOUND A. Apply 1/8" thick duct exterior coating of vibration dampening compound at floor supply and return duct takeoffs. 3.8 FLOOR AND WALL SEALS A. Required for penetrations of ductwork and piping in following construction: 1. Equipment room walls. 2. Floors, except in shafts. 3. Roofs, specifically inside roof curbs for mechanical equipment. B. Sound proofing: Fill openings with fibrous glass blanket, or board where required for full depth of penetration. Caulk each side of opening with non-hardening, non-aging caulking compound. 3.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE A. Base Types: A = No base, isolators attached directly to equipment B = Structural steel rails or base C = Concrete inertia base D = Curb-mounted base B. Isolator Types: 1 = Pad 2 = Rubber floor isolator or hanger 3 = Spring floor isolator or hanger 4 = Restrained spring isolator 5 = Thrust restraint MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Equipment Location Floor Span Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Min Min Min Min Horsepower Base Isolator Defl Base Isolator Defl Base Isolator Defl Base Isolator Defl Equip. Type & Other RPM Type Type in. Type Type in. Type Type in. Type Type in. Refrigeration Machines and Chillers Centrifugal, screw All All A 3 0.75 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.50 A 4 1.50 Pumps Large inline 5 to 25 All A 3 0.75 A 3 1..50 A 3 1.50 A 3 1.50 End suction and split case ≤40 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.50 C 3 1.50 Cooling Towers All Up to 300 A 3 0.75 A 4 3.50 A 4 3.50 A 4 3.50 301 to 500 A 3 0.75 A 4 2.50 A 4 2.50 A 4 2.50 500 and up A 3 0.75 A 4 0.75 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.50 Boilers All All A 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.50 B 4 2.50 Axial Fans, Cabinet Fans Up to 22 in. diameter All All A 2 0.25 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 24 in. diameter & up ≤2 in. SP Up to 300 B 3 2.50 C 3 3.50 C 3 3.50 C 3 3.50 300 to 500 B 3 0.75 B 3 1.50 C 3 2.50 C 3 2.50 501 and up B 3 0.75 B 3 1.50 B 3 1.50 B 3 1.50 Propeller Fans Wall-mounted All All A 1 0.25 A 1 0.25 A 1 0.25 A 1 0.25 Heat Pumps All All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A/D 3 1.50 Condensing Units All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.50 A/D 4 1.50 Packaged Rooftop All All A/D 1 0.25 D 3 0.75 Equipment Ducted Rotating Equipment Small fans, fan- ≤1000 cfm All A 2 0.25 A 2 0.25 A 2 0.25 A 2 0.25 powered boxes ≥1000 cfm All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 Engine-Driven Gen. All All A 3 0.75 C 3 1.50 C 3 2.50 C 3 3.50 END OF SECTION 15240 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15240 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes thermal insulation of the following mechanical equipment and systems: 1. Fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Plumbing System. 4. Heating System. 5. Cooling System. 6. Air Distribution. 7. Other Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this Section. Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of the documents. B. Section 15250 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. Related work specified in Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control. 1.3 WORK PROVIDED BUT SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. External Sound Insulation System, Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM Standards for the insulation products and methods of installation and testings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Section 15250 Contractor: Three years minimum experience in piping and ductwork insulation application. B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84 and complying to NFPA 90A for installation exposure to circulating air systems. C. Insulation thicknesses listed are minimum values regardless of 'k' factor. Submitted 'k' factors shall be relative to the specified mean temperature. Any insulation with a 'k' factor higher than that specified shall have its thickness increased to a point where its heat transfer rate is equal-to or less-than the heat transfer rate resulting from the specified 'k' factor/thickness combination. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Insulation materials and accessories. 2. Typewritten summary sheet indicating mechanical systems insulated, insulation type, model number used, 'k' factor at the specified mean temperature, insulation thickness in inches for each pipe size of each system of piping ductwork and equipment. 3. Show fabrication and installation details for the following: a. Removable insulation sections at access panels. b. Application of field applied jackets. c. Applications at linkage control devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION (Type A) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Rigid glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin, 850°F service temperature, all-purpose jacket of white kraft bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiber glass yarn, integral pressure sensitive tape lap seal, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A, jacket shall have a maximum of 0.02 perms water vapor permeance when tested per ASTM E-96 Procedure A. C. Johns Manville Micro-Lok, performance "k" factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature 2.2 SEMI-RIGID FIBERGLASS EQUIPMENT INSULATION (Type B) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Semi-rigid glass fiber, bonded with thermosetting resin, 650° F temperature, all purpose jacket of white kraft bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn, separate 3" wide pressure sensitive tape matching insulation jacket, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A, jacket shall have a maximum of 0.02 perms water vapor permeance when tested per ASTM E-96 Procedure A. C. Johns Manville Pipe and Tank, 3 PCF density, performance "k" factor of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. 2.3 FIBERGLASS DUCT BLANKET INSULATION (Type C) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Flexible blanket of glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin, aluminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated kraft, 250°F service temperature, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA, UL labeled, facing shall have a maximum of 0.02 perms water vapor permeance when tested per ASTM E-96 Procedure A. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Johns Manville Micro-lite, 1 PCF, performance "k" factor of 0.28 at 75°F mean temperature. 2.4 RIGID FIBERGLASS DUCT INSULATION (Type D) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Rigid glass fiber bonded with thermosetting resin, 450°F service temperature, aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to chemically treated fire-resistant kraft, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A. C. Johns Manville Type 814 Spin-Glass, 3 PCF, performance "k" factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. 2.5 CLOSED-CELL POLYETHYLENE PIPE INSULATION (Type E) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Nomaco Therma-cel or equivalent. B. Flexible closed-cell polyethylene in pipe or sheet form, 212°F service temperature, sealed with non-flammable adhesive, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A. C. Nomaco Thermal-cel, 2 PCF density, performance "k" factor of 0.25 at 75°F mean temperature. 2.6 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (Type F) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Hydrous calcium silicate, water insoluble, in either a preformed curved or scored blocks, flame/smoke rating of 5/0 per ASTM E84. C. Johns Manville Thermo-12, 14 PCF, performance "k" factor of 0.45 at 300°F mean temperature. 2.7 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION (Type G) A. Acceptable manufacturer: Fibre-X or equivalent. B. Spun mineral fibers with low binder content, 1200°F operating temperature, non-corrosive, water repellent, inorganic, free of crystalline silicic acid. C. Fibre-X Mineral Fiber Blankets #100 8 PCF, performance "k" factor of 0.42 at 400°F mean temperature. Contractor has option of using #202, 203 or 302 with integral wire mesh 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS INSULATION A. Fittings Inside Air Plenums 1. Manufactured Fitting Covers: Pre-molded polyvinyl chloride material rated for flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A, plenum-rated covers shall be MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 readily distinguishable from the standard non-rated PVC covers, provide fiberglass insert for insulation. 2. Mitered pipe covering: Molded glass fiber or insulating cement of same thickness as adjoining insulation and finish with glass cloth and apply heavy coat of lagging adhesive. B. Fitting Outside Air Plenum: Manufactured pre-molded polyvinyl chloride fitting covers with fiberglass insulation insert. C. Protective Jacketing Outdoors: Minimum 0.016 inch thick aluminum sheet jacket with fabricated seam. D. Protective Jacketing Indoors: Impact resistant polyvinyl chloride, 15 mil minimum thickness, maximum flame/smoke rating of 25/50 per NFPA 90A, sealed with welding adhesive, or as recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2.9 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre-sized a minimum of 8 oz/sq yd. 1. Type Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: 0.080 inch nickel-copper alloy; 0.062 inch soft annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 inch soft annealed galvanized steel. D. Weld-attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface. E. Adhesive-attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.10 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Surface preparation: clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. C. Refer to Paragraph 3.02 Minimum Pipe Insulation Schedule for required insulation thickness. D. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. F. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate piping, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints and uninsulated equipment. G. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140°F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but level and seal ends of insulation at such locations. H. On heating water piping over 140°F, insulate piping, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints, and uninsulated equipment. I. On piping, provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter and larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. J. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. K. Finish exposed edges of insulation with lagging adhesive. L. Do not install insulation so that it is compressed to less than 75% of its nominal thickness. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.2 MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide the following minimum insulation thickness on all HVAC Piping Systems: HVAC Systems Pipe Insulation Thickness in Inches for Various Pipe Sizes Heating System Temperature (°F) Equivalent Steam Pressure (psig) Runouts ½”-1” 1-1/2” & Less 2” thru 8” 120-200 --- 1/2 1-1/2 2 Notes: 1. 2. Runouts are defined as piping branches not exceeding 4 feet in developed pipe length which serve individual terminal units. For piping exposed to outdoor air: a. Scheduled 1-1/2” pipe size and greater shall increase by ½” thickness. HVAC Systems Pipe Insulation Thickness in Inches for Various Pipe Sized Cooling System Temperature (°F) & Type Runouts 1-1/2” & Less 2” thru 8” 40 – 56 CWS/R 1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 Free-Cooling Condenser Water ½ 1-1/2 1-1/2 Notes: 1. 2. Runouts are defined as piping branches not exceeding 12 feet in developed pipe length which serve individual terminal units. For piping exposed to outdoor air: a. Scheduled 1-1/2” pipe size and greater shall increase by ½” thickness. B. Provide the following minimum insulation thickness on all Plumbing Piping Systems: Plumbing Systems Pipe Insulation Thickness in Inches for Various Pipe Sizes Plumbing System Temperature (°F) & Type Runouts thru 1” 1-1/2” & Less 2” & Up 100-130 HW & HWC 1 1-1/2 2 Notes: 1. 2. Runouts are defined as piping branches not exceeding 4 feet in developed pipe length which serve individual terminal units. For piping exposed to outdoor air: a. b. Scheduled ½” through 1” thicknesses shall all increase to 1-1/2” thickness. Scheduled 1-1/2” thickness and greater shall increase by ½” thickness. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.3 SPECIFIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fittings 1. Insulation depth shall match that of adjacent pipe insulation. Standard PVC fitting covers are permitted throughout piping system except in air plenums. PVC fitting covers are permitted in air plenums only when accepted by the local building code officials and the covers comply with a flame/smoke rating less than or equal to 25/50 per NFPA 90A. Apply minimum 1-1/2" wide tape to seal edge of fitting covers to pipe insulation jacket. 2. All other fittings locations shall be provided with either mitered pipe insulation, glass fiber molded inserts or insulating cement built-up to same thickness as adjacent insulation. Finish with glass cloth and a heavy coating of lagging adhesive. B. Valves 1. Insulation depth shall match that of adjacent pipe insulation. Standard PVC fitting covers are permitted throughout piping system except in air plenums. PVC fitting covers are permitted in air plenums only when accepted by the local building code officials and the covers comply with a flame/smoke rating less than or equal to 25/50. Apply minimum 1-1/2" wide tape to seal edge of fitting covers to pipe insulation jacket. 2. All other valve locations shall be provided with oversized pipe insulation with thickness matching adjacent insulation. Finish with glass cloth and a heavy coating of lagging adhesive. C. Plumbing System 1. Domestic Cold Water a. Insulate horizontal piping above ceilings and where freeze protection is required with 1-1/2" fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A. Jacket lap shall be stapled 2" O.C.; laps shall be sealed with an approved vapor- retarded adhesive. 2. Roof Drainage a. Insulate drain bowls, horizontal piping and vertical piping with 1/2" thick fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A. Jacket lap shall be stapled 2" O.C.; laps shall be sealed with an approved vapor-retarded adhesive. 3. Overflow Roof Drainage a. Insulate drain bowls and the first ten feet of connecting drain pipe with 1/2" thick fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A. Jacket lap shall be stapled 2" O.C.; laps shall be sealed with an approved vapor-retarded adhesive. 4. Domestic Hot, Tempered and Recirculation Water MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. Insulate entire piping system per Paragraph 3.2 with fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, thickness sized for the system water temperature. 5. Domestic Water Heaters, Not Factory Insulated, Hot Water Storage Tanks and Hot Water Accumulators a. Insulate vessels per Paragraph 3.2 with semi-rigid fiberglass equipment insulation, Type B, thickness sized for the system water temperature. D. Heating System 1. Insulate the following piping systems per Paragraph 3.2 with fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, thickness sized for the system fluid temperature: Jacket lap shall be stapled 2" O.C. a. Heating Water Supply and Return, 120-200°F 2. Insulate the following items per Paragraph 3.02 with semi-rigid fiberglass equipment insulation, Type B, thickness sized for the system fluid temperature at 8" pipe size and up. Wrap around cylinder and cutting material 3" longer than circumference to provide a lap. Remove extra fiber glass at the lap and staple with outward clinching staples 2" on center. Matching pressure sensitive tape shall then be applied to the circumferential joints on hot applications and to both the circumferential and longitudinal joints. a. Air Separators 120-200°F b. Heat Exchangers 120-200°F c. Storage Tanks 120-200°F E. Cooling System 1. Insulate the following piping systems per Paragraph 3.02 with fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, thickness sized for the system fluid temperature. Jacket lap shall be stapled 2" O.C.; laps shall be sealed with an approved vapor-retarder adhesive. a. Chilled Water Supply and Return b. Cold Condensate Drain Piping c. Condenser Water Supply and Return, Free-cooling Systems Only d. Refrigerant Suction e. Refrigerant Hot Gas 2. Chilled Water Pump Impeller Housings a. Provide a two-piece shop fabricated 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal casing with a 2" thickness of closed cell polyethylene pipe insulation, Type E, adhered to all interior surfaces. Casing shall be sufficiently large enough to avoid liner contact with impeller housing except at pipe and shaft casing penetrations. Provide latches 8" OC along seam and at each side of pipe and shaft penetrations to connect the two pieces of casing. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 b. Enclosure shall completely cover the end suction diffuser housing. 3. Cold Chiller Surfaces not Factory Insulated a. Insulate per Paragraph 3.02 with closed cell polyethylene insulation, Type E, thickness sized for system fluid temperature at 8" pipe size and up. Seal all joints with adhesive. F. Condenser Water Systems 1. Insulate with fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, per Paragraph 3.02, minimum thickness of 2". Apply insulation over freeze protection heating cable. Cover insulation with aluminum protective jacketing locating seam on bottom of horizontal and angled piping. a. Condenser Water Piping routed outside the building to Cooling Towers and similar equipment exposed to outdoor air. G. Air Distribution 1. Insulate the exterior surfaces of the following systems with rigid fiberglass duct insulation, Type D, 1-1/2" thick with all edges tightly butted. Mechanical fasteners (cup-head pins, stick pins, or weld pins) on 12" centers shall be used to secure the material to the duct. All joints and penetrations of the vapor-retarder facing shall be sealed with a minimum 3" wide tape which matches facing. Where space does not allow mechanical fasteners, the insulation shall be applied using an approved adhesive. a. Outside Air Ductwork. b. Combustion Air Ductwork. c. Mixed Air Ductwork not Lined. d. Supply and Return Air Plenum not lined. e. Exposed Rectangular Supply Air Ductwork not lined. f. Ventilation Equipment as indicated on drawings. 2. Insulate the exterior surfaces of the following systems with flexible fiberglass duct insulation Type C, 1-1/2" thick: The insulation shall be cut longer than the perimeter of the duct to provide 2" staple lap and minimum compression at the corners. All joints shall be lapped 2" and stapled with outward clinching staples 2" on center. The insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the underside of all ducts 24" wide or more using cup-head pins, weld-pins, or stick pins with speed clips 18" on center. All joints and penetrations of the vapor-retarded jacket shall be sealed with a minimum 3" wide matching pressure sensitive tape. a. Rigid Round Supply Air Ductwork. b. Dryer Vent Ductwork routed through unheated spaces. c. Exhaust boxes between exterior wall and backdraft dampers. 3. Insulate the exterior surfaces of the following systems with mineral wool insulation, Type G, 3" thick: Attach welded studs, clips or angles to duct as anchors for wire mesh. Apply insulation over anchors with staggered seams, MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 overlap to match required insulation thickness. Cover insulation with 1" galvanized hexagonal mesh and wire to shelves using 16 gauge galvanized wire. a. Commercial Kitchen Hood Exhaust Air Ductwork. H. Other Systems 1. Piping exposed to Freezing and Weather: Insulate with fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, per Paragraph 3.02, minimum thickness of 2". Apply insulation over heating cable. Cover insulation with aluminum protective jacketing locating seam on bottom of horizontal and angled piping. 2. Underground Piping a. Incidental water piping, all systems, under-floor: Insulate with closed- cell polyethylene pipe insulation, Type E, per Paragraph 3.02, minimum 1" thickness. Seal all joints with adhesive. b. Direct-Bury Piping System not Pre-insulated (1) Insulate systems using pourable underground pipe and tank insulation, Type H. Coordinate with piping contractor for installation of forms to contain insulation prior to backfill. (2) Consolidate insulation using a rod-type concrete vibrator with a 1-3/8" to 2" diameter head. Provide pre-formed fiberglass pipe insulation, Type A, 4" thick, on each leg of all expansion loop prior to filling insulation forms. (3) After testing insulation for proper density, place flattened insulation bags on top of insulation. Hand fill with 6" of soil (no stones) to cover bags, continue with standard backfill techniques per Contract Documents. (4) Refer to details on drawings for insulation thickness, and piping arrangements. 3. Insulate the following systems from equipment connection continuous through counter flashing of roof penetration with hydrous calcium silicate insulation, Type F, thickness as indicated. Insulation shall be tightly butted with staggered joints and secured to metal surfaces with 16 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire or 1/2" wide, 0.015" gauge galvanized steel bands on 12" centers. Welded studs, clips or angles shall be provided as anchors for wires and bands. Cover all insulation with 1" galvanized hexagonal mesh screen and to wires or bands with edges laced together. Apply 1/2" thickness of insulating and finishing cement in two coats troweled to a smooth finish. a. Shop-fabricated Boiler Breeching and Flue Stack, 1-1/2" thick. b. Engine Exhaust and Muffler inside Building, 3" thick. END OF SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15300 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. General: Provide all materials and labor for the design and installation of new supervised automatic sprinkler and standpipe system in accordance with the applicable codes and all requirements of this specification. (Note the standpipe system is a separate standalone manual dry system as required by the Town of Vail Fire Department). B. The Contractor shall field verify all information contained on these drawings and is responsible for design and installation of the system in accordance with the specifications. The bid drawings do not show all information necessary for installation of the system, but are intended to be used as a guide by the Contractor for the purpose of designing the system and preparing bid. Automatic sprinkler locations are shown in areas where location is sensitive as the location pertains to obstructions as well as aesthetics. Automatic sprinkler locations are not shown in areas where the location is dictated strictly by NFPA 13 and aesthetics are not as sensitive, such as back of house (center of tile locations shall still be provided in these less sensitive areas). Sensitive areas such as Lobby, Lounge, Library, Bar and Residential areas, shall be coordinated with the Architect for aesthetics, reflected ceiling plans and design shop drawings. C. Supply: The systems shall be supplied from two, redundant water supply lines (from West Lionshead Circle and Interstate Frontage Road) as described and specified by the civil engineer of record. The 8-inch fire-line shall enter the building at an approved location (see Civil Drawing) and have a water department approved backflow prevention device within 10 feet of point-of-entry/flange into the building. A reduced-pressure backflow device is required in accordance with the Eagle River Water District requirements (maximum pressure shall be set at 200 psi downstream of the valve). D. Water-flow Switches: Provide, install and properly adjust sprinkler system supervisory switches and water-flow indicators as required herein. E. Drains: Provide direct piped connections to building drains necessary to drain and test the sprinkler systems. F. Shields: Install shields necessary to protect electrical equipment from sprinkler discharge. Provide shields to protect all drum drip assemblies, connected to the dry pipe systems, in the Parking Garage and the Loading Dock. G. Submittals: Prepare and submit shop drawings, record drawings and other submittals required herein. All submittals shall be signed/stamped. Follow Town of Vail (TOV) requirements. All documentation shall be submitted to the Owner’s Fire Protection Engineer for review PRIOR to submitting to TOV. H. Tests: Test each new sprinkler system. The Sprinkler contractor shall also attend fire alarm tests necessary to aid in testing sprinkler system monitoring devices. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out required tests. Separate tests may be required by the Architect and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Guarantee: Guarantee all new equipment and systems during installation and for a one- year period after final acceptance of the work by the Architect. J. Approvals: Obtain all approvals required for the work of this section from all public authorities having jurisdiction, from the project insurer, fire protection consultant and from the Architect. K. Fees: Pay all fees required to obtain permits, inspections or approval of this work. L. Coordination: Coordinate work with other trades working on the project prior to the installation of fire protection systems. M. Underground: The Contractor shall connect to the sprinkler and standpipe lines at 5-feet from the building and will have to bring the lines into the building. N. Valves: Provide all control valves, and other appurtenance as required for a fully operable system by the fire department and the contract documents. O. Unit Additions: Provide any additional equipment and labor if described in the Bid Format sheets for the specified unit lump sum prices of typical equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE or BY OTHERS A. Supply Piping: 8-inch, water supply pipe services (from Interstate I-70 Service Road) to within 5-feet of the building’s exterior. B. Alarms: Wiring and connection to sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices. C. Drains: Floor drains and other facilities for receiving discharge from sprinkler system drains. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Standards: All work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable portions of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and Recommended Practices listed herein, as modified by the fire department. 1. NFPA 13 – 2010 Edition, "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems." (NFPA 13) 2. NFPA 14 – 2010 Edition, "Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems." (NFPA 14) 3. NFPA 24 – 2010 Edition "Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances." 4. NFPA 25 – 2011 Edition "Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems." (NFPA 25) 5. NFPA 72, – 2011 Edition “National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code” 6. NFPA 70 – 2011 Edition “National Electrical Code®” AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 7. Rules and Regulations Concerning the Fire Suppression Program from the Colorado Department of Public Safety Division of Fire Safety. 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listing. Provide UL listed materials, appliances and equipment. 9. 2009 International Building and Fire Codes (IBC & IFC) with Town of Vail Amendments. B. All standards enforced will be those found in the year/version edition of the National Fire Codes as adopted by the Town of Vail Building and Fire Department at the time of submittal. C. Governmental Jurisdiction: All work and materials shall conform to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations governing this installation including the current editions of the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) and the 2009 International Fire Code (IFC), as amended, modified or interpreted by the Building and Fire Department officials. Governing Regulations: Follow governing laws, codes and regulations that are more stringent. D. Code Conflicts: If there is a conflict between the referenced NFPA Standards, Federal, State or local codes and this specification, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to bring the conflict to the attention of the Architect for resolution through the Fire Protection Consultant. E. Permit Fees: The Contractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, paying all fees and securing all permits, inspections and approvals necessary for conducting this work. F. Equipment: All devices, systems, equipment and materials furnished and installed shall be new and shall be of types or models approved by TOV for use in systems and occupancies of this type. G. Contractor Requirements: The Contractor shall: 1. Hold all licenses and obtain all permits necessary to perform work of this type in the Town of Vail. Copies of the Contractor's licenses shall be provided with bid submittal. 2. Have at least five (5) years of experience in the installation of systems of this type and scale and be familiar with all applicable local, state and Federal laws and regulations. 3. Be regularly engaged in the design, installation, testing and servicing of automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems. 4. Provide a job site supervisor who is to be present at all times when work is actively in progress. H. Contractor Shop Drawings will be engineered by the contractor awarded the sprinkler contract and not subcontracted by any other contractor or design shop. 1.4 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA A. Densities: Hydraulically calculated NFPA 13 wet pipe sprinkler systems shall be installed and designed to produce discharge densities of: AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. 0.10 gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet design area on the 1st through 7th floor levels in areas similar to residential, unused attics, and exit ways (Light Hazard Occupancies). 2. 0.2 gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet design areas on the Garage at P1, P2 and P3 and Dock areas. This design density will apply to all the areas on these floor areas, regardless of lesser density requirements from NFPA 13. 3. Other Areas not listed here shall be designed with discharge densities in accordance with their use and NFPA 13. (i.e. Retail accessible attics that could be used for storage.) B. Areas of Application indicated in 1.04.A shall be modified as follows: 1. Wet pipe sprinkler systems installed under sloped ceilings with a pitch exceeding 2" in 12" shall have an area increase of 30% if Standard Spray Upright, Pendent, Sidewall Spray or Large Drop sprinklers are used. 2. Dry pipe systems shall have a design area increase of 30%. The loading dock and any areas where freezing temperatures are expected including attic space to the top floors of the building and the trash chutes. 3. Dry pipe systems shall be provided for the Parking Garage areas. All dry pipe systems shall consist of hot galvanized dipped (inside & out) piping and fittings only, with no welding allowed. Compressors for dry pipe system shall be on isolation grommets and shall be electrically hard wired for power (110v plug in not permitted). Dry pipe systems shall use drum drips protected from vehicles in parking garage areas. Dry pipe systems shall utilize slope in pipe for proper drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. Dry pipe systems shall be monitored by the fire alarm system for low air, high air, system trip (flow), and tamper switch. Follow Town of Vail Fire Department (TOVFD) requirements for installation of dry pipe systems. C. Minimum Standards: The stated densities and application areas are the minimum acceptable. The Contractor shall confirm densities and areas of application with local codes and Fire Department as modifications may be needed. D. General Criteria: The Contractor shall follow the hydraulic design criteria contained in NFPA 13. In accordance with Colorado/TOVFD standards a minimum 10% safety factor shall be required when determining available pressures for the sprinkler system design. E. Hose Stream: The calculations shall include a 100 gpm inside hose stream at the hose valve closest to the floor control assembly. The combined (inside and outside) hose stream for the calculations shall be 100 gpm for Light Hazard areas and 250 gpm for Ordinary Hazard areas. F. Sprinkler zones will be based on floor areas of the building, on a per floor distribution. The facility is separated into two (2) separate A/B buildings and therefore each floor of either building shall be independently zoned. If the building floor plates exceed 52,000 square feet, there will need to be at least two separate (or multiple) sprinkler zones per floor. The lower level of the Parking Garage needs be served by multiple zones. Additionally, high maintenance areas including, but not limited to, retail spaces, mechanical areas, laundry and trash chutes, and elevator shafts and control rooms are to be provided with monitored sprinkler system isolation valves for each area. Follow TOV requirements. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Typically supply piping for the building will be contained in the floor-ceiling assembly. Separate supply piping to the upper floor levels will also be contained here. The contractor shall avoid running wet system piping in exterior/unheated walls and only do so with the permission of the Architect and the Fire Protection Consultant. H. All lockable owner closets, water closets and bathrooms in the residential dwelling units are required to have fire sprinklers even if they are less than 24 square feet in area. Water closets with only one toilet and no other fixtures may have the sprinkler head omitted from that room only. Follow TOV requirements. I. Sprinklers will be installed in all trash/laundry chutes in accordance with the building and fire code. This includes a sprinkler at the top of the shaft, bottom of the shaft and at alternative levels. Valves will also be provided as required by the fire code. If exposed to freezing temperatures, a dry-pipe system shall be used to provide protection. J. Sprinkler coverage of elevator shaft and machinery rooms: Sprinklers shall be installed at the bottom of elevator shafts (elevator pit) and in machinery rooms with an Ordinary Hazard, Group II sprinkler density. Automatic sprinklers are not required in the top of the non-combustible, ASME A17.1 compliant elevator shafts. Automatic sprinkler(s) in elevator pit shall be provided with a ball drip. Installation of these sprinklers shall comply with the TOVFD requirements for shunt trip of the elevator power. Heat detection provided within 2 feet of each of these sprinklers shall initiate elevator power shunt trip through the fire alarm system. Elevator shunt trip shall be initiated by a control relay receiving signal from the fire alarm control panel. K. Water Supply Test: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to perform and verify with the Fire Marshal the representative water supply for automatic sprinkler design purposes. This test shall have the results modified according to the time of year performed and the formulas used in modifying by the Fire Marshal. This test result shall be documented to the Engineer of Record with verification and approval from the Fire Marshal provided on the results documentation. Attached is fire flow test conducted by the Fire Marshal with the Town of Vail. It is for reference only. A new fire flow test is required to be conducted by the Sprinkler Contractor. 1.5 STANDPIPE SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA A. Standpipes shall be Class I, Manual - Dry Standpipes. Hydraulic calculations for the standpipe shall be based on an automatic system. 1. Minimum sizes: All piping supplying standpipe outlets shall be of the following sizes as a minimum. a. 2 ½ - inch threaded connection when supplying one 2 ½ - inch hose valve. 2. Outlet Locations: Outlets shall be provided: a. Location will be in accordance with the IBC and NFPA 14 and will be typically located at each primary stair enclosure. The locations of the standpipe outlets shall be approved by the Architect and TOVFD. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Standpipes are to be located within stairwells such that they do not encroach into the necessary egress width of the stairwell. 4. Provide a dry pipe valve operated solely by a Knox Box switch to be located in the Fire Command Room. The switch shall remotely begin filling the manual dry standpipe system when operated. B. Hose Connections: Outlets shall include a 2 ½ - inch connection with hose thread as approved by TOVFD. The connection should also include a 2 ½ - 1 ½ - inch reducer and cap on each standpipe hose connection. Outlets shall be located at 60 – inches above floor with the outlet pointed at a 45° angle downward. Outside 2 ½ - inch hose connections shall be protected with Knox Box keyed caps. C. Performance Criteria: The system shall be sized to deliver 500 gpm to the discharge side of hose valves at the top most standpipe or roof manifold and 250 gpm for two other additional standpipe outlets (total flow of 1,000 gpm). D. Pressure reducing valves (PRV’s) at the standpipe outlets shall be required only if hydraulic calculations prove necessary. A 4 inch sprinkler/standpipe drain is required to be able to conduct acceptance and maintenance tests of the PRV’s. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Procedure: Contact the Architect for the submittal procedure and comply with all specification and contractor submittal requirements. All sheets of plans and the cover sheet of submittals shall have a Contractor NICET 4, or FPE stamp and FPE review stamp. All drawings shall be electronically produced. No hand drawn submittals shall be accepted. B. Shop Drawings: The Contractor will be authorized to start each portion of the work when the shop drawings, catalog cuts and calculations for that portion of the work are received, reviewed and approved by the project insurer, the Architect, the Building and Fire Department officials. Shop drawings, catalog cuts and calculations shall be reviewed and stamped (review stamp) by the Engineer of Record prior to submittal to the Fire Department. Installation prior to these approvals shall be at the risk of the Contractor. Phased submittal of Shop Drawings are not permitted, complete submittal of Shop Drawings Package is expected for submittal/review by BCER. 1. The Contractor shall submit 5 sets of shop drawings, 5 sets of catalog cuts, and 5 sets of hydraulic calculations and technical data to the Architect for approval in accordance with the shop drawing submittal schedule and procedures. The fire protection shop drawings shall be “wet” stamped by the fire protection sprinkler contractor for submittal to BCER Engineering review and approval as the fire protection engineer of record. BCER Engineering will only review and stamp 5 sets of shop drawings. The contractor shall also submit one copy of all drawings, hydraulic calculations, specifications, product date sheets and the like in electronic format for submittal to TOVFD. 2. Shop drawings shall show all of the information required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 for working plans and shall include drawings showing the location of all equipment, AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 controls, piping, valves and drains. The drawings shall also show: Location and diameter of all necessary core drills, pipe sleeves and pipe clearance openings in walls and floors, and fire department connections. The drawings shall show reflected ceiling plans with a 1/8-inch scale. Each plan sheet and cover sheet of submittals shall have a Contractor NICET 4 or PE stamp. 3. Shop drawings shall contain a list of all material to be used for the sprinkler system on this project. The manufacturer, trade name and catalog number shall be given for each item. C. Product Data: The Contractor shall submit a product data submittal with the shop drawings: 4 sets of Manufacturer's Data Sheets showing the type and model of all equipment or material proposed. This information shall include type of pipe or tube, hangers, valves, pipe fittings/joining methods, sprinklers, water-flow devices, supervisory devices and fire department connections, escutcheons, and signage. When a Data Sheet shows more than one product, the specific proposed product shall be clearly indicated by arrows or other suitable means. D. Samples: Within 30 days of authorization to proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval samples of all types of proposed sprinklers, including types of finishes available and a complete list of where each type and finish will be installed. E. Permits: Prior to start of installation, the Contractor shall submit copies of all permits and approvals to the Architect necessary to conduct this work. F. Certificates: The Contractor shall provide the Architect with one copy of all documents that are reviewed and approved by the local code authorities. These documents shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Site inspection forms 2. Permit drawings 3. Final inspection forms 4. All documents shall include all required approval stamps, signatures or other information necessary to properly certify that the installation has been reviewed and accepted by the Fire Department officials. G. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a loose- leaf manual containing: 1. 11" x 17" reduced copies of the record drawings required below. 2. Copy of NFPA 25. 3. Copy of all test certificates and approvals. 4. A list of recommended spare parts. 5. Service directory. H. Draft Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Within 90 days of authorization to proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect 4 copies of the draft manual for approval (excluding test certificates and drawings). I. Final O&M Manual: Within 30 days of the completion of the work, copies of the approved manual with reduced drawings and test certificates shall be delivered to the Architect. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 J. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the sprinkler system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Architect without written instruction from the Architect in each case. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set. Follow TOVFD requirements. K. Final Submittal: Upon review of the printed record drawings, before final approval, one set of reproducible record drawings and additional sets of printed record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. In addition, a record set of drawings shall be transmitted to the Architect in electronic format on CD disks with any applicable executable un-archiving files. L. If the Contractor's submittals, upon review by the Architect do not conform to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall be required to resubmit with modifications, within ten (10) days of receipt of the Architect's notification to the Contractor. M. The Fire Protection Shop Drawing Review by TOVFD the following process for Fire Protection (Automatic Extinguishment System and Fire Alarm System) Shop Drawing Review shall be required on this project: 1. BCER Engineering, Inc. (“BCER”) has been commissioned as the Fire Protection Engineer of Record. BCER will prepare a specification and fire protection engineering drawings for submittal with the building permit set. 2. Fire Protection Subcontractor will submit five (5) sets of original Fire Protection Shop Drawings to the General Contractor for circulation and approval. 3. The Architect of Record will review Fire Protection shop drawings and add architectural comments, and sign and date with the Architects Shop Drawing Review Stamp. BCER will review for compliance with the specifications and fire protection engineering permit drawings. BCER will either reject/return for additional information or changes to the shop drawings by the subcontractor or approve for submittal of approved drawings to TOVFD for their review, approval and issuance of a permit. BCER may make comments or recommendations to the shop drawings that corrections could be made during construction and installation of the fire protection system. BCER will provide a Shop Drawing Review Stamp and Fire Protection Engineer Stamp as needed. (BCER will keep one original for their records.) 4. The Fire Protection Subcontractor (Sprinkler or Fire Alarm) will keep one original for their records and submit four (4) “originals” with wet stamps of the architect and BCER to the TOVFD for review and approval. TOVFD will keep one original for their records upon approval and the three (3) remaining originals will be submitted to the Subcontractor for distribution. A copy of the TOVFD approved set of drawings will be made by the subcontractor and sent to both the Architect and BCER for their records. Distribution of the remaining three (3) original fire protections drawings will be done in accordance with the contract. 5. The Fire Protection Contractor will have on site at all times a copy of the Contractor’s permit which will be kept with an approved set of fire protection drawings for reference by the TOVFD during installation and inspection. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Modifications to approved fire protection shop drawings will be permitted, as approved by the TOVFD. Field approval of the ‘”permit” fire protection shop drawings will be provided by BCER. 1.7 WARRANTY AND EMERGENCY SERVICE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of two years beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner/Architect. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or equipment. B. Emergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four (4) hours of a request by the Architect or Owner for such service. This service shall be provided on a 24-hour per day, seven days per week basis. 1.8 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Architect prior to final acceptance. B. Spare Parts: The Contractor shall install two (2) metal sprinkler cabinets containing a minimum total sprinklers as required by NFPA 13, of each type, finish and temperature rating used, but not less than 24 spare sprinklers. Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of sprinkler wrenches compatible with each type of sprinkler provided. The cabinets shall be installed at the locations approved by the Architect. C. Special Tools: The Contractor shall supply the Architect with two (2) complete sets of special tools and equipment necessary to perform routine maintenance on the sprinkler systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General: All equipment and system components furnished and installed shall be new and of first quality, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), or approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for their intended use. All such equipment and system components shall be installed within the limitations of the respective UL listings or FM approvals. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following: 1 Gate Valves: a Nibco b Kennedy Valve c Mueller d Stockham e Tyco f Milwaukee 2 Swing Check Valves: AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a Central b Mueller c Kennedy Valve, Division of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. d Tyco e Viking f Victaulic g Globe 3 Butterfly and Ball Valves: a Tyco b Mueller c Victaulic d Milwaukee 4 Grooved Mechanical Couplings: a Gruvlok b Victaulic Company of America 5 Double Check Valve Assembly: a Febco Model 805YD b Watts Model 709 c Hersey Model 2 or E-1 d Ames Model 2,000 (epoxy) 6 Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly: a Febco 825YD b Watts 909 c Hersey 6 CM d Ames 4,000 Rp (epoxy) 7 Fire Protection Specialty Valves: a Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b Tyco c Viking Corporation d Globe 8 Fire Department Connection: a Croker b Potter-Roemer c Elkhart d Tyco 9 Sprinkler Heads: a Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America. b Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c Tyco d Viking Corp. e Globe 10 Fire Protection Specialties: a Croker-Standard Division; Fire-End & Croker Corp. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 b Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. c Tyco d Grunau Sprinkler Mfgr. Co., Inc. e Potter Roemer, Inc. 11 Inspector's Test and Drain Module: a Victaulic b A.G.F. c Grinnell/Gem 2.2 BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide identification complying with Division 15 “Basic Mechanical Requirements” section "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers. 2. Fire Protection Valves: Valve tags. 3. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs: a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls. b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated. c. At door to each sprinkler control valves, sign reading "FIRE CONTROL". d. At each drain or test, sign indicating its purpose. Coordinate all signage with TOVFD. B. Attach to the riser a metal sign indicating the name, address and telephone number of the Fire Protection Contractor. Also indicate the date of installation. Follow NFPA 13 and TOV requirements. 2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Sprinkler system piping or tubing shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13, design standards or any one or a combination of the following: All dry pipe automatic sprinkler system piping shall be hot-dipped galvanized piping and fittings, inside and outside. Hot-dipped galvanized piping shall not be welded. Pressures in some areas are expected to exceed 175 psi. Where this occurs 300 psi rated piping and fittings shall be required. B. Thin-wall Pipe: Schedule 10 Pipe meeting ASTM A-53, A-135 or A-795 requirements with: 1. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings for roll grooved pipe sizes 2 ½ - inches and larger. 2. Plain-end pipe couplings and fittings for pipe sizes 1-inch through 2-inches, inclusive. 3. Threaded fittings for tubing specifically listed for such uses and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and listing requirements. C. Schedule 40 Pipe: Schedule 40 Pipe meeting ASTM A-53, A-135, and A-795 requirements with: 1. Threaded pipe couplings and fittings AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings for roll or cut pipe sizes 2 ½ - inches and larger. 3. Plain-end pipe couplings and fittings for pipe sizes 1-inch through 2-inches, inclusive. D. XL Pipe: Allied XL pipe meeting ASTM A-135 requirements with: 1. Threaded pipe couplings and fittings and tubing specifically listed for such uses and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and listing requirements. E. Underground piping: All underground pipes shall be centrifugally cast ductile iron or other material approved by the Architect, Civil Engineer and Water Department Standards. F. Underground pipe fittings: Underground pipe fittings shall be "Tyton", "Fastite", or "Belltite" mechanical joint, short body Class 230 Fittings conforming to ANSI Specification A21.10. Flanged Fittings shall conform to ANSI Specification 3161, Class 125. G. Pressure ratings: Pressure ratings of all fittings shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system. H. Corrosion protection: All piping and hangers where exposed to the weather or installed in a corrosive atmosphere shall be protected against corrosion. 2.4 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES A. Types: Sprinkler system control and drain valves shall be the following types: 1. O.S.&Y. gate valves. 2. Butterfly valves that are approved for use in automatic sprinkler systems. 3. Butterfly valves with integral valve supervisory switches, whose entire assembly is approved for use in sprinkler systems. B. Listing: All valves must be UL listed or FM approved for their intended use. C. Signs: All water supply control valves and drain valves shall be permanently marked with metal signs to show their function and the sprinkler system zone they serve and indicate their normal position (“normally open” or “normally closed”). Additionally, adhesive labeling for identification of risers and mains is required. Field determinations will be acceptable. Follow Town of Vail requirements. D. Pressure Ratings: Pressure ratings of all valves shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system. E. Supervision: All control valves shall be electrically supervised. F. Access Panels: Provide and install access panels (minimum size 12-inches by 12-inches) for all control valves located above finished ceilings or concealed in walls. Label all access panels indicating “CONTROL VALVE” and the appropriate zone. All labeling must be clearly visible from the walking surface. Architect will approve all locations and select finish AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 of access panels. Access panels installed in fire resistive construction shall be of the types required for maintaining proper protection of assembly. Follow TOV requirements. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. Types: Automatic sprinklers shall be of the following types: 1. Pendent and sidewall sprinklers shall be installed in all public areas and back of house areas with finished ceilings. All pendent sprinkler heads will be concealed sprinklers. Residential sprinklers shall be used in all dwelling units and egress corridors, with flat, non-vaulted ceilings. Cover plates for concealed sprinkler heads shall be painted by the manufacturer and shall be approved by the Architect. Documentation of manufacture painted cover plates shall be retained for final inspections. 2. Architect will select sprinklers for installation in the main entry area and any other architecturally sensitive areas. 3. Standard upright or pendent sprinklers shall be installed in non-public, unfinished areas. 4. All sprinkler locations will be coordinated or approved by the Architect or fire protection consultant. 5. Dry barrel type automatic sprinklers used as exterior sprinklers shall be provided in lengths recommended by the manufacturer to prevent freezing of interior wet piping and to prevent ice build-up inside dry type sprinkler piping. 6. Sprinkler heads shall be fast-response 155 – 165 degree concealed or semi- recessed except where listed for a particular application as follows: 7. Architect’s selection of fire sprinkler heads shall be reviewed by Fire Protection Engineer and Contractor prior to submittals to TOVFD for review. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Attic Systems Standard Response – ventilated Standard Response – unventilated 212 degree F 286 degree F Dry Pipe Systems Quick Response ventilated (unoccupied space) Standard Response unventilated 212 degree F 286 degree F Mechanical/Electrical Rooms Quick Response 155 – 165 degree F Residential Areas Residential, concealed (flat ceilings) or Quick Response, extended coverage, dry- pendent, concealed heads, (vaulted ceilings only) 155 degree F Elevator Machinery Standard Response 212 degree F Sauna/Steam Rooms Laundry Dryer Plenum Corrosion-resistant Quick Response 286 degree F Walk-in Coolers/Freezers Dry pendent Quick Response 165 degree F B. Final Selection: The Architect will select finishes for all automatic sprinklers, escutcheons, and cover plates from samples of available finishes supplied by Contractor. Be aware that the Architect may desire special order colors on cover plates for aesthetics and the number of colors and number of cover plates (areas) shall be coordinated with the Architect. Cover plate color selections and area information is not available at this time. C. Uniformity: All sprinklers within a space shall be from the same manufacturer and have the same heat response element, including temperature rating and response characteristics. D. Temperature Rating: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to install sprinklers of the proper temperature rating as required by NFPA 13. Coordinate with TOVFD when sprinklers are placed nearby heat sources. E. Corrosion Resistance: Sprinklers located on exterior piping systems, or located in corrosive atmospheres shall be corrosion resistant. F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Escutcheons shall be metal and be listed with the sprinklers for recessed sprinkler locations. G. Sprinkler Orifice: All sprinklers shall be standard orifice sprinklers (1/2" orifice) unless specifically approved otherwise. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.6 DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER COMPRESSORS A. Where dry pipe automatic sprinkler system dry pipe valves are located, they shall be provided with two (2) floor mounted compressors each for reliability (one back up compressor in each area). Compressors for dry pipe systems shall be on isolation grommets and shall be electrically hard wired for power (110v or 210v plug not permitted). Compressors shall be UL listed for use. B. Packaged Dry Pipe System: A factory tested, UL Listed, FM Approved, preassembled and prewired Dry Pipe System with electric release. The packaged system shall include the following: 1. 14 Gauge steel cabinet with red powder coating. 2. Individual access doors for the hydraulic section. Each door shall be provided with a neoprene gasket to avoid vibrations. 3. Field wiring terminal strips integrated with the cabinet for connection of field wiring for audible devices, buildings Fire Alarm Control Panel, auxiliary contacts and power supply for air compressor. 4. Alarm check valve with a cast iron body and 175 psig working pressure. Viking Alarm Check Valve Model F or manufacturer’s equivalent. 5. Air Maintenance: Provide galvanized steel air supervisory and regulation trim rated at 175 psig. Provide integral tank-less air compressor at 120 Vac. 6. Water-Flow Switch, Low air pressure switch and tamper switch. 7. Pressure gauges to indicate water supply pressure, priming water pressure and air pressure of the system. 8. Schedule 40 steel pipe header with grooved ends for connection to supply water. Provide shutoff valve for isolation of the dry pipe system. 9. Schedule 40 steel pipe drain manifold of 2-inch diameter for drain connections. Open drain cups in the cabinet and multiple drain manifolds will not be accepted. 10. Provide inlet filter and dryer to dry pipe system air compressor. 11. Sequence of Operation: a. The activation of at least one automatic sprinkler will open the dry valve and cause the system to fill the piping network with water and spray through all open sprinklers. This will activate alarm and water-flow switch contacts connected to the building fire alarm panel and sound an alarm. 12. Hose Outlet Valves: 300 PSIG, 2-1/2 inch, rough chrome plated, pressure regulating, brass angle valve, with removable, 2-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch reducing lug pin and hose connector coupling. Valve and coupling shall have external threads having the NH standard thread, for the 2-1/2 inch valve, as specified in NFPA 1963. Provide spanner wrench for removal of reducing coupling. Provide with cap and chain finished to match valve. Provide Knox Box keyed caps for exterior valves. C. Bracing: The valve supply piping shall be braced securely to the building structure. Brace all end of line branch lines on dry pipe systems following TOVFD requirements. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Contractor shall furnish and install hydraulic calculation signs for each new sprinkler zone. Contractor shall also provide identification signs for all valves installed under this section. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Required Information: Hydraulic calculation signs shall include all information indicated in NFPA 13. Valve identification signs shall identify the function of the valve and the area served. 2. Description: Signs shall be rigid, flat steel or aluminum plaques with embossed enamel background and lettering. Signs shall be secured by chain or durable wire to each sprinkler zone control valve, or in an obvious location specifically approved by the Architect. 2.8 SUPERVISORY AND ALARM EQUIPMENT A. All water-flow and valve supervisory switches shall be furnished, installed and properly adjusted by the sprinkler contractor. Alarm monitoring of these devices will be by others. B. Contacts: All water-flow and valve supervisory switches shall be provided with two "Form C" (D.P.D.T.) contacts for monitoring. Specific contact rating shall be coordinated with the fire alarm contractor. C. Water-flow Switches: Vane-type water-flow indicators shall be provided to indicate water- flow in each new sprinkler system zone. D. Supervisory Switches: Valve supervisory switches shall be provided for all valves controlling the water supply to the sprinkler and standpipe systems. Pressure switches shall be supplied for dry-pipe systems with the ability to monitor high and low pressure limits. E. Loop Type Switches: Valve supervisory switches shall be the yoke mounted or integral type. Contractor shall not use remote mounted, wire loop type switches. 2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow prevention device shall be UL listed reduced pressure backflow device type and accepted by the Water Department and Fire Department. Follow Water Department requirements for the location of the backflow prevention device at the water entrance into the building. The assembly shall have two spring-loaded independently operating poppet- type valves mounted in a common body between two OS&Y gate valves. The assembly shall have four test cocks and shall be designed for installation in a horizontal flow attitude. A bypass flow meter shall also be provided. There shall be a single-check valve installed upstream of the backflow device, between the supply connection and the RPBD. 2.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Two fire department connections (FDC) shall be required as a minimum for connection to the fire sprinkler system. Number of inlets to be calculated by Fire Protection Contractor. In addition, two FDC’s shall be required as a minimum for connection to the standpipe system. Again, number of inlets to be calculated by Fire Protection Contractor according to system demand. The location of these connections shall be on the exterior of the building as shown on the drawings. These are the fire department approved staging areas. The location shall be approved by the Architect, Fire Protection Consultant and TOVFD. FDC supply piping shall be contained within the wall and floor/ceiling assemblies of the building, AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 and not extend under the buildings. The FDC shall be a free standing, flush or parallel type connection. There needs to be 2 inlets and 6 or 8-inch piping to the standpipe riser connection. There will be 2 separate FDC’s for sprinkler system. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges shall be UL listed 4 1/2-inch minimum dial type gauges with a maximum limit of not less than twice the normal working pressure at the point installed. All gauges shall be provided with a shut-off valve (gauge-cock). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKING CONDITIONS A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to inspect the drawings and become familiar with the conditions under which the work will be performed. B. Working Hours: All work may be conducted during normal working hours, unless authorized by the General Contractor. C. Construction Meetings: The Contractor shall be responsible for attending weekly construction coordination meetings with the Architect. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR WORK A. Cooperation with other trades: The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate with the work of the other trades towards the general purpose of having the construction progress as rapidly and as smoothly as possible with a minimum of interference between trades. Coordination to occur prior to the installation of any fire protection system. B. Openings, cutting and patching: Before the start of Structural Work, the Sprinkler Contractor shall submit instructions for openings and penetrations required for his work to the Architect. Instructions shall be subject to the Architect's approval. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide any subsequent additional penetrations or openings or relocation required, but not delineated in his instructions at no additional cost to the Architect. C. Approval prior to installation: No work shall commence prior to approval of shop drawings by the Architect. Any change in work which has been installed prior to approval of the shop drawings shall be made without additional compensation to the Contractor. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Aesthetics shall be a primary consideration when installing sprinklers and sprinkler piping. Any facet of sprinkler installation that does not meet with the Architect's approval shall be revised by the Contractor to the Architect's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Holes: All holes made by the Contractor in any wall, ceiling, or floor shall be patched by the Contractor, restoring the wall, ceiling, floor or member to its original condition, fire resistance and integrity. Utilize UL listed assemblies where required. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. General Locations: Location of all equipment, controls, piping, valves and drains shall be subject to Architect's approval. D. Special Installation Instructions: All sprinklers and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All special tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be used. E. Deflectors Distances: Sprinklers permanently installed shall be installed with the deflector to ceiling distances in accordance with their listing requirements and NFPA 13. 3.4 PIPING A. All sprinkler piping installed in public areas or non-public areas with suspended ceilings shall be concealed in the walls, ceilings or soffit. Pipe in unfinished areas may be exposed. B. Exposed Piping: All piping exposed within the building public areas shall be approved by the Architect and painted by the Contractor. All exterior piping shall be primed with zinc chromate and painted by the Contractor. Architect to select paint colors. C. Escutcheon Plates: All exposed pipe which passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor shall be provided with escutcheon plates. D. Minimum Height: All exposed piping and devices shall be installed as high as possible, but no less than 7-feet 6-inches above the finished floor in traffic or working areas, and so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway or passageway, and shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of any mechanical, plumbing or electrical equipment. E. Operating Chains: Valves controlling water supply to the sprinkler systems shall be less than 7-feet 6-inches above the finished floor. Valves are to be located so as easily accessible (without the use of a ladder) and must not require special tools or knowledge for their operator. Follow TOVFD requirements. F. Protection: The Contractor shall identify to the Architect locations requiring adequate permanent protection for any installed piping, valves, devices or accessories which are subject to physical damage or may be hazards. The Contractor shall make recommendations for protection of this equipment and the Architect will approve these protection devices or techniques including colors to be used. G. Sealant: Pipe which passes through fire-resistive barriers (including shaft walls) shall be sleeved and grouted or sealed to maintain the integrity and rating of the fire resistive barrier with rated fire protection sealants equal to the fire resistive rating of the assembly. Utilize UL listed assemblies where required. H. Underground Piping: Underground piping shall be installed as required in applicable sections of this specification. Trenching, pipe laying, backfill, compaction, thrust blocks, testing and flushing shall be in accordance with the specifications. I. Dry Pipe automatic sprinkler piping shall be hot dipped galvanized piping, inside and out. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 J. Hot-dipped galvanized piping shall not be welded. 3.5 SYSTEM TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS A. The sprinkler subcontractor shall provide all test valves and drain connections as required by NFPA 13. B. Discharge: All test connections and drain connections shall be hard piped to discharge waste water directly to the outside if possible, or into a floor drain. The test connection is required to discharge to the exterior. The sprinkler contractor shall route the pipe and modify any floor drain grates as necessary to minimize splashing due to discharge. In locations where the Architect allows, the drain may discharge with a down turned elbow at the building exterior. In these locations the contractor shall provide a concrete splash block to protect the landscaping. 3.6 RISERS A. The Contractor shall locate the main risers and standpipes for the sprinkler system in order to minimize obstruction to traffic or building operations. Exact location of risers shall be approved by the Architect and the Fire Protection Consultant. B. Supervisory Switches: Valve supervisory switches shall be provided on all valves controlling water supply to the fire sprinkler system, including valves located at backflow prevention device. 3.7 FLUSHING AND SANITIZATION A. Prior to connecting the sprinkler piping with the underground main, the Contractor shall flush and sanitize the underground main in accordance with NFPA 13, the Health Department, Eagle River Water District and the water company's standards. The Contractor shall notify TOVFD prior to underground flushing. 3.8 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) training sessions of four (4) hours each to familiarize the building personnel with the features, operation and maintenance of the sprinkler and standpipe systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled by the Architect at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and the Architect. B. Agenda: The Contractor shall submit a proposed training agenda for the Architect's review and approval within 60 days of authorization to proceed. The proposed training agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Overview of system operation. 2. Overview of system equipment and device locations. 3. Detailed operation guidelines. 4. Detailed maintenance procedures. 5. Periodic testing procedures. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Final Agenda: The Contractor shall submit the final approved training agenda 14 days prior to the first training session. 3.9 FINAL INSPECTION AND TEST A. The Contractor shall inquire about making arrangements with the Architect for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance tests. The Architect may want to conduct a final inspection and witness the final acceptance test. This Architect inspection and test would be separate from testing by the local authorities. B. Required Tests: All tests and inspections required by the referenced Codes and Standards, the Town of Vail Building and Fire Department officials and the Architect shall be performed by the Contractor under this scope of work. 1. When local code authorities are required to witness tests, the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the code authorities and coordinating the work with the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all test documents with necessary approval stamps and signatures of the code authorities. The Contractor shall submit one copy of each of these documents to the Architect. C. Notice: Contractor shall provide at least five (5) working days notice for all tests. D. Final Approval: Final approval and acceptance of the work will be given by the Architect when: 1. The completed sprinkler systems have been inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and the Town of Vail Building Inspection Division and Fire Department officials. 2. Required submittals, system operation and maintenance manuals, record drawings, spare parts, special tools and training have been provided to, reviewed, and accepted by the Architect. E. The Architect's Consultant will visit the job site to observe the work and witness the final acceptance tests when he has been advised by the Contractor that the work is completed and ready for test. If the work has not been completed or the test is unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be responsible for the Architect's extra expenses for re-inspection and witnessing the retesting of the work. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Architect to the Contractor. 3.10 RECEIVING AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all receiving, handling and storage of his materials at the job site. Use of loading docks, service driveways, and freight elevators shall be coordinated with the Architect. 3.11 RUBBISH REMOVAL AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Contractor shall remove rubbish and debris resulting from his work on a daily basis from the work site. Rubbish not removed by the Contractor may be removed by the Architect and back-charged to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 15300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15300 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Water Piping. B. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping. C. Natural Gas Piping. D. Domestic Water Heater and Accessories. E. Plumbing Specialties. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of the Documents. B. Section 15400 Contractor shall review all sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. Plumbing Drainage Institute "Standard WH-201". 2. The American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) Standards 1001, 1003, 1003-1, 1005, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1023, 1024, 1025. 3. National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.) B. When CPVC is used, all installers must be trained by FlowGuard Gold or Corzan representatives as provided by Noveon. This training must be documented. C. When CPVC is used, all materials to come into contact with CPVC must be approved for use with FlowGuard Gold and Corzan CPVC material. Examples are solvent cements, fire stops, thread sealants, and leak detectors. Current information can be found on www.flowguardgold.com or www.corzancpvc.com or by contacting Noveon or any FlowGuard Gold or Corzan manufacturers. D. Regardless of specific model numbers of equipment scheduled or specified, all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and pipe shall comply with NSF/ANSI 372, 2010 for being lead free. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following items under provisions of Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Pipe, fittings, couplings, solder, joint materials. 2. Drains. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Domestic Water Heaters. 5. Shock Absorbers. 6. Backflow Prevention Devices. 7. Fixtures and Trim. 8. Faucets, Shower Valves, Supplies and Stops. 9. Specialties and Special Systems. 10. Circulating Pumps. 11. Sump and Pumps. 12. Sewage Ejectors. 13. Sovent System. B. Submit printed Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operating and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Domestic Water Heater. 2. Backflow Prevention Devices. 3. Fixtures and Trim. 4. Faucets, Shower Valves, Supplies and Stops. 5. Specialties and Special Systems. 6. Pumps. C. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with the pressure test and disinfection requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER DISTRIBUTION A. Interior Buried: 1. Provide Type K annealed copper water tube conforming to ASTM B-88 with BCup brazed filler metal joints using wrought fittings. 2. Provide continuous tube for all buried tubing using tube bends in lieu of fittings. Exterior tube may be coupled where requirements are in excess of standard mill lengths by using wrought pressure couplings with stops, and brazed BCup Joints. Lengths coupled in this manner, where necessary and acceptable to the Engineer, will meet the intent of the no fitting requirement of this Specification. Interior buried tube shall meet the same criteria and requirements. 3. Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe and Fittings: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO a. FlowGuard Gold Copper Tube Size (CTS) Pipe and Fittings (up to 2” in size) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2846. The CPVC pipe compound shall meet cell class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784 and be certified by NSF to use the NSF-pw mark. b. Corzan Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Pipe and Fittings (All Sizes) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F441, Schedule 80. The CPVC pipe compound used for pipe up to 8” in diameter shall meet cell class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784. CPVC pipe 8” in diameter and larger shall meet cell class 23447. The CPVC pipe compounds shall be certified by NSF to use the NSF-pw mark. c. CPVC Fitting: CTS fittings shall be FlowGuard Gold CPVC only and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2846. IPS fittings shall be Corzan CPVC fittings only. IPS Fittings shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F437 (schedule 80 threaded) and ASTM F439 (schedule 80 socket). The CPVC compound used to produce the IPS fittings compound shall be pressure rated in accordance with ASTM D- 2837 and PPI TR-3 having Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 72oF and 1000 psi at 180oF as listed in PPI TR-4. d. CPVC Solvent Cement: All socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM F493 and primers that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F656. Safe handling of solvent cement shall be in accordance with ASTM F402. Solvent Cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved for use with Corzan and FlowGuard Gold manufacturers. B. Interior Tube Supported by Hangers and Clamps: 1. Provide type L copper water tube (ASTM B 88M, drawn temper for all water distribution piping inside building/structure. a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper, solder joint fittings. b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint end. c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast copper alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball and socket, metal to metal seating surfaces and solder joint of threaded ends. C. Copper tubing system from 2" through 6" may be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type, with a central cavity design pressure responsive gasket along with grooved end copper or bronze fittings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company of American. D. In lieu of providing couplings in copper tubing, the Contractor may as an option, provide mechanically formed couplings, provided they are in accordance with the following STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 1. Formed couplings by first annealing are at end of tube where expansion will occur. Insert tube expander to die size required and expand tube end to accept tube end to accept tubing of the same size. 2. Resulting joint is a minimum of 3 times as long as the thickness of the tube, and braze using B Cup series filler metal. E. Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe and Fittings: 1. FlowGuard Gold Copper Tube Size (CTS) Pipe and Fittings (up to 2” in size) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2846. The CPVC pipe compound shall meet cell class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784 and be certified by NSF to use the NSF-pw mark. 2. Corzan Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Pipe and Fittings (All Sizes) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F441, Schedule 80. The CPVC pipe compound used for pipe up to 8” in diameter shall meet cell class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784. CPVC pipe 8” in diameter and larger shall meet cell class 23447. The CPVC pipe compounds shall be certified by NSF to use the NSF-pw mark. 3. CPVC Fitting: CTS fittings shall be FlowGuard Gold CPVC only and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2846. IPS fittings shall be Corzan CPVC fittings only. IPS Fittings shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F437 (schedule 80 threaded) and ASTM F439 (schedule 80 socket). The CPVC compound used to produce the IPS fittings shall be pressure rated in accordance with ASTM D-2837 and PPI TR-3 having Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 72oF and 1000 psi at 180oF as listed in PPI TR-4. F. CPVC Solvent Cement: All socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that meet or exceeds the requirements of ASTM F493 and primers that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F656. Safe handling of solvent cement shall be in accordance with ASTM F402. Solvent Cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved for use with Corzan and FlowGuard Gold manufacturers. G. Polyethylene Tubing -PEX 1. Polyethylene tubing shall be installed in residential units only. 2. Polyethylene tubing shall be installed in accordance with the manufactures recommendations. All components of the potable water system shall be provided by one manufacturer including but not limited to tube, fittings, manifolds and other ancillary components required to complete the installation. 3. The installing contractor shall provide in writing, to the engineer that the PEX tubing furnished under this specification conforms to the material and mechanical requirements specified herein. 4. PEX manufacturer must pass the NSF P171 CL-R product rating for recirculation of hot water. 5. The cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing shall carry a twenty five year non- prorated warranty against failure due to defect in material and workmanship. 6. All products, components, etc. specified herein shall be as manufactured and/or supplied by Wirsbo Company, Rehau or Noveon TempRite PEX manufacturer. Alternate equipment manufacturers must submit for approval prior to bid. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 7. The cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing shall be manufactured by PEX-A peroxide method or Noveon’s PEX-B Silane multilayer technology method . Tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 and F877. The tube must be listed to ASTM by an independent third party testing agency. Pipe shall meet requirements of NSF chlorine resistance Protocol P-171 and carry the NSF CL-R designation. Pipe exposed to natural UV light for a period of no less than six months must be shown through test results to lose no more than 20% of its original chlorine resistance as defined in NSF P-171 CL-R. 8. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Wirsbo, Rehau or approved Noveon TempRite PEX manufacturer. Fitting shall consist of a PEX ring marked to the respective tube size and the applicable fitting. All fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F1960 or ASTM F1807. Fittings shall not reduce the ID of the piping system. 2.2 JOINT MATERIAL FOR COPPER PIPING A. Perform soldering or brazing within the following standards and with the acceptable products as follows: Designation Type Method ASTM AWSA Class Max/Min % Properties An t i m o n y Co p p e r Ph o s - ph o r u s Si l v e r Ti n Silver Silver Brazing B-260 5.8 BCup-5 - 80-0 5-0 15-0 - Standard 95-5 Solder NA NA SnSb 0-5 - - - 0-95 Lead Free Silver Solder B-32- 96AM - - - - - NA = Not Applicable B. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Canfield Technologies. 2. Oatey 2.3 JOINT MATERIAL FOR SCREWED PIPING A. Make-up screwed joints with Teflon tape or Teflon joint sealing compound. 2.4 SOIL DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Interior Buried Pipe and Fittings: 1. Provide cast iron (centrifugally cast) service weight (SV) soil pipe with cast iron drainage fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM A74, to point of connection with the site sanitary sewer. Joints materials and system shall be hub and spigot with neoprene gaskets and lubricants conforming to ASTM C- 564 SV pattern. Gaskets and lubricants shall be equal to Tyler Pipe Ty-Seal. Acceptable pipe manufactures: Tyler Pipe, Charlotte Pipe, AB & I Foundry or Star Pipe Products. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Interior Soil Waste and Vent Pipe Supported by Hangers and Clamps: 1. Provide cast iron (centrifugally cast) service weight (SV) soil pipe with cast iron drainage fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM A888 or CISPI 301 for Hubless Pipe and Fittings. Acceptable pipe manufactures: Tyler Pipe, Charlotte Pipe, AB & I Foundry or Star Pipe Products. 2. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Soil, Waste pipe: Stainless-Steel couplings meeting ASTM A666, Type 301, stainless steel bands and sleeve. (1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8 inch wide shield with 2 bands. (2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 3 inch wide shield with 4 bands. b. Vent pipe: Compact, Stainless-Steel couplings meeting ASTM A666, Type 301, stainless steel corrugated shield; stainless steel bands and sleeve. (1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8 inch wide shield with 2 bands. (2) NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3 inch wide shield with 2 bands. (3) NPS 8 and NPS 10: 4 inch wide shield with 4 bands. 3. Contractor option: utilize PVC for the waste and vent below the floor of the first level, and PVC vent above the first level. PVC piping shall not be utilized in any return air plenums. 4. Sovent Fittings: ASME/ANSI B16.45 C. Forced Mains 1. Sanitary sewer forced mains may use any one of the following pipe materials: a. Hard drawn Type L copper with copper pressure fittings and soldered joints or grooved end fittings. b. Steel grey iron pipe with threaded fittings and threaded joints. Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized. c. Steel pipe with grooved end fittings and couplings. Pipe and fittings (below grade only) shall be galvanized. d. Schedule 40 PVC may be used below grade only. e. Corzan and/or FlowGuard Gold Piping Systems. D. Copper Waste, Vent and Soil Pipe and Fittings shall be prohibited on this project. 2.5 PLASTIC STORM DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PIPING (underground only) A. Plastic storm drain waste and vent piping may be installed when in compliance with jurisdictional codes and this specification. B. Plastic DWV shall be PVC (polyvinylchloride) solid wall drain waste and vent as required by code and utilizing drainage pattern fittings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO C. PVC (polyvinylchloride) pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665 and shall consist of schedule 40 DWV pattern. D. PVC socket fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665 made to ASTM D 3111 DWV patterns. 2.6 STORM PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Interior Buried Pipe and Fittings: 1. Provide cast iron (centrifugally cast) service weight (SV) storm pipe with cast iron drainage fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM A74, to point of connection with the site sanitary sewer. Joints materials and system shall be hub and spigot with neoprene gaskets and lubricants conforming to ASTM C- 564 SV pattern. Gaskets and lubricants shall be equal to Tyler Pipe Ty-Seal. Acceptable pipe manufactures: Tyler Pipe, Charlotte Pipe, AB & I Foundry or Star Pipe Products. B. Interior Storm Pipe Supported by Hangers and Clamps: 1. Provide cast iron (centrifugally cast) service weight (SV) storm pipe with cast iron drainage fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM A888 or CISPI 301 for Hubless Pipe and Fittings. Acceptable pipe manufactures: Tyler Pipe, Charlotte Pipe, AB & I Foundry or Star Pipe Products. 2. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Storm pipe: Heavy-Duty Type 301, Stainless-Steel couplings meeting ASTM A666, Type 301, stainless steel bands and sleeve. (1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8 inch wide shield with 2 bands. (2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 3 inch wide shield with 4 bands. C. Forced Mains 1. Above ground storm drain forced mains may use any one of the following pipe materials: a. Hard drawn Type L copper with copper pressure fittings and soldered joints or grooved end fittings. b. Steel grey iron pipe with threaded fittings and threaded joints. Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized. c. Steel pipe with grooved end fittings and couplings. Pipe and fittings (below grade only) shall be galvanized. d. Corzan and/or FlowGuard Gold Piping Systems. 2.7 CONDENSATE DRAIN A. Provide type DWV copper tubing with drainage fittings for pipe sizes 1-1/4" and larger or FlowGuard Gold/Corzan pipe and fittings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Provide type M copper tubing with wrought copper fittings or FlowGuard Gold CTS for pipe sizes smaller than 1-1/4". 2.8 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. Buried Exterior Pipe and Fittings 1. Pipe: Schedule 40 Black Steel, ASTM A53 pipe for butt welding. 2. Fittings: Butt weld steel, ASTM-234. 3. Wrapping: Standard of serving Utility Company. 4. Medium Density Polyethylene pipe and fittings: PE 2406, Type II, Grade P24, Category 5 per ASTM D 1248/D 3350, SDR 11 pipe. Risers shall be prefabricated metallic and wrapped or coated. B. Interior Exposed or Accessible 1. Size 1/2" thru 2" (for pressure at or less than 6" water column): a. Pipe: Schedule 40 black, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S b. Fittings: Threaded malleable iron c. Joint Seal: Teflon d. Unions: Black malleable iron ground joint, bronze to iron seat, 150 lbs. class, ANSI B2.1 and ASTM A 197. 2. Size 2-1/2" and over (All pressures) a. Pipe: Schedule 40 black, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S b. Fittings: Butt weld ASME B16.9 wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel c. Unions: 150 lb. forged steel weld neck flange, ASME B16.5 and ASTM A105. C. Interior concealed non accessible, air plenums and gas pressures above 6" water column: 1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S 2. Fittings: Butt weld ASME B16.9 wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel 3. Unions: 150 lb. forged steel weld neck flange, ASME B16.5 and ASTM A105. D. 2.9 DRAINS - FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS A. Provide drains as scheduled on Drawings. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade. 2.10 CLEANOUTS A. General: Cleanouts shall consist of bronze plug. Floor cleanouts to be furnished with flashing clamp device and set in the center of a 24" x 24" flashing pan except for slab on grade or grade cleanout applications. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade. C. Floor Cleanouts (F.C.O.): All F.C.O. to have satin nickel bronze tops except as specified otherwise. 1. Schedule Floor Surface Josam Model & Accessory Numbers Slab on Grade or Over Crawl Spaces Upper Floor w/Occupied Spaces Below Finished Concrete Surface 57000-1 57000-1-41 Tiled Surface 57000-1-12 57000-1-12-41 Terrazzo Surface 57000-1 57000-1-41 Carpet 57000-1-14 57000-1-14-41 Heavy Wheel Load Traffic in Parking Structure and other exterior areas 57000-SD NA NA = Not Applicable 2. Provide modifications for spigot or no hub type connections for cleanouts specified above. D. Wall Cleanouts (WCO) 1. Provide at base of all sanitary and storm stacks. 2. For pipe spaces and walls without access: a. Josam 58910-19 E. Cleanout Plugs (CO) 1. For accessible pipe spaces and exposed sewer piping (end of main, heel, wyes, etc.) a. Josam 58540 plug with tapped spigot no hub or hub type. F. Grade Cleanout (GCO) 1. Provide cast iron riser to grade. 2. Josam #57000-SD 2.11 DRAIN FLASHINGS (no plan code) A. Provide 40 mil chlorinated polyethylene sheet. 2.12 SHELL & TUBE TYPE WATER HEATER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Patterson Kelly 2. A.O. Smith STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 3. ITT Bell and Gossett 4. Weben-Jarco B. Warranty: 3 year non-prorated full replacement warranty for shell, exchangers and components, 5 year non-prorated full replacement warranty for tanks and linings. C. Unit to be National Board Certified, ASME Certified and labeled. D. Capacity: As indicated on Drawings. E. Provide steel shell, 3/4" OD 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy tube, cast iron heads, copper tube sheets and supports. F. Provide Powers Regulator Co. double seated water control valve and self contained actuator, ASME code relief. Be responsible to insure all wiring is accomplished per manufacturers’ instructions and requirements. G. Provide 125 psi ASME labeled vertical steel, .01 inch max glass-lined storage tank with structural supports, tappings and flanges of sizes and at locations required, stratification baffles, 2 coats rust inhibiting primer and one coat heat resistant black epoxy enamel exterior finish. Tank shall be field insulated per Mechanical Insulation Section 15250. H. Provide 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy exchanger tube, cast iron heads, brass tube supports and tube sheets, steel welding collar, ASME code construction. 2.13 HOT WATER STORAGE TANK A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lochinvar 2. Weben-Jarco 3. Wessels 4. A.O. Smith 5. Adamson B. Provide an ASME certified and labeled and National Board Certified NSF approved glass lined, domestic hot water storage tank for 125 psig working pressure as indicated on the drawings. Tank manufacturer to provide tappings of sizes, type and locations required by the contract documents. C. Provide ASME temperature and Pressure relief valves, tank drain valve, and dielectric unions for all piping connections at tank. D. Factory paint tank with rust inhibitor primer and finish with two coats of heat resistant epoxy enamel. 2.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANK A. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Amtrol STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 2. State Industries 3. Wessels B. Furnish and install as shown on plans an ASME constructed, pre-charged hydropneumatic steel expansion tank. All internal wetted parts shall comply with FDA regulations and approvals. An internal butyl diaphragm shall be used to isolate air charge from water. 2.15 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Armstrong Pumps 2. Bell and Gossett 3. Taco 4. Paco B. Provide in-line type circulating pumps, all bronze construction, bronze face bracket, cast bronze one piece enclosed type impeller hydraulically and dynamically balanced, alloy steel shaft with cupro-nickel shaft sleeve, carbon/ceramic mechanical shaft seal, non metallic noiseless coupler, resilient mounted dry proof motor with sleeve bearings and over load protection. C. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. 2.16 SUMP PUMPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Weil Pump Company. 2. Federal Pump Corp. 3. Aurora/Hydromatic, Inc. 4. Metropolitan Pump Co. 5. Zoeller Pump Co. 6. Myers. 7. Paco. B. Description 1. Provide factory assembled and tested submersible sump pump unit complying with UL 778. Pumps shall be submersible, direct connected sump pump[s] complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sump pumps. a. Pump Arrangement: Duplex b. Casing: Cast iron with cast iron legs that elevate the pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick disconnect system discharge elbow fitting. c. Casing: Cast iron with cast iron legs that elevate the pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for plain- end pipe connection arranged for vertical discharge. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO d. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semi-open non-clog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft and secured locking cap screw. e. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory sealed, grease lubricated ball bearings. f. Seals: Double mechanical seals. g. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor start type; with built in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. h. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. i. Basin Cover: Refer to drawings. j. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following: (1) Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion resistant vertical pipes or structural members, attached to base plate and basin side wall. (2) Baseplate: Corrosion resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow. (3) Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or toher attachments for aligning pump during connection to flanges. (4) Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning device. (5) Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at manhole. k. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, wall mounted, with three mercury float switched in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump can not handle the load. l. High Water Alarm: Rod-mounted NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury float switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. C. Provide reinforced or precast concrete type 5 class II basin, with gas tight steel (gasketed) cover and grommeted cable openings. Provide a separate precast concrete basin for the check valve and gate valve assemblies. D. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. 2.17 SEWAGE EJECTORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Weil Pump Company. 2. Federal Pump Corp. 3. Aurora/Hydromatic, Inc. 4. Metropolitan Pump Co. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Description 1. Provide factory assembled and tested submersible sewage pump unit complying with UL 778. Pumps shall be submersible, direct connected sewage pump[s] complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps, include quick disconnect system. a. Pump Arrangement: Duplex b. Casing: Cast iron with cast iron legs that elevate the pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick disconnect system discharge elbow fitting. c. Casing: Cast iron with cast iron legs that elevate the pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for plain- end pipe connection arranged for vertical discharge. d. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semi-open non-clog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft and secured locking cap screw. e. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory sealed, grease lubricated ball bearings. f. Seals: Double mechanical seals. g. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor start type; with built in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. h. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. i. Basin Cover: Refer to drawings. j. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following: (1) Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion resistant vertical pipes or structural members, attached to base plate and basin side wall. (2) Baseplate: Corrosion resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow. (3) Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or toher attachments for aligning pump during connection to flanges. (4) Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning device. (5) Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at manhole. k. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, wall mounted, with three mercury float switched in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump can not handle the load. l. High Water Alarm: Rod-mounted NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury float switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO C. Provide reinforced or precast concrete type 5 class II basin, with gas tight steel (gasketed) cover and grommeted cable openings. Provide a separate precast concrete basin for the check valve and gate valve assemblies. D. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. 2.18 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Shock absorbers (Water Hammer Arrestors) (SA): 1. General: Provide shock absorbers of the sizes shown (coded) on the Drawings and in conformance with recommendations of P.D.I. (Plumbing Drainage Institute) Standard WH-201. 2. Manufacturer: Precision Plumbing Products, (PPP), Watts, Sioux Chief. 3. Schedule Drawing Code Size PDI Make Inlet/Outlet Size (inches) SA-1 A PPP ½ SA-2 B PPP ¾ SA-3 C PPP 1 SA-4 D PPP 1-1/4 SA-5 E PPP 1-1/2 SA-6 F PPP 2 B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: (RPBFP) 1. General: Provide reduced pressure backflow preventers approved by State Health Department and University of Southern California Foundations for Cross Contamination Control Research. Size unit for full line size, extend unit drains to floor drains with funnel below backflow preventer discharge. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Febco, Watts, Wilkins. 3. Schedule Drawing Code Pipe Size (inches) Make Model Funnel Part Number BFP-1 ¾ - 2 Febco 825 AGD-Y BFP-2 2-1/2 - 10 Febco 825 AGD-L C. Hose Bibbs (HB) 1. Provide in each mechanical equipment room and where indicated on plans, one polished chrome plated hose bibb with 3/4" hose and spout and integral vacuum breaker, lock shield and loose key. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Woodford 3. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. D. Sillcocks (SC) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 1. Furnish and install where shown on plans the following sillcocks. Sillcock, housing and vacuum breaker shall be chrome plated bronze finish. Vacuum breaker shall be permanently affixed to the sillcock so that it will become "non- removable" and vandal-proof. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Woodford 3. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. E. Vacuum Relief 1. Furnish and install on each water heater or storage tank a vacuum relief valve. Vacuum relief shall comply with ANSI Z21.22 and shall be AGA certified. The vacuum relief valve shall have an all brass body and include a protective cap. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts, Wilkins. F. Trap and Supplies Insulation 1. Provide on all lavatories in public restrooms or where ADA complying lavatory/sink fixtures as required, insulation on p-traps and supplies. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Truebro, Brocar, Proflo. 2.19 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish and install fixtures of the type and quantity as indicated and scheduled on the drawings. All fixtures, flush valves, and fixture trim shall be of the same manufacturer wherever possible. B. All exposed metal parts required for the fixture installation shall be provided with the finish matching the faucets or trim pieces, unless otherwise noted. This includes fixture connections, stops, supplies, "P" traps, etc. 1. Traps, Stops, Supplies, Airgaps, Drains: Kohler - Eljer - American Standard - Bridgeport - Brasscraft – Dearborn-Proflo. 2. Chair Carriers: Josam - J.R. Smith - Zurn - Wade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION A. Preparation: 1. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of fixture and equipment locations before proceeding with the Work. Obtain field measurements for work required. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements for precise rough-in, and connections of fixtures and equipment. 2. Clean surfaces of piping, leave ready for painting or identification as required. 3. All copper tube and fittings shall be reamed and buffed prior to soldering or brazing. 4. The use of 50-50 solder of any class, for joint makeup or back-up for finishing is prohibited. 5. Refer and conform to the Copper Development Association instructions for proper preparation and installation practice for all soldered and brazed joints. 6. Support water tube in accordance with Section 15050. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Installation: 1. Service: The domestic water service, water meter, required valves, etc., to be furnished and installed as required by Jurisdictional Water Company. 2. Run piping as direct as possible to required connections, and sloped to drain valves at low points for complete system drain-down. Locate drain valves at accessible points within the system. 3. Sleeve and caulk wall or floor penetrations of water services with non- hardening adhesive sealant compound. 4. Provide unions at connections to fixtures and equipment including valves when union trim is not furnished as a standard part of the equipment trim or where items cannot be removed from line without unions. 5. Provide adequate allowance for expansion, contraction and vibration in the piping system by isolation, looping and anchoring means. 6. Corzan and FlowGuard Gold pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the approved manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. PEX tubing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Sterilization: 1. Sterilization shall be in conformance with AWWA C651-92. 2. Sterilize potable water piping with a chlorine solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of the pipe volume. Chlorine shall consist of either liquid chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution. No gas chlorine will be permitted. 3. Maintain chlorine solution in the system for a period of not less than 24 hours, during which time open and close all valves and faucets at least 3 times. 4. After the sterilization period is completed, flush the entire system with potable water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 2 to 4 parts per million or equal to incoming water supply. 3.2 SANITARY, VENT & STORM A. Preparation 1. Field Measurements: Verify routing and dimensions, equipment and fixture connection locations before proceeding with the Work. Obtain field measurements for work required. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements for precise rough-in, and connections of fixtures, drains and equipment. B. Installation 1. Service: Make connections to public sanitary sewer as applicable and in accordance with rules and regulations of Jurisdictional utility company. 2. Provide bedding, restraints and hangers as appropriate and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations based upon type of pipe, fittings, joints, and bury depth using final finished grading as the basis. 3. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through the foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation water tight. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 4. Piping shall be run true, plumb, and straight, with all restraints and hangers adjusted to carry their proportional load and locked to prevent pipe "wag" misalignment, movement or shear. 5. Provide anchors for piping risers on every floor using riser clamps, wall brackets, knee brackets, and foot blocks for all vertical piping over 20 feet straight height. 6. Furnish and install all soil, waste and vent piping for the complete sanitary system in accordance with jurisdictional code requirements. 7. Furnish and install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in location indicated on drawings and as follows: a. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of Authorities having jurisdiction. b. Cast Iron Sovent: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. c. Shop Drawings shall be provided to the manufacturer for verifying the system design. Contractor to submit approved drawings to Architect/Engineer for review. 8. Install cast iron soil piping in accordance with CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook", Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings". 9. All soil and waste piping shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/4" per foot (2.08%) All storm piping 4" and over shall be run at a slope of not less than 1/8" (1.04%) per foot or as noted on drawings. 10. Tapped spigots or tees shall be used when changing from cast iron pipe to steel or copper waste or vent piping, and for appropriate cleanout plug. 11. The waste connections between fixtures and their respective collection and venting systems shall consist of galvanized steel nipples and cast iron drainage fittings. Copper pipe may be used for dirt arms at sinks, drinking fountains and lavatories only. Copper pipe may not be used for dirt arms at urinals. 12. All pipe and fittings shall have affixed thereon the CISPI grade mark of identification. 13. All vents shall be installed through the roof of at least the minimum size as required by jurisdictional code and shall be cast iron. Vents shall be secured rigidly to eliminate "wagging". 14. All vents protruding through the roof shall be extended to not less than 12 inches above the finished roof, and flashed per roofing manufacturer’s recommendation. 15. All vents thru roofs shall be installed a minimum of 20 feet from any air intake. 16. All vents shall be located in accordance with jurisdictional code and in no case less than two (2) feet from roof edge or parapet, or wall line of an "on the roof structure". Vents shall be installed to be a minimum of 20 feet from any air intake. 17. Provide all expansion joints, braces, earthquake restraints as required by the contract documents and jurisdictional authority. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 3.3 PLASTIC STORM DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Plastic piping shall be installed with caution towards expansion and contraction characteristics. The piping shall be free to flex and move without bindings. The pipe shall be securely anchored at the roof to prevent movement at the roof penetrations. B. Roof penetrations shall be made with self-sealing neoprene boots with flashing pans. C. Provide solvent weld joints. D. Support vertical piping from building structure with padded riser clamps. 3.4 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. Preparation 1. Field Measurements: Verify routing and dimensions, equipment and fixture connection locations before proceeding with the Work. Obtain field measurements for work required. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements for precise rough-in and connections of equipment. B. Installation 1. Install "tee" fitting with bottom outlet fitted with a line size 6" long nipple and capped at bottom of pipe risers or drops. 2. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together. 3. Remove cutting and threaded burrs before assembling piping. 4. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and to remain until continuation of piping or equipment connections are completed. 3.5 DRAINS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate placement with other trades and building structure for elimination of interference. B. Preparation 1. Field Measurements: Verify locations of equipment before proceeding with installation. Obtain measurements and be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting, rough-in and placement of finished work. C. Drain, strainer, and grate finishes shall be as specified, cover all finished surface surfaces during construction to prevent damage. D. Install drains with "P" pattern traps and vents as required. E. All drain bodies shall be plugged during construction to prevent foreign obstacles, dirt concrete etc. from entering the drain and drainage piping. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO F. Drains shall be set flush and level with finished surfaces, with grate pattern parallel or perpendicular to adjacent walls or floor patterns. G. Flash all drains on roofs, upper floors, and floor over crawl spaces with 24" x 24" minimum flashing pans. Shower pans shall be turned up in walls to a minimum of 6" above the shower receptor threshold. H. Clean and polish all drain bowls, rims, strainers, and grates prior to final inspection. 3.6 CLEANOUTS A. Provide cleanouts at 50 feet on center for all interior sanitary and storm piping, 100 feet on center for all exterior sanitary and storm piping or as required by jurisdictional code. B. Provide appropriate access tops for imposed construction. C. Coordinate interior floor cleanout locations with contractor for Division 3 - Concrete. D. Provide 24"x24" minimum flashing pans and clamp devices for all cleanouts located on upper floors or floors over crawl spaces. E. Clean and polish all cleanout access covers prior to final inspection. F. Cleanout access covers shall be flush and level with finished building surfaces. G. Install cleanout plugs on exposed or accessible piping. H. Provide wall cleanouts where piping is concealed in walls or non accessible chases, use tapped cleanout tee or tapped extension to within 4" of wall face. Do not use no- hub type blind plugs for wall cleanouts. I. Provide 12"x12"x8" thick 3000 lb. concrete pads for all grade cleanouts. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 3 - Concrete. Tops of pads to be 1" above finish grade and cleanout access flush and level and centered in pad surface. J. The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare Coordinated Floor Plans indicating all clean- out locations for coordination with the Architect and Owner. This shall be done prior to any installation or purchasing of access panels or covers. 3.7 DRAIN FLASHINGS (No Plan Code) A. All drains on upper floors or over crawl spaces shall be flashed with flashing extending a minimum of 12" beyond the drain top dimensions. B. Seams weld chlorinated polyethylene seams to be folded and shaped as required by the manufacture. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 3.8 SHELL (U) TUBE HEATER WITH TANK A. Allow for tube (coil) pull without destruction; keep all piping and other equipment clear of coil pull area. B. Provide dielectric connections to all units. C. Provide inlet and outlet pressure gauges on water, thermometers on unit inlet and outlet of hot water side and boiler water side. D. Units shall be set slightly out of level to provide for complete drain down thru drain valve to be provided at low point. E. Provide isolation valves to allow for complete unit or component removal without removal of connecting piping, locate valves adjacent and outside the union connections. F. Provide vacuum relief valve, vacuum breakers, expansion tank, hose and drain valve, mixing valve, blending chamber, shut off valves and dielectric connections. G. Coordinate all electric control and power required for solenoids, pumps, control valves and devices with Division 16 Contractor in accordance with Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. H. Coordinate insulation requirements with Contractor with Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation. 3.9 HOT WATER STORAGE OR ACCUMULATOR TANK A. Provide structural 2" dia schedule 40 black steel welded pipe stand with 2" pipe cross bracing, 6"x6"x1/8" steel leg support plates, 3" wide rolled steel (to tank diameter) saddles with 1/8" plate stiffeners, 3" wide x 1/4" thick neoprene pads between saddles and tank. B. Set stand level and absolutely plumb, slope tank slightly using saddles as shim mechanism, to drain valve at one end of tank to facilitate complete drain down. C. Provide unions and ball valves for complete isolation of the tank from the system. D. Provide relief valve with drain extension air gapped to appropriate receptacle, vacuum relief and expansion tank. E. Tank tappings shall be provided as detailed or appropriate, ASME welded tank flanges or nipples. F. Tank shall be installed on a 4” thick concrete housekeeping pad. 3.10 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Coordinate wall mounted "on-off" toggle switch and time clock for pump and electrical power requirements with Division 16 Contractor in accordance with Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO B. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings and accessories. C. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps. D. Suspend horizontal or vertical in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. 3.11 SUMP PUMPS AND SEWAGE EJECTORS A. Coordinate electrical power and control wiring, panel mounting and remote and local alarm systems wiring with Division 16 Contractor in accordance with Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. B. Provide sumps and basins level and plumb, all openings thru basin or cover to be gas tight, provide unions, valves and checks as appropriate. Note: pump discharge check valves to be non slam type, tilting disc or pilot operated 45 degree swing design. Lift type or spring operated types will not be allowed. C. Operating floats may be tied to discharge pipe and shall not swing free in basin. D. Provide pump power cords of sufficient length to junction box in basin and connect to power source above floor outside of basin area. E. Mount control panel and alarm panel, on walls secured tightly and permanently. 3.12 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Backflow Prevention Devices 1. Provide funnel one inch below backflow preventer discharge. Funnel to be supported from adjacent piping or building structure in an approved manner by means of angle iron, pipe clamps, Unistrut clamps, charge pipe from funnel as required and open site drain to floor drain. 2. Install clean and test assembly in place in accordance with the state of Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. B. Hose Bibbs or Sillcocks 1. Each hose bibb, hose valve or sillcock shall be installed with accessible ball valve or stop and drain valve in branch line ahead of outlet. 2. Anchor all sillcocks with anchor flange provided by the manufacturer. C. Vacuum Relief Valve 1. Each relief valve shall be installed in accordance the manufacture's instructions. D. Relief Valves STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO 1. Each relief valve shall be installed with a drain, full size of relief valve opening, piped to floor drain location. Open site drain to a floor drain or a service sink. 3.13 FIXTURES AND TRIM A. Examination: Examine the contract documents and provide all necessary attachments, accessories, support equipment and materials as necessary to fit allocated spaces. B. Field Measurements: Verify all dimensions and installation requirements so that work can be accurately fitted to other construction and in accordance with the intent of the contract documents. Be responsible for accuracy of measurements and adequate space requirements for the precise fitting and assembly of finished work. C. Provide fixture supplies and stops on every individual fixture or appliance. D. Stops shall be quarter turn compression by compression types with flexible straight copper tube risers, loose key, screw driver or wheel handle stops. Stems shall be brass. Provide one key per fixture for all loose key (L.K.) stops. E. All components, stops, risers, inlet pipe and escutcheon shall be chrome plated brass, polished stainless steel, or special finish as specified for fixture trim. F. Flush valves, supplies and stops shall be anchored rigidly behind walls, eliminating push or pull movement. G. All wall and floor mounted fixtures shall be caulked with a non-hardening white or fixture color match for colored fixtures adhesive elastomeric sealant compound providing a watertight seal at the joint with the walls or floor. H. Adjustment: Adjust all flush valves, faucets, metering devices, shower heads, gas, air and vacuum cocks, and bubblers for proper flow and action after flushing operations are accomplished. I. Cleaning: Clean all fixtures, trim, accessories and attachments including strainers, traps, aerators, and valves. 3.14 TESTING A. Schedule of Plumbing Pipe System Testing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 23 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO Plumbing Pipe System Allowable Test Methods Minimum Test Pressure (psig) Minimum Test Period (minutes) Allowable Pressure Variance (psig) H20 CA* Potable water Pipe Valves & Fittings Yes Yes 125 60 0 Sanitary Storm & Vent System Yes Yes 5 60 ±1/2 Natural Gas Threaded Pipe No Yes 10 180 0 Natural Gas Welded Pipe and systems carrying pressures greater than 6” water column No Yes 60 180 0 H20 = Water (hydrostatic test). CA = Oil-Free Compressed Air. * Note: PVC piping shall not be air tested. B. In the event that tests fail, use a standard soap and brush inspection under line pressure. After source of failure is discovered, correct and retest system. Repeat procedure until system sustains required testing successfully. C. Verification of tests shall be made by the General Superintendent or the Construction Manager. The witness shall sign the required test form. D. All joints, valves, fittings and piping necessary items shall be exposed to view during tests whether pipe is above or below ground. "Closed in" or "Buried" piping shall be re-exposed during testing. E. Proper restraining of piping and test plugs shall be accomplished prior to test. F. Test Records: Record pressure and ambient temperature at start and end of test. Submit written results of test to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 15400 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 24 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15500 - HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following materials and methods common to HVAC piping and pumps: 1. Air Separators. 2. Air and Dirt Separators. 3. Expansion Tanks. 4. Air Vents. 5. Non-Electric Thermostatic Valves. 6. Hydronic Water Piping. 7. Grooved Piping. 8. Pumps. 9. HVAC Chemical Treatment 10. Temporary Heating. 11. Engine Exhaust Piping. 12. Equipment Drains and Overflows. 13. Underground Piping Systems. 14. Testing. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15500 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of work. Review Sections 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods for Work not specified in this Section. 1.3 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS: A. Two-way automatic control valves. B. Three-way automatic control valves. C. Aquastats. D. Condenser water bypass valve. E. Flow switches in the chilled and condenser water piping. F. Engine generator exhaust silencer. G. Automatic insertion-type flow indicators. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by an NCPWB Certified Welder with current certificate in accordance with ANSI B31.9 for shop and project site welding of piping work. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Service Piping" for materials, products and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, NDPWB, MSS, OSHA and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Hydronic Specialties. 2. All pipe. 3. All pumps and pump packages. 4. HVAC Chemical Treatment. 5. Test Reports. 6. Certificates. B. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports for the following showing compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Piping pressure test. C. Certificates: Before proceeding with the Work, submit to the Engineer, two copies of Certification that the welding work will be done according to ANSI B31.1 by welders who have been tested and whose qualifications test sheets are available, attesting to their ability to weld in accordance with Standard Procedure Specifications as established by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and form-work requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping specified in Division 7 for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following items in accordance with Division 1and Section 15010: 1. All pumps and pump packages. 2. HVAC chemical treatment. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate steps to correct problems in timely fashion to meet the project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide sufficient chemicals to maintain specified concentrations in HVAC Piping Systems during the two-year warranty period. B. Provide one additional mechanical seal for each pump. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR AND DIRT SEPARATORS A. Tank Type (Piping systems 2" and larger) 1. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Taco, Spirotherm, Caleffi. 2. Provide air and dirt separators of size and capacity indicated on Drawings, non-tangential design. 3. Operating temperature range of 35°F through 250°F with capability to accommodate up to 50% glycol concentration. 4. Housing shall be steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for operating pressure indicated on drawings. 5. Inlet and outlet connections as appropriate to the piping system and be located on the housing to provide an upper section for air removal and lower section for dirt removal. 6. Inside the housing provide a bundle of non-degrading material compatible with the fluid temperatures and chemical content to act as a coalescing air eliminator and dirt separator. 7. Upper portion of housing shall be constructed to form an air collection chamber to ease the removal of accumulated gases. 8. On top of the housing, provide a removable automatic air vent assembly to routinely remove gases purged from the moving fluid. 9. Provide manual air relief valve to aid in the quick release of air during fill and drain cycles. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 10. Bottom of housing shall be provided with blowdown connection to facilitate routine removal of accumulated material from bottom of the unit. 11. Units to be provided with National Board Inspection. 12. Provide manual valves upstream and downstream for periodic shutdown for maintenance. 13. Where indicated on drawings, provide flanged housing to permit disassembly of internal components. Provide accommodation in mounting and clearance to facilitate the complete removal of the components. 2.2 EXPANSION TANKS A. Bladder-Type, Precharged 1. ASME stamped for 125 PSI working pressure. Each tank will be supplied with a heavy duty butyl replaceable bladder. Tank shall be supplied with a ring base, lifting rings and NPT system connection. An air charging valve (standard tire valve) shall be provided to facilitate adjusting precharge pressure to meet actual system conditions. 2. Materials of Construction a. Shell: Steel b. Bladder: Material to be compatible with hydronic system chemicals and glycol type used. Coordinate with Division 15 Contractor. c. Designed Constructed and Stamped per ASME Section VIII 3. Maximum Operating Conditions: Working Temperature 240°F 4. Capacity and size as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical section of 2" diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/4" copper tubing to a petcock, 125 psig minimum operating pressure. B. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts, 150 psig, 225°F manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew with NPS 1/8" discharge connection and NPS 1/2" inlet connection. C. Automatic: Cast iron body and cover, stainless steel bolts and nuts, bronze pilot mechanism, 3/4" NPT inlet, minimum 3/8" NPT outlet, up to 250°F working temperature and up to 150 psi working pressure. 2.4 HEATING, CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING A. Steel, Welded and Threaded 1. Pipe, 2" & Smaller: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black buttweld or continuous welded steel. 2. Pipe, 2-1/2" & Larger: ASTM A53, Grade A or B, Schedule 40 black seamless steel. 3. Fittings, 2" & Smaller: ASTM A197, 150 pound black malleable iron screwed. 4. Fittings, 2-1/2" & Larger: ASTM A234, Schedule 40 weld fittings. 5. Unions: Refer to Section 15050. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Gaskets, All Sizes: 150 pound 1/16 inch full faced-punched, material and type suitable for fluid to be handled at design temperatures and pressure. 7. Bolting: ASTM A307, Grade B, regular square head machine bolts with heavy hex nuts. 8. Flanges, All Sizes: ASTM A181, Grade 1, 150 pound slip-on or weld neck flat faced. B. Copper, 2" and less 1. Tube sizes up through 2" to be ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 2. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 3. Joints: ANSI/ASME B32 solder Grade 95TA. 2.5 ENGINE EXHAUST PIPING A. Steel, Welded and Threaded 1. Pipe, 2-1/2" & Larger: ASTM A53, Grade A or B, Schedule 40 black seamless steel. 2. Fittings, 2-1/2" & Larger: ASTM A234, Schedule 40 weld fittings. 3. Bolting: ASTM A307, Grade B, regular square head machine bolts with heavy hex nuts. 4. Flanges, All Sizes: ASTM A181, Grade 1, 150 pound slip-on or weld neck flat faced. 2.6 GROOVED STEEL PIPING SYSTEM A. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Victaulic, Gruvlock/Anvil. B. Heating, chilled and condenser water piping above grade may be constructed using mechanical grooved pipe couplings, fittings and butterfly valves. C. When this system is used, all components shall be obtained from a single manufacturer. Mixing of components from different manufacturers shall not be permitted, and if such occurs, the contractor shall replace the system to meet the single manufacturer requirement without additional cost or time penalties to the project and its completion schedule. D. Heating, chilled and condenser water piping includes risers, mains, equipment connections, branches, supply and return lines under operating conditions not exceeding -20°F to +200°F. 1. Pipe, 2" & Smaller: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black buttweld or continuous welded steel, square cut grooved to coupling manufacturer's specification, standard weight steel pipe. 2. Pipe, 2-1/2" & Larger: ASTM A53, Grade A or B, Schedule 40 black seamless steel, square cut grooved to coupling manufacturer's specification, standard weight steel pipe. 3. Grooved piping 2" and smaller shall not be permitted. 4. Couplings: Line and fitting joints to be Victaulic Style 75 or 77 with Grade "E" gaskets and plated nuts and bolts. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. "Rigid" line fitting and valve joints to be Victaulic Style HP-07 Couplings with Grade"E" gaskets and plated nuts and bolts. 6. Joints designated Outlet Couplings to be plated Victaulic Style 72 or 72-BFV with Grade "E" gaskets and plated nuts and bolts. 7. Joints designated Reducing Couplings to be Victaulic Style 750 with Grade "E" gaskets and standard nuts and bolts. 8. Flanged components connections to be Victaulic Style 741 and 742 Vic-Flanges with Grade "E" gaskets. 9. Fittings: Victaulic "Full Flow" malleable iron or ductile iron or segmental welded fittings with grooved or shouldered ends. 10. Valves: Butterfly valves 6" and smaller to be Victaulic Series 700 or 300 with latch-lock throttling handles, Grade "E" linings and standard trim. Buttrefly valves 8" and larger - Style 300 or 709. 2.7 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. 3/4" thru 3": Copper tube, ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn, ANSI/ASME B16.29 wrought copper fittings, ANSI/ASME B32 solder Grade 95TA. B. 4" and Larger: Steel, ASTM A53, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, black seamless with ASTM A234 Schedule 40 weld fittings. 2.8 HYDRONIC PUMPS A. Horizontal In-line Centrifugal Pump 1. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, Paco, Allis-Chalmers, Aurora. 2. Pumps shall be selected for quiet operation. Pump curve shall be submitted for review, capacities and model number as shown on Drawings. 3. Motor to be non-overloading throughout the range of the pump curve and in accordance with Section 15050 Motor Requirements. 4. Pump shaft shall be alloy steel, and shall have bronze sleeve-type bearings. Pump seal shall be of the mechanical type. 5. Impeller shall be cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced. B. Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pump 1. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, Paco, Aurora, Allis-Chalmers. 2. Provide pumps of the sizes and capacities indicated on Drawings. Pumps to be of the in-line type, close-coupled, designed for installations having a vertical shaft orientation, and be capable of servicing without disturbing piping connections. 3. Pumps casing to be of Class 30 cast iron. Impeller to be cast bronze, enclosing type, statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and secured by locking capscrew. 4. Liquid cavity shall be sealed off at motor shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal having a ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225°F. A bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal with a ground and polished stainless steel shaft. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Pumps to be rated for minimum 175 psi working pressure. Casing shall have gauge tappings at suction and discharge nozzles and shall have vent and drain ports. Volute housing shall have a recessed cup for pipe stand mounting. 6. Motor shall be non-overloading throughout range of pump curve and be in accordance with Section 15050 motor requirements. Motor shall be directly mounted to pump casing with lifting and supporting lugs in top of motor enclosure. 7. Motors served by variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be manufactured for use with VFDs. Coordinate with Division 15 Subcontractor providing the VFDs. 8. Each pump shall be factory tested, thoroughly cleaned and painted with a minimum one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. C. End-Suction Centrifugal, Flexible Coupled Pump 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, Paco, Allis- Chalmers, Aurora. 2. Provide pumps and motors of sizes and capacities scheduled on Drawings. Pump manufacturer to check suction condition on pumps, and provide pumps suitable for operation at proper net pump suction head (NPSH). Pump shall be rated for 175 psig minimum working pressure and 225°F. 3. The pumps shall be single stage, end suction, vertical split case design, in cast iron and bronze fitting constructed. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections or motors. 4. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, cast bronze, dynamically balanced and keyed to the shaft and secured with a suitable locknut. 5. Pump seal shall be standard single mechanical seal with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. 6. A replaceable shaft sleeve shall be furnished to cover the wetted area of the shaft under the seal or packing. Shaft shall be steel with bronze sleeve. 7. The bearing frame assembly of the pump shall be fitted with regreaseable ball bearings equivalent to electric motor bearing standards for quiet operation. 8. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common baseplate of heavy structural steel design with securely welded cross members and open grouting area. A flexible coupler, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor, and it shall be equipped with a suitable coupling guard as required. 9. The pump shall be factory tested, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. A set of installation instruction shall be included with the pump at the time. 10. Motor to be non-overloading throughout the range of the pump curve and in accordance with Section 15050 motor requirements. 11. Motors served by variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be manufactured for use with VFDs. Coordinate with Division 15 Subcontractor providing the VFDs. D. System Lubricated Circulators, 1/10 hp and smaller 1. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Bell & Gossett, Taco, Grundfos. 2. Provide pumps of the sizes and capacities indicated on Drawings. 3. Pumps shall be of the size and capacity indicated on Drawings and be suitable for 225°F operation at 125 psig and have a hardened stainless steel HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 shaft. Bearings to be lubricated by the circulated fluid. Bearings and rotor shall be protected from system contamination by a ring seal. Rotor to be sheathed in stainless steel and protected from contact with circulating fluid. Hollow pump shaft to permit rear seal lubrication after filtering. 4. Motor shall be non-overloading through pump curve. 5. Pump body to be bronze. Impeller to be synthetic E. Pump Specialties 1. Suction Diffuser: Cast or ductile iron body to match piping system, 175 psig working pressure, stainless steel diffuser/orifice cylinder having 3/16" perforations, full length stainless steel straightening vanes, in-stream magnet for pump seal protection, start-up strainer of 16 mesh bronze, adjustable foot support. 2. Triple Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 psig pressure rating, cast iron body, pump discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze fitted shut off, balancing and check valve features. 2.9 HVAC CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. General 1. Qualifications: The water treatment contractor shall be a firm which has been regularly engaged in the manufacture and assembly of water treatment formulations and equipment systems for a period of at least five years. 2. The chemical manufacturer shall provide supervision and service for all phases of water treatment as follows: a. Field supervision for the installation of all equipment systems and for the initial charging of each system with chemicals as called for. b. Complete start-up service to acquaint owner's operating personnel with the operation and adjustment of each equipment system, care and handling of treatment chemicals, and water test control procedures. c. Complete water analyses to be conducted on the owner's premises at the time of each service call with a written report of the findings to be left with the owner and a copy of such report to be forwarded to the consulting engineer. 3. Supplies: All items of water treatment equipment specified in this section are available to any bona fide manufacturer or supplier of water treatment chemicals. There shall be no deviation from or substitution of the specified items. All materials specified in this section shall be provided by a single water treatment firm. Provide chemicals as hereinafter specified for cleaning and for the control of scale, corrosion, and microbiological growths in all water-using systems. The quantity of chemicals furnished shall be sufficient to develop desired treatment levels in all systems from the time of start-up until acceptance by the Owner. 4. Waste Water Standards: Discharges from any chemically treated system to storm or sanitary sewers shall not result in contaminant levels which are in excess of standards as set forth by appropriate water pollution control authorities. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Materials 1. Chemicals shall be suitable to local conditions and be approved by local health and building officials. 2. System Cleaner a. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products. b. Algaecide 3. Inhibited Propylene Glycol a. DowFrost HD or equivalent for systems with concentrations of 30% or less. Reserve alkalinity of 19 minimum. b. DowFrost or equivalent for systems with concentrations of 31% or greater. c. Propylene glycol to be industrially inhibited (phosphate-based). d. When installed in water systems containing more than 250 gallons of glycol, the glycol manufacturer shall provide an annual water/glycol analysis free of charge. e. Glycol shall pass ASTM D1384. 4. Closed System Treatment (Water): a. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH. b. Corrosion inhibitors, non-chromate. c. Conductivity enhancers 5. Condenser Water System Treatment (Cooling Towers): a. Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling b. Acid to reduce alkalinity and pH c. Corrosion inhibitor d. Algaecide C. Equipment 1. By-pass (Pot) Feeder a. Five gallon, quick opening cap, for working pressure of 175 psig minimum. Provide filter feeder (5 micron) to remove suspended matter. Provide air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shut off valves on sides. 2. Solution Metering Pump a. Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic construction, continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and built-in relief valve. 3. Solution Tanks a. Fifty gallon capacity, polyethylene, self-supporting, one five gallon graduated markings; molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid level switch. 4. Conductivity Controller a. Packaged monitor controller with solid state circuiting, five percent accuracy, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control function light, output to control circuit. 5. Water Meter a. Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse contact register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch. 6. Solenoid Valves HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. Forged brass body globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, explosion proof and watertight solenoid enclosure, and continuous duty coil. 7. Brass Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends and PTFE seats and seals. 8. Brass Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable strainer-steel strainer cleanout. 2.10 HEATING WATER MAKE-UP WATER SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Sage Ind., Inc. or acceptable equal. B. Provide Glycol Feed system as shown on the drawings (one for each system) shall consist of a 55 gallon polyethylene tank with a removable polyethylene tank cover. A 12" suction and under drain system, with hose bibb, for draining the tank, and a pump shut-off valve. The tank shall be supported by four steel legs with foot pads and the pump mounted under, for positive suction, as an integral part of the tank. C. The control cabinet shall be NEMA 4X fiberglass box. The following components shall be mounted on the inside panel: Low liquid level alarm light, low liquid level alarm silencer switch, pump test switch, and pump operating, indicating light. A 0-60 psi system pressure gauge, an adjustable drum low level sensor shall prevent the positive displacement pump from operating when the tank liquid level is low and shall also audibly sound an alarm when tank level warning alarm. A 3-35 psi adjustable pressure switch shall control the system pressure. D. The pump shall be an Oberdorfer, all bronze, rotary gear pump with a 1/3 HP 1725 rpm motor mounted integrally with the pump. The pump shall be designed to produce 1.8 gpm at 40 psig. Electrical characteristic: 120V/60HZ/1 phase/1/3 HP. E. The Glycol Feeder discharge shall consist of a 3/4" check valve, 3/4" threaded female "T", for connecting the Glycol Feeder to the system piping, and a Watts pressure relief valve set at 50 psig, which will dump any closed system over pressure, back into the Glycol Mixing Tank. F. Provide a Hand-Operated Rotary Transfer pump equal to Wetcorp Model WC-551031 with 8 feet of 1 inch hose and a non-sparking 3/4" nozzle for the transferring of glycol from the glycol container to the glycol feed tank. The pump shall have a 1 inch suction pipe, and bung adapter with 2 inch thread. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE WORKMANSHIP A. Piping shown on the drawings shall be installed complete, and shall be of the size shown on the drawings. When size is not indicated, the sub-contractor shall request the pipe size from the Architect/Engineer through the General Contractor. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building construction. All piping shall be installed so as to allow for expansion. Install saddles and shields per Section 15050. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.2 PIPING JOINTS A. All pipe shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread and an approved compound applied to the male thread only. Welded joints shall be made in accordance with the procedure outlined in National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or by other reputable testing laboratory or agency. Subcontractor shall use only "Threadolet" or "Weldolet" fittings for intersection welding of branches to mains or Victaulic Style 970-921 mechanical tee. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or flanged joints. No bushings allowed. 3.3 ENGINE EXHAUST PIPING A. Provide exhaust piping as indicated on drawings for emergency generator installations. B. Piping shall be required from the engine exhaust outlet to the exhaust silencer and from the silencer to the subsequent venting system or termination out of the building. C. Coordinate with generator supplier to obtain required flexible connectors including those supplied as part of the standard generator package and others as may be required by the installation shown on the drawings. D. Coordinate with Section 15250 – Mechanical Insulation for insulation and covering on exposed piping. E. Coordinate with Section 15880 – Air Distribution for pressurized venting system interface and connections. 3.4 EXPANSION JOINTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. Refer to Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods for specification on expansion joints, anchors and guides. B. Pipe anchors shall be installed as shown and at the closest feasible point to all changes in pipe direction and elevation and at main branch take-offs, except at expansion loops. All piping shall be supported, anchored, braced and guided to control expansion-contraction and pipe movement due to pressure or shock, and to result in quiet operation. 3.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Install automatic control valves as required and specified in Section 15975. 3.6 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Provide condensate drain lines from each cooling coil, evaporative drain pan and secondary drain pan to drain or termination indicated. B. Provide 3/4" Type M copper drain pipe to nearest floor drain from drain tray of ductwork downstream of each duct mounted humidifier. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.7 AIR VENTS A. At all changes in elevation downward in direction of flow at heat transfer coils, and where shown, provide a manual air vent as follows: install a full size air chamber and pipe down with 1/4" copper tubing at a petcock. If the vent is above a ceiling, install the petcock just above the ceiling. Provide air vent fittings (manual) on hydronic coils. B. Automatic air vents on air separators shall be provided with a shut-off valve between vent and separator. Pipe air relief full size to nearest floor drain. 3.8 PIPING CONNECTORS A. Install flexible pipe connectors at equipment coils and pumps and elsewhere as required to accommodate misalignment and vibration in accordance with Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control. 3.9 AIR AND DIRT SEPARATORS A. Install combination air and dirt separator in pump suction line supporting separator from structure either by hanging or base-mounting as recommended by manufacturer installation instructions. B. Install air-side quick relief piping to nearest floor drain. Provide ball valve in piping if none is supplied by separator manufacturer. C. Install piping from automatic air vent and route to nearest floor drain D. Install dirt-side blowdown piping with ball valve and extend to nearest drain. 3.10 FLOW SWITCHES A. Contractor shall furnish and install flow switches for mounting in piping where indicated on Drawings and at the chilled water and condenser water piping of each chiller machine. Flow switches shall be mounted in horizontal run at least five diameters downstream from bender tee. 3.11 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES A. Contractor shall furnish and install adjustable, indicating type, mercury filled thermometers of the separable socket adjustable type in glass faced metal cases. Refer to Section 15050. They shall be placed in the piping adjacent to the machine in the following locations: 1. Entering and leaving water lines of all heat exchanging devices such as chillers, boilers, heat exchangers, cooling towers, water heaters, etc. 3.12 PIPE SYSTEM TESTING A. General: Provide test pump, gauges, meters, other instruments, materials and labor, in connection with tests. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Pressure Tests: Before testing piping systems, remove or otherwise protect from damage, control devices, air vents and other parts which are not designed to stand pressure used in testing piping. C. Hydrostatic Pressure: Test hydronically, piping for all services (except pneumatic system compressed air) to 125 psi for at least six consecutive hours, during which time pressure shall remain constant without pumping. Subject welded joints to the hammer test, and copper joints to soap suds while under hydrostatic pressure. 3.13 HEATING SYSTEM USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Permanent heating system shall not be used until building is totally and permanently enclosed (no temporary barriers for weather protection), and source of heat supply is permanently installed. B. Once the heating system has been placed into operation, it shall not be shut down except for moderate weather, and all heated areas shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 50°F for 24 hours a day. C. When any air-handling equipment is used for temporary heat, the filters shall be installed and maintained. Before building acceptance by Owner, these units shall be thoroughly cleaned and new or cleaned filters shall be installed. This is over and above the set of filters to be provided the Owner as called for in the specifications. Coils shall be cleaned, if necessary, as determined by the Engineer. D. Any and all systems being used for temporary heat shall become the Contractor's responsibility to maintain, and be put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner. E. Any guarantees that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be personally extended by the contracting firm holding the prime contract for construction, so that the Owner will have his one-year guarantee from date of acceptance. 3.14 IN-LINE TYPE WATER PUMPS A. Each pump shall be installed dead level, and shall not touch nor rest on any part of the building structure. B. Electrical connection to each pump shall be made through the use of flexible conduit at least 18" long. C. Each pump shall be so installed that pump can be completely removed without dismantling or removal of any piping or valves. No additional motor support will be allowed. D. Motor and coupling shall be checked and properly aligned in strict accord with manufacturer's instructions. E. Adjacent piping shall be carefully fitted and erected so that pump can be installed or removed from pipe line without forcing or springing. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. After system has been completed and pump started, each pump and system shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise, and any such noise or vibration shall be immediately corrected. 3.15 BASE MOUNTED CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Valves and fittings in piping to pumps to be full line size with reductions made directly to pump suction (eccentric reducer) and discharge (concentric increaser). B. Pumps and motors to be leveled and aligned on bases and foundation pads in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and within their recommended tolerances using an indicating micrometer. This is to be done before any piping or electrical connections are made. After connections have been made and just prior to placing each pump in operation, recheck levels and alignments. Make adjustments to assure that the thrust is balanced, that shaft rotates freely when turned by hand, and that pump is quietly in operation. When adjustments are completed, tightly bolt and grout motor and pump. 3.16 PUMP SPECIALTIES A. Provide suction diffusers on each base-mounted pump and as indicated on drawings. Remove strainer and clean after pipe system cleaning and thirty days after subsequent start-up. 3.17 WATER COUPON RACK A. Provide serpentine series of 3/4" pipe elbows and nipples (8" minimum length) with four capped tees to hold corrosion coupons specified in HVAC Chemical Treatment. Provide in series a flow control fitting for 3 to 5 gallons per minute and shut-off valves. B. Pipe in parallel with the water system to be monitored in accordance with piping diagram and instructions provided by HVAC Chemical Treatment Contractor. C. Provide coupon racks for all hydronic systems. 3.18 HVAC CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Provide valved tees, piping and threadolets for water treatment apparatus in accordance with HVAC Chemical Treatment Contractor instructions. Size as required, 3/4" minimum. B. Preparation: System shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. C. Cleaning Sequence 1. Chemical treatment manufacturer shall supervise cleaning or system. 2. Add cleaner to closed systems at concentration recommended by manufacturer. 3. Hot Water Heating Systems: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160°F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. Remove heat and HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 circulate to 100°F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. 4. Chilled Water Systems: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. 5. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer. 6. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill. 7. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. 8. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required. 9. Clean strainers in all piping systems. D. Closed System Treatment (Heating Water, Chilled Water, Glycol) 1. Provide one filter feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise. 2. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. Provide water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for four test specimens. 3. Provide sufficient inhibited propylene glycol, DowFrost or equivalent, to achieve the following solution concentrations. System Type Solution Concen- tration Freeze Protect Limit Burst Protection Limit Pressure Drop Correction Flow Rate Correction Heating Water 25% 1°F -30°F N/A* N/A* Snowmelt 50% -35ºF -60ºF 1.25 1.15 Chilled Water, Some Exterior 25% 1°F -30°F 1.3 1.1 * Water temperature 160°F or greater. E. Condenser Water Systems (Cooling Towers 100 tons and greater capacity) 1. Provide automatic condenser water control systems for inhibitor feed, blowdown and biocide feeds. Inhibitor application shall be meter activated, blowdown shall be conductivity activated, and biocide shall be meter fed with blowdown locked out to ensure biocide retention time. 2. Control system shall incorporate solid state integrated circuits and digital LED displays, in NEMA-12 steel enclosure. Provide gasketed and lockable door. 3. Base dissolved solids control on conductivity and include: a. LED digital readout display (micro-ohm/cm). b. Temperature compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold. c. High, low, normal conductance indicator light (flash or steady). d. High or low conductance alarm light (flash or steady switch), trip points field adjustable. Flash or steady switch shall have silence position. HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 e. Illuminated legend shall indicated "ALARM" whenever alarm condition exists. f. Hand-off-automatic switch for solenoid bleed valve. g. Illuminated legend shall indicate "BLEED" when valve is operated. h. Adjustable hysteresis or dead-band (internal). 4. Base inhibitor feed control on make-up volume and include: a. Solid state counter (1-15 field selectable). b. Solid state timer (adjustable 1/4 to 5 minutes). c. Test switch. d. Hand-off-Automatic switch for chemical pump. e. Illuminated legend shall indicated "FEED" when pump is activated. f. Solid state lock-out timer (adjustable 1/4 to 3 hours) and indicator light. Lock-out timer shall deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits. g. Panel totalizer (amount of makeup), electro-mechanical type. 5. Biocide programmer to include: a. 24 hours timer with 14 day skip feature to permit activation of any hour of the day. b. Precision solid state bleed lock-out timer (0-9 hours) and biocide pump timer (0 - 2-1/4 hours), clock controlled. c. Solid state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations. d. Digital display of the time of day (24 hours). e. LED display of day of week (14 days). f. Fast and slow clock set controls (internal). g. Battery back-up so clock is not disturbed by power outages, quartz timekeeping accuracy. h. Hand-off-automatic switches for biocide pumps. i. Illuminated legend shall indicate "BIOCIDE A" or "BIOCIDE B" when pump is activated. 6. Provide water meter on system make-up, wired to controls system. 7. Provide solution pumps to feed sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor from solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Provide agitator as required. 8. Provide conductivity controller to sample condenser water and operate solenoid bleed valve and piping to blowdown controller sampler wired to open when condensing water pump is operating. 9. Provide 3/4" water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for four test specimens. 10. Provide test kit. END OF SECTION 15500 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15500 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15550 - BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes, but is not limited to furnishing and installing the following: 1. Hot Water Steel Water Tube Boilers, Gas-Fired (Atmospheric/Forced Draft). 2. Boiler Start-up and Test Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15550 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by an ASME Certified Welder with current certificate in accordance with ANSI B31.1 for shop and project site welding of piping work. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: B. Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) codes as applicable for welding requirements. C. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI B31.1) Code for Pressure Piping. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop Drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1: 1. All boilers and associated equipment. B. Test Reports: Submit certified Test Reports for the following showing compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Boiler start-up tests. BOILERS 15550 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Thermal efficiency tests. C. Certificates: Before proceeding with the Work, submit to the Architect two copies of Certification that the welding work will be done according to ANSI B31.1 by welders who have been tested and whose qualification test sheets are available, attesting to their ability to weld in accordance with Standard Procedure Specifications as established by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. 1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the Operation and Maintenance Paragraph in Section 15010: 1. All boilers and associated equipment. 1.7 CSD-1 COMPLIANCE A. As a minimum, all automatically fired boilers shall be provided with controls and safety devices in accordance with ANSI/ASME CSD-1. Other more stringent conditions may be required by the individual boiler specifications and information provided on the Drawings. Section 15550 Contractor shall meet all requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOT WATER STEEL WATER TUBE BOILERS FORCED DRAFT A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Bryan, Rite. (Buderus Cast Iron is an acceptable alternate). B. Type: Forced Draft Steel Water Tube Boiler. Factory assembled and tested. Non- condensing design to operate at 80% efficiency. C. Construction 1. Tube bundle to consist of steel tubes supported by steel frame with provisions for thermal expansion. Headers to be 5/8" pressure vessel steel. Optional copper tubes, 2" O.D. 13 gauge with magnesium anode rods for direct water heating. 2. Tube bundle assembly shall be multiple pass design and free floating to prevent thermal shock damage. 3. Head gaskets to be full face fabric reinforced neoprene, 3/16" thick. 4. Boiler shall be complete with factory assembled and insulated jacket fabricated with minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. D. Pressure rating: Boiler shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME Heating Boiler Code Section IV, for 125 psi working pressure at 250°F. Vessel shall be ASME National Board stamped. E. Burner, Forced Draft 1. U.L. listed forced draft automatic burner for operation with ANSI Catgeory III pressurized vent stack. BOILERS 15550 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Burner to be designed to burn natural gas. 3. Electronic supervised spark ignition. 4. Burner operation to be modulating firing. 5. Burner safety controls: a. Electric safety controls to be U.L. and AGA design certified. b. Scanner or ultraviolet flame detector. c. Air flow switch. d. Boiler/burner unit startup to be performed by factory authorized agent only. F. Fuel 1. Natural gas 830 BTU/CF @ 8,000 ft. elevation Inlet gas pressure to burner to be 4" to 14" W.C. G. Boiler Controls and Trim 1. ASME CSD-1a compliance. 2. Operating control. 3. Hi-limit control with manual reset. 4. Low water cutoff (manual reset and test switch as required). 5. Electronic supervised spark ignition. 6. ASME pressure relief valve set at 75 psi. 7. Combination temperature/pressure gauge. 8. Built-in air elimination. 9. (Forced draft only): Control panel with indicating lights. H. Gas Train 1. U.L. listed gas train completely factory assembled and in compliance with ASME CSD-1a. 2. Main and pilot gas shutoff valves. 3. Main gas pressure regulator. 4. Main gas valve. 5. Auxiliary gas valve. 6. Low and high gas pressure switches above 2500 MBH. I. Warranty 1. Boiler to be guaranteed to operate at a minimum fuel to water efficiency of 80%. 2. Pressure vessel to have 20-year warranty from damage to thermal shock. 2.2 BOILER START-UP AND TEST REQUIREMENTS A. At a time requested by Division 15 Contractor, the boiler representative shall adjust and start boiler. Three, typewritten copies of the starting report shall be sent to the Architect/Engineer prior to final inspection for insertion into the O&M manuals, submitting a fourth copy directly to the Engineer, and shall include the following information for each boiler. 1. Temperature and pressure settings of the boiler. BOILERS 15550 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Heating system water pressures, cold and hot. 3. Gas pressure setting. 4. Gas volume being burned. 5. Percent CO2 and CO. B. A component and integrated check shall be made of all controls. Factory tests do not substitute for this test. A foreman or superintendent of the Installing Division 15 Contractor familiar with the system shall also be present and witness this test. C. Thermal efficiency shall be 80% minimum with CO2 at 9% minimum. Presence of CO in flue gas or high stack temperature will require corrective action by the Contractor. D. Contractor shall request and obtain inspection and written approval of the installation by the State Division of Labor prior to building occupancy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Pertinent details of the design Engineer's plan shall be combined with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide adequate space as required by manufacturer for servicing including tube removal and replacement. B. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. C. Vibration Isolation: Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements shall be per Section 15240. 3.2 BOILER VENTING A. Boilers shall be vented in accordance with Section 15880 - Air Distribution and Sheet Metal. 3.3 BOILER WIRING A. All electric wiring for control of boiler operation to be furnished and installed by Division 15 Contractor. All wiring to be heat and moisture resistant, minimum 105°C. 3.4 START-UP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, inspect, and adjust boiler components and equipment installation and to perform startup service. B. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. BOILERS 15550 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion. E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency. G. Adjust initial temperature set points. H. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. I. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. J. Prepare written report that documents testing procedures and results. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust operate, and maintain cast-iron boilers. END OF SECTION 15550 BOILERS 15550 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BOILERS 15550 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15600 - FUEL-FIRED HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes but is not limited to the following equipment and systems: 1. Infrared Heaters. 2. Indirect Fired Make-up Air Units. 3. Direct Fired Make-up Air Units. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15600 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, ETL, IAPMO, NBS, NCPWB, NEBB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA, and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Condensing Furnace: Furnace with annual fuel utilization efficiency rating more than 88 percent; designed to vent saturated flue gas. B. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. C. Noncondensing Furnace: Furnace with annual fuel utilization efficiency rating ranging from 78 to 85 percent; designed to vent dry flue gas. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Infrared Heaters. 2. Indirect Fired Make-up Air Units. 3. Direct Fired Make-up Air Units. FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Infrared Heaters. 2. Indirect Fired Make-up Air Units. 3. Direct Fired Make-up Air Units. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 1. Makeup Air Units a. Five-year extended warranty on heat exchanger. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate actions to correct problems in a timely fashion to meet all project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure areas, protected from weather and damage. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets for each furnace installed. 2. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets for each makeup air unit installed. 3. Drive Belts: Furnish one set of drive belts for each makeup air unit installed. 4. Burner Igniters: One hot surface burner igniter for each style of gas-fired radiant heater furnished. B. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's representative that extra stock has been delivered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Co-Ray-Vac, Re- Verber-Ray, Solaronics, Reflect-O-Ray. B. Units: Packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, burner, heat exchanger, radiant tube, reflector, controls, complying with ANZI Z83.6. AGA FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 approved, designed and built to burn NG with characteristics same as those of gas available at project site. Provide high altitude kit. C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. D. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel combustion chamber with aluminized steel tube with polished aluminum, 97 percent minimum reflectivity, with end caps. Provide for rotating reflector or heater around a horizontal axis for minimum 30 degree tilt from vertical. E. Gas Burner: Forced draft type with adjustable combustion air supply, combination gas valve and pressure regulator incorporating manual shut-off, pilot valve, automatic 100 percent shut-off and thermo-couple pilot safety device, electronic pilot ignition. AGA approved, designed and built to burn NG with characteristics same as those of gas available at project site. Provide high altitude kit. F. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Thermo-couple sensor prevents opening of solenoid gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. Differential pressure switch in burner, safety circuit to stop burner operation with high discharge or suction pressure. Burner on indicator light. G. Refer to Section 15975 for Sequence of Operation. 2.2 INDIRECT-FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Hastings, Modine, Reznor, Sterling, Trane, Greenheck. B. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit condensing unit consisting of cabinet and supply fan assembly, and duct furnaces each consisting of heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filter. C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors, glass fiber insulation and reflective liner. D. Heat Exchanger: Type 409 stainless steel welded construction. E. Supply Fan: One speed Two-speed (1800/900 rpm) centrifugal type rubber mounted with belt drive, variable pitch motor pulley. Motor per Section 15050, high efficiency type. F. Filter: Easily removed 2-inch thick glass fiber disposable type, located to filter air before fan. G. Mixing Dampers: 1. Dampers: Outside and return dampers with damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper shall fail to closed position. 2. Gaskets: Tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets. 3. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train. FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Mixed Air Control Sequence: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for unoccupied heating. H. Gas Burner: Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, combination gas valve and pressure regulator incorporating manual shut-off, pilot valve, automatic 100 percent shut-off and thermo-couple pilot safety device, electronic pilot ignition, power vent with rain cap. I. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Thermo-couple sensors prevents opening of solenoid gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. J. Burner Operating Controls: 1. Room thermostat: Cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting. 2. High Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on high bonnet temperature and re-energizes when temperature drops to lower value. 3. Fan Control: Bonnet thermostat independent of burner controls, cycles supply fan, with manual switch for continuous fan operation. K. Coils 1. Provide access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils with cleanable headers and cleanable return bends. Provide drain pans and downspout for cooling coil banks more than one coil high. Pans shall extend a minimum of 24" downstream from coil face. 2. Coils shall be fabricated of 5/8" OD seamless copper tubes expanded into fins with brazed joints. Fins shall be aluminum. Coil casing shall be die formed channel frame of galvanized steel. 3. Water Cooling Coils: Headers of cast iron, seamless copper tube or prime coated steel pipe with brazed joints. Configuration to be drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent; threaded plugs in return bends and in headers opposite each tube. L. Accessories 1. Remote control station with operating switches and indicating lights. 2. Fresh air hood with birdscreen. 3. Vibration isolators, spring type. 4. Low outlet temperature shut off. 5. Day-night operation. 6. Blocked intake switch and signal light. 7. Fused disconnect switch. 8. High gas pressure regulator (1/2 psig and higher). 9. Five-year warranty on stainless steel heat exchanger. 10. Modulating gas valve with adjustable unit mounted thermostat and duct-mounted sensing bulb. 11. Electronic modulating make-up air with remote temperature selector and two- position space heating. M. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operation. FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.3 DIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Hastings, Sterling, King National, Ruup, WeatherRite, Industrial Air, Reznor, Greenheck. B. Construction and Ratings: Outdoor and indoor unit(s) with single point power connection in accordance with ARI 210/240. Testing: ASHRAE 14. C. Casing and Components: Galvanized steel panels, 18 gauge reinforced with structural angles and channels to ensure rigidity; access panels to burner and blower motor assemblies from either side of unit. D. Observation Port: On burner section for observing main and pilot flames. E. Insulation: Neoprene faced glass fiber insulation one inch thick on complete unit. F. Finish: Heat resistant baked enamel. G. Suspended Installations: Service platforms complete with handrails and access ladder. H. Outdoor Installation: Weatherproofed casing, with intake louver or hood. I. Filter: 2 inch thick glass fiber disposable filters in rigid frames. J. Burners 1. Assembly: For natural gas, capable of modulating turn down ratio of 25:1, including electric modulating main gas valve, motorized shut down valve, main and pilot gas regulators, pilot electric gas valve, manual shut-off valve and pilot adjustment valve. 2. Pilot: Electrically ignited by spark rod through high voltage ignition transformer and supervised. 3. Damper: Motorized with end switch to prove position before burner will fire. K. Fan: Statically and dynamically balanced centrifugal fan mounted on solid steel shaft with heavy duty self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings and V-belt drive with matching motor sheaves and belts. L. Controls 1. Controls: Pre-wire unit for connection of power supply. Field wiring from unit to remote control panel makes unit operative. 2. Remote Control Panel: On-off-auto switch, pilot operation, burner operation, clogged filter indication and lockout indication. 3. Interlocks: Unit to start when exhaust fan is running (per sequence of operations in section 15980). Burner to operate when flow switch located in exhaust duct proves flow. 4. Fan Discharge Thermostat: Modulating gas valve controls to maintain supply air temperature. Provide remote discharge thermostat adjustment within 20 foot of unit. FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Carbon Monoxide Monitoring System: Operates fan on high volume when pre-determined carbon monoxide concentration is detected. 6. Safety Controls: Sense correct air flow before energizing pilot and sense pilot ignition before activating main gas valve. 7. Manual Reset Low and High Limit Controls: Maintain supply air temperature between set points and shut fan down if temperatures are exceeded. 8. Purge Period Timer: Automatically delays burner ignition and bypass low limit control. M. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS A. Verify that floors and ceilings are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. D. Install heaters level and plumb and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install to NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. F. Install connect gas fired duct heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 59, NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations. G. Install suspended units from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. H. Mount counterflow furnaces installed on combustible floors on support base. I. Provide vibration isolation per Section 15240. 3.2 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Verify that floor and roof are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. Verify that proper power and gas supplies are available for connection. Verify proper fan rotation. B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, ANSI/NFPA 90B, and ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 and ANSI/NFPA 211. C. Provide full perimeter support curb for roof mounted units. D. Provide nominal 4" high concrete housekeeping pad per Section 15050 and Section 03000 for indoor units. E. Provide vibration isolation per Section 15240. FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Provide all tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with requirements including but not limited to Section 15990, manufacturer's testing and Local Code testing. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Gas Piping: Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. Provide AGA approved flexible units. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 15600 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15600 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15650 - REFRIGERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes but is not limited to the following refrigeration equipment and systems: 1. Centrifugal Water Chillers, Dual-Compressor Type. 2. Closed-Circuit Cooling Towers. 3. Refrigerant Piping. 4. Variable Frequency Drives for Cooling Towers. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15650 Contractor shall review all Sections of Divisions 15 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of ACGIH, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, CTI, ETL, IAPMO, NBS, NCPWB, NEBB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA, SMACNA and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. The Refrigeration Piping Contractor shall have at least three years of successful installation experience on projects with refrigeration piping system work similar to that required for this project. C. Brazing Qualifications: Certify operators, brazing procedures and brazers in accordance with ANSI B31.5 for shop and job-site brazing of refrigerant piping work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data to the following items in accordance with the Division 1 and General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Chillers and Accessories. 2. Chiller Starters. 3. Cooling Towers. 4. Variable Frequency Drives. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Chillers and Accessories. 2. Chiller Starters. 3. Cooling Towers. 4. Variable Frequency Drives. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate actions to correct problems in a timely fashion to meet all project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. C. Deliver and store refrigerant piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. D. Protect refrigerant piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide two-year warranty. B. Add Alternate: Provide a extended five-year warranty from the date of Owner's acceptance of the project for the following products: 1. Refrigerant Compressors. 1.9 CERTIFICATES A. Before proceeding with refrigerant piping work, provide the Engineer with two copies of Certification that brazing procedures, brazers and operators will be in accordance with ANSI B31.5. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Trane, York, Carrier. B. Provide factory assembled and tested water cooled liquid chillers consisting of screw compressors, condensers, evaporator, thermal expansion valve, refrigeration REFRIGERATION 15650 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 accessories, and control panel. Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ARI 590. C. Compressors 1. Construct rotary twin screw compressors with heat treated forged steel shafts, axial bearings and seals to prevent gas leakage, suction and discharge valves, and sealing surface immersed in oil. 2. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on spring vibration isolators. 3. Provide positive displacement, oil pump lubrication system with oil charging valve, oil level sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug on strainer, arranged to ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation. 4. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of a slide valve unloader. Use slide mechanism operated by oil pressure or solenoid valve. Provide for unloaded compressor start. 5. Provide constant speed 3600 rpm compressor motor, suction gas cooled with solid state sensor and electronic winding overheating protection, designed for across-the-line starting. 6. Furnish with starter. 7. Provide crankcase heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down. Energize heater thermostatically or when compressor is not operating. D. Evaporator 1. Provide evaporator of shell and tube type, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless copper tubes or red brass tubes with integral fins, rolled or silver brazed into tube sheets. Provide multiple refrigerant circuits on multiple compressor units. 2. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 225 psig working pressure and water side for150 sig working pressure, in accordance with ANSI/ASME SECTION 8. 3. Insulate to comply with ASHRAE 90A. 4. Provide water drain connection and thermometer wells for temperature controller and low temperature cutout. E. Condensers 1. Provide condensers of shell and tube type, seamless or welded steel heads, seamless copper tubes or red brass tubes with integral fins, rolled or silver brazed into tube sheets. Provide additional condensers on heat recovery units. 2. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 450 psig working pressure in accordance with ANSI/ASME SECTION 8. 3. Provide integral subcooler circuit. 4. Provide 450 psig safety relief valve on condenser shell. 5. Design, test, and stamp water side for 150 psig working pressure in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code. F. Refrigerant Circuit REFRIGERATION 15650 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Refrigerant type used shall be R-134a. All components, motors, seals, bearings, shells, tubing, etc. shall be compatible with the refrigerant used. 2. Provide refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped. 3. Provide for each refrigerant circuit: a. Liquid line solenoid valve. b. Filter dryer (replaceable core type). c. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. d. Thermal expansion for maximum operating pressure. e. Charging valve. f. Insulated suction line. g. Discharge line check valve. h. Compressor discharge service valve. i. Pressure relief device. 2.2 CLOSED-CIRCUIT COOLING TOWER (Fluid Cooler) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Baltimore AirCoil, Evapco. B. Provide units for indoor use, factory assembled, sectional, counterflow, vertical discharge, blow thru design, with fan assemblies built into pan and casing. C. Pan and Casing: Galvanized steel, 12 gauge for casing and 8 gauge for reinforcing angles and channels with access doors at both ends of cooler to air plenum, lift out steel strainer, bleed line (from pump discharge) with valve inlet and outlet silencers, duct flanges on outlet. D. Cooler Coil: Steel tubing, air tested under water to 350 psig, sloped to ensure drainage, encased in steel framework. Provide cleanable [header] [tube] unit with removable cover plates on header to access tubular coil. E. Fans: Forward curved centrifugal type mounted on steel shaft, with belt drive, bearings with ANSI/AFBMA 9 or ANSI/AFBMA 11 L-10 life expectancy at 30,000 hours, with extended grease fittings. F. Fan Motors: Single-speed mounted on adjustable steel base. Refer to Section 15050. G. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheave for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts. Drive rated minimum 150% nameplate rating of motor. H. Fan Guard: Removable, welded steel rod and wire guard. I. Distribution Section: Polyvinyl chloride piping header and branches with plastic spray nozzles. J. Fill: Wave formed sheets of polyvinyl chloride plastic, self extinguishing with ASTME E-84 flame spread rating of 5. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 K. Drift Eliminators: Two or three pass formed steel, minimum 24 gauge, to limit drift loss to 0.7 percent of total water circulated. L. Fill Valves: Electronic water level sensor with solenoid valve. M. Hardware: Galvanized steel nuts, bolts, and washer stainless steel 0.25 inch nuts, bolts, and washers. Assemble with phenolic epoxy coated, cadmium plated washer head fasteners. N. Finish of steel components: G210 hot dipped galvanized steel with zinc chromatized aluminum paint. O. Pump: Closed coupled, bronze fitted, centrifugal pump with mechanical seal, mounted on piping, controlled by pan mounted immersion thermostat. P. Pump motor: Two-speed (1800/900 rpm) open drip proof mounted on pump body. Refer to Section 15050. Q. Accessories 1. Electric Temperature Controller: In pan with sensor to cycle fans. 2. Time Delay Relay: Limits fan motor starts to not more than six per hour. 3. Capacity Control: Consists of scroll damper and modulating electronic damper controlled by temperature controller; sensor in pan. R. Factory Finishing: Finish of steel components: G210 hot dipped galvanized steel with zinc chromatized aluminum paint. 2.3 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCup silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190° to 1480°F. B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper. 2. Points: Flared. C. Pipe Supports and Anchors: Refer to 15050. D. Valves and specialties shall be rated for their intended use. Refrigerant piping contractor shall provide the following items as may be required and recommended by the equipment manufacturer, their local representatives, Section 15975 Contractor and as indicated on the drawings: 1. Moisture and liquid indicators. 2. Valves. 3. Refrigerant charging valves. 4. Strainers. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Check valves. 6. Pressure relief valves. 7. Filter-driers. 8. Solenoid valves. 9. Expansion Valves. 10. Receivers. 11. Flexible connectors. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES FOR COOLING TOWERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Robicon, Reliance, ABB, Graham, Yaskawa, or equivalent. B. Provide variable speed drive system for the cooling tower fan(s). The system will consist of two variable frequency drives, bypass circuitry for each VFD, and control logic for sequencing the VFD's. The entire system shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure divided into two compartments, each with its own door. One of the compartments will be for the VFDs with the last for the main power feed, bypass circuitry and 120V logic. C. As part of the temperature control system, the manufacturer shall supply two temperature transducers for mounting by others in the common pump discharge. The temperature transducers will produce a 4-20 ma signal proportional to return water temperature. A temperature setpoint controller shall condition the signal before it is received by the VFD's. The temperature controller shall have a digital display and a front-accessible keypad for all operator tuning and control activities. The display shall be capable of displaying both setpoint and actual temperatures. The controller shall have programmable proportional, integral and derivative control loops. The control system shall be capable of interfacing with the Control System by Section 15975. D. Ratings 1. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. 2. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. 3. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating speed and load. 4. Operating Ambient: 0°C to 40°C. 5. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 90 percent. E. Design 1. Employ microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. 2. Employ pulse width modulated inverter system. 3. Employ switching power supply operating off DC link. 4. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. 5. Design to attempt five (adjustable) automatic restarts following fault condition before locking out and requiring manual reset. F. Product Options and Features 1. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and output current. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for over-current, over-voltage, ground fault, over temperature, and input power ON. 3. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110 percent of rated. 5. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 - 30 seconds. 6. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 - 30 seconds. 7. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control. 8. Input Signal: 4 - 20 mA DC. 9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Manual Bypass: Provide contractor, motor running overload protection, and short circuit protection for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor. Include isolation switch to allow maintenance of inverter during bypass operation. 12. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of each controller. G. Fabrication 1. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. H. Motors shall be per Section 15050. 2.5 CHILLER CONTROLS A. Control Panel: Stand-alone, microprocessor based. B. Enclosure: Unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, hinged or lockable; factory wired with a single-point power connection and a separate control circuit. C. Status Display: Multiple-character liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes and keypad. Display the following conditions: 1. Date and time. 2. Operating or alarm status. 3. Operating hours. 4. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. 5. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. 6. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. 7. Entering and leaving temperatures of condenser water (for water-cooled water chillers only). 8. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. 9. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. 10. Oil temperature and pressure. 11. Oil pump status. 12. No cooling load condition. 13. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). 14. Water pump status (optional). REFRIGERATION 15650 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 15. Anti-recycling timer status. 16. Percent of maximum motor amperage. 17. Current-limit set point. 18. Number of compressor starts. 19. Purge drum pressure. 20. Purge pump status. 21. Purge oil separator heater status. 22. Purge suction temperature. 23. Purge elapsed time. D. Control Functions 1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. 2. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperature, control set points, and motor load limit. 3. Chilled-water temperature shall be reset based on return-water temperature. 4. Current limit and demand limit. 5. Condenser-water temperature (for water-cooled water chillers only). 6. External water chiller emergency stop. 7. Anti-recycling timer. 8. Automatic lead-lag switching. 9. Start and run during a temperature of E. Automatic Reset Safety Controls: Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating any one will shut down machine and automatically reset: 1. Low chilled water temperature. 2. Low oil pressure (differential pressure switch). 3. Chilled water flow switch. 4. Condenser water flow switch. F. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset: 1. Low evaporator temperature (HFC-134a). 2. High condenser pressure. 3. Refrigerant high pressure. 4. High or low oil pressure. 5. High oil temperature. 6. Low oil sump temperature. 7. Low compressor suction pressure. 8. Compressor motor current-overload. 9. Electrical overload. 10. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault. 11. Processor communication loss. 12. Control device failure. 13. Starter fault. 14. Relay for remote mounted emergency shut-down. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building management system to monitor and control chilled-water set point and chiller-control displays and alarms. H. Provide pre-piped gauge board with pressure gauges for suction and discharge refrigerant pressures, and oil pressures for each compressor. I. Provide alarm package with test button and indicating lights which indicate control circuit is energized and compressor is running, and will sound an audible alarm and light an indicating light upon detection of compressor malfunction, low chilled water temperature, or evaporator water flow failure. J. Starter 1. On or near chiller, mount steel NEMA 1 type enclosure, containing Star Delta closed transition starter, manufactured in accordance with chiller manufacturer's specifications and factory tested. 2. Enclosure shall be designed for top or bottom cable entry with front access. Door, interlocked with circuit breaker, shall accommodate padlock. 3. Mount the following devices within enclosures: a. Disconnect switch on line side with fuses. b. Standard interrupting capacity circuit breaker with ground fault protection. c. Pilot relays to start and stop compressor on signal from chiller control panel. d. Electronic overload provides overload protection, protects compressor motor from distribution system irregularities, and provides motor current signal to chiller capacity control module. e. Control power transformer. f. Fused control circuits for control circuit, oil pump motor, oil heater, and purge control unit. g. Contactor interlocks for communication between starter and control panel. h. Capacitors, one per phase, to correct power factor to minimum 95%. i. Fused disconnect and starter for oil pump. j. Relay for remote mounted emergency shut-down switch. 4. Provide the following devices on starter door: a. Starter fault trip indicator and reset. b. Overload trip indicator and reset. c. Distribution fault trip indicator and reset. d. Ground fault trip indicator and reset. e. Ammeters, one per phase. f. Voltmeters, one per phase. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER COOLED CHILLERS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Align chiller package on steel or concrete foundations. C. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Division 16. Include for connection of oil pump to separately fused circuit. D. Provide for connection of electrical wiring between starter and chiller control panel, oil pump, and purge unit. Refer to Division 16. E. Align chiller on concrete foundations, sole plates, and sub-bases. Level, grout, and bolt in place. F. Install units in vibration isolation. Refer to Section 15240. G. Provide evaporator connections to chilled water piping. Refer to Section 15500. On inlet, provide thermometer well for temperature controller, flexible pipe connector, pressure gauge, and shut-off valve. On outlet, provide thermometer well and thermometer, flexible pipe connecter, pressure gauge, and balancing valve. H. Furnish and install necessary auxiliary water piping for oil cooling units and purge condensers. I. Insulate evaporator and cold surfaces. Refer to Section 15250. J. Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter season shut down during first year of operation including routine servicing and check out. K. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning. L. Provide piping without valves or restrictions from chiller rupture disc to outdoors. Size as recommended by manufacturer. M. Provide services of factory trained representative for minimum one day to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. N. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil. 3.2 COOLING TOWERS A. Install and perform startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install tower on structural steel beams as instructed by manufacturer. C. Elevate tower to maintain maximum positive suction head on condenser water pump. D. Install tower on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 15240. E. Install flexible pipe connectors at final connections of towers mounted on vibration isolators. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Connect full size ducts to inlet and/or outlet of tower, as shown on plans, with flexible duct connection. G. Connect condenser water piping with flanged connections to tower. Pitch condenser water supply to tower and condenser water suction away from tower. Refer to Section 15500. H. Connect make-up water piping with flanged or union connections to tower. Pitch to tower. Refer to Section 15500. I. Connect overflow, bleed, and drain as indicated on drawings. J. Inspect tower after installation and submit report prior to start-up, verifying installation is in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES FOR COOLING TOWERS A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer. B. Set VFD on concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Division 3. C. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and NEMA ICS 3.1. D. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller. E. Install fuses in fusible switches. F. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. G. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. H. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. I. Confirm with cooling tower manufacturer that motors in cooling tower have been manufactured for use with variable frequency drives. J. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. K. Make final adjustments to installed drive to assure proper operation of fan system. Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads. L. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. M. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes. REFRIGERATION 15650 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 END OF SECTION 15650 REFRIGERATION 15650 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15655 - REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes but is not limited to the following refrigeration equipment and systems: 1. Refrigerant Monitoring System. 2. Self-contained breathing apparatus. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15655 Contractor shall review all Sections of Divisions 15 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of ACGIH, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, CTI, ETL, IAPMO, NBS, NCPWB, NEBB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA, SMACNA and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15. C. CFR: SCBA shall comply with requirements in 42 CFR 84. 1.5 DEFINITIONS 1. CMOS: Ceramic metal-oxide semiconductor. 2. HFC: Hydrofluorocarbon. 3. HCFC: Hydrochlorofluorocarbon. 4. IR: Infrared. 5. LED: Light-emitting diode. 6. Ppm: Parts per million. 7. SCBA: Self-contained breathing apparatus. REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data to the following items in accordance with the Division 1 and General Conditions of the Contract: 1. For each type of refrigerant monitor; include refrigerant ppm range, temperature range, alarm outputs, readout range, furnished specialities, installation requirements, and power consumption. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Coordination Drawings: Include machinery room layout showing location of monitoring devices in relation to refrigerant equipment. 4. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices and SCBA, signed by product manufacturer. 5. SCBA; include mounting details and service requirements and compliance with authorized Federal agency. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Refrigerant monitoring equipment and SCBA to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate actions to correct problems in a timely fashion to meet all project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. C. Deliver and store refrigerant piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide two-year warranty from start of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Davis Instruments Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. Foxboro Company (The). 3. General Analysis Corp. 4. Genesis International Inc. 5. Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.; Haloguard Monitors. 6. Trane Co. (The). REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Functional Description of Refrigerant Monitoring System 1. On leak detection by refrigerant sensor(s), the system shall perform the following: a. Activate machinery room ventilation. b. Activate audio and visual alarm inside and outside machinery room. c. Shut down combustion process where combustion equipment is employed. d. Notify Building Automation System of alarm condition. C. Refrigerant Monitor 1. Description: CMOS or IR sensor shall continuously measure and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and shutting down equipment, and automatically activating ventilation system. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: HFC-134a. b. Refrigerant Concentration: 0 to 1000 ppm. c. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; 1 ppm d. Linearity: 0 to 100 ppm; linear e. Sensitivity: 1 ppm. f. Resolution: 1 ppm. g. Operating Temperature: 41° to 104°F. h. Response Time: 90 percent of a step change in 4 minutes. i. Relatively Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature range. 3. Operating Requirements: a. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac; 60 Hz, 30 W. b. Alarm Relays: 3 relays at 5- to 8-A resistive load. c. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter. d. Audible Output: Sonic alert at 75 to 80 dB at 60 inches. e. Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA current sourcing. f. Serial Output Type: RS 232. 4. Sensor Configuration: CMOS sensor. a. Expandable to four channels. 5. Display: 10-character, alphanumeric, vacuum-fluorescent indicating lights for each alarm set point; standard alarm; acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; and alarm status LEDs and service fault LEDs. a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, type as required for ambient condition. 6. Alarm Output: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. a. Two remote unit for mounting outside machinery room and having light beacon with double lights. REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 b. Field-adjustable alarm set points. 7. Calibration: Factory calibrated. D. Source Quality Control 1. Refrigerant Monitor: Factory tested and certified. 2.2 SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC International, Inc. 2. Clarey's Safety Equipment, Inc. 3. Genesis International Inc. 4. MSA, Instrument Division. 5. Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.; Haloguard Monitors. B. Description: Open-circuit, pressure-demand, compressed-air SCBA includes completely assembled, portable, self-contained devices designed for hazardous breathing environment application. C. Face Piece: EPDM or Silicon construction material, one-size-fits-all with double-sealing edge, stainless-steel speaking diaphragm and lens retainer, five adjustable straps to hold face piece to head (two straps on each side and one on top), exhalation valve in mask, close-fitting nose piece to ensure no CO2 build-up, and perspiration drain to avoid skin irritation and to prevent eyepiece, spectacle, and lens fogging. D. Backplate: Orthopedically designed of high-strength chemical and impact-resistant glass-fiber composite. E. Harness and Carrier Assembly: Large triangular back pad, backplate, and adjustable waist and shoulders straps. Modular in design, detachable components, and easy to clean and maintain. Shoulder straps are padded with flame-resistant material and reinforced with stainless-steel cable and attached with T-nuts, washers, and screws; rivets are not permitted. F. Air Cylinder: 30-minute, low-pressure, air-supply-loaded fiberglass or aluminum cylinders fitted with quick-fill assembly for refilling and air transfer. G. Wall-Mounted Case: Leakproof, corrosion-resistant, tough, plastic case. H. Control Cable: Electronic and fiber-optic cable for control wiring shall be as specified in Division 16 Section. I. Source Quality Control 1. SCBA: Tested and certified by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health and the Mine Safety and Health Administration according to 42 CFR 84, Subpart H. REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine chiller layout for proper location of monitoring device. B. Verify refrigerant contained in chiller(s) to ensure compatibility of refrigerant monitor. C. Examine machinery room ventilation system to verify its operation with refrigerant monitor(s). 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigerant monitoring equipment level and plumb. B. Install labels and nameplates to identify monitoring devices and SCBA components according to Section 15050. C. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16. D. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections for compliance with requirements. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust alarm set points. B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain refrigerant monitoring devices. Refer to Division 1 Section. REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" SCBA video that details exact operating procedures of equipment. END OF SECTION 15655 REFRIGERANT MONITORING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15655 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15750 - HEAT TRANSFER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes, but is not limited to providing the following: 1. Baseboard Radiation. 2. Unit Heaters. 3. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 4. Fan Coil Units. 5. Flat Plate Heat Exchangers. 6. Electric Heaters. 7. Electrical Contacts, Relays, Terminal Boxes, Thermostats, etc. in accordance with Section 15050 and Division 1. 8. Snowmelt Tubing. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15750 Contractor shall review all Sections of Divisions 15 for coordination and extent of Work. C. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Methods and Materials for Coil Hook-Up Kits with and/or without hoses. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. Comply with American National Standards Institute, ANSI B31.1, Piping Code. 2. ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM and ARI. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Condition of the Contract: 1. Baseboard radiation. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Unit Heaters. 3. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 4. Fan Coil Units. 5. Heat Exchangers. 6. Air Coils. 7. Snowmelt Tubing. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed operating instructions and maintenance data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Unit Heaters. 2. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 3. Fan Coil Units. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing content. 1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets for each piece of equipment installed. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt for each piece of equipment installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASEBOARD RADIATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Vulcan, Sterling, Trane, Dunham-Bush. B. Heating Elements: Seamless copper tubing, mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins, suitable for soldered fittings. Active heating element shall be length noted on drawings. C. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal movement, on enclosure brackets. D. Enclosures: 18 gauge steel up to 18 inches in height, 16 gauge steel over 18 inches. Provide easily jointed components for wall to wall installation. Support rigidly, on wall or floor mounted brackets at least 3 feet on center maximum. E. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of standard color as selected by Architect on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. F. Capacity shall be as indicated on Drawings. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Damper: Where not thermostatically controlled, provide knob-operated internal damper at enclosure air outlet. H. Access Doors: For otherwise inaccessible valves, provide factory-made permanently hinged access doors, 6" x 7" minimum size, integral with cabinet. 2.2 UNIT HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Vulcan, Sterling, Trane, Dunham-Bush, Ted Reed Thermal, Modine, KHD. B. Coils: Seamless copper tubing, 0.31 inch minimum wall thickness, silver brazed to steel headers, and with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig. Provide with manual air vent. C. Casing: 18 gauge steel with threaded pipe connections for hanger rods. D. Finish: Factory apply baked enamel of on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. E. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard; horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ball bearings. F. Air Outlet: Adjustable pattern diffuser, four way louvers. G. Motor: Refer to Section 15050; horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ball bearings. H. Control: Unit mounted fan - speed switch and thermostat. Refer to Section 15980 for sequence of operation. I. Capacity shall be as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Vulcan, Sterling, Trane, Dunham-Bush, Ted Reed Thermal, Modine, KHD. B. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 200 psi minimum working pressure. Provide with manual air vent. C. Cabinet: 16 gauge steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, removable panels, glass fiber insulation, integral air outlet, and inlet grilles as indicated by model numbers on Drawings. D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of standard color as selected by Architect on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. E. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven. F. Motor: Refer to Section 15050; sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Control: Unit mounted fan - speed switch and thermostat. Refer to Section 15980 for sequence of operation. H. Filter: Easily removed 1" thick glass fiber disposable type, located to filter air before coil. I. Capacity shall be indicated on Drawings. 2.4 HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS (DD-Direct Drive, Standard Static Pressure) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Trane, International, Enviro-Tec, Williams, Airtherm, Magic Aire, McQuay, First Co. B. Units shall consist of coils, drain pan assembly, filter and centrifugal fan with drive, mounted in a common cabinet for independent air delivery from a single unit. Units are to be complete with controls. Unit shall be of the shallow depth type and be either UL or ETL listed. C. Casings shall be constructed of galvanized steel with flanged edges, phosphatized to assure paint adherence and finished with baked enamel. Casings shall be provided with internal glass fiber insulation having a minimum R-4 value and meeting NFPA 90A for flame and smoke spread. Units to have flanges when attached to ductwork. D. Coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. Coils shall be specifically designed and circuited for water use and shall be leak tested in 200°F water with air at 250 psig with manual air vent. Coil shall have capacity indicated on drawings. Refrigerant coil shall be copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1". Include thermal expansion valve. E. Fan shall be forward-curved, double-width, centrifugal type with direct-drive motor. Fan shaft shall be supported by a permanently lubricated bearing. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. F. Drain pans shall be integrally attached to the coil casings and are complete with threaded pipe drain connection. All pans shall be galvanized for corrosion resistance and cover the entire coil length. Drain pans shall be waterproofed to prevent leakage, and shall be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection. 1. Units shall be provided a secondary drain pan to collect condensate drip from uninsulated cooling coil connections and valves and direct the condensate to the main drain pan of the unit. Pan shall be rated for installation in return air ceiling plenums. G. Filters shall be provided on all units, 1" disposable type. Filter access shall be from side of the unit. 1. Where fan coil units are provided with filter return grilles, filters are not required at the unit. H. Motor shall be three-speed permanent split-capacitor type with UL listed thermal overload protection and be in accordance with Section 15050. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operations. J. Fans shall have standard or high-static pressure capability as noted on drawings. K. Risers for vertical stacked units shall be Type L seamless copper and include a minimum 3" upsized or swaged section at top to accept riser from above without requiring a coupling. Provide riser sizes as indicated on Drawing. Risers to be insulated with closed cell foam insulation meeting NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke development ratings per the following table. Pipe Size Insulation Thickness for Risers (Inches) Pipe Size ¾” 1” 1-1/4” 1-1/2” 2” 2-1/2” Heating Supply/Return 1 1 1 1 1 1 Chilled Supply/Return ½ ½ ¾ ¾ ¾ 1 Condensate Drain ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ 2.5 HORIZONTAL FAN COIL UNITS (Belt Drive) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Trane, International, Enviro-Tec, Williams, Airtherm, Magic Aire, McQuay, First Co. B. Units shall consist of coils, drain pan assembly, filter and centrifugal fan with drive, mounted in a common cabinet for independent air delivery from a single unit. Units are complete with controls. C. Casings shall be constructed of galvanized steel with flanged edges, phosphatized to assure paint adherence and finished with baked enamel. Casings shall be provided with internal glass fiber insulation having a minimum R-4 value and meeting NFPA 90A for flame and smoke spread. Units to have duct flanges when attached to ductwork. D. Coils shall have capacity indicated on drawings. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. All coils shall be specifically designed and circuited for water use and shall be leak tested in water at 200°F with air at 250 psig. Refrigerant coil shall be copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1". Include thermal expansion valve. E. Fans shall be forward-curved, double-inlet, centrifugal type equipped with heavy duty adjustable V-belt drive rated to 120% of motor horsepower. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. F. Drain pans shall be integrally attached to coil casings and are complete with threaded pipe drain connection. All pans shall be galvanized for corrosion resistance and cover the entire coil length. Drain pans shall be waterproofed to prevent leakage and shall be formed to slope. G. Filters shall be provided on all units, 1" disposable type. Filter access shall be from the side of the unit. H. Motors shall be as scheduled on the plans and be in accordance with Section 15050. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operations. 2.6 FLAT PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Tranter, Alfa Laval, Graham, Mueller, Bell & Gossett. B. Configuration: Free standing assembly consisting of frame support, fixed and moveable end plates, tie rods, plates, and one - piece gaskets. C. Frames: Carbon steel with baked epoxy enamel paint, stainless steel side bolts and shroud. D. Plates: ASTM A666, Type 316 stainless steel, stamped corrugated surface for increased water turbulence. E. Gaskets: Molded EPDM. F. Nozzles: 150 psig. ASA flange type or grooved pipe. G. Entire assembly to be rated for 250°F at 150 psig. 2.7 SNOWMELT TUBING (HYDRONIC) A. Acceptable manufacturers: Wirsbo, Stadler. B. All components of system shall be provided by one manufacturer including tubing, manifolds, support brackets, fastening systems, tube bend supports, couplings, splicing nipples, etc. C. Tubing shall be cross-linked polyethylene with an oxygen diffusion barrier rated at 180°F at 100 psig. Pipe shall have a nominal inside diameter of 3/4" and meet ASTM F876-877. D. Tubing shall carry a ten-year non-prorated warranty against failure due to manufacturing defects or exposure to stress cracking agents. All other components to be provided with two-year warranty from date of Owner acceptance of project. E. Manifolds shall be made of brass resistant to dezincification and be capable of multiple unit connections. Return manifolds shall be provided with an air vent and hose adapter, and have a balancing valve for each tubing circuit. Supply manifold tubing circuit connections shall be capable of being left manually open or fitted with a 24-volt valve operator for zone control. F. Contractor shall have to option of shop-fabricating manifolds that do not have individual circuit balancing valves only when all circuits are connected to the manifold to allow equivalent pressure drop across each circuit. Supply manifolds to have shut- off valve and manual air vent. Return manifolds shall have a shut-off valve and circuit setter. G. Controls shall be provided by Section 15975 Contractor. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 H. Controls shall consist of programmable electronic components as indicated on Drawings. 2.8 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Markel, Q-Mark, Trane, Erincraft, Brasch, Modine, Reznor. B. Description: Electric unit heater for suspended mounting, with fan forced air distribution over electric resistance heating coils with horizontal and vertical discharge, UL or ETL listed. C. Heating capacity, input voltage and phase shall be as indicated on Drawings. D. Heating Element: Enclosed copper tube, aluminum fined element of coiled nickel- chrome resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material. E. Input Fuses: Provide integral fuses for units rated more than 48 amperes full load. F. Provide line voltage disconnect switch for each input circuit. G. Fabricate cabinet of heavy welded steel. H. Provide hinged and latched or captive-screw held panel for electrical connection and control compartment. I. Provide internal shroud around heating elements to assure uniform air flow and delivery temperature across heater face. J. Provide suitable fan blade protection using wire guard. K. Cabinet Finish: Use corrosion-resistance primer and finish with baked enamel. L. Contactor: Provide contactor control for unit. M. Thermostat: Provide integral low voltage thermostat to control contactor. N. Provide low voltage control transformer as required. O. Operating Stages: One P. Provide terminal blocks for power and control wiring connections. Q. Louver: Provide discharge louver with individually adjustable blades. R. Vertical Discharge Diffuser: None. 2.9 ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Markel, Q-Mark, Vulcan, Trane, Berko, Erincrat, Brasch. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Description: Surface and recessed wall-mounted cabinet heater with fan forced air distributed over resistance heating element, UL or ETL listed. C. Heating capacity, input voltage and phase shall be as indicated on Drawings. D. Heating Element: Enclosed copper tube, aluminum finned element of coiled nickel-chrome resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material. E. Provide line voltage disconnect switch, integral contactors with built-in thermostat, to directly control heater element. F. Fabricate cabinet of heavy welded steel. G. Grille: Fabricate from stamped steel sheet. H. Provide hinged and latched or captive-screw held panel for electrical connection and control compartment. I. Cabinet Finish: Use corrosion-resistant primer and finish with baked enamel of color as selected by Architect. J. Grille finish to match cabinet. K. Provide terminal blocks for power and control wiring. 2.10 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Indeeco, Markel, Q-Mark, Vulcan, Berko, Erincraft, Aztec. B. Assembly: UL listed and labelled, with thermal box and cover and controls. C. Heating Elements: Enclosed copper tube element of coiled nickel-chrome resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material, bonded to ceiling panels. D. Ceiling Panels: Aluminum pans with silkscreened pattern matching ceiling tile; manufactured and assembled to configuration, size and capacity indicated on Drawings. Panels suitable for surface mounting. E. Controls: Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operation. F. Wall Thermostat: Bimetal sensing elements calibrated from 35 to 90degrees F, with contacts suitable for 24 V circuit and with manually operated snap-acting off switch with contactors, relays, and control transformers for 24 V control circuit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASEBOARD RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. After all radiation supports, piping and finned elements have been installed, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer for inspection purposes prior to installation of radiation enclosure covers. 3.2 UNIT HEATERS A. Unless noted otherwise, mount high as possible to give greatest headroom possible. Piping shall be as shown on the plans. Protect the entire unit with a cover during construction. Manufacturer's data is to be observed before installation. 3.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Coordinate with Contractor installing ceiling and wall systems for opening requirements of recessed heaters. Protect units during construction. 3.4 FAN COILS A. Set units level with vibration isolation per Section 15240. B. Check for proper fan rotation after power is connected. 3.5 AUXILIARY CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS A. Provide shop-fabricated or factory-fabricated auxiliary condensate pans under each horizontal fan coil unit located above ceilings. The purpose of the pan is to collect overflow water from the main unit condensate pan should the drain line become plugged and is required by the Building Code. This pan is not provided by unit manufacturers. B. The drain shall be fabricated from sheet metal with soldered or welded corners. Alternate materials will be considered only when they meet the flame and smoke ratings of NFPA 90A and are permitted by the Building Code. C. The pan shall have a minimum depth of 1.5 inches, shall not be less than 3 inches) larger than the unit or the coil dimensions in width and length and shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant material. Metallic pans shall have a minimum thickness of not less than 0.0276-inch galvanized sheet metal. Nonmetallic pans shall have a minimum thickness of not less than 0.0625 inch. D. Provide a 3/4" opening in the bottom of the drain pan with a pipe fitting connector having a water-tight compression fitting and gasket for connection to a 3/4" drain pipe. Drain pipe material shall meet the requirements of this Section, the flame and smoke ratings of NFPA 90A and as are permitted by the Building Code. E. The drain pipe shall be routed through the ceiling at a conspicuous location that is not located over a doorway or exit passage so that excess moisture will spill into the room and alert people to an overflow problem. F. Suspend the pan separately from the building structure leaving a minimum of 1" clearance between the top of the pan and the bottom of the unit. Do not directly attach to the fan coil unit. HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Alternative to the Auxiliary Drain Pan: When permitted by the Building Department, a separate overflow drain line shall be connected to the drain pan provided with the equipment. Such overflow drain shall discharge to a conspicuous point of disposal to alert occupants in the event of a stoppage of the primary drain. The overflow drain line shall connect to the drain pan at a higher level than the primary drain connection. H. Alternative to the Drain Pipe Extending Through the Ceiling: When permitted by the Building Department, an auxiliary drain pan without a separate drain line shall be provided under the coils on which condensate will occur. Such pan shall be equipped with a water-level detection device that will shut off the equipment served prior to overflow of the pan. 3.6 SNOWMELT TUBING A. Unless shown on the drawings, the Section 15750 Contractor shall have local supplier provide sketches on routing and spacing of tubing. B. Install per manufacturer's instruction. Coordinate with Concrete Contractor to allow for timely installation of tubing and concrete finishing. C. Coordinate with Chemical Treatment Contractor for system flushing and glycol fill. END OF SECTION 15750 HEAT TRANSFER 15750 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15770 - SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following material methods common to swimming pool heating recovery. 1. Refrigerated Heat Recovery Units. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15770 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, ETL, NCPWB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Refrigerated Heat Recovery Units. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed operating instructions and maintenance data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Section 15010: 1. All units. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage taking appropriate steps to correct problems in timely fashion to meet project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide an extra set of filters for each unit for installation at time of acceptance of project by Owner. B. Provide a spare set of fan belts for each belt drive unit, tagged with Plan Code indicated on drawings. C. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's representative that extra stock has been delivered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERATED HEAT RECOVERY ROOFTOP UNITS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Desert Aire, Governair, Pool Pak, DesChamps/Martini, APR, Dectron. B. The system shall be specifically designed to control the swimming pool environment. Capacities and specifications shall comply with the drawings. Units shall be complete factory assembled and tested. Outside air, exhaust air systems, fans, motors, and all operating and safety controls specified shall be furnished, factory installed and factory tested. Units shall be built to comply with UL 465. The unit's cooling, heating, humidifying, ventilating and exhausting capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that indicated on the drawings. Tags and decals to aid in service or indicate caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access doors. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. C. Base and Frame: Units shall have a rigid base assembly manufactured of electrically welded structural steel members. All major components shall be supported from the base. The unit construction shall include an electrically welded upper frame, fabricated of structural steel tubing, welded to the unit base to form a rigid, unitized assembly. The entire structural steel assembly shall be prime coated with epoxy chromate primer and top coated with 2-part epoxy paint. Cabinets constructed of formed sheet metal posts and panels, screwed or otherwise fastened together without an inner frame are unacceptable. Welded integral lifting lugs shall be provided. D. Service Vestibule: All water cooled heat exchangers, the compressor, valves, filter drier, receiver, and head pressure control valve shall be located in a service vestibule separated from the indoor and condenser fan air streams. The vestibule shall be insulated on all surfaces not exposed to the indoor air stream and shall be vented to the indoor air stream. E. Cabinet: Exterior panels shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge galvanized steel formed panels. All side panels, the roof and the floor are to be fully lined with a minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel inner liner covering all insulation. All exterior panels, the roof, and the base shall be insulated with a minimum of 1" thick, 2 lb/cu.ft. fiberglass insulation glued in place. Smoke and flame spread rating shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A. Man-sized hinged access doors shall be provided and arranged to permit ready access to all internal components. Doors shall have a SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 minimum of three Type 302 stainless steel hinges and two high compression latches with handles. Doors are to be double wall construction. Doors are to have a low leakage extruded bulb type gasket to eliminate air leakage. F. Finish: The interior of the unit shall be completely cleaned and finished with an air dried chemical resistant epoxy over primer which meets or exceeds Federal Specifications TTP636 exposure requirements. The exterior shall be coated with an alkyd enamel finish that meets or exceeds the same. G. Dehumidifying Coil: The coil shall be pressure tested after assembly with 325 psig air under water and then dehydrated. Coil shall be fabricated from round seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. A bypass damper shall be placed above the cooling coil. It shall have a manual quadrant adjusting lever to allow proportioning air between the bypass and the cooling coil. The damper blades shall be fabricated from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel. H. Refrigerant Reheat Coil: A refrigerant reheat coil shall be placed downstream from the dehumidification coil to recover compressor heat after the dehumidification process. The coil shall be fabricated from round seamless tubes mechanically expanded to aluminum fins. I. Face and Bypass Damper: A face and bypass damper shall be placed immediately upstream from the refrigerant reheat coil. The damper shall modulate under control of the temperature control system. An increasing demand of heat in the pool space will increase the air through the refrigerant reheat coil and decrease the bypassed air. The dampers shall be of the opposed blade design. J. Refrigeration Circuit: Refrigerant circuit shall include service pressure tap ports, check valves, refrigerant line filter-driers and factory furnished operating charge. The filter drier shall be of the replaceable core type. A three valve bypass shall be installed to allow replacement of the filter drier core without shutting the compressor off. The condenser head pressure and the system refrigerant charge shall be maintained by a three-way head pressure control valve. The valve shall be factory set to maintain a minimum 190 psig receiver pressure. As the receiver pressure falls in the refrigeration system due to reduced water or air temperatures, the head pressure control valve shall divert uncondensed refrigerant gas into the receiver. This shall have the result of reducing condenser effectiveness by flooding refrigerant into the condenser and thereby increasing the compressor head pressure. A refrigerant receiver shall be installed and sized to hold the system operating charge variation plus 10% of the maximum operating charge. The receiver shall be ASME UM stamped under section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME code for unfired pressure vessels. The receiver shall contain an ASME approved pressure relief valve set to relieve at 450 psig. Refrigerant shall be R-410A. K. Compressor: Compressor(s) shall be heavy duty, scroll, hermetic type. Each compressor shall be equipped with low pressure and high pressure safety switches, with internal protection from overheating. Capacity reduction for each compressor shall be accomplished with hot gas bypass. Each compressor shall be mounted on spring isolators as recommended by the compressor manufacturer. Pipe vibration absorbers shall be installed in both the suction and discharge lines of each compressor. Discharge line muffler(s) to reduce any pulsation noise shall be provided. SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 L. Water-Cooled Heat Rejection Condenser: The dehumidifier shall be equipped with an auxiliary water- cooled condenser to reject heat if all the compressor heat is not required for air or pool heating. The condenser shall be of the shell-and-tube type with removable bonnets to allow tube cleaning. The tubes shall be externally finned and rod cleanable. The tube material shall be copper. The condenser shell shall be carbon steel and the water bonnets shall be cast iron. The condenser shall be painted with enamel paint. The dehumidifier shall be equipped with a three-way refrigerant diverting valve to divert hot refrigerant from the pool water heat exchanger to the condenser. When the condenser is not in use, it is to be pumped out of refrigerant and reduced to suction pressure. M. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Fan performance shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Std 210. Fans shall be selected to provide the airflow and pressure according to the schedule. Fan shall be of the centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced and tested in the factory. The assembly shall use a turned, ground, and polished solid steel shaft selected so that the fan reaches its rated speed before the shaft passes through its first critical speed. The bearings shall be self-aligning, relubricate ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours average life. Bearing grease fittings shall have extended lube lines to the fan drive side. The fan motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common welded structural steel base to provide consistent belt tension with no relative motion between the fan and motor shafts. This entire assembly shall be spring isolated from the unit base. The fan discharge shall be connected to the cabinet through a minimum six inch reinforced flexible connection. V-belt drives shall be rated for not less than 150% of the connected driving motor horsepower. Belt guard shall be provided. Sheaves shall have at least two grooves, selected to drive the fan at the required speed. N. Fan Motors: Fan motors shall be NEMA design ball bearing type with electrical characteristics and horsepower as specified. Motors shall be 1750 rpm and TEFC. The motor shall be located within the unit on an adjustable, heavy steel slide rail base. O. Air Inlet Section: The dehumidifier shall be equipped with a fresh air inlet section sized to provide the fresh air requirement as indicated on the drawings. The air inlet damper shall be equipped with a manual quadrant adjusting lever with locking screw to all size adjustment of the air inlet volume during start-up. P. Dampers: Dampers shall be of the heavy gauge extruded aluminum air foil type. Dampers blades shall be a maximum of 60" in length. Blade ends shall be sealed with a 3" aluminum spring type seal. Blade edges shall be extruded vinyl with an interlocking vee design for ultra low leakage. Damper leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM per square foot at 4" W.G. static pressure. The damper frame shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized steel with large diameter nylon damper bearings mounted in holders extruded into the frame. Damper linkage shall have a minimum 200 inch pound torque ratings. Q. Filters: Panel filter frames shall be welded galvanized steel fabricated as an integral part of the unit. Filter face velocity shall not exceed the value indicated on the drawings. The filters shall be 30-35% efficient, 2-inch thick, pleated disposable type. SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 R. Hot Water Heat Coil: A hot water heating coil shall be supplied down stream from the hot gas reheat coil The size and capacity will be in accordance with the schedule. The coil shall be fabricated from round seamless tubes mechanically expanded into thick aluminum fins. The coil casing shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. The coil shall be degreased after testing and phenolic dipped.] [The coil shall be fabricated from round seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into copper fins. The coil casing shall be 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel. S. Control Panel: Each unit shall be equipped with a control panel built as an integral part of the unit. The control panel shall contain a three-pole main power terminal, starters, contractors, three-phase current overload protection, fuse blocks with fuses, numbered terminal strips, a line voltage to 115 volt control transformer with primary and secondary fuse and control circuit switch. Each unit shall be equipped with a mounted and wired non-fused disconnect switch to meet NEC requirements. The disconnect switch shall be mounted within the control panel with the switching mechanism extended to the outside of the control panel door creating a dead front cover. A separate 115v/1ph power circuit shall be provided for lights and maintenance power. T. Controls: Units shall be provided with temperature and humidity controls. Wall mounted thermostat and humidistat shall be mounted and wired by others. A room thermostat shall control the cooling and heating to maintain the setpoint temperature. An adjustable outside air thermostat shall position the outside air damper to the required position. The following control shall be provided mounted and wired: 1. Two-stage aquastat. 2. Pool water flow proving switch. 3. 5 Min. compressor anti short cycle timer. 4. 3 Min. low ambient start-up timer. 5. Single zone temperature controller. 6. Face and bypass damper motor operator. 7. Supply a control cycle for and unoccupied period that will consist de-energizing the exhaust fan and driving the outside air and the exhaust air dampers shut. U. Section Lights: Each section shall be equipped with a vapor-proof 100 watt service light. Each light shall have its own on-off switch mounted in the same section as light. All lights and switches shall be completely installed and wired to unit control for internal power source. Lights shall be functional whether or not main power is in "OFF" position. V. Remote Monitoring Panel: Unit manufacturer shall provide a remote monitoring panel with each unit. Panel shall be field mounted and wired by electrical contractor to matching terminals in unit control panel. The monitoring panel shall include "ON-OFF" system switch; "OCCUPIED-UNOCCUPIED" switch, minimum outside air damper potentiometer; and six signal lights to indicate supply fan operation, mechanical cooling operation, heating operation, or clogged filters. Mount the remote panel in the pool equipment room on the lower level of the aquatics center. SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ALL HEAT RECOVERY ROOFTOP UNITS A. Follow manufacturers’ instructions for setting unit and subsequent start-up. B. Coordinate with Section 15950 Contractor for proper installation of control system. C. Refer to Section 15050 when using units for temporary heating and ventilation. D. Section 15770 Contractor shall coordinate all pool and spa heat recovery work with the Pool Equipment Contractor prior to fabrication, placement of equipment, and piping. END OF SECTION 15770 SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15770 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15780 - PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes but is not limited to the following equipment and systems: 1. Split Systems DX Packages (5 tons and less). 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15780 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, ETL, NCPWB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA, and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. Split Systems DX Packages (5 tons and less). 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. 1. Split Systems DX Packages (5 tons and less). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate steps to correct problems in a timely fashion to meet all project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide an extra set of disposable filters for each unit for installation at time of acceptance of project by Owner. B. Provide a spare set of fan belts for each belt driven unit, tagged with Plan Code. C. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's representative that spare filters have been installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM DX PACKAGES (5 tons and less) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Trane, York, Carrier, McQuay, Lennox, Mitsubishi, Friedrich, Sanyo. B. Units shall consist of coils, drain pan assembly, filter and centrifugal fan with drive, mounted in a common cabinet for independent air delivery from a single unit. All oiling connections shall be extended to exterior of casing to facilitate maintenance without removing sound proofing on exterior of unit. C. Casings shall be constructed of galvanized steel, phosphatized to assure paint adherence and finished with baked enamel. Casings shall be provided with internal glass fiber insulation having a minimum R-4 value and meeting NFPA 90A for flame and smoke spread. Units to have duct flanges when attached to ductwork. D. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. All coils shall be specifically designed and circuited for refrigerant use. E. Fans shall be forward-curved, double-inlet, centrifugal type equipped with heavy duty adjustable V-belt drive rated to 120% of motor horsepower. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. F. Drain pans shall be integrally attached to coil casings an are complete with threaded pipe drain connection. All pans shall be galvanized for corrosion resistance and cover the entire coil length. Drain pans shall be waterproofed to prevent leakage. G. Filters shall be provided on all units, 1" disposable type. Filters access shall be from the side of the unit. H. Motors shall be as indicated on the plans and be in accordance with Section 15050. I. Outdoor Condensing Unit 1. Condenser coil to be copper tubing with aluminum fins for durability. 2. Provide internal pressure relief valve and overload protection for the compressor motor. compressor to be isolator mounted, hermetic with a high- torque refrigerant gas cooled motor. 3. Unit is to be UL listed and certified in compliance with ARI Standards 210 and 270. PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Cabinet to be designed for outdoor use, 18 gauge galvanized steel with a baked enamel finish and removable panels for easy service maintenance. 5. Unit to include all refrigerant circuit components, crankcase heater, quick connect refrigerant fittings, [low ambient kit] and full charge of R-22. J. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends, sized per manufacturers recommendations. If a refrigerant line kit is not available, or if the piping run length/height is too long for a line kit, provide refrigerant piping and specialties per specification section 15650, sized per manufacturers recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. NOT USED. END SECTION 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15850 - AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes but is not limited to the following equipment and systems: 1. Cabinet Fans. 2. Centrifugal Fans. 3. Square In-Line Centrifugal Fans. 4. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators. 5. Upblast Kitchen Hood Exhaust Fans. 6. Ceiling/In-Line Exhaust/Transfer Fans. 7. Dryer Booster Fans (Residential Style). 8. Propeller Fans. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this section and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15850 Contractor shall review all Sections of Divisions 15 and 17 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Appropriate standards of ACGIH, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, ASA, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, AWS, CDA, ETL, FM, IAPMO, IRI, NBS, NCPWB, NEBB, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, MSS, OSHA, SMACNA and UL apply unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. All air handling equipment. 1.5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data of Section 15010: 1. All air handling equipment. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND AIR HANDLING A. Inspect all items upon delivery for damage, taking appropriate actions to correct problems in a timely fashion to meet all project scheduling. B. Store items in a secure area, protected from weather and damage. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Provide two-year warranty. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one spare set of filters, for each piece of equipment having filters, to be installed prior to date of acceptance by Owner. B. Provide a spare set of fan belts for each belt drive unit, tagged with Plan Code on drawings. C. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's representative that extra stock has been delivered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING/IN-LINE EXHAUST AND TRANSFER FANS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Penn, Greenheck, Cook, Acme. B. Provide fans of the arrangements and sizes indicated on drawings. C. Fans shall have galvanized steel housing, direct drive resilient mounted motor and gravity backdraft damper at discharge outlet. Motor to have integral thermal overload protection. Provide metal grille mounted on fan for directing air through ceiling. In-line style shall have removable access doors for maintenance. D. Provide disconnect switch and variable speed control as indicated on drawings. 2.2 DRYER BOOSTER FANS (Residential Style) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Fantech, American Aldes, Spruce Environmental. B. Fan features a plastic housing constructed of UL-recognized, UV-protected thermoplastic resin to allow fan to be mounted in outdoor and wet locations. Housing shall be sealed at the motor screws, the wiring cables and along the seams of the fan to prevent moisture from entering the housing. C. Tested and approved by UL and CSA. D. Suitable for airstream temperatures up to 140°F. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Power connection using external wiring box with waterproof gasket. F. Provide positive pressure switch with integral delay and mounting bracket. 1. Switch which recognizes dryer operation and activates the booster fan from an independent electrical circuit to eliminate connections through the dryer circuit which may void the manufacturers' warranty as well as manual systems which require the attention of the operator or costly current/temperature sensing systems. 2. Power to the booster fan is connected in-series through a normally-open terminal on the switch. 3. A pressure tap shall be connected to a tip on the side of the switch. 4. Switch shall activate fan upon detecting a positive pressure range from 0.05"- 0.07" water column. 5. When the dryer begins operation, positive pressure in the duct causes the switch diaphragm to expand closing the circuit to the booster fan. 6. An integral delay-on-make timer in the switch will cycle the fan on for intervals of 10 minutes. This will continue until the dryer has stopped and the timer delay period has lapsed. 7. Drying cycles, the booster fan, the delay timer and the pressure switch are not to be adversely affected by the starting/stopping intervals. G. Secondary Lint Filter Box: Paintable galvanized metal, 4-inch inlet and outlet, pull out door with view window, removable lint filter and 1/2" flange for flush mount installation. H. Three-year factory replacement warranty, with Fourth and Fifth year factory repair or replacement warranty. 2.3 PROPELLER FANS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Penn, Greenheck, Acme, Cook, American Coolair. B. Impeller: Shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs, statically and dynamically balanced, keyed and locked to shaft, directly connected to motor or provided with V-belt drive. C. Motor: Self-aligning pre-lubricated ball or sleeve bearings affixed to mounting plate permitting belt tensioning, neoprene vibration isolation between fan assembly and mounting plate. D. Frame: One piece, square steel with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and supports, with baked enamel finish. E. Safety Screens: One inch galvanized wire over inlet, motor, and drive. Backdraft damper for separate mounting on outlet as indicated on drawings. F. Provide galvanized steel or aluminum hood with base. Hood panels to be sloped for drainage and mounted on steel frame. Include 1/4" birdscreen and accessories indicated on drawings. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.4 UPBLAST KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Penn, Greenheck, Cook, Acme. B. Furnish and install kitchen hood exhaust fans of model, size and capacity as shown on drawings. Unit shall be UL listed for kitchen hood exhaust (UL 762 - YZHW). C. Housings shall be of contour type, circular, aluminum, circumferential air discharge, upblast. D. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. E. Motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed weather-proof housing outside of the air stream and in accordance with Section 15050 motor requirements. Provide outside air cooling tube and wiring conduit into motor enclosure. F. Drives shall be belt driven. Belt shall be oil resistant. An adjustable sheave on the motor shall be provided to allow changes in the fan speed. Drives sized for 150% of motor horsepower. Provide pillow-block bearings. G. Ventilators shall be installed on the roof on a pre-fabricated, self-flashing aluminum curb with minimum 1-1/2" fiberglass liner, furnished with the fan. Provide vented extension on curb to meet NFPA 96 D. H. Provide a factory wired non-fused disconnect switch which shall be located under the hood of the unit. I. Entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by a birdscreen securely installed in place. J. Fan shall be provided with a factory-mounted grease drain and removable container for field cleaning of accumulated grease. K. Provide the following accessories: 1. Disconnect switch, NEMA 3R. 2. Insulating heat baffle under entire motor housing. 3. Hinge kit for tilt-up access to fan parts and ducts. L. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequence of Operation. 2.5 TUBULAR MIXED-FLOW INLINE BLOWER A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Acme, Barry Blower, Greenheck, Cook. B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL/705) for US. For restaurant applications, fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL/762) for US. For smoke control applications, fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (Power Ventilator for Smoke Control Systems) for US Fan shall bear the AMCA Certified AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Ratings Seal for Sound and Air Performance. Performance shall be certified for both inlet and outlet sound. C. The fan shall be of welded and bolted construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Housing shall be minimum 14 gauge steel with integral inlet and outlet collars for slip fit duct connections. Straightening vanes shall be included to assure maximum efficiency and low noise levels. Adjustable motor plate shall utilize threaded studs for positive belt tensioning. Copper extended lube lines shall be furnished for lubrication of fan bearings. Lifting lugs shall be provided for ease of installation. Adjustable mounting feet shall allow field adjustment of motor position. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM, static pressure, and maximum fan RPM. D. Steel fan components shall have an electrostatically applied, baked polyester powder coating. Each component shall be coated with a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder finish. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method. E. Wheel shall be steel, non-overloading, high efficiency mixed-flow type. Contoured single thickness blades shall incorporate 3-D curvature for maximum efficiency across the entire surface of the blade. Blades shall be continuously welded to the backplate and inlet shroud. Hubs shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. Wheel shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. F. Motor shall meet all provisions of Section 15050 motor requirements. Motor to be mounted out of the airstream and be provided with a motor cover/belt guard. The cover shall have ventilation openings. Provide a NEMA 1 disconnect switch on casing. Motor pulley to be adjustable. G. Blower shaft shall be AISI C-1045 hot rolled and accurately turned, ground and polished. Shafting shall be sized for a critical speed of at least 125% of maximum RPM. H. Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball or roller type in a cast iron pillow block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. I. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AIR HANDLING FANS A. Install fans where indicated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor and ceiling construction, and electrical work as necessary to interface installation of air handling equipment with other work. C. Access: Provide access space around fans for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not operate fans for any other purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. E. Install floor-mounted fans on reinforced concrete pad in accordance with Section 15050. F. Mount fans on vibration isolators, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Section 15240. G. Electric Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer with rotation in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. If there is no rotation arrow supplied by manufacturer, install a correct rotation arrow. H. Refer to Section 15880 - Air Distribution & Sheet Metal. Provide ductwork, accessories and flexible connections as indicated. 3.2 DRYER BOOSTER FANS A. Install Pressure Sensor Switch as indicated on instructions. B. Fan shall be installed a minimum of 15 lineal feet from dryer outlet to minimize the potential for lint loading on the fan wheel. 1. Exception: Fan may be installed closer to dryer outlet provided a secondary lint filter is installed between the dryer outlet and the fan inlet. C. Positive pressure switch shall be attached to the fan in a vertical orientation to allow for proper operation of the switch. D. Secondary Lint Filter Box: Mount box level with access door placed for frequent access and cleaning at 48-54" above the finished floor, and the viewport window can be seen from front of the dryer. E. Coordinate with Division 16 Contractor to properly wire pressure switch and fan. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. END OF SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following work: 1. Ducting Materials. 2. Low Pressure Ductwork. 3. Manufactured Duct Joints. 4. Casings. 5. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ductwork. 6. Residential Dryer Ductwork. 7. Recessed Dryer Wall Box. 8. Duct Liner. 9. Damper Operator Hardware. 10. Manual Volume Dampers. 11. Factory-made Flexible Ductwork. 12. Factory-made Flexible Metal Ductwork. 13. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. 14. Access Door Hardware. 15. Duct Access Doors. 16. Flexible Duct Connections. 17. Louvers. 18. Brick Vent Louvers. 19. Fire Dampers. 20. Combination Fire Smoke Dampers. 21. Gravity Backdraft Dampers. 22. Motorized Control Dampers. 23. Pressure Rated Chimneys. 24. Sound Attenuators. 25. Barometric Damper. 26. Flue Gas Expansion Joints. 27. Filters and Accessories. 28. Air Filter Gauges. 1.2 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Motorized dampers provided under Section 15950. B. Louvers provided under Section 10210. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this Section. Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Section 15880 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE, ANSI, ACGIH, ARI, ASA, AMCA, NEBB, ASTM NFPA SMACNA and UL Standards apply for all air distribution, gas vent, chimneys and sheet metal products and methods of testing and installation. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Duct sizes indicated on Construction Documents are clear inside dimensions. Where lined ductwork is indicated, increase sheet metal duct size to accommodate required liner thickness, maintaining clear inside duct size dimensions. B. Pressure Clarifications 1. Low Pressure: 0 through 1" WG, positive or negative, air velocity 2000 feet per minute and less. 2. Medium Pressure: Greater than 1" WG but less than 6" WG positive or negative, regardless of air velocity. 3. High Pressure: 6" WG and greater regardless of air velocity. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All materials and methods of ductwork construction and use of plena shall conform to NFPA 90A, 90B and 96. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. 1. Duct Liner. 2. Damper Operator Hardware. 3. Manufactured Duct Joints. 4. Factory-made Flexible Ductwork. 5. Factory-made Flexible Metal Ductwork. 6. Access Door Hardware. 7. Duct Access Doors. 8. All Dampers. 9. Fiberglass Ductwork. 10. All Venting Products. 11. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. 12. Sound Attenuators. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Data paragraph in Section 15010. 1. All types of dampers. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. SPECIAL NOTE: Contractor shall not fabricate or install any ductwork until he has assured himself that the ductwork can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Kitchen, Landscaping, and all other Divisions of Work. Report conflicts and discrepancies promptly to the Architect. B. Provide any and all offsets and fittings required to coordinate with field conditions. The lack of coordination will not constitute a change in contract price. The contract drawings are of a schematic nature only exact duct routing and field coordination is the responsibility of the Division 15880 Contractor. 1.10 CERTIFICATES A. Submit welding certificates. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTING MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. C. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. D. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or all-thread. E. Steel Ducts: ASTM A653or ASTM A653Mgalvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 ounce per square foot for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. F. Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209, aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T5 or of equivalent strength. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on center line. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. D. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. E. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded supports. 2.3 MANUFACTURED DUCT JOINTS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Ductmate or equivalent. B. Transverse duct joints may be made with manufactured components of standard catalog manufacture. C. Construction of the duct, such as gage and reinforcing shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer an as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. 2.4 DRYER WALL BOX A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Dryerbox or prior approved equivalent. B. General 1. Deep drawn manufacturing process and made in the USA. 2. Extension rim protrudes from nailing flange 7/8". 3. Total of eight 3/16" mounting holes (4 on each side). 4. Sides are tapered to allow for nesting of multiple boxes. 5. Surface is clean of any oil residue and will adhere paint. 6. Instruction sheet attached to rear panel. 7. Incorporate a Gas Port knock-out. C. Dryerbox Model 425 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. 22 gauge aluminized steel weighing 4.14 pounds each. 2. Top port measures 4 1/8" with very slight oval shape. 3. Distance from nailing flange to rear of box is 4 1/4". 4. Overall measurements: 21" h x 12 1/2" w x 5 1/8" deep. 5. Inside measures 9 1/2" wide x 18 1/4" tall. D. Dryerbox Model 350 1. 22 gauge aluminized steel weighing 4.03 pounds each. 2. Top port measures 4 7/8" x 3 1/8" oval shape. 3. Distance from nailing flange to rear of box is 3 1/2". 4. Overall measurements: 21" h x 12 1/2" w x 4 3/8" deep. 5. Inside measures 9 1/2" wide x 18 1/4" tall. 2.5 DUCT LINER A. Acceptable manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Manville, Owens- Corning, Knauf, Certainteed. B. Flexible duct liner insulation made of glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin. Airstream side of liner to be coated for erosion prevention and be labeled "NFPA 90" or with UL label. C. Suitable for air velocities through 4000 feet per minute and air temperature up to 250°F. D. Minimum Sound Absorption Coefficient based on Type "A" Mounting per ASTM E795. Thickness 1.5 Pounds per Cubic Foot Density Sound Absorption Coefficient (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 1” 0.10 0.25 0.47 0.66 0.82 0.85 0.55 1.5” 0.20 0.40 0.71 0.86 0.91 0.85 0.70 2” 0.22 0.49 0.83 0.89 0.89 0.91 0.8 E. Minimum Sound Absorption Coefficient based on Type "A" Mounting per ASTM E795. Thickness 2.0 Pounds per Cubic Foot Density Sound Absorption Coefficient (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC ½” 0.04 0.12 0.28 0.47 0.53 0.76 0.40 1” 0.10 0.29 0.53 0.72 0.83 0.84 0.60 1.5” 0.2 0.42 0.8 0.93 0.93 0.88 0.75 2” 0.24 0.57 0.9 0.95 0.95 0.96 0.85 F. Minimum Sound Absorption Coefficient based on Type "A" Mounting per ASTM E795. Thickness 3.0 Pounds per Cubic Foot Density Sound Absorption Coefficient (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC ½” 0.05 0.12 0.29 0.51 0.68 0.81 0.40 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Thickness 3.0 Pounds per Cubic Foot Density Sound Absorption Coefficient (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 1” 0.05 0.25 0.57 0.78 0.87 0.89 0.60 1.5” 0.20 0.46 0.82 0.94 0.95 0.91 0.8 2” 0.27 0.72 1.04 1.02 0.96 0.92 0.95 2.6 DAMPER OPERATOR HARDWARE A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Ventfabrics or equivalent. B. Regulators and End Bearings. Damper Shaft Length 12” or less Ventlok #620 Regulator 12” to 20” Ventlok #635 Regulator and #607 Berings Larger Dampers: Ventlok #640 or #641 Regulator and #607 Bearings C. Provide equivalent model elevated bases for insulated ducts. 2.7 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12"x30". C. Fabricate multi-blade dampers of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes of 12"x48". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware and linkage. D. Splitter dampers will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer in writing. E. Except in round ductwork 12" and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where damper shafts exceed 30" in length, provide regulator at both ends. G. Dampers larger than 48"x48" shall be made in multiple section using connecting rods or bars. Jack shafts shall be a minimum 1" diameter with larger sizes as required for damper torque. Jack shaft supports to match damper frame material. H. On insulated duct, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases or adapters. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.8 FACTORY-MADE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK (Low Pressure) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Thermaflex MK- E or equivalent. B. Duct system shall consist of factory-fabricated assembly using a spring steel wire with an inner liner of continuous non-perforated flexible material. Duct shall be wrapped with fiberglass insulation, 1" thick, having a "k" factor of 0.25 maximum and be covered with a metalized polyester film vapor barrier. C. Operating temperature range -20°F to 250°F. 4"-16" size: Working pressure capability of 6" WG positive. 18"-20" size: Working pressure capability of 4" WG positive and a maximum 4000 feet per minute. D. Entire assembly to be Class 1 air duct per UL 181. E. Accessories: Spin-in collar with adjustable damper including positive locking regulator damper hardware. 2.9 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Definitions 1. Grille: A covering for an air passage opening which can be located in the sidewall, ceiling, floor or sill. Covering style can be varied and will function. 2. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly covering an air opening. 3. Diffuser: An air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes, and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air. B. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: 1. Fixed Vane: Metal-Aire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Nailor, EH Price. 2. Adjustable Vane: Metal-Aire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Nailor, EH Price. 3. Perforated: Metal-Aire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Nailor, EH Price. 4. Linear Bar: Metal-Aire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Nailor, EH Price. 5. Linear Slot: Metal-Aire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Nailor, EH Price. 6. Note: When collecting submittal data, submitted style must match style as indicated on Construction Documents. C. Fixed Vane (Supply, Return, Exhaust and Transfer Air) 1. Ceiling Installation: Fixed vane grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of steel frames with removable core made of either steel or aluminum. Frame shall have integral collar. Supply air outlets shall have continuously gasketed frame and core shall have integral bracing to prevent rattling of vanes. Surface mounted and dropped frame margin size shall be sufficiently large enough to cover ceiling openings. Lay-in and spline frame margin sizes shall conform to the modular ceiling support grid. Provide air throw pattern and accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. Finish shall be off-white unless indicated otherwise. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Sidewall Installation: Fixed vane grilles and registers shall be constructed of steel frames with either steel or aluminum cores. Surface mounted frame margins shall be sufficiently large enough to cover wall openings. Provide accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. Finish shall be off-white unless indicated otherwise. D. Adjustable Vane (Supply Air only) 1. Ceiling Installation: Adjustable vane grilles, registers and diffusers shall be of steel or aluminum construction with adjustable curved blades. Surface mounted frame margin shall be sufficiently large enough to cover ceiling opening and shall be continuously gasketed. Lay-in frame margin shall conform to the modular ceiling support grid. Finish shall be off-white. Provide air flow pattern and accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. 2. Sidewall Installation: Adjustable vane grilles and registers shall be of steel or aluminum construction with adjustable flat blades providing both vertical and horizontal air deflection control. Frame margin shall be continuously gasketed and be large enough to cover wall opening. Finish to be off-white unless indicated otherwise. E. Perforated Face (Supply, Return, Exhaust and Transfer Air) 1. Ceiling Installation: Perforated face grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of steel with 3/16" diameter holes on 1/4" staggered centers, minimum 51% free area, a duct collar and frame to accommodate lay-in, spline, surface and snap-in ceiling requirements. Perforated face shall be removable and have hinges to hold face after unlatching. Supply air outlets shall be provided with adjustable blades, located at the duct collar, for modifying discharge air throw pattern. Air throw pattern controller with blades or deflectors attached to the perforated face are not permitted. Pattern controllers having individually adjustable blades shall be provided with a tension devices to maintain blade position in addition to any incidental hinge friction. Finish shall be off-white unless indicated otherwise. Provide air throw patterns and accessories indicated on Construction Documents. F. Linear Bar (Supply, Return, Exhaust and Transfer Air) 1. Sidewall and Ceiling Installation: Linear bar grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Cores shall receive perpendicular supports, on 12" centers, located behind fixed face bars. Outlets and inlets installed in plaster and gypsum board surfaces shall be provided with a mounting frame to permit acceptable surface finishing. Provide core, frame and border styles with accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. Finish to be aluminum unless indicated otherwise. 2. Floor Installation: Linear bar grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Core shall be heavy-duty style with perpendicular supports, on 9" centers, located behind fixed face bars. Provide core, frame and border styles with accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. Finish to be aluminum unless indicated otherwise. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Sill Installation: Linear bar grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Cores shall receive perpendicular supports, on 12" centers, located behind fixed face bars. Outlets and inlets installed in plaster and gypsum board surfaces shall be provided with a mounting frame to permit acceptable surface finishing. Provide core, frame and border styles with accessories as indicated on Construction Documents. Finish to be aluminum unless indicated otherwise. G. Linear Slot (Supply, Return, Exhaust and Transfer Air) 1. Ceiling Installation: Linear slot grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Supply outlets shall receive pattern controllers to permit 180° adjustment in air throw. Return inlets, exhaust inlets and transfer inlets/outlets shall not receive pattern controllers. Outlets and inlets in plaster and gypsum board surfaces shall be provided with a mounting frame to permit acceptable surface finishing. Core to be provided with minimum 1-1/8" border. Mounting frame style to match ceiling type. Slot size to be 1" wide unless indicated otherwise. Provide concealed mounting bracket, end caps and alignment strips/pins. Provide accessories as indicated. Finish to be off-white unless indicated otherwise. 2. Models of acceptable manufacturers are Metal-Aire Series 6000, Titus ML-39 (38,37), Krueger Series 1900, Anemosat SLAD and J&J Register Series 2200. H. Filter Return Grilles 1. Wherever filter return grilles are installed, the Division 15 Contractor shall provide 1" thick disposable filters, sized to match the grille. 2.10 ACCESS DOOR HARDWARE A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Ventfabrics Ventlok Series or equivalent. B. Latches, hinges and gasketing. 1. Doors less than 4 square feet - Series 100. 2. Doors 4 to 8 square feet - Series 200. 3. Larger doors and in all medium pressure systems - Series 300. 2.11 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. UL-181 listed fire-resistant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 ounces per square yard, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.13 LOUVERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Those that are current AMCA members and have their louvers tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and comply with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. B. Provide stationary louvers with heads, joints, flanges, mullions and sills required for each location and size. Extended sills are required where louvers are not flush with outside surface of wall. Blade angles allowed 35 to 45 degrees. C. Louver Specification Louvers 24”x24” and Smaller Manufacturer: Ruskin Frame Depth: 4” Model No.: ELF437D Interior Screen: ¼” Blade Type: Drainable Material: Aluminum Blade Gauge: 0.125” Finish Mill, Field Painted Frame Gauge: 0.125” Louvers Larger than 24”x24” Manufacturer: Ruskin Frame Depth: 6” Model No.: ELF6375D Interior Screen: ¼” Blade Type: Drainable Material: Aluminum Blade Gauge: 0.125” Finish Mill, Field Painted Frame Gauge: 0.125” Architectural Louvers Manufacturer: Construction Specialists, Inc. Frame Depth: 7” Model No.: RS-7315 Interior Screen: ½” Blade Type: Drainable Material: Aluminum Blade Gauge: 0.081” Finish Mill, Field Painted Frame Gauge: 0.081” AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. See plans for size and use. 2.14 BRICK VENT LOUVERS A. Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents: Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125-inch nominal thickness, assembled by welding; with 18-by-14- mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating weep holes, continuous drip at sill, and integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design and construction. B. Cast-Aluminum Wall Vents: One-piece, cast-aluminum louvers and frames; with 18- by-14-mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design and construction. C. Dampers: Aluminum blades and frames mounted on inside of wall vents; operated from exterior with Allen wrench in socket-head cap screw. Fabricate operating mechanism from Type 304 stainless-steel components. 2.15 FIRE DAMPERS A. Provide all fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 90A as indicated on drawings. Fusible links shall be 165°F and UL listed. B. All fire dampers shall be classified and labeled under UL 555 and local building code. Fire dampers shall be classified 1-1/2 hours for walls, partitions and floors having a fire resistance of less than 3 hours. C. Installation Arrangements and Styles 1. Type A Style (blades in the air stream) shall be installed in masonry walls. 2. Type B Style (blades out of the air stream) shall be installed in non-masonry walls and all types of floor construction. 3. Round and flat oval ducts shall receive square or rectangular dampers have duct connections matching, etc. The required shape and meeting the above wall/floor installation styles above. 4. Horizontal dampers shall include blade lock and stainless steel closure spring. D. Integral fire damper sleeves shall meet UL and NFPA requirements for such sleeves. 2.16 COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide all combination fire smoke dampers in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL and as indicated on drawings. B. All combination fire smoke dampers shall be classified and labeled per UL 555S and local building codes including integral, sleeves and motor actuators. All components to be factory assembled. Dampers shall be functional after 1/2 hr exposure to 250°F. Damper leakage shall be no higher than 10 cfm/sq.ft. at 1" WG, Leakage Class II. Damper shall have end switches to indicate open or close status at remote location. C. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf. 3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 4. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300in. x 1bf. 5. Electrical Connection: 115V, single phase, 60 Hz. 2.17 GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Current AMCA members meeting specifications. B. Gravity backdraft dampers, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. C. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balance backdraft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel with blades of maximum 6" width, with flexible vinyl sealed edges meeting NFPA 90A, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, plated steel pivot pin and adjustable counterweight to permit setting for varying differential static pressure, (or adjustable tension return spring). 2.18 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Ruskin CD50 or equivalent. B. Provide parallel or opposed blade action as required. C. Frame shall be extruded aluminum with 0.125" nominal wall thickness. D. Blades shall be airfoil shaped constructed of extruded aluminum matching frame grade quality with a maximum width of 6", with thrust bearings at end of every blade. E. Seals shall include extruded vinyl blade edge seals and flexible metal compression type joints seals. F. Bearings to be molded synthetic. Linkage to be concealed in frame. Axles to be 1/2" plated steel hex. G. Finish to be standard mill. Maximum single damper size to be 60" wide by 72" high. Jack-shafts shall be 1" pipe or larger as needed by torque requirements. H. Minimum performance shall be per the following schedule: Damper Leakage Characteristics When Closed AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Damper Width Leakage at Velocity & 1” Pressure Differential Maximum System Pressure 60” 2.4 cfm/s.f. at 3000 fpm 3.5” 48” 2.7 cfm/s.f. at 4000 fpm 6.2” 36” 3.0 cfm/s.f. at 5000 fpm 8.5” 24” 3.0 cfm/s.f. at 5000 fpm 10.75” 12” 3.0 cfm/s.f. at 6000 fpm 13.0” 2.19 FIBERGLASS DUCT SYSTEMS A. Fiberglass duct systems are not permitted on this project unless specifically noted otherwise. 2.20 VENTING SYSTEMS (PRESSURE-RATED FOR BOILERS) A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: Schebler or equivalent. B. UL listed as building heating appliance chimney, double wall for positive pressure. C. Materials 1. Outer Jacket: Aluminum coated steel. 2. Inner Pipe: Type 304 stainless steel for gas. 3. Lining: refer to boiler schedule on drawings. 4. Sealants to match manufacturer's recommendation for fuel burned and flue temperature realized. 5. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory items including flanged boiler kits, clamp flanges, elbows, increasers, tees, wyes, drain sections, wall supports, wall guides, floor guides, plate supports, roof supports, ventilated roof thimbles, flashings, storm collars, exit cones, open stack top rings and stack caps as indicated and required for complete installation. 6. Provide double-line drawings of Vent System layout for review by Architect/Engineer. Identify all components and sizes. 2.21 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brausch, Armstrong, Macurco, Vulcain. B. Gas Detector/Transmitter: Microprocessor controlled with electrochemical sensor, factory calibrated. Detector shall utilize low voltage wiring, with power loss fail-safe control, external alarm contacts and built-in self test and on/off fan switch. Unit shall interface with the control panel. C. Monitor Unit/Control Panel: Microprocessor controlled, with static discharge protection, and designed to operate with low voltage wiring. Unit shall have battery backup for memory and time clock. Unit shall have corrosion resistant enclosure with power loss fail-safe control. Unit shall have up to 10 programmable fan zones. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Monitor unit requirements: Discrete LEDS shall indicate warning, alarm and sensor status. Four-digit led display for relay outputs shall consist of : (1) common fault relay, (1) common alarm relay, and (1) common warning relay. All relays are SPDT with dry contacts rated at 10 amps, 115 VAC resistive. Warning and alarm relays are field adjustable for 0-5 minute delay, field configured for latching or non-latching and energized or de-energized operations. E. Audible alarm: The audible alarm shall have either a solid on or a variable sound pulse. Pulse frequency shall increase as higher concentrations of gases are detected PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. Provide sheet metal duct systems, connections, dampers, duct turns, housings, hinged sheet metal doors and necessary removable access doors for the complete supply, return and exhaust systems. Provide access doors in ductwork wherever required for observation and maintenance of dampers. B. Aluminum ducts in the pool area shall be hung with aluminum hangers and stainless steel screws shall be used for any connections, to avoid rust. C. Duct Workmanship: Duct work to be constructed and erected in a workmanlike manner. Ducts to be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration under every condition of operation. The internal ends of slip joints to be made in the direction of the air flow. The ducts to be securely attached to building construction in an approved manner. Changes in dimensions and shape of the ducts shall be gradual. Duct sizes fall within the limiting dimensions indicated on the drawings unless otherwise approved. D. Duct Turns: 90 degree elbows up to 18" wide and 45 degree elbows consist of an inside radius of not less than 1/2" width of the duct to be furnished with single blade duct vanes with 2-1/4" blade spacing. 90 degree elbows larger than 18" to be equipped with airfoil type duct vanes. Shop fabricated duct vanes to conform to details of the SMACNA HVAC duct construction manual. Curved elbows shall have a center line radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct unless indicated otherwise. E. Flexible Connections: Provide sound isolating flexible connections on the inlet and outlet of each fan to which duct connectors are made. At least 6" slack to be allowed in fabric connections to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork. The fabric can either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar frames at each end to prevent air leakage. F. Dampers: Opposed-blade type volume dampers to be installed where called for on the drawings or otherwise necessary for proper balancing. G. Install motorized control dampers where called for on the Drawings. H. Ducts to be sealed airtight and tested per SMACNA standards. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Where joints are not accessible for proper sealing, hand holes should be cut in duct and joints sealed from the inside. Special care to be taken to seal duct corners. J. Wherever exposed ducts pass through walls, floors or ceilings, a 2" flanged sheet metal collar fitting collar fitting close around ducts to be slipped along duct with flange is tight against finished surface covering edges of openings and presenting a neat appearance. Lock collar to duct. Wherever ducts penetrate floors or fire walls, seal as to maintain fire wall integrity. K. Access doors shall be installed at all automatic, fire and fire smoke dampers. L. Wherever ducts penetrate floors or fire walls, install safing insulation to maintain fire wall integrity, per Architectural Specifications. M. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. N. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers, duct smoke detectors, firestats and controllers. O. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 1. Ductwork not yet installed and stored on site shall be elevated above the floor surface to eliminate direct contact with floor surface and be protected from weather and damage. 2. Openings of assembled lined duct sections and entire sheets of unassembled lined ductwork shall be covered with taped plastic sheeting to prevent the accumulation of rain, snow or other form of direct moisture contact. 3. Ductwork or portions of ductwork with liner exposed to rain, snow or other forms of direct moisture contact shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. P. Where bellmouth fittings are specifically called for on Drawings, provide standard bellmouth fittings per SMACNA Standards. Q. Medium and High Pressure Ductwork. 1. Do not use air turns on high velocity ductwork unless specifically called out on Drawings. Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Weld in place. 2. Seal ductwork per SMACNA Standards for Seal Class A. Where joints are not accessible for proper sealing, cut hand holes in duct and seal the joints from the inside. 3. Conduct a complete tightness test as outlined in the SMACNA High Velocity Duct Manual. 4. Total leakage of each high-velocity duct system not to exceed 1% (one percent) of total CFM requirements for any one fan distribution system. R. Manufactured Duct Joints: The installation of the manufactured duct joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 S. Duct liner shall not be provided in ductwork downstream of steam humidifier manifolds. 3.2 DUCT SYSTEM MATERIAL, PRESSURE AND SEALING CLASS SCHEDULE Duct System Material, Pressure and Sealing Class Schedule Duct System Material Pressure Class (WC) Seal Class Residential Round Supply Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet Galvanized Steel + 1.0” B Residential Rectangular Supply Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet Galvanized Steel + 1.0” B Residential Rectangular Return Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Fan Unit Galvanized Steel - 1.0” B Residential Exhaust Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Fan Unit Galvanized Steel - 1.0” B Residential Exhaust Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet Galvanized Steel + 1.0” B Residential Rectangular Transfer Air Ductwork Galvanized Steel - 0.5” C Residential Dryer Venting – Rigid Portion Only Galvanized Steel + 2.0” A Corridor Makeup Air Supply Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlets Galvanized Steel + 2.0” B Restaurant/Retail Rectangular & Round Supply Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet Galvanized Steel + 2.0” A Restaurant/Retail Return Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Fan Unit Galvanized Steel - 1.0” B Restaurant/Retail Exhaust Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Outdoor Fan Galvanized Steel - 1.0” B Restaurant/Retail Rectangular Transfer Air Ductwork Galvanized Steel - 0.5” C Restaurant/Retail Combustion Air Intake & Relief Galvanized Steel ± 0.5” C Restaurant Kitchen Exhaust Air Ductwork from Hood to Fan on Roof Carbon Steel - 2.0” A Restaurant Kitchen Makeup Air Ductwork from Air Unit to Air Outlet and/or Hood Connection Galvanized Steel + 2.0” A Restaurant Dishwasher Exhaust Ductwork from Hood or Dishwasher to Fan Aluminum or Stainless Steel - 1.0” A Restaurant Dishwasher Exhaust Ductwork from Fan to Air Outlet Aluminum or Stainless Steel + 1.0” A Shower/Locker Exhaust Air Aluminum - 2.0” B Swimming Pool Supply Air Aluminum + 1.0” B AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Duct System Material, Pressure and Sealing Class Schedule Duct System Material Pressure Class (WC) Seal Class Swimming Pool Return/Exhaust Air Aluminum - 1.0” C 3.3 DRYER WALL BOX A. Visit and observe location for dryer wall box to be certain box will fit properly in wall and allow ductwork to be routed as indicated on the drawings. B. Install aligned with floor and studs per manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend rigid ductwork through opening for a sufficient distance to adequately attach the flexible transition duct provided with the dryer. 3.4 DRYER VENT DUCTWORK – RESIDENTIAL A. Assemble residential dryer vent ductwork without use of fasteners penetrating the ductwork that otherwise may collect lint. This excludes screws and similar fasteners that protrude into the air stream. B. The male end of joints shall point away from dryer in the direction of air flow to minimize the accumulation of lint. C. Ductwork shall be installed such that longitudinal joints shall be at either side of the duct, not at the top where inspection and sealing is inhibited nor at the bottom where potential leaks may occur due to condensation of moisture. D. Seal all longitudinal and transverse joints with a hand-applied mastic of contrasting color to that of the ductwork for ease of inspection during construction. Application of sealant shall begin at ceiling and/or wall duct penetration near dryer and continue to the exterior wall or roof duct penetration. Use of adhesive tape is not acceptable. 3.5 DUCT LINER A. Dimensions of lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after lining has been installed. B. Sound linings to be held in place with mechanical fasteners as per the latest SMACNA duct liner application standard, with joints and any tears to be coated with sealant or adhesive. The transverse joints to be coated prior to installation so that the ends of the liner are compressed together while the adhesive is still moist, forming a seal of the leading and training edge of each joint. Excess adhesive to be brushed to an even finish over the joint. C. Provide continuous sheet metal edge protectors at entering and leaving edges of lined duct sections. D. Extent of Liner in rectangular ductwork. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Thickness & Location of Liner in Ductwork Thickness Location 1/2” Residential Rectangular Supply Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet 1/2” Residential Rectangular Return Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Fan Unit 1/2” Residential Rectangular Transfer Air Ductwork 1” Corridor Rectangular Supply Air Ductwork from Fan to Air Outlets 1” Restaurant/Retail Rectangular Supply Air Ductwork from Fan Unit to Air Outlet (future) 1” Restaurant/Retail Return Air Ductwork from Air Inlet to Fan Unit (future) 1/2” Restaurant/Retail Rectangular Transfer Air Ductwork 1” Toilet and general exhaust ductwork upstream of fan for a minimum of 20’-0”. 1” Transfer air ducts. 3.6 FACTORY-MADE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK (Low Pressure) A. Use factory-made flexible ductwork on low pressure supply air duct systems to make final connections to grilles, registers and diffusers as indicated on drawings. Maximum length of extended flexible duct shall be eight feet. B. Install flexible ductwork in a fully extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. C. Suspend flexible ductwork from structure on 35" centers using duct manufacturer's hanger system or with 1" width minimum hanger material as per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. D. Any tears in vapor barrier up to 12" long may be repaired using 2"-3" wide adhesive tape suited for vapor barrier use. Tears long than 12" long shall require replacement of the entire flexible duct section. E. Any tears occur in the inner core, replace entire flexible duct connection. 3.7 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of grilles, registers and diffusers, making necessary adjustments in position to conform with Architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement. C. Section 15880 Contractor shall be responsible for final coordination of location and proper type of each grille, register and diffuser used on the project. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Provide balancing dampers on each duct take-off to diffusers and grilles unless indicated otherwise on Construction Documents. E. Install diffusers, registers and grilles to ductwork with air tight connection and allowing service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors and fire dampers. F. Paint, matte black, the interior of ductwork visible through grilles, registers and diffusers. Do not paint fusible link assemblies. G. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.8 LOUVERS A. Coordinate with General Contractor for opening requirements. Set louvers aligned with structure and as indicated on Architectural plans. 3.9 FIRE DAMPERS/COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Set fire dampers so as to maintain UL ratings. UL label shall be visible for inspection by building officials. Adjust for proper action. 3.10 GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Provide gravity backdraft dampers on all exhaust fan duct systems and as indicated on Drawings. Do not provide gravity type where motorized control dampers serve the same purpose or where specifically excluded by notation. 3.11 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS A. Provide parallel blade action at where motorized backdraft dampers are indicated and where return/outside air dampers are indicated for creating mixed air upstream of coils or air handlers. B. Coordinate with Section 15975 Contractor for location of shaft extension for operator position. 3.12 VENTING SYSTEMS (PRESSURE-RATED FOR BOILERS & GENERATORS) A. Provide pressure rated venting all forced draft combustion gas-fired equipment such as boilers, water heaters, unit heaters, etc. B. Coordinate with General Contractor to maintain clearances to combustibles and non-combustibles per the products UL listing and local building codes. C. Route venting so as to provide adequate clearances and head room for maintenance personnel accessibility, maintaining product's UL listing. D. Prior to equipment connection seal outlet and inlets, test as a duct per SMACNA to 2" of pressure for leakage. Record results and submit with other ducting test reports in O&M manual. AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean all duct systems, equipment and vents to "like-new condition" and as specified in NASMA prior to turnover to Owner. B. After installation of diffusers, registers and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers and grilles that have damaged finishes. 3.14 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM A. Division 15 Contractor shall provide components and mount the monitoring control panel. Division 15 Contractor shall supply Division 16 Contractor with CO Sensors for mounting on matching size j-box. B. All power, communication and relay wiring shall be by Division 15 Contractor. Communication wiring shall be routed in conduit separate from power & relay wiring. Division16 Contractor shall provide a single 240VA 24/120 volt transformer in a separate NEMA-1 panel to power the CO monitoring system. Wiring from the sensor to the central panel shall be 4-conductor when using the sensors provide by Division 15. Refer to manufacturers wiring diagram and make all connections. Voltage supplied to the sensor shall be a minimum of 18 VDC and a maximum of 30 VDC. Division 16 Contractor shall mount CO sensors. Provide 24V wiring in conduit to relays in the automatic starter for each garage exhaust fan to activate fans simultaneously upon signal from CO control panel. Start/stop of fan to be fully controlled by the CO monitoring system. C. Maintenance requirements: The system shall be factory tested and calibrated. System shall be automatically zero relative humidity and temperature compensated and not require field calibrations. D. Manufacturers capability: As a minimum, the manufacturer shall be capable of providing toll-free factory assistance. E. The CO monitoring system shall be capable of activating garage exhaust fans upon detection of a CO level exceeding 9-PPM anytime during and eight-hour period with a maximum concentration not exceeding 25-PPM during a one-hour period. F. Refer to Specification Section 15980 for Sequence of Operation. END OF SECTION 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15880 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15975 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a Building Management and Control System (BMCS) incorporating Direct Digital Control (DDC), energy management, and equipment monitoring and control consisting of the following elements: 1. Microcomputer-based remote control panels interfacing directly with sensors, actuators and environmental delivery systems (i.e., HVAC equipment, etc.). 2. A two-wire communication network to allow data exchange between remote panels and the central Building Management computer. 3. A personal computer (PC) based central and software functioning as the primary operator interface for the BMCS. 4. Pneumatic, electric and electronic controls for all items indicated on drawings and described hereinafter including dampers, valves, panels, compressed air plant, and pneumatic and electrical installation. B. Submittals, installation, data, entry, programming, start-up, test and validation of BMCS, instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of BMCS, "as-built" documentation, and system warranty. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Valves, flow switches, thermal wells and dampers. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15975 Contractor shall review all Sections of Division 15 for coordination and extent of Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following manufacturers and installers are acceptable to provide the controls required for this project: Acceptable Manufacturers Acceptable Installers Honeywell BODE Group – Denver, CO Johnson Factory Office – Denver, CO Invensys (Siebe/Landis & GyrStaefa) Long & Associates – Englewood, CO Delta Setpoint Systems – Denver, CO Andover Westover – Denver, CO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. The system shall be installed by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the BMCS contractor with full responsibility for proper operation of the BMCS including debugging and proper calibration of each component in the entire system. Contractor shall have an in-place support facility within twenty-five miles of the site with technical staff, spare part inventory, all necessary test and diagnostic equipment, and a full-service department. C. Codes and Approvals 1. The complete BMCS installation shall be in strict accordance to the national and local electrical codes and the electrical section of these specifications. All devices designed for or used in line voltage applications shall be UL Listed. 2. All microprocessor-based remote devices shall be UL916 Listed. 3. All electrical environmental control and monitoring devices shall be UL429 and/or UL873 Listed. 4. The following current NFPA Standards and Guides are applicable: a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code b. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning Systems c. NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating, Air conditioning D. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC regulation Part 15, Section 15 governing radio frequency electromagnetic interference. E. All systems components shall be fault tolerant. 1. Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at ±3 hertz variation in line frequency. 2. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus-connected devices shall be a.c. coupled or equivalent so that any single device failures will not disrupt or halt bus communication. 3. All real-time clock and data file RAM shall be battery or capacitor backed. 1.5 ACCEPTABLE BIDDER AND BID PROCEDURES A. Technical Proposal: It is the intent of this specification to define a state-of-the-art distributed computerized Building Management and Control System which is user friendly, has known reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed, installed, implemented, and supported by a local office of the manufacturer by people skilled in providing functional and efficient solutions to building system needs. B. To allow evaluation of contractors and systems, a detailed technical proposal shall be provided at the time of bidding, formatted in accordance to this outline. C. Each contractor shall submit with his/her proposal a summary of the sections of this Specification with which the proposal cannot comply. D. The 15975 Contractor will submit his bid and be a direct subcontractor to the Division 15 Subcontractor. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Central Computer 1. Day-to-day interactive operation interface description with sample English/Graphic displays, penetration scheme for display/command and logical configuring, and examples of alarms and data in various modes (disabled, fixed, not responding, etc.). 2. Short cut penetration schemes for direct graphic, point, and command access. 3. Color graphic system description with sample system displays, color graphic penetration and command schemes, graphic creation means and library of symbols. 4. Interactive data-editing scheme for modification of system data base and parameters including operators, peripheral assignments, system configuration, text, time schedules, point monitoring limits, event-initiated control, and control application program parameters. 5. Custom menuing. 6. Data access control and security scheme. 7. Report description including selection scheme and sample reports. 8. Programming facility including language and canned packages of sub-routines and intrinsic functions. 9. Sample sequence of operations. 10. Sample custom report. 11. Sample text alarm message. 12. Sample of system and point descriptor text. 13. Technical description of all hardware components. 14. Interaction of software with non-BMCS Microsoft Windows and DOS programs. F. Distributed control panel point architecture, memory, battery. 1. Functional description. 2. Alarm detection speed. 3. Control and power loss capabilities. 4. Life safety interfacing. 5. Lighting control interfacing. G. Communication network architecture, point, panels. H. Available services for full system maintenance, software update and modifications, hardware spare parts, adds and changes, system training and training classes. I. Contractor experience/capability, size 1. Organization with key brief resumes. 2. Strong history of local support of management, engineering, installation, and maintenance locations and business. 3. Local experience on similar jobs with references. 4. Local facility description. J. Vendor's standard specification data literature. 1.6 SUBMITTALS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract and Part 3 of this Section: 1. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and turn data conductors. 2. List of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 4. System configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 5. Descriptive data and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software. 6. Control drawings on AutoCAD. B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each control component exposed to occupied spaces. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. C. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. D. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data in accordance with Division 1 and Operation and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. B. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed system with identified and numbered, system components and devices. C. Include step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. D. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. E. Two diskettes containing the final "as-built" AutoCAD control drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 15050 and with all building trades required to make the systems function as defined. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. C. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. D. Ensure system is completed, commissioned and fully operational at the time of turnover to the owner. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide two-year warranty from the date of owner acceptance. 1.11 CERTIFICATES A. Section 15975 Contractor shall submit a letter certifying the proper operation of all individual and combined control loops and system controls to the Architect prior to the Owner's acceptance of the project. 1.12 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying 3. Preserving confidentiality 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRALIZED HOST STATION (CHS) A. One Centralized Host Station (CHS) shall be provided. The CHS shall, in conjunction with the network of Stand Alone Digital Controller's (SDC's) described elsewhere in this specification), and components as required, provide the performance requirements defined within this specification. B. The CHS shall include all hardware and software components to serve the centralized facility operator station provide Windows-based color graphics, facility wide access and coordination of global control strategies, and centralized documentation. C. The CHS shall include as a minimum: 1. Case: Mini-tower configuration. 2. Motherboard: PCI, 1066Mhz front-side bus, PCI Express slot. 3. Processor: Intel Pentium Core 2 Duo, 1.86GHz minimum, 2MB Level 2 cache. Intel Celeron, Pentium M and AMD CPUs will be rejected. 4. Random Access Memory: 2.0GB minimum using a maximum of two memory chips, expandable to 4.0GB. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. When installing Microsoft Windows Vista, RAM shall increased to 4GB automatically. 5. Floppy Disk Drive: one 3.5", 1.44Mb disk drive, this may be an external device connected via a USB port. 6. Tape Drive: None. 7. Optical Drive: Provide separate optical drives with the following configuration. a. CD: 48x CD-RW b. DVD: 16x DVD+/-RW c. ROM-type optical drives will be rejected. 8. Hard Disk Drive: SATA 3.0Gb/s compliant, 250Gb minimum size, 7200 rpm, 8MB cache. Provide NTFS file system. FAT32 is unacceptable 9. Video Adapter: PCI Express, 256Mb minimum, OpenGL, Microsoft Windows XP/Vista compatible. 10. Monitor: (minimum requirements) a. Type: LCD Panel, TFT active matrix. b. Size: 19” minimum, with adjustable stand. c. Input Video Signal: DVI and Analog. d. Contrast Ratio: 500:1. e. Resolution: 1280x1024 at 75Hz. f. Pitch: 0.294mm. g. Response Time: 8ms. h. Brightness: 300 cd/m2 i. Additional features such as USB ports and speakers are acceptable but undesired. 11. Sound Adapter: Integral with motherboard. 12. Speakers: Standard offering, minimum of two for left/right channel capablility. 13. Keyboard: Standard 104-key with USB connector. 14. Mouse: Microsoft USB Intellipoint Optical or equivalent, two-button plus wheel. 15. Communication Ports a. Serial: One DB-9 serial port. b. Parallel: One parallel port, ECP/EPP support for enhanced printing. 16. Universal Serial Bus: Minimum of four USB 2.0 ports, two ports accessible at front of case. 17. Local Area Network: 10/100/1000 network interface, motherboard integration acceptable. 18. Modem: Compliant with ITU V.90 Standard for 56Kps transfer rate over a standard phone line, Windows 2000/XP compatible. 19. Operating System a. Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 and media. b. Microsoft Windows XP-Home is unaccepted. c. Microsoft Windows Vista is not acceptable until after Service Pack 1 is released and in use for a minimum of three months. d. Supply and install all service packs, patches, fixes, etc. required by the operating system. e. Provide updates for software provided with system. f. Provide setup diskettes, system installation CD-ROM disks and complete documentation manuals for end-user including authentication certificates and registration cards. g. All software shall be fully licensed. 20. Provide all component setup disks in a multi-ring binder having printed or typewritten identification on the cover. Provide plastic sleeve disk holders in DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 binder with printed or typewritten identification. Include component manuals, registration numbers, etc. for end-user reference. 21. Printers a. Monochrome: Provide one of the following printers with bidirectional cable: (1) Laser (a) Minimum 15 page per minute rating. (b) 600 dpi resolution. (c) 200-sheet paper tray. (d) 4Mb RAM minimum. (e) Support for Hewlett-Packard PCL and HPGL/2. (f) Windows XP/Vista Ready. (2) Dot Matrix (a) 24-pin impact dot matrix, bidirectional in text and graphics modes. (b) Print Speed: Draft - 360 cps (12 cpi) and 300 cps (10 cpi); Letter Quality - 120 cps (12 cpi) and 100 cps (10 cpi). (c) Character Sets: 96 ASCII characters; 14 international character sets and 1 legal character set; 128 user-defined characters; Extended IBM® style graphic characters. (d) Maximum Graphics Resolution: 360 x 360 dpi. (e) Paper Feed Mechanism: Removable push/pull tractor for rear, front and bottom feed; automatic fanfold paper load; automatic single sheet paper stacking; friction feed; top and front automatic single sheet load. (f) Windows XP/Vista Ready. 22. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) a. TrippLite Omni Smart 1050VA UPS, tower format, 120-volt/1-phase, six outlets with backup and surge protection, two additional outlets having surge protection only, RJ-11 phone line communication surge protection, 28 minute of run-time at 150 watts, visual alarm, audible alarm with reset switch, circuit breaker, power management software with manual, Windows XP compatible PowerAlert monitoring software with USB port and cabling. Other manufacturers are acceptable provide these requirements are met. b. Install UPS software onto computer and setup program for monitoring UPS and safety features. 23. Miscellaneous Software Required (not included with operating system) a. Anti-Virus (1) b. Anti-Malware: Obtain a retail package for one of the following software programs and install it on the computer. Provide updates to bring machine up to current status. (1) Sunbelt Software CounterSpy, full-version. (2) Webroot SpySweeper, full version. (3) Encore Spyware Doctor, full-version. c. Adobe Acrobat Reader DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 24. Download and install the latest version of Adobe Acrobat Reader. Install all available updates D. Graphical User Interface (GUI) 1. The CHS shall be completely icon driven, multi-tasking and employing a graphical operating environment. The GUI shall not only be for real time access to any system(s) on the LAN but shall also allow the operator an easy method of information management. Information management shall mean the massaging and manipulation of any system real time or historical data into integrated applications such as report generators, spreadsheets, X/Y charts, database managers, etc. Complete file management and data transfer such as copying, moving or transferring files, automatic and manual means of "cutting and pasting" of data items from one application to another (via Dynamic Data Exchange or via Windows Clip Board "copy and paste") shall be provided as an integral part of this CHS. This CHS shall be completely Windows "compliant", meaning that a user with experience using Windows shall also be able operate this system with minimum additional training. E. Menuing and System Access 1. This CHS shall provide an easy and absolute method of menuing and system access. The menuing system shall provide the entry point into all of the CHS's array of applications and programs. This same menuing system shall also serve as the shell for the MS Windows operating system replacing the Windows Program Manager. All the CHS programs, MS Windows or MS DOS programs shall be accessible through this CHS menuing system. 2. This menuing program shall consist of a series of dynamic push buttons. Each menu push-button shall be user configurable to allow access to any of this CHS's applications. A push-button shall display a user selectable ICON and text describing visually and textually the application which it will lead the user into. As well as starting the application (such as a dynamic graphic screen, word processor or spread sheet) it will also have the capability of bringing up a specific dynamic graphic screen, word processing document or spread sheets. 3. This menuing system shall be able to call any operator menu or menus allowing complete versatility in how the menuing structure is designed and used. F. System Security 1. System security shall be on an application by application basis. During the setup or editing of a particular user the owner shall be able to enable or disable the use of any application or function within an application for each user of the system. Each user security access record for this CHS shall list each of the CHS's applications which the User has access and the functions which are permitted from within each of these applications. This shall include enabling or disabling the Windows "System Keys" allowing or not allowing the use of the Windows "Task List" or "Switch To" feature from within any application as well as granting access to any non-CHS DOS or Windows programs. The users shall be assigned discrete password names and codes, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 both of which must be entered in order to have access to any particular application or function within the system. 2. As well as application protection each user shall be assigned to a personalized menu (see Menuing and System Access). This shall allow for each user to have their own discrete menuing system for access into the various applications and dynamic graphic screens. Upon the user logging on to the system this custom menu shall be displayed allowing access into only those applications or dynamic graphics presented from this user's menu. G. Dynamic Graphics 1. The dynamic graphic portion of this CHS shall allow the operator to access any (see System Security) system information via a system penetration method. System penetration shall allow the operator to begin at an entire site plan and then zoom in to a particular area for closer inspection and then further zoom in on this area and so on until the detailed color graphic display of a desired portion of the facility is represented. The operator shall be able in this manner to penetrate to any desired system information without being required to enter any commands via the keyboard. 2. As a minimum, a graphic screen shall be designed showing the building, each floor, each major piece of mechanical equipment within each building that is being monitored/controlled, all of which will display the data for each area dynamically. All dynamic points associated with the viewed graphic shall be displayable on one graphic display. 3. Dynamic point display shall be user selectable from at least the following options: standard text readout with font, style, size, foreground and background colors and border style (3D raised or lowered) and color selectable, slider bar instruments with the same flexibility as the text point type, discrete movement animation allowing unlimited user selectable and definable animation displays for items such as dampers, gauges, fans, etc., and multi-state digital or analog animation for animating discrete incremental movement or action such as switches, lights, alarm activity, etc. Screen regions or zones shall be definable for dynamic coloration based on an assigned point. 4. By pointing and clicking on any individual dynamic point the following shall be available for display or modification from within any specific dynamic graphic display, which shall include, but not be limited to: a. The current analog or digital value may be changed. b. Charting (X/Y) of a selected point for a user given time frame. The chart shall be "tiled" onto the current display defaulting to occupy no more than one fourth of the screen, the user shall be able to move the window and adjust the size of the chart by simply clicking and dragging on the windowed chart. Trace colors and X scale shall be user configurable. Up to 4 charts shall be displayable simultaneously on one screen. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 c. Spontaneous timed override requests. The override may be set to start immediately or for any date and time in the future and to end at any date and time in the future. d. Point help shall be available for each point displayed on the screen. This shall be a user editable text screen. This help window will contain information specific to this point and its relationship to the system which is currently displayed. 5. Dynamic screen links shall be easily placed on the screen by selecting from a on screen list of linkable dynamic screens. These links shall be represented by either a dynamic command push- button or invisible button. Push-buttons shall be described by placing an Icon or text on the button face. Invisible buttons shall be used on maps, floor plans and so forth so that a user only need to click on a region or zone on the map or floor plan to link to an associated screen. These command buttons shall also be definable for use on any screen. Command buttons shall be used to execute DOS and Windows programs and associated documents or databases from any Dynamic Graphic Screen. These command buttons will be used to link each screen to a sequence of operation for the system displayed. Trend charts shall also be displayable by clicking on a command push-button assigned to a specific system trend. Linking a trend chart to a push-button shall be a matter of selecting from a list of trend names. 6. Each mechanical and electrical system that is monitored/controlled by the system shall have a unique dynamic color graphic. The display will be provided by the control contractor. The display will be approved by the engineer. 7. The graphical user interface shall allow the user to easily create new displays and modify existing displays. A library of standard hvac equipment, control devices, mechanical systems, tables, lines, circles, rectangles, squares, arrows, etc. shall be provided to allow easy implementation of the changes/additions to the system. 8. The program sill allow any scanned picture or AutoCAD drawing to be displayed with dynamic data overlayed on to the display. Provide AutoCAD floor plans of the facility. H. Centralized Scheduling and Modification 1. Calendars shall be provided for displaying and modification of any of the SDCs time clock functions. The user shall be able to view an entire month's scheduling at a time. Holidays and special functions shall be clearly marked on the calendar. Calendars shall be displayed by area served. Schedule changes may be made by clicking on a day or week and entering the new schedule. Changes shall be permanent or, for one time or multiple occurrences. Global changes shall be allowed for similar or dissimilar schedules. I. Alarm Annunciation DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Upon the incidence of an alarm an alarm window shall be displayed showing the point in alarm , the time and date of the alarm and a user -selected predefined alarm message (and optionally printed to a user defined printer, printers and or VT-100 or dumb terminal devices). Alarms shall be displayed regardless of the application in use including any non-CHS DOS or Windows applications. The program shall display the current number of unacknowledged and acknowledged alarms and exceptions, and updating date and time. The user shall be able to selectively enable or disable a reminder in the event there are unacknowledged alarms. This reminder shall be both visual and audible. The user shall be able to record their own reminder messages and select the frequency at which they will play. 2. Acknowledgment of alarms shall be from the alarm "pop- up" and/or from a separate alarm summary. Acknowledgment shall be by a specific event, date range, class, or specific alarm definition and condition. Upon acknowledging the alarm, the name of the operator acknowledging the alarm and the time and date will be associated with the acknowledgment, this data will be stored to the alarm history file and printed to the chosen printers or terminal devices. 3. Automatic or manual display of associated dynamic graphic screens and trend charts shall be provided for each alarm. This shall, upon the alarm occurrence, cause an associated graphic screen and/or trend chart to be displayed. The operator shall be able to suppress the automatic display and perform the query function manually. 4. Upon exiting the alarm handling mode the user shall be placed back to the application in use at the time of alarm/exception occurrence. 5. A current alarm screen shall be provided which will dynamically display only alarms that are currently in alarm. The user shall be able to select all alarms, acknowledged and unacknowledged, as well as by class definition (i.e.: fire, HVAC, building, etc.). As alarms are returned from their respective alarm states the current alarm screen shall be dynamically updated to reflect the change. From this current alarm screen the user shall be able to select an alarm and display an associated graphic screen or trend chart. J. Trend Management 1. The CHS shall automatically perform time based periodic collection of real time point data and subsequently store it to the systems hard disk. There shall be local and remote modes of operation. Local collection shall allow the CHS to directly query the SDCs for individual point samples. Remote collection shall mean that the SDCs collect and store trend data on individual points and then release the entire trend table(s) upon a request from the CHS. 2. Storage and manipulation of sampled points shall only be limited by disk space. Sampling rates shall be user selectable from instantaneous (once a second or less) to once a week. Collection of data shall be user selectable to start and stop on specific times and dates. 3. Charting of the trend data shall be an integral part of the trend management program. Third party graphing packages such as Excel or Lotus 123 shall not DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 be required to implement this program. Multiple points shall be chartable. Four X/Y charts may be run simultaneously displaying either real time data (instantaneous) or historical. Y scaling shall be either automatic or user selectable for any chart displayed, each chart may have different scaling. X scales shall be user selectable allowing for display of data over a wide range of times and dates. Multiple years of data shall be allowed. The chart display shall be capable of displaying a window of time as short as 15 seconds and up to as long as 4 years. Analytical data shall be displayed for selected points. This analytical data shall consist of the average, high and low values. K. Reporting 1. The report section of the CHS shall be the gateway to the CHS's database for all data collected and shall provide an easy means of reporting and information management. 2. The report generator shall be an integral part of the CHS. Off-line third party packages (such as Excel or Lotus 123) for report manipulation shall not be required to implement this program. 3. Reports on historical trend data shall allow for daily, weekly, monthly and yearly reporting. These reports shall be completely flexible on the data items to be reported on. The user shall be able to select from a list of predefined reports or select data items on-the-fly. The selection of data items shall not be restricted by panel source. Reports shall have multiple columns and be infinite in length. Reports must be capable of reporting on data that has been collected at varying time intervals. Report generator shall allow an operator to easily and quickly define the contents of a report as well as define a print time and date if so desired. Information contained in the reports shall be derived from alarm history, CHS or SDC data, trend data and timed overrides. 4. The operator shall be able to compile reports by user, company/department, time and date period, point or points. A combination report may also be printed. The combination report option shall allow the operator to define any or all of the data to be reported on within one compilation. A report definition shall be able to be printed once and destroyed or to be saved for subsequent use. A cover page shall be printed automatically displaying the time, date and the parameters by which the report was compiled. L. Multi-tasking 1. The CHS shall be capable of true multi-tasking capabilities. The user shall be able to use other non-related programs in the CHS while still running all CHS applications with no interruptions. This shall include the use of real time data in other applications. This CHS shall allow spread sheet programs to gather data from the SDCs dynamically while running a dynamically updating graphic screen. The CHS shall have the ability to allow the passing of data freely to MS Windows applications which incorporate the use of Dynamic Data Exchange. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.2 LOCAL CONTROLLER HARDWARE A. General: The Local Controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor-based controller installed at each mechanical system; ie., air handling unit, heating boiler, chiller. The controller shall execute local control sequences independent of a workstation. All control loops and setpoints shall be stored in EEPROM or other non-volatile field reprogrammable memory. Each controller shall be addressable by a portable laptop computer. B. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs. C. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. All inputs and outputs shall be individually optically isolated from other inputs and outputs, power, communication, and field wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component of the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring. D. Database: All field control database shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation. E. Auto-Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. F. Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities: 1. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, etc.) And binary contact closures. 2. Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type. 3. Analog outputs shall be 1% resolution over total output span of 100%. G. The local controller shall communicate to the system controller. 2.3 SYSTEM CONTROLLER A. The system controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi-tasking realtime controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink communication, polling and other supervisory functions for VAV terminal unit and local controllers. B. The controller shall be a true no-host system that does not require a computer workstation or portable computer to perform any control, supervisory or communication function. A liquid crystal display and alphanumeric/special function keypad shall be included on the face of the controller for operator interface during computer workstation downtime. C. The controller shall have full stand-alone capability with a battery backed real time clock and dial-in/dial-out capabilities. D. Direct digital control, energy management and facilities management software functions shall be provided. These functions shall include control programming DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 revisions, energy profile reports (daily and monthly), maintenance reminders, autodial of multiple phone number, message routing, trending and alarm reporting. 2.4 PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRIC SYSTEM DEVICES A. All electric switch devices shall be selected for the applied load and UL listed for the application. all water thermostats shall be provided with a separable copper, Monel or stainless steel well. Miscellaneous, electric, pneumatic, and mechanical devices shall include: B. Any automatic control dampers not specified to be integral with other equipment. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 8 inches wide not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals stainless steel of the tight-seal springs type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 to 200°F, and shall be capable of withstanding a pressure differential of three inches of W.C. and velocities of 1500 feet per minute without damage. 1. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type as hereinafter specified and all two-position dampers shall be parallel blade types. 2. Dampers shall be sized to meet flow requirements of the application. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper to duct size. Baffles shall not exceed 6". 3. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the temperature control manufacturer shall submit leakage data for all control dampers with the temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. 4. Where ultra-low leakage dampers are specified the blade edge shall be fitted with replaceable, snap-on, inflatable seals to limit damper leakage to 1/2 percent at applied static pressure. C. Smoke dampers where indicated on the plans. D. Automatic control valves 2" and smaller shall be screwed type, size 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures and temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring leaded Rubber/Teflon packing with replaceable discs. 1. All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with equal-percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. Valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi, unless otherwise noted. 2. Unitary valves shall be straight-through or three way type as specified in the sequence of operations. Stems shall be polished stainless-steel and packing shall be ethylene-propylene suitable for both chilled water and 250°F hot water service. Pressure ratings shall be as required for the intended service. 3. Valves, 2-1/2" and larger, shall be pneumatic. All others are to be electric. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Safety low limit shall be manual reset twenty-foot limited fill type responsive to the coolest section of its length. F. Electric thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type suitable for the application. Low voltage type heating thermostats shall have adjustable heat anticipation. G. Unit heater aquastats shall be strap-on type. 2.5 ELECTRONIC DATA INPUTS AND OUTPUTS A. Input/output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the remote panel for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input/output. Control input shall be highly sensitive and matched to the loop gain requirements for precise and responsive control. In no case shall computer inputs be derived from pneumatic sensors. B. Temperature sensors: 1. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of operation. Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper, Monel or stainless steel well. Outside air wall mounted sensors shall be provided with a sun shield. 2. Outside air, return air, discharge air, return air, space, and well sensors shall be linear with ±0.7°F. between 32°F and 212°F. C. Relative humidity sensors shall be capacitance type with 10% to 90% range. Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with sampling chambers. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers. D. Differential and Static Pressure Sensors, Switches and Current Switches 1. Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be differential pressure type or current switch. Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than one inch WG, they shall be piped across the fan. 2. Maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10 inches WC. 3. Pump proof-of-flow switches shall be adjustable differential pressure or current switches. 4. Air flow and duct static pressure analog sensors shall be high accuracy suitable for the low pressures to be encountered, be selected for approximately 50% overrange, and have a 4 to 20ma output. These differential pressure sensors shall be provided with valved lines for testing and calibration, and shall have adjustments for zero and span. E. Outputs 1. Control relays and analog output transducers shall be compatible with the remote panel. Relays shall be suitable for the loads encountered. Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with pneumatic repeatability error no greater than 2 percent. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.6 LOCAL CONTROLLER SOFTWARE A. General: Local Controllers shall operate totally standalone and independent of any other device for all specified control applications. Software shall include a complete operating system (O.S.), communications handler, point processing, alarm processing, standard control algorithms and specific control sequences (DDC), and an owner/user custom control and calculation package complete with interpreter. A PHC port shall be provided at each HVAC component to allow DDC tuning, modification, and adjustment. B. Operating system software shall operate in real time, provide prioritized task scheduling, control time programs, monitor and manage panel-to-panel and panel-to central computer communications, and scan inputs and outputs. Operating system shall also contain built-in diagnostics. C. Input/Output point processing for each panel shall include: 1. Continuous update of input and output values and conditions. All connected points are to be updated at a minimum of one second intervals. 2. Analog to digital conversion, scaling and offset, correction of sensor non-linearity, and sensing no response or failed sensors. 3. Assignment of proper engineering units and status condition identifiers to all analog and digital input and outputs. 4. In addition to physical points specified and listed, "Pseudo" software points shall be provided where required for displayable and addressable command access and meaningful displays. All pseudo points shall be derived in the remote control processor for timely display. a. Pseudo points shall appear identical to physical points in displays and graphics and shall be assignable to test descriptors, reports, etc. in the same manner as physical points. b. Analog Pseudo points which are the result of a calculation (GPM, tons, etc.) shall be processed and assignable alarm limits exactly like physical points. c. Each PID setpoint and other program values specified to be displayable and commandable shall be assigned upper and lower command limits beyond which the point cannot be easily commanded. Command limits shall be owner adjustable via restricted access. D. Command Control software shall manage the receipt of commands from the central operators console, portable operators terminal, and from control programs. 1. Command delay, programmable from 0 to 30 seconds, shall be provided to prevent simultaneous energizing of large loads. 2. A "fixed mode" option shall be supported to allow inputs to, and outputs from, DDC control programs to be set to a fixed state or value. When in the "fixed mode" inputs and outputs are to be so noted in all reports. E. Alarm Processing 1. Analog input alarm comparison with the ability to assign two individual sets of high and low limits (warning and actual alarm) to an input or to assign a set of DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 floating limits (as defined below) to the input shall be provided. Each alarm shall be assigned a unique differential to prevent a point from oscillating into and out of alarm. Alarm comparisons are to be made each scan cycle. 2. Debounce of digital inputs to prevent nuisance alarms shall be provided. Each point debounce timing shall be adjustable from two seconds to two minutes in one-second increments. 3. Alarm lockout shall be provided to positively lock out alarms when equipment is turned off or when a true alarm is dependent on the condition of an associated point. Lockout points and lockout initiators are to be operator programmable. On initial startup of air handler and other mechanical equipment, a "timed lockout" period shall be assigned to analog points to allow them to reach a stable condition before activating alarm comparison logic. Lockout period is to be programmable on a per point basis. 4. Run time shall be accumulated based on the status of digital input points. It shall be possible to totalize either on-time or off-time hours. Run time counts shall be resident in non-volatile memory and have NCP resident run time limits assignable through the operator's terminal. When run time limits are reached, a report shall be issued to the operator station. F. Custom DDC programs are to be provided to meet the control strategies as called for in the sequence of operation sections of these specifications. Each remote panel shall have resident in its memory and available to the programs a full library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic, and relational operators for implementation of control sequences. 1. All DDC setpoints, gains, parameters, and time constants associated with DDC programs shall be available to the operator for display and modification via the central operator interface and/or portable operators terminal. 2. The execution interval of each DDC loop shall be adjustable. G. Each DDC program shall operate within a single fully field programmable and fully standalone DDC panel. Under no circumstances other than point/data sharing and global EMS (with failure default instructions) shall any DDC program be dependent upon any communications link. H. Occupancy/Time Programs shall occupancy or start and stop times per day for each system. 1. Unique time programs shall be provided for each air handler system. I. Provide a time and event programming (TEP) capability which will initiate a sequence of commands for execution at a specific time or upon the occurrence of an event. Program features required as a minimum are: 1. Analog points to be commandable to a specific value. 2. Digital points commandable to a specific state; i.e., on or off; fast, slow or off. 3. Initiator to be a specific day and time or a specific event; i.e., either analog or digital alarm occurrence. 4. Commands must honor command delays and residual priority structures. 5. Multiple commands assigned to a single initiator and the ability to chain TEPs. 6. Ability to enable and disable TEPs and initiators individually and manual initiation. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT – GENERAL A. Smoke Detectors: Install smoke detectors where required in main supply and return air ducts of air handling units which are rated 2,000 cfm and greater. B. Electronic Temperature Sensors: Sensing elements shall be resistance or thermistor sensors for use with EMS. Elements shall be applicable for the medium being sensed, i.e., pipe elements, room elements, wall-mounted elements, duct-mounted elements and outdoor mounted elements. C. Electronic Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall consist of a cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB) relative humidity sensing elements, a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) and an electronic bridge which will sense relative humidity between 10 to 100% R.H. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 4% of full scale between 35% and 65% and plus or minus 5% of full scale between 20% and 70% R.H. Drift shall be no more than plus or minus 1% of full scale per year. Sensors shall be capable of being duct mounted with calibrations and adjustments capable of being carried out externally from the duct and sensors shall be available for room wall mounting. D. Electronic Static Pressure Sensors: Static pressure sensors shall be differential pressure sensors with the "high" output sensing the duct pressure and the "low" input sensing the atmospheric pressure. The range for the static pressure sensor shall be matched to the static pressure of the system being sensed, 0 to 0.5 inches, 0 to 2 inches, 0 to 5 inches or 0 to 10 inches. Transducers shall sense differential pressures and convert the difference to a proportional 0-5 or 4-20 Ma output for both unidirectional and bi-directional pressure ranges. Each transducer shall be furnished with a 24 Vdc power supply. E. Valve and Damper Operators 1. Electric operators for air terminal valves and fan terminal units shall be pulsed directly for position control. 2.8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS (VFD) WITH MOTORS A. This portion of Section 15975 applies to those VFDs not provided with factory-assembled packaged equipment systems. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. C. Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends. D. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. E. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. G. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. This includes variable frequency drives and motor for equipment served. H. Ratings 1. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. 2. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. 3. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating speed and load. 4. Operating Ambient: 0°C to 40°C. 5. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 90 percent. I. Design 1. Employ microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. 2. Employ pulse width modulated inverter system. 3. Employ switching power supply operating off DC link. 4. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. 5. Design to attempt five (adjustable) automatic restarts following fault condition before locking out and requiring manual reset. J. Product Options and Features 1. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and output current. 2. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for over-current, over-voltage, ground fault, over-temperature, and input power ON. 3. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: ±10 percent. 4. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110 percent of rated. 5. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 - 30 seconds. 6. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 - 30 seconds. 7. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control. 8. Input Signal: 4 - 20 Ma DC. 9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Manual Bypass: Provide contractor, motor running overload protection, and short circuit protection for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor. Include isolation switch to allow maintenance of inverter during bypass operation. 12. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of each controller. K. Fabrication 1. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. L. Motors shall be per Section 15050. Motors used in air handling units shall be of the Open Drip-Proof (ODP). M. Acceptable Manufacturers: Robinson, Reliance, Asea Brown Boveri, Graham, CW Industries or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Building Energy Management and Control System (BMCS) shall be designed, installed, and commissioned in a turnkey fully implemented and operational manner; including all labor not noted in the Work by Others paragraph of Part I of this section of the specifications, and not noted in other sections of these specifications. 3.2 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Building Management and Control System (BMCS) manufactured and the owner will enter into a software license agreement with provisions such as limiting use of the software to the equipment provided under these specifications, limiting copying, preserving confidentiality and prohibiting transfer to a third party. 3.3 DATA CONTROL (D/C) AND GRAPHICS SUMMARY A. The attached points lists show the hardware devices required to be connected to the local controllers, and the standard control software modules to be implemented. In addition, all additional software required to accomplish the detailed sequence of operations specified within this section shall be provided. B. The following pages also include pseudo points required to be provided for display in logical groups and graphics. Commandable pseudo points shall be commandable directly from all displays. C. Each analog point shall have unique remote panel resident dual high and dual low limit alarm thresholds as specified elsewhere set in engineering units. Where specified, floating (a band above and below a set point) alarm limits shall be provided. D. Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the monitored input does not track its associated command output within a programmable time interval, a "command failed" alarm shall be reported. E. Where calculated points (such as CFM) are shown, they shall appear in their respective logical groups. The respective unconditioned raw data (such as the logarithmic differential pressure) points shall also be grouped in a special group for display and observation independent of the logical groups. F. Where data or control points are required to accomplish the digital control or energy management sequences specified but not listed on this D/C summary, the contractor shall notify the architect in writing at least fourteen days prior to bid opening. If this DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 timely notification is not received by the architect, all points required by the sequences shall be provided. G. Unless otherwise specified or approved prior to bidding, the primary analog input and the analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a single remote panel containing the DDC algorithm, and shall function independent of any peer or mux communication links. Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received from the peer network, but approved default values and/or procedures shall be substituted in the DDC algorithm for this secondary input if network communication fail or if the secondary input becomes erroneous or invalid. 3.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide required number of copies of submittal data. B. In addition to the license agreement above, submittal shall consist of: 1. System architecture showing all digital devices. 2. Data sheets of all products. 3. Valve, damper, and well and tap schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. 4. Sketches of all graphics. 5. Graphic penetration tree showing all graphics and all points. 6. Data entry forms for initial parameters. Contractor shall provide English listing of all analog points with columnar blanks for high and low warning limits and high and low alarm limits, and a listing of all fan systems with columnar blanks for beginning and end of occupancy periods: and samples of proposed text for points and messages. All text and graphics shall be approved prior to data entry. 7. Wiring and piping interconnection diagrams including panel and device power and sources. 8. Detailed color conventions proposed for all graphics and graphic elements and states. 9. Equipment lists of all proposed devices and equipment. 10. Software design data including: a. Flowchart of each DDC program showing interrelationship between inputs, PID functions, all other functions, outputs, etc. b. Sequence of operation relating to all flowchart functions. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and rough-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electric work and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights. B. Wiring: The term "wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices. All wiring exposed in occupied areas and in equipment rooms shall be encased in metallic raceway (conduit). Raceway construction shall conform to DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 requirements specified in Division 16. Transmission bus shall be plenum-rated wire. All wiring to be provided under Division 15. C. Wiring System: Complete wiring system for electric/electronic temperature controls and EMS shall be provided under Division 15. Conceal wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly. D. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. E. Unit-mounted Equipment: Where control devices are indicated to be unit-mounted, do so in the field not shipped to the factory (except VAV devices). F. Refer to other Division 15 sections as applicable for installation of dampers in mechanical systems; not work of this section. G. Installation of Detectors 1. Duct detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 90A. All brackets and hardware shall be provided as required to install detector housing in correct position. All detector housing shall be sealed as required to prevent air leakage between duct and housing. All wiring shall be by Division 16, not work of this section. H. Temperature sensors installed in duct systems shall be of length to traverse entire duct width. Sensors in piping lines shall be installed at a 45 degree angle with flow; coordinate locations required with Section 15500 Contractor. I. Provide suitable brackets for valve and damper operators. Operators shall be installed suitable for field adjustment of operation. J. Interlock smoke detectors to shut down supply fan. Set at 135°F; for shutdown. K. Install all controllers, relays, pneumatic electric switches, and related wiring and pneumatic piping in temperature control panels. L. Provide complete pneumatic piping system for large valves and damper actuators in the chiller plant and heating plant. Construct piping of seamless copper tubing. Plastic tubing may be used in walls and ceiling spaces. NOTE: Do not install plastic tubing in return air ceiling plenums. Plastic tubing installed in occupied spaces shall be installed in metal raceways. Firmly support horizontal piping and raceways; spaced evenly not to exceed 6'-0" center-to-center Provide 100 psi brass drain petcocks at low points in system for condensate removal. M. Maintain closed ends of piping with temporary caps and plugs during construction. Test pneumatic piping with compressed air at 50 PSIG; maintain 2 hours, loss shall not exceed 2 PSIG. N. Provide compressor, air dryer, coalescing filter, bypass piping, condensate float traps, drain petcocks, discharge pressure regulator and pressure gages as indicated on DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 drawings. Extend drain lines to nearest floor drain. Discharge lines will not be permitted to drain to floor. 3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. After completion of installation, adjust controllers, motors, and similar equipment provided as work of this section. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system. 3.7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM (VFD) AND MOTORS A. General 1. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer. 2. Set VFD on concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Division 03000. 3. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and NEMA ICS 3.1. 4. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller. 5. Install fuses in fusible switches. 6. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. 7. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 8. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 9. Provide motor to Division 15 Contractor for installation in equipment served by VFD. B. Field Quality Control 1. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. 2. Make final adjustments to installed drive to assure proper operation of fan system. Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads. 3. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 4. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes. 3.8 VALIDATION A. The BMCS contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all connected hardware and software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. B. Witnessed validation demonstration shall consist of: 1. Running each specified report. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 23 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site-specific customizing capability. Demonstrate parameter changes. 3. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update and direct access to graphics. 4. Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode. 5. Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs (6 loops minimum). 6. Demonstrate BMCS performance via trend logs and command trace. 7. Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. 8. Demonstrate Microsoft Windows software and its integration with the BMCS Software. 9. Demonstrate on-line user guide and help function. 10. Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive upline and downline load, and demonstrate specified diagnostics. 11. Demonstrate multi-task by showing alarm reporting during Microsoft WordPerfect operation. (WordPerfect to be furnished by Owner). 12. Demonstrate programming with point options and alarm archiving. 3.9 MANUALS A. An Operators Manual with graphic explanations of operator functions. Although operator functions are to be self-instructional and menu-interactive from the terminal keyboard, this manual shall be for off-line study and refresher use. B. A Programmer's Manual with graphic descriptions of functions required for software modifications and development. Although high level languages such as PASCAL are required to be usable on the system, full PASCAL type manuals and training are not required. The use and installation of PASCAL type programs shall be included in this manual. This programmer's manual shall include computer generated listings of all DDC programs. C. Computerized printouts of all NCP data file construction including all point processing assignments, physical terminal relationships, scales and offsets, command and alarm limits, etc. D. A user manual for the integrated spreadsheet package. E. A manual including revised As-Built documents of all materials required under the paragraph "SUBMITTALS" on this specification. F. Three Operators Manuals, two Programmers, and two As-Built Manuals shall be provided to the owner. G. A user manual for the integrated spreadsheet package. 3.10 TRAINING A. All training shall be by the BMCS manufacturer and shall utilize specified manuals, as-build documentation, and the on-line help utility. If the "Help" utility specified above is not supplied, the following training shall be repeated semi-annually during the warranty period. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 24 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Operator training shall include two initial six-hour sessions encompassing: 1. Sequence of Operation review. 2. Sign-on/Sign-off. 3. Selection of all displays and reports. 4. Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode. 5. Modifying English text. 6. Use of all dialog boxes and menus. 7. Modifying warning limits, alarm limits and start-stop times. 8. System initialization. 9. Download and initialization of remote panels. 10. Purge and/or dump of historical data. 11. Use of Portable Operators Terminal. 12. Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors). 13. Password modification. C. Supervisor training shall include an additional two-hour session encompassing: 1. Password assignment/modification. 2. Operator assignment/modification. 3. Operator authority assignment/modification. 4. Point disable/enable. 5. Terminal and data segregation/modification. 6. Use of portable operator terminal. 7. Use of Microsoft Windows with system data. D. Programmer training shall include two additional three-hour sessions encompassing: 1. Software review of Sequence of Operation and flowcharts. 2. Modification of control programs. 3. Add/Delete/Modify data points. 4. Use of diagnostics. 5. System maintenance procedures. 6. Review of initialization. 7. Download and off-line archiving of system software. Programmer training shall be for two owner personnel and shall be scheduled by the owner with two week notice anytime during the warranty period. 8. Graphic creation. 3.11 WARRANTY A. All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the BMCS manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from Owner acceptance date. B. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram or replace system components shall be furnished by the BMCS contractor at no charge to the owner during the warranty period. C. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 25 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.12 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Refer to Section 15980 for Sequences of Operation. END OF SECTION 15975 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15975 - 26 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15980 - MECHANICAL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Section 15975 Contractor shall be responsible for this Section. B. This Section, while not complete, is intended to provide a level of expectation as to the complexity of the Sequences of Operation and the degree of Control Points required for the project. C. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1. Freeze Protection Cable. 2. HVAC Pumps. 3. Glycol Feed System. 4. Boilers. 5. Boiler System Accessories. 6. Water Chillers. 7. Cooling Towers. 8. Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment. 9. Unit Heaters. 10. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 11. Fan Coil Units. 12. Heat Exchangers. 13. Air Coils. 14. Radiant Tube Heaters. 15. Electric Heaters. 16. Snowmelt Heating. 17. Split Systems DX Packages. 18. Duct Smoke Detectors in Ductwork. 19. Exhaust Fans. 20. Garage Exhaust Fans. 21. Supply Fans. 22. Motorized Control Dampers. 23. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers. 24. Motorized Backdraft Dampers. 25. Carbon Monoxide Exhaust Control Systems. 26. Freezestat Shutdown of Air Handling Equipment. 27. Building Smoke Management System. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Work furnished but not installed this Contractor: MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Access doors in accordance with this Section and Division 8. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct-digital controls. B. VFD: Variable frequency drive. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards, and refer to NEMA Standards for definitions of terminology herein. 2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-70 for electrical installation requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following items in accordance with Division 1and the General Conditions of the Contract: 1. All control sequences in conjunction with diagrams and equipment identified in Section 15975. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit printed data for the following items in accordance with Division 1and Operation and Maintenance Data Paragraph in Section 15010. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange for spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for installation of control components. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for control items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs involved to accommodate any motors which exceed the scheduled horsepower sizes as called for in the mechanical or electrical plans and specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Division 15 Contractor shall provide control sequences as described in this Part 3 of Section 15980. B. Section 15980 Contractor shall in conjunction with the Section 15975 Contractor provide 120-volt, single phase, power wiring per NEC requirements from the nearest suitable electrical panel as required. C. Building Start/Stop Time Sequences 1. Building shall be in Occupied Mode 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. D. Building Room Temperature Set Points 1. General a. Heating: 72°F b. Cooling: 75°F 2. Vestibules a. Heating: 50°F b. Cooling: N/A E. Critical Placement Requirement for Thermostats 1. Thermostats, including room temperature sensors, shall be located on wall according to the Thermostat Details. 2. Any thermostat location not in compliance with the details shall be subject to relocation by the Section 15980 Contractor without additional cost to the owner. F. Exterior static pressure sensor shall be located at grade level on southeast portion of building. G. Ambient air temperature sensor shall be located on the north side of the building with a non-ferrous solar shield with finish suitable for field painting. H. All temperature and pressure setpoints shall be adjustable. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Under Section 15975, the Main Control Panel display functions shall be part of the BMCS Central Host Computer software for display on the computer monitor. J. The Chilled Water System Control Graphic shall display the following: 1. System graphic. 2. Condenser water pump on/off indication. 3. Condenser water pump on/off/auto switch. 4. Chilled water pump on/off indication. 5. Chilled water pump on/off/auto switch. 6. Chiller on/off indication. 7. Chiller condenser water supply and return water temperature. 8. Chiller chilled water supply and return temperature. 9. Chiller condenser water control point adjustment. 10. Chilled water control point adjustment. 11. Low level cooling tower sump alarm. 12. Cooling tower fan on/off indication. 13. Cooling tower sump heater on/off indication. 14. Cooling tower bypass valve open/closed indication. 15. Outside air temperature. 16. Excess pressure bypass valve open/closed indication. K. The Heating Water System Control Graphic shall display the following: 1. System graphics. 2. Boiler on/off indication. 3. Boiler circulating pump on/off indication. 4. Primary heating pump on/off indication. 5. Secondary heating pump on/off indication. 6. Primary heating water entering/leaving temperature. 7. Secondary heating water entering/leaving temperature. 8. Outside air temperature. 9. Excess pressure bypass valve open/closed indication. 10. Heating system pump failure alarm. L. The Air System Control Graphic shall display the following: 1. System graphic. 2. Air Handler on/off indication. 3. Supply fan on/off indication. 4. Supply air discharge temperature. 5. Outside air temperature. 6. Heating and chilled water circ pump operation. 7. Air system low temperature alarm. 3.2 FREEZE PROTECTION CABLE A. Garage Piping Exposed to Freezing Temperatures: Piping routed in the garage that is near the entrances and/or near garage ventilation intakes shall be provided with freeze protection cabling that shall operate on its own controller to maintain temperature setpoint. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Piping Exposed to Freezing Temperatures: Miscellaneous piping routed on the roof or any other area exposed to freezing temperatures shall be provided with freeze protection cabling that shall operate on its own controller to maintain temperature setpoint. 3.3 HEATING SYSTEMS A. Heating Water Generation 1. All boilers shall be enabled for operation on a continuous basis to generate heating water for domestic water heating, snowmelting, pool equipment heating and building heating. 2. A call for heating from the domestic water, building heating, pool heating or snowmelt systems shall initiate activation of the heating system to produce hot water. 3. The call for heating shall activate the Boiler Draft Control System. Upon confirmation the draft system is functioning properly, the boilers shall be staged for firing to produce hot water as required by the system. 4. Coordinate with supplier of Boilers and Boiler Draft Fan Control System to properly accommodate the required control wiring and pressure tubing connections between each component, to the flue stack, to the boilers, draft fans, boiler makeup air unit, combination fire/smoke damper and BMCS. 5. Each boiler shall be provided with a dedicated pump for circulation of heating water. 6. Two water temperature sensors with insertion wells on the boiler heating supply and return water loop shall monitor the system water temperature to stage the boilers for maintaining 200°F supply water temperature. 7. Each boiler shall be provided with a two-port, two-position Heating Control Valve (HCV) with end switches for isolating the boiler from the circulating water loop during staging of the boilers. End switches shall permit indication of open/close valve status. 8. A Local Control Panel (LCP) for Boiler Staging shall be provided by the Section 15975/980 Contractor to automatically sequence each boiler individually or collectively to maintain the heating supply piping water temperature. LCP shall provide communication to the BMCS. 9. An insertion-type water temperature sensor shall monitor the heating supply and return piping water temperature for input to the LCP for Boiler Staging. 10. The following boilers, dedicated pumps and control valves shall be staged independently upon an increasing demand for heating water: a. B-1, BHWP-1 & HCV-1. b. B-2, BHWP-2 & HCV-2. c. B-3, BHWP-3 & HCV-3. 11. Boiler Staging a. Each boiler/pump set shall be capable of operating as a stand-alone heat generating device. b. Every combination of boiler/pump sets shall be capable of operating together to provide a full range of heating generation. 12. Activation sequence for each boiler/pump set shall be as follows: MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. The Heating Control Valve HCV shall open. b. The end switch shall close initiating startup of the Boiler Water Pump. c. The flow switch shall make contact upon flow detection to enable the boiler control panel to fire. 13. Heating Control Valves HCV-1, HCV-2 & HCV-3 a. Each boiler shall be provided with a two-port, two-position Heating Control Valve (HCV) with end switches for isolating the boiler from the circulating water loop during staging of the boilers. End switches shall permit indication of open/close valve status. b. Valves are related to the boilers as follows: (1) B-1 and HCV-1. (2) B-2 and HCV-2. (3) B-3 and HCV-3. 14. Boilers B-1, B-2 & B-3 a. Each boiler shall be set to provide 200°F leaving water temperature. b. The boiler shall operate under its own controls to maintain the leaving water temperature by varying the power burner firing capacity. c. Provide wiring from the boiler alarm contacts to the LCP for communication to the BMCS. 15. Boiler Water Pumps BHWP-1, BHWP-2 & BHWP-3 a. Provide a flow switch in the discharge piping of each pump for flow confirmation and enabling boiler to operate. b. Failure of the flow switch to detect water flow shall signal an alarm indication at the BMCS and activate the next boiler/pump set. c. Upon deactivation of a boiler the corresponding Boiler Water Pump shall continue to operate for 1 minute (adj) to remove residue heat from the boiler heat exchanger. After shutdown of the pump, the corresponding HCV shall close. 16. Primary Heating Water Pumps PHWP-1 & 2 a. Primary Heating Water Pump (s) shall operate continuously. b. Each pump shall be controlled via a variable frequency drive (VFD) to vary the speed of the pump motor based upon the pressure differential at valve HCV-4. Provide wiring in conduit from the differential pressure sensor down to each VFD. c. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. d. Provide lead/lag sequencing between both pumps. e. The lead pump shall activate with a low-speed start. f. The BMCS shall enable and activate the lag Primary Heating Water Pump whenever the lead pump is unable to maintain the differential pressure in the system for more than 15 minutes (adj.) MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 g. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. h. If in single pump operation, failure of the lead pump shall alarm the BMCS and activate the lag pump. The VFD of the lag pump shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. i. Upon failure of the either pump while in dual pump operation, indicate an alarm condition on the BMCS and keep the other pump in operation. The VFD of the remaining pump in operation shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. 17. Stack Economizer Pumps SEP-1, SEP-2 & SEP-3 a. The pump controller provided by the supplier of the stack economizer shall activate/deactivate each pump independently based upon flue gas temperature each boiler is activated for firing. b. Provide a flow switch in the discharge piping of each pump to provide operation status to BMCS. c. Should the flow switch fail to close during operation of the respective boiler, indicate an alarm on pump failure at the BMCS. 18. Stack Economizers BSE-1, BSE-2 & BSE-3 a. Provide inlet and outlet water temperature sensors to indicate and monitor water temperatures during flue gas heat recovery operation. B. Heating Control Valve HCV-4 1. Provide a two-port modulating control valve shall be positioned to maintain a minimum of 5PSIG differential between the boiler loop heating supply and return water piping. Minimum water flow through valve shall match the water flow of Boiler Water Pump BWP-1. C. Glycol Feed System GFS-H1 1. The glycol feeder system shall operate from its control panel to maintain the setpoint pressure of the Heating Water System under normal operating conditions. a. A dedicated water feed pipe shall be provided for fill-and-flush cycles during project start-up. Valve shall be turned off during normal operating conditions to maintain glycol introduction into the water system. 2. Gylcol Feed System supplier shall provide a remote-mounted pressure sensor for field installation by the Section 15975/980 Contractor. 3. The Section 15975/980 Contractor shall provide wiring in conduit from the sensor location down to the Glycol Feeder System. 4. Provide wiring interface from Low Tank Fluid Level Alarm to BMCS. D. Domestic Water Heating System (Boiler Side) MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. The Domestic Water Heating System consists of the following components: a. Tank & Heater ST-1 & DHW-1 with Valve HCV-5. b. Tank & Heater ST-2 & DHW-2 with Valve HCV-6. 2. Domestic Heater Exchanger/Storage Tank DWH-1 & 2 and ST-1 & 2 a. The BMCS shall modulate the two-way Heating Control valves (HCV-5 & 6) to vary the amount of heating supply water into each heat exchanger to maintain the water temperature setpoint as sensed by the insertion-type water temperature sensor in the Domestic Water Storage Tank. Refer to Plumbing Drawings for temperature setpoint required. E. Building Space Heating System 1. Secondary Heating Water Pumps SHWP-1 & 2 a. Upon a drop in outdoor air temperature below 65°F, the BMCS shall enable and activate the lead Secondary Heating Water Pump. b. Each pump shall be controlled via a variable frequency drive (VFD) to vary the speed of the pump motor based upon the pressure differential between the supply and return water piping taken at a point about 2/3 of the distance to the farthest coil/radiator. Provide wiring in conduit from the differential pressure sensor down to each VFD. c. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. d. Provide lead/lag sequencing between both pumps. e. The lead pump shall activate with a low-speed start. f. The BMCS shall enable and activate the lag Secondary Heating Water Pump whenever the lead pump is unable to maintain the differential pressure in the system for more than 15 minutes (adj.) g. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. h. If in single pump operation, failure of the lead pump shall alarm the BMCS and activate the lag pump. The VFD of the lag pump shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. i. Upon failure of the either pump while in dual pump operation, indicate an alarm condition on the BMCS and keep the other pump in operation. The VFD of the remaining pump in operation shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. F. Pool Equipment Heating System 1. Indoor Pool Heat Exchanger HX-1 a. Provide a two-way modulating control valve for temperature control. b. Provide a water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in pump suction piping from the pool. c. Provide another water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in heat exchanger outlet piping to monitor leaving water temperature. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 d. The BMCS shall modulate the two-way Heating Control valve (HCV-7A, 7B) to vary the amount of heating supply water into heat exchanger to maintain the return water temperature setpoint. Refer to Pool Equipment Drawings for temperature setpoint. e. The Mechanical Contractor shall mount a flow sensor in the cold side of the heat exchanger to prohibit the 2-way valve on the hot side of the exchanger from opening if the cold side does not have flow. 2. Indoor Spa Heat Exchanger HX-2 a. Provide a two-way modulating control valve for temperature control. b. Provide a water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in pump suction piping from the spa. c. Provide another water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in heat exchanger outlet piping to monitor leaving water temperature. d. The BMCS shall modulate the two-way Heating Control valve (HCV-8A, 8B) to vary the amount of heating supply water into heat exchanger to maintain the return water temperature setpoint. Refer to Pool Equipment Drawings for temperature setpoint. e. The Mechanical Contractor shall mount a flow sensor in the cold side of the heat exchanger to prohibit the 2-way valve on the hot side of the exchanger from opening if the cold side does not have flow. 3. Outdoor Spa Heat Exchanger HX-3 a. Provide a two-way modulating control valve for temperature control. b. Provide a water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in pump suction piping from the spa. c. Provide another water temperature sensor with insertion well to the Pool Equipment Piping Subcontractor for them to install in heat exchanger outlet piping to monitor leaving water temperature. d. The BMCS shall modulate the two-way Heating Control valve (HCV-9A. 9B) to vary the amount of heating supply water into heat exchanger to maintain the return water temperature setpoint. Refer to Pool Equipment Drawings for temperature setpoint. e. The Mechanical Contractor shall mount a flow sensor in the cold side of the heat exchanger to prohibit the 2-way valve on the hot side of the exchanger from opening if the cold side does not have flow. G. Snowmelt Heating System (Boiler Water Side) 1. General a. A separate Snowmelt Controller shall provide for monitoring, activation and component control of the snowmelt system. b. Primary snowmelt controls shall be Tekmar brand. c. Provide coordination for control wiring interface and monitoring of required signals for component activation. d. Provide control wiring for all components of snowmelt system. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Snowmelt Heat Exchanger HX-4 a. The Snowmelt Control Panel shall modulate the two-way Heating Control Valve HCV-10 to maintain the leaving snowmelt supply water piping temperature setpoint. H. Snowmelt Heating System (Slab Heating Side) 1. Refer to Drawing M1.16 for more information on snow melting controls to be provided by the Section 15980 Contractor. 2. The control system shall disable the snowmelt system whenever it is not needed. 3.4 BOILER DRAFT CONTROL SYSTEM (BDCS) A. General 1. The system shall consist of and interface with the following equipment components: a. Boilers B-1, B-2 & B-3 b. Boiler Draft Control panel. c. Boiler Draft Fan VFD. d. Boiler Draft Fans BDF-1 e. Boiler Makeup Air Unit BMAU-1 f. Boiler Makeup Air Unit VFD. 2. Upon a call for heating, the BDCS shall activate, confirm its readiness and permit firing of the boilers to commence for the production of heating water. B. Boiler Draft Fans BDF-1 1. Coordinate with supplier of BDCS for control wiring requirements between the components supplied. Coordinate with Division 15 Contractor for assignment of installing components supplied by BDCS supplier. C. Boiler Make-Up Air Unit BMUA-1 1. The “open” end switch of the normally-closed Combination Fire/Smoke Damper shall confirm availability of combustion air from the outside air tunnel. 2. Fan shall start/stop up a signal from the BDCS and be ramped up/down by a VFD to vary the amount of air delivered to the Boiler Room in proportion with the draft fan system. 3. Boiler Makeup Coil Pump BMCP-1 shall be started to provide constant heating water flow through the unit air coil. 4. A two-way modulating valve shall vary water flow into the coil piping loop to maintain a 50°F setpoint at a wall-mounted thermostat at the Lower Level Boiler Room. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.5 COOLING SYSTEM A. General 1. It is expected for there to be year-round cooling required for Common areas without exterior exposure and Resident spaces as desired by the Owners. The cooling system shall be enabled continuously, switching between chiller operation and chiller bypass mode. a. Provide an outside air setpoint temperature above which the cooling system shall be enabled to operate. b. Provide a separate outside air setpoint temperature at or below the chiller bypass is permitted to function. Above this setpoint temperature, Chiller CH-1 shall be enabled and placed into operation. c. The premise for the two setpoints is to allow the building operator to determine at what temperature they wish to permit any central plant cooling while allowing a second temperature point to permit chiller operation. d. Provide cross-checking between to the two temperature setpoints to not allow the second setpoint to match or drop below the first setpoint. 2. The cooling system shall operated according to the following stages of cooling: a. Stage 1 Cooling (Chiller Bypass Mode) (1) Stage 1A (a) Lead Cooling Tower active. (b) Evaporative water pump inactive. (c) Lead Condenser Water Pump active. (2) Stage 1B (a) Both Cooling Towers active (b) Both Evaporative water pumps inactive (c) Both Condenser Water Pumps active. (3) Stage 1C (a) Lead Cooling Tower active. (b) Evaporative water pump active. (c) Lead Condenser Water Pump active. (4) Stage 1D (a) Both Cooling Towers active. (b) Both Evaporative water pumps active (c) Both Condenser Water Pumps active. b. Stage 2 Cooling (Chiller Operating Mode) (1) Cooling towers shall be activated and staged to maintain condenser supply water setpoint. (2) Chiller shall be enabled to operate from its own control panel to maintain the leaving chilled water setpoint. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Cooling Towers CT-1 & 2 1. Whenever engaged in generating cooling water for chiller operation, the cooling towers shall be enabled, staged and operated to provide condenser supply water setpoint temperature. 2. Two water temperature sensors with insertion wells shall provide signals the BMCS for monitoring condenser water supply and return temperatures. 3. A motorized damper on the discharge of each cooling tower shall be interlocked to open upon activation of the corresponding cooling tower. a. Provide end switches to indicate open/close status of damper. b. Damper shall fail closed. c. Upon signal for starting the cooling tower, the damper shall first open. d. The end switch shall make contact and continue startup of the cooling tower. e. Upon shutdown of the tower, reverse the above sequence. 4. Cooling Tower Intake Air Damper Sequencing a. At the same time, either or both of the cooling tower discharge dampers open. b. Open all Garage Intake Air Dampers around the building. 5. A dedicated VFD shall ramp up/down the cooling tower fan to maintain the condenser supply water setpoint temperature. VFD shall start at high-speed and ramp down according to the response of the BMCS to condenser water temperature. 6. Verify low-speed operating point for the fan VFDs. Below that point during cooling tower operation, modulate the (2) two-port control valves at each cooling tower to maintain the condenser supply water temperature setpoint. As the fan VFDs rise above the low-speed operating threshold, position valves to provide increasing water flow through the tower coil. a. Cooling Tower CT-1: Cooling Control Valves CCV-1A & CCV-1B (both NO). b. Cooling Tower CT-2: Cooling Control Valves CCV-2A & CCV-2B (both NO). 7. Provide lead/lag sequencing with alternating lead position for both towers. Towers shall be cycle daily to provide for flushing of the water in the coil. 8. Stage both towers to maintain to maintain the condenser supply water temperature setpoint. 9. Provide maximum number of starts during a one-hour time period, (6) adj. 10. Special Note: Cooling towers shall also be used for Garage Exhaust. Refer to Garage Exhaust description below. C. Condenser Water Pumps CWP-1 & 2 1. Whenever the cooling system is enabled, the condenser water pumps shall be enabled for operation 2. Upon activation of the Chiller Ch-1 or Chiller Bypass Mode, the lead condenser water pump shall be activated 3. An insertion-type water temperature sensor in the Domestic Water Storage Tank shall signal the BMCS to activate the lead pump to provide water flow MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 from the heating water system to the Domestic Water Heat Exchanger located in the tank. 4. Upon activation of the lead pump, an insertion-type water temperature sensor located in the heating supply water piping downstream of the pumps shall modulate the two-port Heating Control Valve HCV-5A to vary water flow into the heating return water piping to allow heating supply water to flow to the heating water pumps serving the Domestic Water Heating System. 5. One pump shall operate to provide the full flow requirement of the entire Domestic Water Heating System. 6. Provide lead/lag controller with time-based operation and automatic change-over between activation cycles to balance out hours of operation to a relatively equivalent time period. 7. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect water flow of pump. 8. The pumps shall be enabled to operate according to the occupied/unoccupied mode. D. Cooling Tower Water Cycling 1. Whenever the cooling system is not enabled, provide for cycling of the water in the cooling towers. 2. The cooling tower valves shall be in their normally-open position. 3. All other valves shall be in their normal positions. 4. Start Condenser Water Pump CWP-1 and CWP-2 to circulate water through the tower coils for a minimum of five minutes at full flow. 5. Provide flexibility to adjust timing between cycles of 30–240 minutes (1/2-4 hours) E. Chiller CH-1 1. Upon a call for chilled water from the BMCS, the chiller shall enabled to operate. 2. The chiller shall operation from its control panel to stage each compressor unit and vary refrigerant flow to maintain leaving water temperature. 3. Coordinate with chiller supplier to provide interface with McQuay MicroTech II Unit Controller for BACnet, LonTalk or Modbus communication protocol for control and monitoring of chiller. F. Chilled Water Reset Control 1. Coordinate with chiller supplier to program chiller for chilled water reset control based upon return water temperature. G. Chilled Water Pumps CHP-1 & 2 1. Whenever the cooling system is enabled, the chilled water pumps shall be enabled for operation 2. Upon activation of the Chiller Ch-1 or Chiller Bypass Mode, the lead condenser water pump shall be activated 3. Upon activation of the cooling system, the BMCS shall enable and activate the lead Chilled Water Pump. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Each pump shall be controlled via a variable frequency drive (VFD) to vary the speed of the pump motor based upon the pressure differential between the supply and return water piping taken at a point about 2/3 of the distance to the farthest coil. Provide wiring in conduit from the differential pressure sensor down to each VFD. 5. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. 6. Provide lead/lag sequencing between both pumps. 7. The lead pump shall activate with a low-speed start. 8. The BMCS shall enable and activate the lag Chilled Water Pump whenever the lead pump is unable to maintain the differential pressure in the system for more than 15 minutes (adj.) 9. Provide flow switch on the water discharge of each pump to detect actual water flow of pump. 10. If in single pump operation, failure of the lead pump shall alarm the BMCS and activate the lag pump. The VFD of the lag pump shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. 11. Upon failure of the either pump while in dual pump operation, indicate an alarm condition on the BMCS and keep the other pump in operation. The VFD of the remaining pump in operation shall respond to the differential pressure sensor to maintain water flow in the building space heating system. H. Glycol Feed System GFS-C1 (Chilled Water System) 1. The glycol feeder system shall operate from its control panel to maintain the setpoint pressure of the Condenser Water System under normal operating conditions. a. A dedicated water feed pipe shall be provided for fill-and-flush cycles during project start-up. Valve shall be turned off during normal operating conditions to maintain glycol introduction into the water system. 2. Gylcol Feed System supplier shall provide a remote-mounted pressure sensor for field installation by the Section 15975/980 Contractor. 3. The Section 15975/980 Contractor shall provide wiring in conduit from the sensor location on the 6th Floor down to the Glycol Feeder System. 4. Provide wiring interface to Low Tank Fluid Level Alarm. I. Chiller Bypass Cooling Mode 1. Entering the chiller bypass mode shall be determined by the BMCS based upon outside air temperature and trend data recorded on the cooling system. a. Upon entering the chiller bypass mode, Chiller CH-1 shall be placed into a controlled shutdown. b. Upon completion of chiller shutdown, Cooling Control Valves CCV-3A (NO) & CCV-3B (NO) shall be positioned closed to stop water flow through the evaporator and condenser tube bundles of Chiller CH-1. c. CCV-3C (NC) shall remain closed. d. Valves CCV-4A (NC) & CCV-4B (NC) shall be positioned fully open to allow flow between the chilled and condenser water system. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 e. Condenser Water Pumps CWP-1 & 2 shall be deactivated and Control Valves CCV-5A & 5B shall be positioned to bypass the condenser water pumps. f. The cooling towers, tower control valves and condenser water pumps shall be staged to maintain the revised condenser water temperature of 44°F (adj). 2. Exiting the chiller bypass mode shall be determined by the BMCS based upon outside air temperature and trend data recorded on the cooling system. a. Upon exiting the chiller bypass mode, the condenser water temperature setpoint shall be reset to system chilled water setpoint. b. Chilled Control Valve CCV-3C shall open and modulate in response to chiller head pressure. Confirm with chiller supplier as to need for direct or inverse response to signal from chiller controls. c. Control Valves CCV-5A & 5B shall be positioned to flow water through Condenser Water Pumps CWP-1 & 2. d. Condenser Pumpss CWP-1 & 2 shall return to normal control mode, activating as required by the BMCS to flow water to/from the Cooling Towers and Chiller. e. Cooling Control Valves CCV-1A/1B and CCV-2A/2B shall position closed to bypass each cooling tower to allow for condenser water temperature to rise. f. Upon the condenser supply water reaching normal setpoint temperature, set the cooling towers and their valves into normal mode for chiller operation. 3. End switches shall be provided on all two-position, two-port valves to provide status indication in the BMCS. 3.6 CHILLER ROOM REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM A. Coordinate with Section 15655 Contractor to install all components of the Refrigerant Monitoring System (RMS). B. Provide control wiring interface from each sensor in conduit back to the RMS Control Panel. C. Provide control wiring interface from RMS Control Panel to the DDC System to provide for enhanced ventilation. D. Upon a positive detection of refrigerant R-134a by the RMS Control Panel, Supply Fan SF-1 and Exhaust Fan EF-5 shall each switch to high-speed operation. E. Return to low-speed operation shall be a manual reset activity. 3.7 CHILLER ROOM VENTILATION – SUPPLY & EXHAUST AIR A. Supply Fan SF-1 shall operate at low-speed continuously to supply outside air to the Chiller Room. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Exhaust Fan EF-5 shall operate at low-speed continuously to remove air to the Chiller Room for discharge outside the building. C. Upon signal from the Refrigerant Monitoring System, both fans shall change to high-speed operation. 3.8 GARAGE EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Provide a carbon monoxide system as identified in Section 15880 Parts 2 & 3. System shall start/stop the garage ventilation system. B. Provide (2) carbon monoxide (CO) Zones: Parking areas below Bldg A & Parking areas below Bldg B. C. All Garage Intake Air and Transfer Air dampers shall be normally-open. Provide end switches on each damper to indicate open/close status at the DDC System. 1. Failure to indicate damper position shall result in an alarm indication. D. The Garage Exhaust System shall consist of the following equipment and components: 1. Cooling Towers CT-1 & 2. 2. Cooling Tower Room Pressure Sensor. 3. Garage Exhaust Fans GEF-1, 2 & 3 with motorized dampers. 4. Garage Make-Up Air Unit GMUA-1. 5. Motorized Garage Intake Air Dampers. 6. Motorized Garage Transfer Air Dampers between Garage and Cooling Tower Room. E. The basic garage exhaust scenario shall be the following: The main garage ventilation exhaust shall be through the cooling tower system. If CO sensors in the Northwest corner of Bldg B are still activated after 10 minutes, then the respective secondary GEF (1, 2 and/or 3) shall activate to ventilate that area. All motorized intake dampers shall open on activation of system. F. The minimum continuous ventilation rate of 0.05 cfm/sf (5,000 cfm total required) shall be achieved by operating GEF-1, sized at 12,000 cfm, when one of the cooling towers is not operational. The motorized dampers at the top of the entry ramp shall open to provide make-up air. If the outdoor air temperature is below 45 deg F, Garage Make-Up Air Unit GMUA-1 shall be activated and temper the air based on its own internal controls. G. All equipment shall be sequenced for equivalent run time. All equipment shall be monitored through the DDC system, and an alarm indication provided if failure occurs. H. Combined Level CO Control Panel Activation 1. The sequences identified above shall be activated as required. If more than one level of parking is requiring ventilation, the cooling tower shall operate through its VFD at a pre-set, field determined VFD speed to maintain 75,000 cfm. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. If more than one level of parking is requiring validation the DDC System shall send one alarm to the pager system. 3.9 PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Refer to the Heating System above for Domestic Water Heating System. B. Sump Pump SP-1 1. Provide communication interface for signal of general alarm at equipment. C. Sump Pump SP-3 1. Provide communication interface for signal of general alarm at equipment. D. Sewage Ejector SE-1 1. Provide communication interface for signal of general alarm at equipment. E. Domestic Circulating Pump DCP-1 1. Provide a flow switch in the discharge piping of each pump for flow confirmation. 2. Upon failure of the flow switch to detect water flow when the pump is enabled to operate signal an alarm indication at the BMCS. 3.10 HEAT TRANSFER A. Unit Heaters (Hydronic) 1. UH-1-25 & VUH-1-15: A heating-only thermostat shall maintain space temperature set point by opening a two-port, two-position control valve and start the unit fan motor. B. Cabinet Unit Heaters (Hydronic) 1. CUH-1-14: A heating-only thermostat shall maintain space temperature set point by opening and closing a two-port, two-position control valve and start the unit fan motor. C. Infrared Radiant Tube Heaters (Gas-fired) 1. IRH-1: Snow/Ice sensor shall activate heaters to melt snow within roof area well. D. Unit Heaters (Electric) 1. EUH-1-6: A heating-only thermostat shall maintain space temperature set point by starting the unit fan motor and activating the electric heater. E. Cabinet Unit Heaters (Electric) MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. ECUH-1-5: A heating-only thermostat shall maintain space temperature set point by starting the unit fan motor and activating the electric heater. F. Radiant Ceiling Panels (Electric) 1. ERH-1-2: A heating-only thermostat shall maintain space temperature set point by activating the electric heater. 3.11 FAN COIL UNITS A. Residential/Club Units: Vertical Fan Coil Units with Multi-Speed Fan Switch Selector at Thermostat 1. FCUH-1-6 & FCUV-1-7: (Hydronic Heating and Cooling) a. Fan coil unit controls shall be independent, and not tied into BMS. b. Room thermostat shall be provided by unit manufacturer, including a three-speed selector switch for the fan motor. c. Upon a drop in space temperature below heating set point, fan shall start and a two-port, two-position valve shall open to flow water through heating coil. Upon satisfying heating set point, the valve shall close and fan shall stop. d. Upon a rise in space temperature above cooling set point, fan shall start and a two-port, two-position valve shall open to flow water through cooling coil. Upon satisfying cooling set point, the valve shall close and fan shall stop. B. Public Units: Fan Coil Units with Multi-Speed Fan Switch Selector at Thermostat 1. FCUH-1-6 & FCUV-1-8: (Hydronic Heating and Cooling) a. Fan coil units shall be monitored through the BMS. b. Room thermostat shall be provided by unit manufacturer, including a three-speed selector switch for the fan motor. c. Upon a drop in space temperature below heating set point, fan shall start and a two-port, two-position valve shall open to flow water through heating coil. Upon satisfying heating set point, the valve shall close and fan shall stop. d. Upon a rise in space temperature above cooling set point, fan shall start and a two-port, two-position valve shall open to flow water through cooling coil. Upon satisfying cooling set point, the valve shall close and fan shall stop. e. A room sensor shall communicate space conditions to the DDC system, and alarm if temperature is out of acceptable range. 3.12 SPLIT SYSTEM DX HEAT PUMP PACKAGES A. HPC-1, 2: (DX Cooling/Heating) 1. Fan coil unit controls shall be independent, and not tied into BMS. 2. Room thermostat shall be provided by unit manufacturer. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Upon a drop in space temperature below heating set point, fan shall start and condensing unit shall be activated. Upon satisfying heating set point, the condensing unit and fan shall stop. 4. Upon a rise in space temperature above cooling set point, fan shall start and condensing unit shall be activated. Upon satisfying cooling set point, the condensing unit and fan shall stop. 5. Controls for individual units are factory. Contractor shall mount remote thermostat assembly as indicated on drawings and connect wiring as required. Section 15780 Contractor shall adjust temperature settings as part of the factory-authorized start-up service. 3.13 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS IN DUCTWORK A. Duct smoke detectors shall be located in air handling units over 2000 cfm by the Division 16 Fire Alarm Contractor. Refer to Section 15050 for coordination responsibilities. 3.14 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT A. Exhaust Fans 1. EF-1-4, 7-10: Fan shall operate continuously. 2. EF-6: Fan shall operate during normally occupied hours, through a time clock. 3. TF-1-18: Fan shall be controlled by reverse-acting thermostat. 4. TEF-1, 2: Fan shall be controlled by wall switch. 5. DBF-1, 2: Fan shall be controlled by pressure switch in dryer vent. 3.15 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. General 1. Upon receiving a signal to start the unit, the air intake damper shall open fully. Upon reaching the fully-open position, an end-switch, provided on the air intake damper by the Section 15980 Contractor, shall start the supply fan motor. 2. Upon receiving a signal to stop the unit, the fan motor shall be deactivated. B. Make-up Air Unit MUA-1,2 – Gas Fired Heating with Chilled Water Cooling: 1. Units shall operate continuously through the BMCS. 2. Upon activation, the fan shall start. 3. Provide a duct discharge temperature sensor. a. At an outdoor air temperature of 60°F (adjustable) and lower, the installed duct-mounted temperature sensor shall modulate the gas furnace to maintain a discharge air temperature of 65°F (adjustable). b. At an outdoor air temperature above 65°F (adjustable), the installed duct-mounted temperature sensor shall modulate a three-way chilled water valve to maintain the discharge maintain air temperature of 65°F (adjustable). c. The associated chilled water circulation pump shall be activated below 35°F (adjustable) to maintain flow in the cooling coil. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.16 POOL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT A. Supply blower runs continuously. B. Compressor starts on a call for dehumidification and/or cooling. C. On a call for dehumidification: The refrigeration circuit will start, operate, and reject its recovered waste heat to the air hot gas reheat coil condenser. D. On a call for cooling: The refrigeration circuit will start, operate with the air reheat off, and reject its heat to either the hot gas reheat coil condenser or the water-cooled cooling condenser. E. On a call for heating: 1. During a call for dehumidification: a. First stage – The refrigeration circuit operates in air reheat mode. b. Second stage – Internal hot water coil operates. c. Third stage – Separate external pre-heat water coil operates. 2. Call for space heating only: a. First stage – Internal hot water coil operates. b. Second stage – Separate external pre-heat water coil operates. F. Exhaust and outside air: 1. Unoccupied times: The outside air intake damper is closed and the bypass damper opens to a position keeping the evaporator and supply airflow constant. An exhaust fan dry contact signals the external exhaust fan off. 2. Occupied times: The outside air intake damper is opened and the bypass damper closes to a position keeping the evaporator and supply airflow constant. An exhaust fan dry contact signals the external exhaust fan on. 3.17 FREEZESTAT SHUTDOWN OF AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT A. All air handling equipment connected to outside air intake openings shall be provided with an electric low limit duct thermostat (freezestat) per Section 15975 and includes air handlers and make-up air units and other similar equipment. B. Freezestat shall be located downstream of the heating coil and upstream of all cooling coils. C. Upon detecting a temperature of 35°F or lower (adjustable), the freezestat shall: 1. Shutdown the air handling equipment. 2. Close the outside air inlet and relief air dampers. 3. Return air dampers, when provided in equipment or as part of the air system, shall open fully. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. On units with heating water coils, open the control valve to provide full flow through the heating coil, and circ pump shall operate. 5. On units with chilled water coils, open the control valve to provide full flow through the cooling coil, and circ pump shall operate. 6. Activation of alarm at the BMCS. 3.18 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be provided by Division 15 and wired by Division 16 Contractors. Refer to Section 15050 for Coordination Responsibilities. B. Control shall be from Fire Alarm Panel in the Fire Command Center. C. All combination fire/smoke dampers shall be powered open during normal operation. Refer to sheet M4.1.4 for fire/smoke damper sequences during fire alarm mode. 3.19 BUILDING SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS – SMOKE MANAGEMENT MODE A. General Requirements: 1. All Smoke Management systems and equipment listed below shall activate upon any alarm. 2. UUKL Listing: Controllers, wiring and any other components required by the Smoke Management system shall be UUKL listed, including, but not limited to: a. All smoke control fans. b. Wiring from Fire Alarm system to all components listed in this section. 3. The Fire Alarm system shall control all aspects of the Smoke Management System. The exception is the following, which shall be controlled thru the DDC System: a. Fan speeds that are required to modulate based on static pressure control. Fan On/Off control is by Fire Alarm system. 4. All sequences listed below that include opening/closing of dampers and operation of a fan(s) for smoke exhaust or pressurization shall have a built-in delay of 15 seconds to allow the dampers to reach the proper position before fan activation. B. Upon activation of the fire alarm system, the mechanical system shall enter the Smoke Management Mode to pressurize and control the migration of smoke as outlined below. A detailed graphic annunciator panel provided and wired by the Fire Alarm Subcontractor, located in the Fire Command Center, shall have On/Auto/Off control of all devices with status indicator lights of each switch position. C. The smoke management system consists of stair pressurization and elevator pressurization fans, each with a variable frequency drive, pressure sensor and a motorized damper. The Division 16 Contractor shall provide the hard wire interface to the damper actuators and variable frequency drives. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide the pressure sensor and relay back to the variable frequency drives. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. The Division 15 Contractor shall closely coordinate with the Division 16 Fire Alarm Subcontractor to provide required contact and signal interfaces between the two systems. E. Stair Pressurization Fans – Typical of SPF-1, SPF-2 and SPF-3 1. Provide one differential static pressure sensor at the ceiling of the Parking Level 1-A with the high pressure port open to the Stair and the low pressure port piped with rigid copper to the exterior of the building at Roof Level. Provide insect screen at exterior opening. 2. The differential pressure signal shall be sent to the variable frequency drive (VFD) of each supply air fan. 3. Provide an open/close motorized damper on the intake or discharge of each pressurization fan with end-switches to indicate open/close status. The motorized damper shall be interlocked with the fan such that the damper will close upon shutdown of fan at the Fire Alarm Panel. 4. Upon an alarm at the Fire Alarm Panel, the stair pressurization fan shall activate and the damper open fully to supply air to the stairwell. 5. The VFD on each fan shall vary the speed of the fan motor to maintain the differential setpoint of 0.05” water column. 6. The fan discharge shall be provided with a duct smoke detector. Two indicator lights shall be provided at the Fire Alarm Panel, green and red. Upon activation of detector, the red light shall illuminate on the Fire Alarm Panel to indicate the probable detector of smoke. Otherwise, the green light shall be illuminated. 7. Stair A-North and B-South are not to be pressurized. F. Elevator Shaft Pressurization Fan EPF-1 and EPF-2 1. Provide one differential static pressure sensor in the Elevator Lobby at the ceiling height of the Parking Level 1-A with the high pressure port piped with rigid copper into the Elevator shaft and the low pressure port piped with rigid copper to the exterior of the building at Roof Level. Provide insect screen at exterior opening. 2. The differential pressure signals shall be sent to the variable frequency drive (VFD) of the supply air fan. 3. Provide an open/close motorized damper on the discharge of the fan with end- switches to indicate open/close status. 4. Upon an alarm at the Fire Alarm Panel, the elevator pressurization fan shall activate and the damper open fully to supply air to the elevator shaft. 5. The VFD on the fan shall vary the speed of the fan motor to maintain the differential setpoint of 0.05” water column. 6. The fan discharge shall be provided with a duct smoke detector. Two indicator lights shall be provided at the Fire Alarm Panel, green and red. Upon activation of detector, the red light shall illuminate on the Fire Alarm Panel to indicate the probable detector of smoke. Otherwise, the green light shall be illuminated. 7. An opening is provided between the elevator shaft and the elevator controls room to allow for pressurization of the elevator controls room. 8. Provide an ANSI Phase 2, high temperature thermal detector in the top of the hoistway. MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.20 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN UPON ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM A. The following equipment shall be shut down upon activation of the local or building smoke detection system. 1. Corridor Outside Air Unit MUA-1. 2. Corridor Outside Air Unit MUA-2. 3.21 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TO OPERATE UNDER EMERGENCY POWER A. Control panels and components connected to the equipment listed below. Coordinate with Division 16 Contractor. Section 15975 Contractor shall provide the routing of power wiring from the appropriate emergency power panel in conduit per Division 16 Specifications. B. Stair Pressurization Fans SPF-1 (Stair A-South) and SPF-2, 3 (Stair B-North). C. Elevator Shaft Pressurization Fans EPF-1 and 2. D. Circulation Pumps CP-1 and CP-2. E. All combination fire/smoke dampers. F. Any motorized dampers associated with the equipment above, shown on the Smoke Management Schematic Plan or called for in the above sequences. END OF SECTION 15980 MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 23 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15980 - 24 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems including but not limited to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and connected equipment. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be the responsibility of one Testing, Balancing and Adjusting firm. The minimal standards to be met are those set forth in Chapter 36 in the 1999 Edition of the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. B. Section 15990 Contractor shall submit bid directly to Division 15 Contractor. C. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: 1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Measuring sound and vibration. 7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents. B. Section 15990 Contractor shall review all Sections of Divisions 15 for coordination and extent of work. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR A. The Division 15 Contractor shall directly procure the services of an independent testing and balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work. Testing and balancing work shall be directly supervised and the results attested to by one of the following: 1. NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor. 2. AABC Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor. B. Section 15990 Contractor shall have a minimum five years of documented experience as a Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Contractor. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Acceptable Section 15990 Contractors 1. Able Balance. 2. Air Right. 3. Complete Mechanical Balancing. 4. Double-T Balancing. 5. Griffith Engineering Service. 6. JPG Engineering. 7. TAB Services. 8. Western Air Balance. 9. Jedi Balancing 1.4 NOTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR A. The Division 15 shall submit the name of the TBA firm to the Engineer within thirty days of contract award to ensure that the TBA firm is on the project from the outset of construction. B. Any TBA firm desiring to offer their services for this work shall submit their qualifications to the Engineer, not less than seven calendar days before the bid date. Approval or disapproval will be given on each request and this action will be given in writing prior to bidding the work. 1.5 STATUS OF SYSTEMS A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order. B. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary TBA requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of available plans and specifications for the project. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that they are being installed properly for the need. C. Before any air balance work is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage, assure filters are installed, see that filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, equipment vibration, and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and outlets shall be wide open at this time. D. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for plugged strainers, proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system static pressure to assure a full system, proper flow meter and check valve installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Inspect all temperature control systems for proper sequence of operation and approximate calibration. Report any deficiencies to the responsible contractor immediately. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF WORK A. Balance all air and water flow to terminals within +10% to -5% of design flow quantities. Measure and record the following data. B. Air Balance 1. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air handling units including supply, return, mixed and outside temperatures and fan data including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, motor running and full load amperage before and after final balance. 2. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to minimize objectionable drafts and noise. 3. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and the control contractor if the systems have fan volume control dampers.\ 4. The duct static shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the balancing contractor. 5. The system shall be tested in all operating modes (full return air, full outside air, modulated damper position, full cooling with the design diversity and full cooling with no diversity). 6. System static pressure and fan motor amperages shall be recorded in all modes. 7. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design delivery inlet or outlet fan volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed. 8. Final adjustments shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Fans, Belt Drive (1) RPM: Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. (2) Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. (3) Final fan speed setting shall allow for predicted filter loading and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators. b. Fans, Direct Drive (1) RPM with speed taps: Set fan speed on tap which most closely approaches design CFM. (2) Report tap setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium or low. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 (3) RPM with speed control rheostat: Set output of fan at design CFM by adjusting the SCR. (4) After adjustments, check fans ability to restart after powering down. Increase setting, if required, for proper starting. (5) CFM with variable pitch blades: Variable fixed pitch fan blades and variable in- motion pitch fan blades shall be adjusted by the manufacturer at pitch required to provide design output. Pitch angle adjustment shall not exceed recommended maximum to prevent "stall". c. Motor Starter Thermal Heaters (1) Mechanical Contractor Furnished Magnetic and Manual Starters: Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper motor protection. (2) Electrical Contractor Furnished Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify electrical contractor of discrepancies. C. Hydronic Balance 1. Heat Exchanger a. Heat exchanger inlet and leaving water temperatures. b. Measure water flow through all circuits. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. 2. Heat-Transfer Water Coils a. Entering-and leaving-water temperatures. b. Water flow rate. c. Water pressure drop. d. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. e. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less than 7500 cfm (3540 L/s). f. Airflow. g. Air pressure drop. 3. Boilers a. Boiler inlet and leaving water temperatures. b. Reset supply temperature (if applicable). c. Gas flow rate and flue gas analysis. The flue gas analysis shall be a copy of the manufacturer's analysis report, if available. 4. Chillers a. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. b. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. c. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 d. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. e. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan data, including number of fans and entering-and leaving-air temperatures. 5. Circulating Pumps a. Circulating pump flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full load amperage at design flow and shut-off conditions. b. The hydronic system shall be proportionally balanced being certain that the path to one terminal is fully open. c. Total system flow shall be adjusted at the pump by restricting the discharge balancing valve. d. If the pump must be severely restricted, the impeller may have to be trimmed. This decision will be the responsibility of the contractor, supplier, and the mechanical engineer. D. Electric-heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering-and leaving-air temperatures at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kW at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection. 3.3 REPORT OF WORK A. The TBA Contractor shall submit six bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least fifteen days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. 1. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. 2. the report shall include all operating data as listed in paragraph 3.2 above, a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the supervising engineer and affixed with his certification seal. 3. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received. B. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. C. When deemed necessary by the mechanical consulting engineer, the balancing firm shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings at the following locations and shall read any of the report quantities in the presence of the engineer for verification purposes. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. When all balancing is done and all dampers are set, all test holes shall be plugged and all dampers shall be marked. The following information shall be recorded in the final report: Design inlet or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet size, design CFM and velocity through the orifice, for each terminal in the system. The pitot tube traverse method for determining CFM shall be used and recorded where ever possible. E. Hydronic systems with meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the report: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes. F. Hydronic systems without meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure drop balance): The system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. On completion of the balance the following information shall be recorded in the report: Design entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop, final balanced entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop. G. Differential Pressure Regulator, Manual Adjustment: Manually adjust the pressure setting on the each valve during balancing of each hydronic system to prevent dead-heading the pump yet maintain water flow requirements. H. When all hydronic balancing is done, all valves shall be marked or the locking rings set. Control valve bypass loops shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in either mode. Confirm in writing. I. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the contractor and the engineer is complete, the balancing firm shall furnish a bound report which shall contain the following information: 1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate information, motor nameplate information, and amperage and voltage to all motors (in all operating modes). 2. Static pressure across all components of the system. 3. Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the terminal size, reading orifice size, and velocities read to attain the CFM. 4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors, pressure drop across all system terminals, pressure rise across the pump in PSI and feet of head. 5. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded. Starter brand, model, enclosure type, installed thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters if different than installed shall be recorded. If the starters were furnished by the mechanical contractor, the heaters shall be changed to the correct size and so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the electrical contractor, the correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the electrical contractor shall be advised. 6. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the method of balance, project altitude, and any correction factors used in the calculations. 7. A reduced set of contract drawings shall be included in the report with all terminals (VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fin tube loops, radiant panel loops, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 8. Any problems, deficiencies or abnormal conditions that may affect the performance or operation of the systems. 3.4 GUARANTEE OF WORK A. The TBA Contractor shall guarantee the tests and balance for a period of ninety days from date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. 1During this period, the TBA Contractor shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies in the balance. END OF SECTION 15990 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INSTALLATION A. The electrical installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Town of Vail, Colorado, OSHA, NEC and the rules, regulations and requirements of the power company supplying power to the buildings. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. General: Provide the work included in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appliances, auxiliaries, services, hoisting, scaffolding, support, supervision, and Project Record Documents, and perform all operations for the furnishing and installing of the complete electrical system, including but not limited to the work described hereinafter. C. The electrical work is shown schematically on the Drawings to indicate the general system arrangement and configuration. The work of this Division shall include coordination with the work of other Divisions of the Specifications and the Contract Documents so as to provide a complete and operational system capable of being readily operated and maintained, including approved re-arrangement of the systems and equipment and re-routing of distribution services to enable the complete system to fit within the confines of the allotted electrical spaces, all to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. D. The work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Equipment supports and miscellaneous steel for electrical equipment. 2. Vibration isolation for the electrical installation. 3. Temporary power and lighting system. 4. Exterior and site lighting. 5. Distribution feeders. 6. Complete 277/480 volt and 120/208 volt light and power distribution system, including emergency system. 7. Lighting, power, telephone, and respective distribution systems. 8. Lighting fixtures, lamps, convenience outlet systems, and miscellaneous wiring devices. 9. Motor power wiring. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 10. Miscellaneous electrical equipment and system, unless otherwise noted. 11. Balancing loads. 12. Grounding system. 13. Mechanical system connections. 14. Sealing of sleeves and other electrical openings. 15. Master "C" lightning protection system. 16. Electrical heaters: baseboard, cabinet and unit types. 17. Lighting control system. 18. Kitchen and laundry equipment connections. 19. Elevator equipment connection. 20. Roof de-icing system. 21. Gutter and downspout de-icing system. 1.3 CODES AND FEES A. General: Comply with Codes in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The electrical installation and the Contractor shall comply fully with all city, county and state laws, ordinances and regulations applicable to electrical installations. C. All equipment shall be equal to or exceed the minimum requirements of NEMA, and IEEE, and UL. D. Should any change in Drawings or specifications be required to comply with governmental regulations, the Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer prior to execution of the work. The work shall be carried out according to the requirements of such code in accordance with the instruction of the Architect/Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 FEES A. All local fees and permits and services of inspection authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. The contractor shall cooperate fully with local utility companies with respect to their services. Contractor shall include in his bid, any costs to be incurred relative to power service (primary and/or secondary) and telephone service. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Provide Project Record Documents of Electrical Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. During construction keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on Drawings and that which is actually installed. Keep this record set of prints at job site for review by the Architect/Engineer. C. Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Architect a complete set of the latest revision of AutoCAD full size electrical plan drawing files. Enter therein, in a neat and accurate manner, a complete record of all revisions to the original Drawings as actually installed. The cost for making the required change shall be borne by this Contractor. Submit one (1) set of bond prints of these revised plans to the Architect/Engineer for review. D. Provide as-built panel schedules upon completion of the work. E. Coordinate Record Documents requirements with Division 1 of the contract documents. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Refer to Division 1 of the Contract Documents Requirements for Guarantee. 1.7 MATENANCE MANUALS A. Refer to Division 1 of the Contract Documents for Maintenance Manual Requirements. 1.8 EXECUTION OF THE WORK A. These specifications call out certain duties of the Contractor and his Subcontractors. They are not intended as a material list of items required by the Contract. B. This division of the specification covers the electrical systems of the project. It includes work performed by the electrical trades as well as trades not normally considered as electrical trades. C. Provide all items and work indicated on the Drawings and all items and work called for in this division of the specification in accordance with the conditions of Division One - General Requirements, of the Contract Documents. This includes all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete systems. Perform start-up and checkout on each item and system to provide fully operable systems. D. Comply with all provisions of the Contract Documents including Division 1, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions of the specifications. E. Certain terms such as "shall, provide, install, complete, start up" are not used in some parts of these specifications. This does not indicate that the items shall be less than completely installed or that systems shall be less than complete. F. Examine and compare the Electrical Drawings and Specifications with the Drawings and Specifications of other trades, and report any discrepancies between them to the ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in the work. At time of bid the most stringent requirements must be included in said bid. Install and coordinate the electrical work in cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. All changes required in the work of the Contractor, caused by his neglect to do so, to be made by him at his own expense. G. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete workable system ready for the Owner's operation. Any item not specifically shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications, but normally required to conform with the intent, are to be considered a part of the Contract. H. These Specifications are basically equipment and performance Specifications. Actual installations shall be as shown on the Drawings. Installations and details shown on the Drawings shall govern where these differ from the Specifications. I. All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be new and unused (temporary lighting and power products are excluded) and free from defects. All materials used shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc. label provided a standard has been established for the material in question. J. All products and materials to be new, clean, free of defects and free of damage and corrosion. K. No exclusion from, or limitation in, the symbolism used on the Drawings for electrical work or the languages used in the Specifications for electrical work shall be interpreted as a reason for omitting the accessories necessary to complete any required system or item of equipment. L. The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications denote that more than one item is referred to. 1.9 COORDINATION OF THE WORK A. Certain materials will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. B. Carefully check space requirements with other trades and the physical confines of the area to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto including finished suspended ceilings. Make modifications thereto as required and approved. C. Transmit to other trades all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections in ample time for installation. D. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that all trades have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify all items of work that require access so that the ceiling trade will know where to install access doors and panels. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that motor controls are of the same manufacturer. F. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete system. Coordinate, project and schedule work with other trades in accordance with the construction sequence. G. The locations of lighting fixtures, outlets, panels and other equipment indicated on the Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subject to such revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed in consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet field conditions or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify the work, or for other legitimate causes. H. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches, etc., and have precise and definite locations approved by the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the installation. I. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate location of outlets. Any significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect/Engineer and receive his approval before such alterations are made. All such modifications shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. J. Obtain from the Architect/Engineer in the field the location of such outlets or equipment not definitely located on the Drawings. K. Circuit "tags" in the form of arrows are used where shown to indicate the home runs of raceways to electrical distribution points. These tags show the circuits in each home run and the panel designation. Show the actual circuit numbers on the finished record tracing and on panel directory card. Where circuiting is not indicated, Electrical Subcontractor must provide required circuiting in accordance with the loading indicated on the drawings and/or as directed. L. The Drawings generally do not indicate the exact number wires in each conduit for the branch circuit wiring of fixtures, and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the correct wire size and quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and/or circuit numbers indicated and control wiring diagrams, if any, specified voltage drop or maximum distance limitations, and the applicable requirements of the NEC. M. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, pull boxes, fixtures, etc. to accommodate the work to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each raceway and busway prior to fabrication. 1. Right of Way: Lines which pitch have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example: steam, condensate, and plumbing drains normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction to raceways and busway and as required to maintain proper head room in pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings. N. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional Detail Drawings to scale similar to that of the bidding Drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the same size as Contract Drawings. With these layouts, coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Such detailed work to be clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit for review Drawings clearly showing the work and its relation to the work of other trades before commencing shop fabrication or erection in the field. O. Contractor shall furnish services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be in constant charge of all work, and who shall coordinate his work with the work of other trades. No work shall be installed before coordinating with other trades. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall visit the site of the job and shall familiarize himself with all conditions affecting the proposed installation and shall make provisions as to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph will in no way relieve the contractor of performing all necessary work shown on the Drawings. 1.11 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall order the progress of his work so as to conform to the progress of the work of other trades and shall complete the entire installation as soon as the conditions of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from the defective or ill-timed work performed under this section shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship and store all products and materials in a manner which will protect them from damage, weather and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. Any such repairs shall be subject to review and acceptance of the Architect/Engineer. B. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened container fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color. C. Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Store materials suitably sheltered from the elements, but readily accessible for inspection by the Architect/Engineer until installed. Store all items subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces. 1.13 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES A. Establish sizes and location of the various concrete bases required. Coordinate with General Contractor and provide all necessary anchor bolts together with templates for holding these bolts in position. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Provide supports, hangers and auxiliary structural members required for support of the work. C. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of raceways through structural, masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection of each raceway and busway passing through building surfaces. D. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars. Prefabricated steel channels providing a high degree of mounting flexibility, such as those manufactured by Kindorf, Globe-Strutt and Unistrut, may be used for mounting arrays of equipment. 1.14 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING A. Provide excavation for the work. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings as required. Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water accumulating therein. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level as specified by the Architect. Whenever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. C. Excavate trenches for utilities to a depth that will provide the following minimum depths to cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown. 1. Primary electric service: 4 feet (minimum) 2. Secondary electric service: 2 feet (minimum) 3. Telephone and CATV services: 2 feet (minimum). 1.15 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES A. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and the installation observed by the Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of these specifications. Deposit in 6 inch layers and thoroughly and carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 1 foot. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 12 inch intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.16 CUTTING, PATCHING, ETC. A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of raceway, outlets or other equipment, the work shall be carefully done. Any damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc. shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall do no cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile, etc., unless he first obtains permission from the Architect/Engineer. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall perform this work in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. C. Where conduits, outlet, junction or pull boxes are mounted on a painted surface, or a surface to be painted, they shall be painted to match the surface. Wherever support channels are cut, the bare metal shall be cold galvanized. D. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs will be provided by the various trades in their respective materials. The trade requiring them to properly locate such openings shall be responsible for any cutting and patching caused by the neglect to do so. 1.17 NOMINAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) A. Unless otherwise noted or required because of special conditions, locate outlets as follows: 1. Heights listed are from finished floor to center of device. Verify exact locations with the Architect/Engineer before installation. a. Convenience and signal outlets: 18 inches unless otherwise noted. b. Lighting Switches: 48 inches c. Disconnect Switches and Motor Controllers: 60 inches d. Wall Telephone Outlets: 48 inches e. Above counter convenience outlets: 6 inches above backsplash (Verify exact locations and mounting heights with Architect prior to rough-in) f. Strobes: 6'-8" or 6" below ceiling - whichever is lower. g. Horn/Strobes: 6'-8" or 6" below ceiling - whichever is lower. h. Mini-Horns: 6'-8" or 6" below ceiling - whichever is lower. i. Card key access reader: 48 inches j. Fire alarm pull station: 48 inches ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 k. Disposal switch: 6 inches above backsplash (Verify exact locations and mounting heights with Architect prior to rough-in) l. Light fixtures: Refer to luminaire schedule on drawings. 1.18 CLEANING UP A. Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc., resulting from the installation of his work. Contractor shall remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the premises clean, subject to the Architect/Engineer's instructions, which shall be promptly carried out. B. Contractor shall clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project. C. All switchboards, panelboards, wireways, trench ducts, cabinets, enclosures, etc shall be thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to energizing equipment and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Architect/Engineer as required. 1.19 WATERPROOFING A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, perform it prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Architect/Engineer and obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings. B. If Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed, he shall restore the waterproof integrity of that surface at his own expense and as directed by the Architect/Engineer. 1.20 SUPPORTS A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice and the following. B. Include supporting frames and racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets. C. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical mounting, which is required in a free standing position. D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment mounted on them. E. Nothing, (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support, except that threaded hub type fittings having a gross volume not in excess of 100 cubic inches may be supported by ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 heavy wall conduit, where the conduit in turn is securely supported from the structure within five inches of the fittings on two opposite sides. F. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, busway, equipment, etc., so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. 1.21 FASTENINGS A. Fasten electrical equipment and devices to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice and the following. B. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 pounds or less, fasten to building elements of: 1. Wood - with wood screws. 2. Concrete and solid masonry - with bolts and expansion shields. 3. Hollow construction - with toggle bolts. 4. Solid metal - with machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs. 5. Steel decking or subfloor - with fastenings as specified below for applied weights in excess of 100 pounds. C. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 100 pounds, but is 300 pounds or less, conform to the following: 1. At concrete slabs utilize 24" x 24" x ½" steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and routed flush with the top of slab screed line, where no fill is to be applied. 2. At steel decking or subfloor for all fastenings, utilize through bolts or threaded rods. The tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and routed in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or subfloor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or subfloor such hangers shall be utilized. D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate with and obtain approval of Architect and conform to the following: 1. Utilize suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably welded or clamped to building steel. Utilize threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members. E. Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include floor anchor fastenings in all cases. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 If products and materials are specified or indicated on the Drawings for a specific item or system, use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of the above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of Shop Drawings where Shop Drawings are required or as approved in writing where Shop Drawings are not required. 2.2 All equipment capacities, etc., are listed for job site operating conditions. All equipment sensitive to altitudes or ambient temperatures to be derated and method of derating shown on Shop Drawings. Where operating conditions shown differ from the laboratory test conditions, the equipment to be derated and the method of derating shown on Shop Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting and adjusting all equipment. Provide one copy of such instructions to the Architect/Engineer before installing any equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during any work on the equipment. Provide all special supports, connections, wiring, accessories, etc. 3.2 Use mechanics skilled in their trade for all work. 3.3 Keep all items protected before and after installation. Clean up all debris. 3.4 Perform all tests required by local authorities in addition to tests specified herein, such as life safety systems. 3.5 Applicable equipment and materials to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and Manufactured in accordance with ASME, NEMA, ANSI or IEEE standards and as approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 Before commencing work, examine all adjoining, underlying, etc., work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship and report any condition which prevents performance of first class work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered. END OF SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16035 - REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT A. Wherever the word "for approval" or "approved" are used in regard to manufactured specialties, or wherever it is desired to substitute a different make or type of apparatus for that specified, submit all information pertinent to the adequacy and adaptability of the proposed apparatus and secure Architect/Engineer's acceptance before apparatus is ordered. B. All requests for substitution of materials or equipment shall be made by the Contractor a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the execution of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. No requests for substitution will be accepted after the execution of the Owner/Contractor agreement or from anyone other than the successful Contractor. C. Wherever operating results such as quantity delivered, or the like are specified, or a definite make and size apparatus is specified, for which such quantities are readily determinable - the make and size of apparatus which is proposed using must conform substantially (in regard to the operating results) to the quantities specified or implied. Same shall apply to important dimensions relating to operation of apparatus in coordination with the rest of the system, or to properly fitting it into available space conditions. Any substitution of equipment or apparatus shall include all necessary revisions, as required to complete the installation. D. Acceptance of substitutions for equipment specified herein will not be given merely upon submission of manufacturers' names and will be given only after receipt of complete and satisfactory performance data covering a complete range of operating conditions in tabular and graphical form. Furnish complete and satisfactory information relative to equipment dimensions, weight, etc. Acceptance of all equipment specified or shown on the Drawings, or substitutions submitted for that specified or shown on the Drawings, will be granted if such equipment, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, conforms to the performance requirements, space conditions, weight requirements and quality requirements. Any additional construction and design costs incurred as a result of any accepted substitution shall be borne by this Contractor. The opinion and judgement of the Architect/Engineer shall be final, conclusive and binding. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for materials, systems and equipment as listed herein, including locations and sizes of all openings in floor decks, walls and floors. B. The work described in any shop drawing submission shall be carefully checked for all clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and proper coordination with all trades on the job. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a certification that all related job conditions have been checked and that no conflict exists. REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16035 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. All drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of field requirements to allow ample time for checking and resubmitting as may be required. All submittals shall be complete and contain all required and detailed information. D. Acceptance of any submitted data or shop drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices, arrangement and layout shall not relieve Contractors from responsibility of furnishing same of proper dimensions and weight, capabilities, sizes, quantity, quality and installation details to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Such acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort on submitted data or shop drawings. E. Each shop drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing and specification article. F. Individual shop drawing submittals shall be provided for each specific material, system or equipment as identified herein. Submittals provided in other than this manner will be returned without review. G. Each equipment submittal shall substantiate conformance to the specification by supplying a document indicating equipment submitted meets or exceeds each line item in the specification or exception taken. Submittals provided without this information will be returned without review. H. All nameplate data shall be complete at time of equipment submittals - refer to Section 16060 for identification requirements. I. For each room or area of the building containing switchboards, panelboards, transformers, emergency generators, dimming cabinets, sound systems cabinets, busway, telephone backboards, signal system backboards, fire alarm terminal cabinets, fire alarm control panels, consoles, etc. the following is required to be submitted for review and acceptance at the time of the equipment submittal. 1. Floor Plans Plan reviews (including sections and elevations when requested) for the equipment indicated in the exact location in which it is intended to be installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less than 1/4" = 1'-0". They shall be prepared in the following manner. a. Indicated the physical boundaries of the space including door swings and ceiling heights and ceiling types (as applicable). b. Illustrate all electrical equipment proposed to be contained therein. Include top and bottom elevations of all electrical equipment. The drawings must be prepared utilizing the dimensions contained in the individual equipment submittals. c. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors, luminaires, ducts, registers, pullboxes, wireways, and structural elements. REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16035 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 d. Note the operating weight of each piece of equipment. e. Note the heat release from each piece of electrical equipment in terms of BTU per hour. This information shall be that which is supplied by the respective manufacturers. f. Illustrate all concrete pads, curbs, etc g. Note all code clearances from all equipment by dimensions. h. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each piece of equipment (as per each respective manufacturer's recommendation). i. On engine generator layout plans, indicate position of radiator and direction of air movement and provide manufacturer's signed statement that engine will operate within approved temperature ranges as shown on the plans. 2. Equipment Removal Routes a. Provide in conjunction with the above, a set of reproducible documents from the then current Contract Documents indicating the methods of equipment removal for all major pieces of equipment. b. Indicate on floor plans by means of arrows, the complete path for eqiupment removal. c. Where equipment will be required to be hung temporarily from a slab or beam, note same on the submission including the weight of the equipment to be hung and the weight of the hoisting equipment. d. Note all heights of conduits, ductwork, link beams, doorways, transoms, piping, etc. in the proposed path assuring that adequate headroom is provided. J. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be provided for the applicable equipment. 1. Wire and Cable (16120) 2. Fire Seals (16122) 3. Poke-Through And Flush Floor Outlets (16132) 4. Wiring Devices (16140) 5. Panelboards (16160) 6. Load Centers (16165) 7. Disconnect Switches (16170) 8. Modular Meter Centers (16175) 9. Fuses (16181) 10. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) (16400) 11. Packaged Engine Generator System (16403) 12. Switchboards (16440) 13. Grounding (16450) REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16035 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 14. Dry Type Transformers (16470) 15. Transfer Switches (16490) 16. Luminaires and Accessories (16500) 17. Lightning Protection System (16601) 18. Roof, Gutters and Downspouts Snow Melt Systems (16858) 19. Lighting Control (16930) 20. Lighting Contactors (16940) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOT USED END OF SECTION 16035 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16035 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16055 - TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide temporary lighting and power in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000. 1. Electrical General Provisions - Section 16010 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Local Utility - Company Holy Cross Energy. 2. Federal Public Law PL-91-596 cited as the Williams-Steifer Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the Owner for the new installation of temporary lighting and power services tailored for this project and the setting of temporary meters in accordance with the Utility Company's requirements. He shall pay for the installation and maintenance of all temporary light and power wiring, including, but not limited to conduits, wire, switches, fuse boxes, receptacles, distribution panel boards, fused disconnect switches, ground fault interruption equipment, fixtures, lamps, fuses and any other incidental material and/or equipment required to provide efficient illumination and power as required by O.S.H.A. and all other authorities having jurisdiction for all areas of the site where work will be performed by the Contractor, his subcontractors, or any other contractors. 2.2 Furnish and install one complete set of 100 watt lamps, including those required for trailers and/or temporary offices. He shall also furnish and install one complete set of fuses for temporary light and power services, as required. The replacement of burned out and broken lamps shall be carried out by those using the trailers and/or offices. 2.3 Temporary power circuits and outlets, etc. shall be provided in accordance with the power requirements of the various horsepower ratings of the equipment to be installed under all contracts and for temporary motors, elevators, etc. Temporary power required for motor operated tools and appliances to be used by various contractors in construction work, and not to be a part of the permanent equipment shall be provided. TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER 16055 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Irrespective of the working hours for the electricians, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain and pay the entire regular and overtime labor cost of keeping the temporary light and power system energized from a period of 15 minutes before the established starting time of the building trade which starts work earliest to a period of 15 minutes after the established stopping time of the trade which stops work latest. This shall apply to every working day of the week during the life of the contract, unless otherwise directed, or until such time that the maintenance of the temporary light and power system is no longer required by reason of the activation of and use of the permanent light and power systems. 3.2 Should this Contractor or any contractor require temporary light or power, or both, before or after the hours set forth in the preceding paragraphs, this Contractor or other contractors shall pay the extra cost of keeping the systems energized and in serviceable condition. 3.3 Remove the temporary light and power systems, when directed. This Contractor shall replace and make good all damage to the permanent parts. Under no circumstances shall temporary wiring be left in finished hung ceiling space. 3.4 When the permanent lighting and power systems are installed and operational, this Contractor shall make the change-over. The cost of making the change-over of the electrical services from the temporary lines to service from permanent lines shall be borne by this Contractor. END OF SECTION 16055 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER 16055 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16060 - IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide fixed identification of all distribution equipment and conductors in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Wire and Cable - Section 16120 2. Panelboards - Section 16160 3. Loadcenters – Section 16165 4. Disconnect Switches - Section 16170 5. Modular Meter Centers - Section 16175 6. TVSS - Section 16400 7. Switchboards - Section 16440 8. Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500 9. Lighting Control - Section 16930 10. Lighting Contactors – Section 16940 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest recommendations of the following. 1. Industry standards shall apply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be black bakelite plates with white engraved upper case letters enclosed by white border on beveled edge. 2.2 Nameplates for equipment supplied by the emergency system shall be red bakelite with white lettering. 2.3 All nameplates must be engraved and must be secured with rivets, brass or cadmium plate screws. The use of Dynamo type or the like is unacceptable. 2.4 Lettering heights unless otherwise noted must be as follows: IDENTIFICATION 16060 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Items Lettering Height Switchboards 2” Panelboards & Load Centers ½” Multiple Meter Centers ½” Feeder Switches ¼” Disconnect Switches ½” Feeder Switches (Fuse Identification) ¼” Wall Plates 1/8” Motor Controllers ¼” TVSS Cabinet ¼” 2.5 Cable tags must be flameproof secured with flameproof non-metallic cord. 2.6 Nameplate inscriptions must bear the name and number of equipment to which they are attached as indicated on the Drawings. The engineer reserves the right to make modifications in the inscription as necessary. 2.7 The Engineer reserves the right to request additional nameplates at time of review of shop drawings and upon site observations. These shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SWITCHBOARDS AND MODULAR METER CENTERS A. Furnish and install a master nameplate for each switchboard and modular meter center engraved with the equipment identification indicated on the Drawings. Mount at top of incoming section. B. Provide on each main switch an identifying nameplate. Where multiple mains are employed each switch shall be numbered. Inscription shall be "main switch" or "main switch no. 1" et al. 3.2 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS A. Furnish and install a nameplate for each panelboard and load center engraved with the identification indicated on the Drawings. Mount at top of panel. Mount unit load center labels on inside of front cover. B. After installations are complete, provide and mount under sturdy transparent shield in the directory frame of each panel door, a neat, accurate and carefully typed directory properly identifying the lighting, receptacles, outlets, and equipment each overcurrent device controls. C. Include on directory the panel or load center identification, the cable and raceway size of panel feeder, and the feeder origination point. IDENTIFICATION 16060 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install a nameplate for each disconnect switch engraved with the equipment designation which the disconnect serves. 3.4 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Furnish and install a nameplate for each motor controller or combination motor controller for both individual motor controllers and those in a motor control center, etc. Engraving must indicate the motor served and the type of service (eg. AC-8 - 1st floor supply, EF-2 - electric closet exhaust). 3.5 FEEDER SWITCHES A. Furnish and install for each feeder switch including, but not limited to those in switchboards, those in switch and fuse panelboards, those in motor control centers, those in multiple meter center, etc, two (2) nameplates as follows. 1. The first nameplate must be white background with red lettering. Engraved with the words "REPLACE ONLY WITH FUSE". Engrave with the proper fuse trade named and ampere rating (i.e. Bussmann LPS-R 100). 2. The second nameplate shall indicate the load served, the size and type of cable and raceway example: LP-4, LP-5, LP-6 4#500 MCM-THW-CU-3-1/2"C. 3.6 SWITCHES A. Furnish and install an engraved nameplate for each switch controlling loads which are not local to the switch. Engraving shall be as directed by the Engineer. 3.7 PULLBOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE TERMINATIONS A. Furnish and install cable tags on each cable which enters a pullbox, enclosure, switchboard and at terminations. Mark tags with type written inscription noting the load served, type and size of cable and the overcurrent device protecting the cable. 3.8 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Install decal type labels on each pipe which is provided with freeze protection. B. Labels shall be inscribed "CAUTION -- ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING" C. Affix labels to the thermal insulation not more than 25' on center but not less than every length of pipe. 3.9 DIMMING CABINETS A. Furnish and install on each dimming cabinet a master nameplate similar to that required for panelboards. IDENTIFICATION 16060 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Where dimmer bank or circuits therein are served via a normal and emergency source provide warning nameplates as follows: "WARNING THIS DIMMER BANK IS ALSO SERVED FROM PANEL CIRCUITS " inscribe panel and circuit numbers. Nameplate to consist of red letters on a white background. C. Provide typed directories similar to that required for panelboards. 3.10 CAPPING AND STAKING A. Wherever raceways are for future use and are terminated outside of the structure, stake the location with a 2' long 1" x 1" wooden stake having a conspicuous color flag. B. Provide metal markers inserted into 8" D x 12" concrete ballast at all raceway terminations exterior to the structure. Inserts must state the date the raceway was installed, the size of the raceway and the point of the raceway termination. 3.11 LUMINAIRES A. Where connected to other than 120 volt circuit, provide each fluorescent or high intensity discharge fixture with the ballast voltage stenciled on the ballast cover in letters not less than 1/2 inch high. 3.12 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION CABINETS (TVSS) A. Provide nameplate on TVSS cabinet or box indicating category A, B, or C. Type of connection, i.e. (L-G), (L-L), (N-G), (L-N). END OF SECTION 16060 IDENTIFICATION 16060 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16065 - TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Complete testing of equipment and systems shall be provided throughout in accordance with contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Wire and Cable - Section 16120. 2. Multiple Meter Centers – Section 16175. 3. Packaged Engine Generator System - Section 16403. 4. Switchboards - Section 16440. 5. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. 6. Automatic Transfer Switches – Section 16490. 7. Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500. 8. Lightning Protection System - Section 16601. 9. Roof, Gutters and Downspouts Snowmelt Systems - Section 16858. 10. Lighting Control - Sections 16930. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents comply with the latest applicable provisions and the latest recommendations of the following. 1. Industry standards shall apply except as otherwise specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide all labor, premium labor and materials required by shop and field testing as specified in the Contract Documents and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.2 SYSTEMS A. The following systems are to be tested, inspected and certified. 1. Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Below) a. Inspect all splices and terminations and make mechanically and electrically tight during a fifteen (15) day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work. b. Perform standard 600 volt insulation test with "megger" tester on all service and feeder conductors. Submit certification to the Architect/Engineer. c. Minimum Test Requirements: (1) Wire and cable rated for 600 volts shall be tested with a 500 V megohmmeter and shall test at least 25 megohms for lengths less than 1000 feet. 2. Motors a. Test all motors under load and verify that motor rotation is correct. 3. Emergency Power System a. Factory Testing (1) Prior to shipment of the engine-generator set from the factory, a certified load test shall be performed and the results submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval before shipment of the unit. The test shall verify the proper operation of all alarms and shut down circuits. (2) The test shall also demonstrate compliance with the set performance criteria as specified herein. (3) Testing shall be performed as follows: (a) In a period of four (4) hours with a loading of 25, 50, 75, 100 and 110 percent of rated load. Step loading procedure shall be utilized (i.e. 25 percent first hour, 50 percent second hour, etc.). (b) Testing shall be under rated load and rated power factor. Testing at unity power factor (resistance banks only) is not acceptable. b. Field Testing (1) After completion of the installation, the Contractor shall arrange with the Architect/Engineer for a load test. The unit shall be TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 required to start-up and accept full load within 10 seconds. The unit shall continue to operate for not less than four (4) hours at 100 percent rated load and power factor. The test shall also include demonstrating that all alarms and shut down devices are functioning properly. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all temporary load-banks, etc. required for the tests. (2) This Contractor shall supply all fuel for the testing. Upon acceptance by the Architect/Engineer, the day tank and main fuel tank shall be filled to capacity after testing. 4. Switchboards and Modular Meter Centers a. At the completion of the work each switchboard and modular meter center shall be field tested in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Tests to be conducted by the service organization of the manufacturer. b. Tests shall include the following: (1) Operation of each disconnecting means under load. (2) Operation of all metering equipment. (3) Operation of all alarm devices. (4) Operation of all key interlocks. c. The manufacturer shall observe all cable bracing both incoming and outgoing and certify that same is provided in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. d. The ground fault system shall be set at the level specified by the switchboard supplier. Each system shall be tested by checking coordination between ground fault and phase to ground fault of a 1 P-20 ampere lighting branch circuit. e. Bus work shall be retorqued in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit certification of same. f. After installation and building occupation, a complete infrared scan shall be made of all current carrying parts to detect loose or poor electrical connections. All connections shall be tightened until satisfactory scan results have been obtained. 5. Lightning Protection System. a. Provide certified label for lightning protection system from U.L. Attach same to building where directed by the Architect.x 6. Lighting Control Dimming System TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. There shall be no power applied to this system until the system installation has been inspected by a factory trained engineer. Any damage resulting from premature energization of this equipment shall be the responsibility of the contractor. b. Upon substantial completion of the system installation the contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the system commissioning, inspection, and training by a factory authorized engineer. c. 7. Ballasts a. Submit manufacturer's certification that ballasts and transformers for discharge type lamps comply with the latest energy code specifications which have been issued. 8. Air Handling Plenums and Luminaires a. For recessed luminaires to be mounted in ceilings utilized as air handling plenums, submit manufacturer's certification that they, together with external connections, are suitable for the purpose. 9. Grounding System a. Upon completion of the electrical grounding system, the contractor shall test the grounding system for stray currents, grounds, shorts, etc. These tests shall be performed with approved instruments. Contractor shall submit in writing to Architect/Engineer a letter indicating the ohmic resistance of the service grounds (25 ohm maximum) and a statement that the grounding system is free of all defects, stray currents, shorts, etc. 2.3 CALIBRATION A. Calibrate and adjust all components requiring same as directed, in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations or as required, for the following categories of equipment. 1. Switchboards. 2. Transformer taps. 3. Lighting fixtures (lamp positions, reflector positions, etc., as required). 4. Automatic transfer switches. B. Provide overloads in all motor starters, in accordance with motor nameplate data and as recommended by the manufacturer. TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Notify the Architect/Engineer seven (7) days prior to the testing dates. If the Architect/Engineer so elect not to witness a specific test a statement of certification must be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval. 3.2 Conduct tests at a time agreeable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide premium labor as necessary. 3.3 Products which are found defective or do not pass such tests shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Tests shall be repeated. 3.4 Conduct all test required by the authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 16065 TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16065 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16102 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide final connections to equipment and coordinate same in accordance with the Contract documents. B. Equipment to receive final connections shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Elevators 2. Motors and Equipment 3. Appliances 4. Owner Furnished Equipment C. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Testing and Acceptances - Section 16065 2. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 3. Wire and Cable - Section 16120 4. Disconnect Switches - Section 16170 5. Packaged Engine Generator - Section 16403 6. TVSS - Section 16400 7. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 D. Related Work Specified in Other Division of these Specifications: 1. Vertical Transportation 2. Motors 3. FF&E Package 4. Control Wiring 5. Appliances EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1). 2. Food and Drug Administration. 3. NFPA-96. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with all conditions affecting the proposed installation of equipment requiring electrical connections and shall make provisions as to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph shall in no way relieve the Contractor of performing all necessary work required for final electrical connections and equipment and the coordination thereof. B. Connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Only those products listed in Division 16000 shall be employed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELEVATORS A. Connections for and coordination of elevators shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Disconnect switches with feeders extended to and connected at each equipment controller. 2. Dedicated fused disconnect switch and circuitry for car lights and fans. 3. Dedicated circuit for machine room receptacle and light. 4. Empty 1” conduit for telephone communications. 5. Lighting fixture, switch and duplex GFCI Receptacle within each elevator pit. 6. One (1) empty conduit from each elevator controller to the Fire Alarm Panel. Size of conduit as per elevator vendor's requirements. 7. Shunt-trip device at each controller. Shunt-trip device shall have auxiliary contacts. Coordinate requirements with elevator system installer. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 8. Fire alarm speaker within each elevator cab and appropriate connections at the elevator machine room and Fire Management System. 9. Warden's fire telephone within each elevator cab and appropriate connections at the elevator machine room and Fire Management System. 10. Signal from automatic transfer switch to each elevator machine room served by that transfer switch. Coordinate requirements with Elevator System Installer. 11. 120 volt power for control of shunt trip circuit breaker. 3.2 EQUIPMENT A. Connections for and coordination of motors and equipment requiring electrical connections shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Provide and install a disconnect switch for each motor and each piece of equipment. Provide disconnects where required by code. 2. Verify that the motor rotation is correct and reconnect if necessary. 3. Provide separate ground wires in flexible, metal conduit and non-metallic conduit so as to provide an electrically continuous ground path. Ground all equipment. 4. Provide motor branch circuit conductors and connections to each individual motor controller and from each controller to the motor through an approved disconnect switch. Make final connection in minimum 24 inch length of liquid-tight, flexible, metal conduit. 5. Where equipment is fed from branch circuit routed in or under the slab, terminate branch circuit at junction box on 2 foot rigid conduit stub-up and make final connection to equipment in liquid-tight, flexible, metal conduit. Provide suitable knee brace on conduit stub-up. 6. Where equipment is fed from overhead support conduit feeder descending from ceiling on flanged floor fitting with conduit type fitting connecting to motor with 24-inch minimum of liquid-tight flexible steel conduit. 7. Where nameplate on equipment indicates fuse protection the disconnecting means shall be equipped with dual element fuses. 3.3 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor is to furnish the following electrical equipment/devices and make the following connections, but is not limited to: 1. All junction boxes, electrical outlets, stainless steel cover plates and switches not built into laundry equipment. 2. All plugs and cords with ampacity as noted on laundry consultant's schedules. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Disconnect switches or similar devices as required by code. 4. Electro-magnetic overload protection for air compressors/vacuum pumps in the laundry as noted. 5. To provide conduit and wiring, installation of electrical devices furnished by laundry equipment Contractor and inter-wire between the following: a. Control panels to water-type ventilators and exhaust/supply fans. b. Signal from fire control system to local fire alarm panel with a dedicated zone per fire control system. B. All outlets and connections shown on electrical laundry drawings are indicated for laundry equipment only. Refer to electrical drawing(s) which indicates the general areas for outlets and devices for general purpose use. C. The electrical laundry plans indicate outlet type and location, and connection positions and loads. For final rough-in locations, refer to laundry consultant's dimensioned plans. 3.4 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. The requirement for equipment furnished by the owner for installation by this contractor shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. The coordination of the proper delivery scheduling of such equipment. 2. The receiving and unloading of such equipment at the property line. 3. The inspection of such equipment for damages, defacement, corrosion, missing components, etc. at the job site. All deficiencies shall be recorded. Deficiencies occurring after inspection shall be corrected by this contractor at his cost. 4. The safe handling at secure storage of such equipment from unloading to the time of permanent installation. 5. The completion of field make up of internal wiring as required. 6. The lamping of equipment. 7. The installation of accessories on such equipment. 8. The installation of such equipment including the transportation of the equipment to the installation area, and the installation of all supports, fasteners, canopies, extensions, etc. required to insure safe support and adaptation to the finished structural, electrical and architectural conditions. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 9. The final connections and grounding to the building electrical system including all necessary labor and materials including but not limited to junction box extensions, lug change outs, etc. 10. The testing of such equipment in its final location. 3.5 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL COORDINATION A. Furnish electrical services to Division 16 equipment as outlined below. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired By the Division 16 Contractor. Contractor should note that the intent of this wiring schedule is to have the Division 16 Contractor responsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 16 for electrical work of this Division 16 which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Division 16 Contractor shall refer to the Division 16 specifications and plans for all power wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding. Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring Equipment Motors MC MC EC --- Motor Starters and Thermal Overload Heaters (See Note 1) MC EC EC MC Fused & Unfused Disconnect Switches EC EC EC --- Manual Operating & Speed Switches (carring load currents) (See Note 3 & 4) MC EC EC MC Control Relays & Transformer (See Note 2) MC MC EC MC Thermostats (Line Voltage) including Aquastats MC EC EC MC Temperature Control Panels MC MC EC MC Building Fire Alarm System Fire & Smoke Detectors, including Relays for Fan Shutdown EC EC EC EC Motor & Solenoid Valves, Damper Motors, PE & EP Switches, Control Valves, Fan Interlocking Wiring, Low Voltage Thermostats MC MC --- MC Duct Detection (Note 6) EC MC --- EC/MC Pushbutton Stations & Pilot Lights (Manually operated Switches not carrying Load Currents) (See Note 3) MC MC --- MC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring Boiler Controls including FM gas train MC MC EC MC Fire Sprinkler System Alarms, Tamper Switches, Flow Switches and Fire Alarm Systems Tie-ins to provide a complete Fire Protection System FPC FPC EC EC Water Softener Timeclocks, Timers, Lock-out Devices, Wheatstone Bridges and Meters MC MC EC MC Temporary Heating Connections MC MC EC MC Electric Freeze Protection heat Cable (Snowmelt) EC EC EC EC Freeze Protection Heat Trace MC MC EC EC HVAC Water Treatment Interlocks MC MC --- MC Variable Frequency Drives MC MC EC MC MC = Mechanical Contractor Under Division 16 of the Work EC = Electrical Contractor Under Division 16 of the Work FPC = Fire Protection Contractor Notes for the Electrical/Mechanical Coordination Schedule 1. All starters, other than those in Motor Control Centers and noted on the Drawings shall be furnished under Division 16. All starters furnished under Division 16 shall be complete with three overload heaters and shall conform to NEC and NEMA requirements. All starters shall have 65,000 AIC rating. 2. Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished under Division 16 except where furnishing such items are specifically required under Division 16 specifications and/or drawings. 3. Pushbuttons stations carrying full load current are to be wired under Division 16 of the work. 4. Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor under Division 16 of the work will furnish and install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches, and make all connections to motors and controls unless interlocked with other mechanical equipment or exhaust fans in locations indicated. Where exhaust fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle switch will be provided under Division 16. Where exhaust fans are interlocked with other mechanical equipment, the interlock wiring will be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor under Division 16. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Electrical contractor shall provide disconnects for all starters and variable frequency drives. Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnects at the equipment if it is not in line of sight of starter disconnect. 6. Electrical contractor provides control wiring to fire alarm panel. Mechanical contractor provides control wiring to mechanical unit. C. All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. All motorized damper equipment shall be furnished and installed under Division 16 and wired under Division 16. D. Control wiring includes all wiring below 120 volts. END OF SECTION 16102 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16102 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide raceways in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Identification - Section 16060. 2. Testing, Acceptances & Certifications - Section 16065. 3. Poke Through and Flush Floor Outlets - Section 16132. 4. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications 1. Finish Painting. 2. Concrete. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Rigid Conduit a. UL Standard UL-6. b. ANSI C80-1. c. Federal Specification WW-C-581E. 2. Intermediate Metallic Conduit a. UL Standard UL-1242. b. Federal Specification WW-C 581E 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing a. UL Standard UL-797. b. ANSI C80-3 c. Federal Specification WW-C-563 4. Flexible Steel Conduit a. UL Standard UL-1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit a. UL Standard UL-360 6. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit a. NEMA TC2; Schedule 40 PVC 7. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing a. NEMA TC12 8. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters a. U.L. Standard UL-870 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide listing of manufacturers proposed in the submittal list identified in Section 16035 of these specifications. B. Where wireways and/or auxiliary gutters are employed full erection drawings must be submitted. Drawings to include plan views, elevations, size of wireways, type and quantity of conductors proposed to be installed therein, etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY TYPES A. Standard Threaded Rigid Steel Conduit 1. Rigid conduit heavy wall galvanized B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit 1. Light weight rigid steel conduit C. Electric Metallic Tubing 1. Continuous, seamless tubing galvanized or sheradized on the exterior coated on the interior with a smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel. 2. All couplings, connectors, etc., used in conjunction with this raceway which are 2 inch in size and smaller may be all steel set screw type; cast or indenter type connectors are not permitted. Conduits of 2-1/2 inch in size and larger must employ steel compression gland fittings, "Tomic" tap-on or "Tomic" compression type or steel set screw type. 3. Where installed in slab or concrete work, provide approved concrete tight fittings. D. Flexible Steel Conduit RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside forming smooth internal wiring channel. 2. Maximum length: 6 feet 3. Each section of raceway must contain a bonding wire bonded at each end and sized as required. Provide connectors with insulating bushings. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit 1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert watertight plastic outer jacket. 2. Cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece brass grounding bushings which thread to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat. F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. PVC conduit shall be rated for 90°C. operating temperature. 2. Conduit shall be a minimum of Schedule 40. G. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing 1. Shall be rated for 90°C. operating temperature. H. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters 1. Of sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings and as required. 2. Provide all necessary elbows, tees, connectors, adaptors, etc. 3. Hinged cover secured with captive screws. 4. Wire retainers not less than 12 inches on center. 2.2 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Provide zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet steel outlet boxes not less than 4 inches octagonal or square, unless otherwise noted. Equip fixture outlet boxes with 3/8 inch no-bolt fixture studs where required. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling, provide a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceiling or walls with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use gang boxes and covers unless otherwise indicated. Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. Provide Series "GW" (Steel City) tile box, or as accepted, or a 4 inch square box with tile ring in masonry walls which will not be plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized provide plaster ring. Provide outlet boxes of the type and size suitable for the specific application. Where outlet boxes contain 2 or more 277 volt devices, or where devices occur of different applied RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 voltages, or where normal and emergency devices occur in same box, provide suitable barrier. B. Construct junction or pull boxes not over 150 cubic inches in size as standard outlet boxes, and those over 150 cubic inches the same as "cabinets", with screw covers of the same gauge metal. C. Plug any open knockouts not utilized. D. Provide surface mounted outlet and junction boxes in indoor locations where exposed to moisture and outdoor locations of cast metal with threaded hubs. All outdoor receptacles shall have tamper resistant cover plates. E. Provide NEMA 6 submersible boxes in vaults and pits associated with any type of sump pump or sewage ejector pump. F. All junction boxes containing emergency power shall be painted red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS A. The following applications must be adhered to except as otherwise required by Code. Raceways not conforming to this listing must be removed by this Contractor and replaced with the specified material at this Contractors expense. B. Raceway Types Application Rigid Conduit Application: Where exposed to mechanical injury, where specifically required, where required by codes, in hazardous areas, and for all circuits in excess of 600 volts. Intermediate Metallic Conduit Application: Same as standard threaded rigid steel conduit Electrical Metallic Tubing Application: Use in every instance except where another material is specified. Flexible Steel Application: Use in dry areas for final connections to lighting fixtures in hung ceilings, connections to equipment installed in removable panels of hung ceilings at bus duct takeoffs, at all transformer or equipment raceway connections where sound and vibration isolation is required. Liquid-Tight Electrical Conduit Application: Use in areas subject to moisture where flexible steel is unacceptable at connections to all motors, and all raised floor areas. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Application: Buried in earth and embedded in concrete slabs on earth. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing Application: Where indicated on the Drawings and as otherwise specifically approved. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters Application: Where indicated on the Drawings and as otherwise specifically approved. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Metal-Clad Cable Application: Where indicated on the drawings and as otherwise specifically approved. 3.2 RACEWAY SYSTEMS IN GENERAL A. Provide raceways for all power distribution and selected portions of low voltage wiring systems, 277/480 volt wiring must be kept independent of 120/208 volt wiring. All types of raceways for power distribution systems (metallic and nonmetallic) shall have ground conductors. The grounding conductor shall be considered an insulated conductor when sizing raceway. Minimum size 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch for home runs and 1 inch minimum for power distribution. Wiring of each type and system must be installed in separate raceways. B. Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed and remove only when wires are pulled. Securely tie embedded raceway in place. Raceways installed below or in floor slabs must extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished slab to the first connector. Lay out the work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs. C. Locate raceways so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and they do not conflict with the services of other trades. Install 1-inch or larger raceways in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in the manner accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight. Protect threads from corrosion with one (1) coat red lead and zinc chromate after installation. D. Above Grade - Defined as the area above finished grade for a building exterior and above top surface of any slabs (or other concrete work) on grade for a building interior. Above-grade raceways to comply with the following: 1. Install raceways concealed except at surface cabinets and for motor and equipment connections in electrical and mechanical rooms. Install a minimum of 12 inches from flues, steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide flashing and counter-flashing for waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings, etc., which penetrate the roof. Route exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to building lines with right-angle turns and symmetrical bends. Run concealed raceways in a direct line and, where possible, with long sweep bends and offsets. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions for passage of raceways. Waterproof sleeved raceways where required. 2. Do not route conduits through boiler rooms. 3. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways with necessary bonding conductor at building expansion joints and between buildings or structures and where required to compensate for raceway or building thermal expansion and contraction. 4. Provide one (1) empty 3/4 inch raceway for each three (3) spare unused poles or spaces of each flush-mounted panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4 inch conduit in a junction box, which after completion, is accessible to facilitate future branch circuit extension. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Provide raceway installation (with appropriate seal-offs, explosion-proof fittings, etc) in special occupancy area, as required. Provide conduit seal-offs where portions of an interior raceway system pass through walls, ceiling or floors which separate adjacent rooms having substantially different maintained temperatures, as in refrigeration or cold storage rooms. 6. Provide drag wire in all spare or empty raceways and in those which the Contractor has elected to install. Tag both ends of wire denoting opposite end termination location with black india ink on flameproof linen tag. Identify special system (POS, PC, TV, etc.) conduits in the method described above. E. Below Grade: Defined as the area below finished grade for a building exterior and below the bottom floor slab or within elevated slabs for a building interior. Below grade raceways to comply to the following: 1. Duct banks shall be installed to drain away from buildings; ducts between handholes and pull boxes shall drain toward the handholes. Duct slopes shall not be less than 3 inches per 100 feet. 2. Duct banks shall be reinforced as shown on the Drawings. 3. Conduits shall be laid in trenches on a clean backfill bedding not less than 6 inches thick and well graded. 4. Where not run under building slabs, underground conduits shall be encased in a 3-inch concrete envelope of 1-3-5 mix and arranged in tiers. Banked conduits shall be held securely in place, at a minimum 1-inch spacing between conduits, by approved separators installed at 5 ft. intervals. 5. Top 2 inches of all concrete envelopes to be mixed with 10 pounds of iron oxide per cubic yard. 6. The minimum cover for conduits shall be 24 inches unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. 7. Conduit entrances to buildings and structures shall be made with rigid metal conduit. 8. Where bends in conduits are required, PVC coated rigid metal long radius elbows, sweeps, and offsets shall be used. 9. All conduits shall be rodded and a mandrel drawn through followed by a swab to clean out any obstructions which may cause cable abrasions. The mandrel shall be 12 inches in length and the diameter ½ inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit. 10. Spare conduits shall be plugged and sealed watertight at all handholes, pull boxes, buildings and structures. 11. Conduits in use shall be sealed watertight at all handholes, pull boxes, buildings and structures. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 12. For PVC runs, a PVC to metallic conduit adapter shall be used at the lower PVC elbow. All exposed conduit shall be metallic. 13. PVC joints shall be made so as to prevent the passage of concrete inside the conduit to form obstructions or cause cable abrasions. A joint compound, approved for the purpose, shall be applied uniformly over the tapered surface before insertion into the coupling. 14. Handhole and pull box covers in streets shall finish flush with finished paving and in other areas shall finish 3 inches above crown of adjacent roadway. 15. Concrete monuments shall be provided at each stubbed conduit location. Monuments shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be installed in the same manner outlined for manhole covers. 16. All underground conduit shall be PVC, except vertical risers and elbows. Vertical risers and elbows shall be PVC coated rigid metal conduit. 17. Provide raceway expansion joints where required to compensate for raceway thermal expansion and contraction. F. Conduits and sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within limitations listed below may be embedded in concrete with approval of the Structural Engineer, provided they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete. 1. Conduits of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. 2. Conduits and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. 3. Conduits with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of cross section on which strength is calculated or which is required for fire protection. 4. Except when plans for conduits are approved by the Structural Engineer, conduits embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the following: a. They shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which they are embedded. b. They shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on center. c. They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. d. Conduits and sleeves may be considered as replacing structurally in compression the displaced concrete provided. e. They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 f. They are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard Schedule 40 steel pipe. g. They have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 inches and are spaced not less than 3 diameters on centers. h. Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and structural walls, shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such supporting elements. i. To prevent displacement during concrete pour of lift slab, saddle supports for conduit, outlet boxes, junction boxes, inserts, etc., shall be secured with suitable adhesives. G. Raceways in hung ceilings shall be run on and secure to slab or primary structural members of ceiling, not to latching channels or T-bars, Z-bars or other elements which are the direct supports of the ceiling panels. Secure conduit firmly to steel by clips and fittings designed for that purpose. Install as high as but not less than 1'-0" above hung ceilings. H. Exposed raceways shall be run parallel or at right angles with building lines. Secure raceway clamps or supports to masonry materials to toggle bolts, expansion bolts, or steel inserts. Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which do not depend on friction or set-screw pressure alone. I. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. This shall be done with ball mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit inside diameter) followed by close fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled in together with, but ahead of the cable being installed. All empty raceways shall be similarly cleaned. Clear any raceway which rejects ball mandrel. J. Support less than 2" trade size, vertically run, raceways at intervals no greater than eight feet. Support such raceways, 2" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than the story height, or fifteen feet, whichever is smaller. K. Support less than 1" trade size, horizontally run, raceways at intervals no greater than seven feet. Support such raceways, 1" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than ten feet. 3.3 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Wireways installed in hung ceilings shall be placed such that the cover will hinge upward from the side. B. 12" clear shall be provided from wireway cover when it is in the open position. 3.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Provide outlet, junction, and pull boxes as indicated on the Drawings and as required for the complete installation of the various electrical systems, and to facilitate proper RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 pulling of wires and cables. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be sized per N.E.C. minimum. B. The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by structural conditions and obstructions, or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures or equipment are installed, they will be symmetrically located according to the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of outlets, panel equipment, etc., with Architect. C. Back-to-back outlets in the same wall, or "thru-wall" type boxes not permitted. Provide 12-inch (minimum) spacing for outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall to minimize sound transmission. 3.5 SEALS A. Underground. Where underground conduits pass from an area of one classification to another or to an unclassified area, a seal fitting shall be installed in the less hazardous area, usually at a stub-up. Seal fittings are not required at the stub-ups of underground runs if both stub-ups are in an area of the same classification and the conduit run does not traverse under an area of different classification. Seal fittings are required at all conduit stub-ups in unclassified areas where any portion of the underground conduit run passes through or under a Division 1 or 2 classified area, or through soil that may contain hydrocarbons. This frequently required that underground conduits terminating under a motor control center or switchgear be sealed. B. Above ground. All overhead conduit passing from an area of one classification to an area of another classification shall be sealed on either side of the classification boundary but not on both sides. There shall be no unions, couplings, boxes or fittings in the conduit between the seal and the classification boundary. C. Sealing enclosures. Sealing of enclosures containing arcing or high temperature devices shall be done in accordance with NEC Article 501-5. In Class 1, Division 1 areas 2 inch or larger conduit must be sealed at enclosures containing splices, taps, or terminals. 3.6 DRAIN FITTINGS A. All overhead conduit systems shall be provided with suitable drain fittings at the low point of vertical runs. If sealing is required in a vertical run, a drain seal fitting shall be installed. To the extent possible, drain fittings shall not be installed until after internal conduit cleaning. END OF SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide 600 volt wire and cable in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000. 1. Identification - Section 16060 2. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 3. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Conductors a. ASTM b. NEMA WC 5 2. Terminal Blocks a. UL-1059 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide listing of manufacturers proposed in the submittal list identified in Section 16035 of these specifications. 1.4 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS A. The use of aluminum alloy conductors is approved by the Engineer and Owner. Specification 16125 shall be followed when aluminum alloy conductors are permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. General 1. Provide wire with a minimum insulating rating of 600 volts, except for wire used in 50 volts or below applications for control of signal systems use 300 WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 volt minimum or 600 volt where permitted to be incorporated with other wiring systems. B. Conductor 1. Electrical grade, annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated in accordance with ASTM standards. Minimum size number 12 for branch circuits; number 14 for control wiring. 2. Conductors may be copper or aluminum where, and to the extent allowed by the NEC. All equipment grounding conductors, grounding electrodes and grounding electrode conductors, and conductors feeding mechanical equipment and elevators shall be copper. C. Stranding and Number of Conductors 1. Cables larger than number 10, stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations. 2. Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Q Class B stranding designations. 3. Cables, multi-conductor unless otherwise noted for low tension systems. D. Insulation 1. Type THW or THWN - Thermoplastic insulation suitable for use in wet locations up to 75 degrees centigrade. Use for lighting, receptacle and motor circuits and for panel and equipment feeders. 2. Type THHN - Flame retardant: Heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation, nylon jacket rated for 90 degrees centigrade operation. Use for lighting branch circuit wiring installed and passing through the ballast channels of fluorescent fixtures, wiring in metal roof decks in or near roof insulation, in attic or joist spaces or in raceways exposed to the sun. 3. Consult equipment manufacturer for insulation type when installation requires an insulation rating above 90 degrees centigrade. E. Color Coding 1. Provide consistent color coding of all feeders, sub feeders, motor circuits and the like as follows: 120/208 Volts Code Phase A – Black Phase B – Red Phase C – Blue Neutral – White Ground – Green 277/480 Volts Code WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Phase A – Brown Phase B – Orange Phase C – Yellow Neutral – Gray Ground – Green with Yellow Stripe 2. Color-code wiring for control systems installed in conjunction with mechanical and/or miscellaneous equipment in accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment. Factory color code wire number 8 and smaller. Wire number 6 and larger may be color coded by color tapping of the entire length of the exposed ends. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Make connections, splices, taps and joints with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically secure. Protect exposed wires and connecting devices with electrical tape or insulation to provide not less than that of the conductor. B. Branch Circuit wires (Number 10 and smaller): Use any of the following types of terminals and connecting devices: 1. Hand applied a. Coiled tapered, spring wound devices with a conducting corrosion-resistant coating over the spring steel and a plastic cover and skirt providing full insulation for splice and wired ends. Screw connector on by hand. 2. Tool applied a. Steel cap, with conduction and corrosion resistant metallic plating, open at both ends, fitted around the twisted ends of the wire and compressed or crimped by means of a special die designed for the purpose. Specifically fitted plastic or rubber insulating cover wrap over each connector. 2.3 ELECTRICAL TAPE A. Specifically designed for use as insulating tape. 2.4 LUBRICANT A. Use lubricant only where the possibility of damage to conductors exists. Use only a lubricant approved by the cable manufacturer and one which is inert to cable and raceways. WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway system. Mount wiring through a specified raceway, regardless of voltage application. B. Drawings do not indicate size of all branch circuit wiring. For branch circuits whose length from panel to furthest outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits, use number 10 or larger. Voltage drop of branch circuiting shall be within three (3) percent of system voltage. Conductor sizing shall adhere to the following tables. Single Phase Branch Circuit Wire Sized for 3% Voltage Drop DISTANCE IN FEET 120 VOLT WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 1000 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 #4 1500 #12 #10 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #2 2000 #12 #8 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 2500 #10 #8 #6 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 #2 #1 3000 #10 #6 #6 #4 #2 #2 #2 #1 #1 #1 3500 #10 #6 #4 #4 #2 #2 #1 #1 #1/0 #1/0 4000 #8 #6 #4 #2 #2 #1 #1 #1/0 #1/0 #2/0 4500 #8 #6 #4 #2 #2 #1 #1/0 #1/0 #2/0 #2/0 5000 #8 #4 #2 #2 #1 #1 #1/0 #2/0 #2/0 #3/0 5500 #8 #4 #2 #2 #1 #1/0 #2/0 #2/0 #3/0 #3/0 208 VOLT WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 1500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 2000 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 2500 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 3000 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 #4 3500 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 4000 #12 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 4500 #10 #10 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #2 5000 #10 #10 #8 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 5500 #10 #10 #8 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 277 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 2000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 2500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 3000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #8 3500 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 4000 #12 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 4500 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 5000 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 5500 #12 #12 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 #4 Single Phase Branch Circuit Wire Sized for 3% Voltage Drop DISTANCE IN FEET 480 FEET WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 2000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 3000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 4000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 5000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 6000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 7000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 8000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 9000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #8 10000 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 11000 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 Three Phase Wire Sizes for Utilization Equipment to Upstream Panel DISTANCE IN FEET 208 VOLT WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 2000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #10 2500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #10 #8 3000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 3500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #8 4000 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 4500 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 5000 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Three Phase Wire Sizes for Utilization Equipment to Upstream Panel DISTANCE IN FEET 208 VOLT WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 5500 #12 #12 #10 #10 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 480 VOLT WATTS 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 1500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 2000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 2500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 3000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 3500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 4000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 4500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 5000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 5500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 6000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 6500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 7000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 7500 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #10 8000 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10 #10 C. Do not install wire in incomplete conduit runs nor until after the concrete work and plastering is completed and moisture is swabbed from conduits. Eliminate splices wherever possible. Where necessary, splice in readily accessible pull, junction, or outlet box. D. Provide cable supports for all vertical risers where required by code not to exceed the following: Minimum Conductor Size Vertical Supports Aluminum Copper No. 18 AWG to No. 8 AWG 100 ft 100 ft No. 6 AWG to No. 0 AWG 200 ft 100 ft No. 00 AWG to No. 0000 AWG 180 ft 80 ft 211,601 CM to 350,000 CM 135 ft 60 ft 350,001 CM to 500,000 CM 120 ft 50 ft 500,001 CM to 750,000 CM 95 ft 40 ft WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Minimum Conductor Size Vertical Supports Aluminum Copper E. Flashover or insulation value of joints to be equal to the of the conductor. Provide Underwriters' Laboratories listed connectors rated at 600 volts for general use and 1000 volts for use between ballasts and lamps or gaseous discharge fixtures. F. Use terminating fittings, connectors, etc., of a type suitable for the specified cable furnished. Make bends in cable at termination prior to installing compression device. Make fittings tight. G. Install wire in raceways and make up terminations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using special washers, nuts, etc., as required. Use an accepted wire-pulling lubricant equivalent to "Yellow" (Ideal) for all wire number 4 and larger. Strip insulation so as to avoid nicking of wire. H. Extend wire sizing for the entire length of a circuit, feeder, etc. unless specifically noted otherwise. I. Isolated ground circuits to have a dedicated neutral wire and a dedicated ground wire. Sharing of these wires with other circuits is not permissible. J. A #10 AWG copper neutral conductor shall be used for all isolated ground circuits. K. The neutral conductor shall be rated at 200% of the phase conductors from the secondary of all K-rated transformers to the panelboard. L. Where conductor sizes have been increased due to voltage drop, the contractor shall provide all necessary provisions required for terminating conductors to devices where the landing lugs at the device do not allow for the larger conductor. Provisions include, but are not limited to; junction boxes for pigtailing, splices, etc. 3.2 TESTING A. See specification 16065 for testing requirements. END OF SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE AND CABLE (600 volts and below) 16120 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16122 - FIRE SEALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide premixed putty sealant at wall, ceiling and/or floor electrical penetration fire seals in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in other Divisions of these Specifications. 1. Finish painting. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. ASTM E119-73. 2. UL 1479. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. 3M Company. 1. Penetration Seals Series 7900 (for conduit/data penetrations). 2. FS-195 Wrap and CP-255/L-Caulk (for busway penetrations). B. Nelson Electric. 2.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS A. The system shall provide an immediate fire seal, require no curing time, emit no hazardous or toxic fumes and be asbestos free. B. The system must have an intumescent nature, expand when heated to increase flame and smoke containment. C. The system shall be easy to use, require no special tools and shall be capable of being installed from one side. D. The system shall not require derating whatsoever of the wiring systems passing through the seal. E. The system shall be factory modified for additions or deletions of raceways or cables. FIRE SEALS 16122 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Existing materials must be reusable to accommodate penetrations changes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Putty shall be installed no thinner than 0.75 inches. B. A minimum of 0.5 inches of putty shall be placed around each penetrating item. When this is not possible a cone shall be built up around the penetrating items, using a second layer of putty. Slope the cone at 30 degrees (30°) from wall or floor. C. Wall openings must not have an unsupported space of putty greater than 4 inches and floor openings an unsupported opening of 1.5 inches. D. Provide ceramic wool temperature rated 2300°F in conjunction with putty in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide ceramic fiberboard temperature rated 2000°F in conjunction with the putty in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. F. Penetrating items must be firmly anchored prior to the putty installation. Provide all necessary anchor bolts, fittings, etc. as necessary. G. In multi-family residential buildings, townhomes, hotels, motels and similar occupancies, provide UL listed fire rated putty pads on all outlets in demising walls and fire rated walls. Putty pads shall be listed to allow less than 24” between outlets on opposite sides of demising walls. END OF SECTION 16122 FIRE SEALS 16122 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16125 - ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide 600 volt wire and cable in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000. 1. Identification - Section 16060 2. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 3. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Conductors a. ASTM b. NEMA WC 5 2. Terminal Blocks a. UL-1059 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide listing of manufacturers proposed in the submittal list identified in Section 16035 of these specifications. 1.4 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS A. The use of aluminum alloy conductors is approved by the Engineer and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION FEEDER A. Distribution feeder conductors in sizes #6 AWG to 1,000 kcmil may be copper or aluminum alloy. Aluminum alloy conductors shall be compact stranded conductors of STABILOY® (AA-8030) as manufactured by Alcan Cable or of a recognized 8000 Series aluminum alloy conductor material by the Aluminum Association. ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16125 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Manufacturer shall verify compliance with the elongation requirement per Table 10.1 of UL Standard 1581 for stranded AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors on wires taken from the conductor after stranding. 2.2 INSULATION A. For use in Raceways: Sizes #6 AWG to 1000 kcmil Type XHHW-2, temperature rating 90º C and marked “SUN RES”. B. For use in Cable Trays: Sizes #1/0 AWG and larger Type XHHW-2, temperature rating 90º C and marked: “SUN RES”, “VW-1”, “GASOLINE AND OIL-RESISTANT II”, and “FOR CT USE”. 2.3 CONNECTIONS FOR CONDUCTORS A. Using Mechanical Screw Type Connectors 1. Connectors shall be dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU) and Listed by UL for use with aluminum and copper conductors and sized to accept aluminum conductors of the ampacity specified. 2. Using a suitable stripping tool, to avoid damage to the conductor, remove insulation from the required length of the conductor. 3. Clean the conductor surface using a wire brush and apply a Listed joint compound. 4. Tighten the connection per the connector manufacturer’s recommendation. 5. Wipe off any excess joint compound. B. Using Mechanical Compression Type Connectors: 1. Connectors shall be dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU) and Listed by UL for use with aluminum and copper conductors and sized to accept aluminum conductors of the ampacity specified. 2. The lugs shall be marked with wire size, die index, number and location of crimps and shall be suitably color coded. Lug barrel shall be factory prefilled with a joint compound Listed by UL. 3. Using a suitable stripping tool, to avoid damage to the conductor, remove insulation from the required length of the conductor. 4. Clean conductor surface using a wire brush. 5. Crimp the connection per the connector manufacturer’s recommendation. 6. Wipe off any excess joint compound. C. Termination of Aluminum Conductor to Aluminum Bus: 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to 1 or 2. 2. Hardware: 3. Bolts: Anodized aluminum alloy 2024-T4 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and to ASTM B211 or B221 chemical and mechanical property limits. 4. Nuts: Aluminum alloys 6061-T6 or 6262-T9 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.2. 5. Washers: Flat aluminum alloy 2024-T4, Type A plain, standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16125 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Lubricate and tighten the hardware as per the manufacture’s recommendations. D. Termination of Aluminum Conductor to Copper Bus: 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to 1 or 2. 2. Hardware: 3. Bolts: Plated or galvanized medium carbon steel; heat treated, quenched and tempered equal to ASTM A-325 or SAE grade 5. 4. Nuts: Heavy semi-finished hexagon, conforming to ANSI B18.2.2, threads to be unified coarse series (UNC), class 2B. 5. Washers: Should be of steel, Type A plain standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. 6. Belleville conical spring washers: shall be of hardened steel, cadmium plated or silicone bronze. 7. Lubricate and tighten the hardware as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Termination of Aluminum Conductor to Equipment not Equipped for Termination of Aluminum Conductor: 1. Prepare compression connection using an adapter Listed by UL for the purpose or by pigtailing a short length of suitable size of copper conductor the aluminum conductor with a compression connector Listed by UL. 2. Provide an insulating cover over adapter body or the compression connector. 3. Terminate the adapter or the pigtail on to the equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOT USED. END OF SECTION 16125 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16125 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16125 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16132 - POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide poke through and flush floor outlets in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000. 1. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 2. Wire and Cable - Section 16120 C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications. 1. Carpet Tiles. 2. Cutting and patching. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. U.L. Standard #514. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell B. Raceway Components, Inc. C. Steel City 2.2 POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS IN GENERAL A. All through floor wiring for power and communication shall have a minimum fire rating of 2 hours. B. All power units shall be factory pre-wired, with 120V, 20 amp rated grounded receptacle, with one divided through floor conduit, a junction box, and shall be self supporting without the attachment of an above floor fitting. C. All units for power and telephone shall be factory pre-wired, with 120V, 20A amp rated grounded receptacle, and shall contain internal barrier such that power will occupy one-half of outlet box and telephone the remaining half of the outlet box. POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. The integral fire barrier shall incorporate a cold smoke barrier to prevent the passage of smoke when heat is not present. E. All units shall be for use with slab floors as well as corrugated metal deck type. All metal boxes shall be provided with corrosion protection suitable for installation in concrete. Aluminum alloy boxes are not considered acceptable for installation in concrete or cinder fill unless protected by asphalt paint or the equivalent. F. All units shall accept up to 100 pair telephone service cable. G. Each unit shall be provided with a heavy gauge steel work plate that is clearly marked - power-telephone. Install the service fitting until the floor finishing is completed. H. Contoured cast brass, finished cover to be as selected by Architect/Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Electrical contractor to verify the thickness of the floor and select the through floor component that fits floor thickness. B. Install so that cover plates are flush with top of finished floor. END OF SECTION 16132 POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide wiring devices in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related work Specified in Division 16000 1. Electrical General Provisions (Mounting Heights) - Section 16010 2. Identification - Section 16060 3. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 4. Wire and Cable - Section 16120 5. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications 1. Finish painting 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Switches a. Federal Specification Standard WS-896E. 2. Receptacles a. N.E.M.A. Standard WD-1, 3.02 through 3.10 b. U.L. Standard 498 Federal Specification WC596-D. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and specifications for all wiring devices and plates. B. Switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Switches – Residential Units and Public Areas 1. Hubbell – HBL2121 Style-Line Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton B. Switches – Back-of-House Areas 1. Hubbell – HBL1221 Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton C. Switch with Integrated Dual Technology Occupancy Sensor 1. Hubbell – ATD1277H Series 2. Wattstopper 3. Leviton D. Dual-Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensor 1. Hubbell – ATD Series 2. Wattstopper 3. Leviton E. Switch and Pilot Light 1. Hubbell – HBL1221PL Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton F. Duplex Convenience Receptacles – Residential Units and Public Areas WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Hubbell – HBL2162 Style Line Series. 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton G. Duplex Convenience Receptacles – Back-of-House Areas 1. Hubbell – HBL5352 Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton H. Faceplates 1. Residential Units and Public Areas - Nylon: Leviton Decora screwless snap-on Series or approved equal Back-of-House Areas - Stainless: Hubbell S Series or approved equal I. Outdoor Receptacles 1. Hubbell – GF5362A Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton J. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 1. Hubbell – GF5362A Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Leviton K. Isolated Ground Receptacles 1. Hubbell – HBL CR5352IG Series 2. Cooper Wiring Devices 3. Pass & Seymour WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Leviton 2.2 SWITCHES A. Switches 1. This specification addresses toggle and rocker (Style Line style) devices. Reference the construction drawings for specific areas of use. As a general rule, Style Line devices shall be installed in all public areas and residential units. Toggle type to be installed in back of house areas. 2. Provide specification grade, flush mounting, quiet-operating AC type, with toggle or rocker operator, heat-resistant plastic housing and self grounding metal strap. Silver alloy contact. Rated 20A (15A within residential units) at 120-277V and capable of full capacity on tungsten or fluorescent lamp load. Design for side or back wiring with up to Number 10 wire. Verified by UL to meet or exceed Federal specification WS-896E. 3. Occupancy sensor switches to be dual technology passive infrared and ultrasonic with manual override switch and adjustable time delay. B. Use single-pole, double-pole, 3-way, 4-way, pilot or keyed type, as indicated on Drawings or required. C. Switches controlling lighting connected to the emergency power system shall be red and of the illuminated toggle type-illuminated when the switch is in the off position. D. Switches controlling lighting by way of low-voltage lighting control relays shall be 3- position, momentary-contact, center-off type to match the other switches. E. Switch and Pilot Light: Switch as indicated with red neon pilot light. F. Color of normal devices as selected by Architect. 2.3 DUPLEX CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES A. This specification addresses standard and Style Line style devices. Reference the construction drawings for specific areas of use. As a general rule, Style Line devices shall be installed in all public areas and residential units. Standard type to be installed in back of house areas. B. Provide 3-pole NEMA and A.N.S.I. standard type, with bronze contacts that accept plug with 2 parallel blades and 1 grounding blade. Heat-resistant plastic enclosure with nylon face and green grounding screw. Break-off terminals for 2-circuit wiring. Rated 20 amperes (15A within residential units unless outlet is on a dedicated 20A circuit breaker or small appliance circuit) at 125-volt electrical alternating current. C. All devices connected to the emergency system are to be red in color. D. Color of normal devices as selected by Architect. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.4 FACEPLATES A. Provide nylon screwless snap-on or stainless steel cover plates for wall receptacles, outlets, and switches as noted above to match device finish, unless otherwise noted. When two or more switches or devices are shown in one location, mount under a common plate. B. Color of device plates to be selected by Architect. Note, certain specific areas may require specially colored devices plates. 2.5 OUTDOOR LOCATIONS A. Each receptacle installed in a damp location shall be corrosion resistant having all metal parts from stainless steel or be nickel plated brass. B. Protect exterior switches and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums by a cast aluminum metal plate with a fiber shield and spring loaded cover. C. Protect exterior receptacles with UL listed lockable weather-proof while-in-use covers and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums by a cast aluminum metal plate with a stainless steel spring-loaded, gasketed, double flap lift cover to remain locked in either open or closed position. D. Where indicated or required provide ground fault circuit interrupters which will interrupt leakage currents between 4-6 mA having a maximum circuit current of 20 amperes. Employ feed through devices as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SWITCHES A. Mount switches vertically with the "on" position on top, unless noted or specified otherwise. B. Where switches are indicated to be installed near doors, corner walls, etc., mount same not less than 2 inches and not more than 12 inches from trim. Verify exact location with the Architect. C. Carefully coordinate the location of switches to insure locations at the strike side of doors. D. Furnish and install an engraved legend for each switch that controls motors, equipment systems, etc., not located within sight of the controlling switch. E. All wallbox dimmers shall be mounted under a separate cover plate. Do not gang with other devices. 3.2 RECEPTACLES A. Unless otherwise noted, mount receptacle vertically with U-shaped ground position at bottom. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Prior to final payment replace broken or damaged faceplates, switches and receptacles. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide panelboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. General Electrical Provisions (Equipment supports) - Section 16010. 2. Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035. 3. Identification - Section 16060. 4. Fuses 600 Volts and Less - Section 16181. 5. TVSS - Section 16400. 6. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. C. Related work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications. 1. Finish painting. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. Panelboards a. UL Standards #50 and #67. b. Federal Standard W-P-115A Type II, Class 1. c. NEMA Standard PB-1. 2. Circuit Breakers a. UL Standard #489. b. Federal Standard W-C-375a Amendment No. 4 and W-C-375b. c. NEMA Standard AB-1. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedures and additional documents for submittals in concert with panelboard submittals. Submittals failing to meet the following criteria will be returned without a review or acceptance. B. With each panelboard drawing the following is required. 1. Show main devices and lug sizes; branch circuit device sizes and arrangement; bus ampacities; withstandability and short circuit rating; dimensions and construction; gutter and backbox dimensions; nameplate and legend; protective coating; and all pertinent details of panel, enclosure, cover, and method of securing cover and lock. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each panelboard as a complete and finished product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each panelboard. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All panelboards are to be of the same manufacturer as the switchboards except for fused lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards required for selective coordination. Selective coordination fused panelboards shall be Bussmann. 2.2 PANELBOARDS IN GENERAL A. Provide panelboards consisting of an assembly of branch circuit switching and protective devices (circuit breakers, switch and fuse units, or combination thereof) mounted inside a dead front enclosure. Provide the number and size of these branch circuit devices as indicated by the circuiting, on the drawings, and in the schedules. B. Provide the following modifications and additional equipment as shown on the Drawings. 1. Main circuit breakers. 2. Shunt trip circuit breakers. 3. Subfeed switches. 4. Feed through or sub feed lugs and/or bus. 5. Feed through cabling arrangement. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Double lugs for multiple cables or for future provisions. 7. Circumferential compression lugs where aluminum conductors are employed. 8. Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers. 9. Where main breakers are indicated, they shall be factory mounted to the bus and shall be located at top center panel. Back connected branch circuit breakers are not acceptable as main breakers. 10. Special purpose lugs as may be required for voltage drop compensated conductors. C. Interiors 1. Rigid removable assembly of tin plated aluminum or silver-plated copper bus bars and interchangeable bolted branch circuit devices. 2. Bus bars drilled to permit branch circuit devices of all sizes and number of poles to be interchangeable and installed in any spare space of sufficient size, without disturbing adjacent units; without removing main bus or branch circuit connectors and without machining, drilling, or tapping in the field. 3. Arrange bus in sequence or distributed phasing so that multi-pole circuit breaker can replace any group of single circuit breakers of the same size. 4. Provide neutral bus in each panelboard. 5. Provide a copper ground bus in each panelboard. 6. Provide a non-linear rated panelboard when feed from a K-rated transformer. 7. Provide an isolated ground bus when panelboard feeds isolated ground receptacles. 8. Provide feed through and/or sub feed interiors as indicated on the panel schedules and one line diagram. D. Enclosure 1. Code gauge steel box galvanized. 2. Provide a bolt-on ground connector to inside of enclosure. 3. Flush mounted in finished areas and where indicated. Surface mount elsewhere. 4. All panelboards installed outdoors shall have a NEMA 3R enclosure. 5. Enclosures of multiple section panelboards shall all be of the same size and dimensions. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Front 1. Doors must be provided on all lighting and power panels. On switch and fuse panelboards doors over overcurrent devices are not to be provided unless rated for same. 2. Provide hinged door-in-door or front-hinged covers for all panelboards. 3. Heavy code gauge steel as required to maintain panel face flat. 4. Hold front closed with latch and lock. 5. Factory finished in ANSI 61 gray enamel or two coats of air-drying lacquer over a rust inhibitor. 6. Provide type written directory in plastic cover for total number of poles. 7. Provide approved lock. All panels keyed alike. Furnish four (4) sets matching keys and one key per panel to the Owner. 8. Welded angle rest at the bottom of the door to facilitate cover installation. 9. Doors over 48" in height shall have auxiliary fasteners at top and bottom of door in addition to lock and catch. 10. No commercial logo on face of equipment. F. Terminal Lugs 1. Bolted type, labeled for either copper or aluminum conductors. 2. Locate main lugs properly at top or bottom, depending where main feeder enters. G. Electrical Ratings 1. Panelboards are to be rated 120/208 volts or 277/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral with ampacities as indicated on the Drawings (unless otherwise noted). 2. Short circuit withstand ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Where indicated, provide panelboards having a "service entrance" Type UL label with neutrals factory bonded to frame or enclosure. H. Circuit Breaker Devices 1. Plastic molded case. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break, with inverse time delay characteristics. Single-handle and common tripping multi- pole breakers. 3. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices. 4. Panelboard must be of the type which will accept the field installation of shunt trip devices of 60 amperes or less on the branch devices. 5. Interrupting capacities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. For lighting circuits that are controlled at panel, provide devices labeled "SWD" for switching purposes. 7. Bolted type terminals U.L. listed for either aluminum or copper 75 Degrees C cables. 8. Provide main breakers in panels served from transformers. 9. Locate next to each breaker or space unit an individual number. 10. Circuit breakers serving kitchen equipment beneath cooking hoods shall include a shunt trip coil. 11. The use of series rated breakers shall be approved by the engineer prior to preparation of submittals. The drawings are based on a fully rated system, should the Contractor elect to use series rated systems and the inspector having authority requires revised engineered drawings reflecting the series rated systems additional engineering services will be required by the engineer to provide the required drawings. I. Ground fault circuit interrupter branch circuit breakers shall be as indicated in panel schedules. Circuit breakers shall be circuit interrupting which will operate manually for normal switching functions and automatically under overload, short circuit, and 0.005 amp line-to-ground fault conditions for personnel protection or 30 mA for equipment protection as required by the NEC. The operating mechanism shall be entirely trip-free so that contact cannot be held close against an abnormal overcurrent, short circuit, or ground fault condition. The device shall be bolt-on type with insulated case construction and shall be interchangeable with standard 1P breakers utilized in the panelboard. J. Switch and Fuse Devices 1. Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front type. Each switch a self-contained unit, externally operable from the front. 2. Fuse and switch compartment interlocked to prevent access to the fuse compartment until switch is thrown to "OFF" position. Interlock intentionally releasable by externally applied tool to permit checking switch and fuses under load. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Switch units interchangeable for replacement, without disturbing balance of distribution panelboard's operation. 4. Switches are to reject fuses other than those specified. 5. Provide Class R rejection type fuses as specified elsewhere. 6. Provide spare fuses as specified elsewhere. K. Selective Coordination 1. Where Articles 700.27 and/or 701.18 and 517.26 of the NEC apply. Bussmann coordination modules or power module switches shall be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount panel 4 feet to panel center but with maximum height of six feet 6 inches to handle of topmost switching device. B. Mount surface type panels a minimum 1 inch off wall on channels. C. Where flush mounted, the fire integrity of the wall in which it is installed must be maintained. D. Neatly arrange branch circuit wires and tie together in each gutter with Thomas & Betts nylon "Ty-Raps", or approved equal at minimum 4 inch intervals. E. Plug all knockouts removed and not utilized. 3.2 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING A. Vacuum all backboxes clean of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance. B. Touch up scratch marks, etc., with matching paint. 3.3 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide a 4" high reinforced concrete pad beneath all floor mounted panelboards. END OF SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS 16160 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16165 - LOAD CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide load centers in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000. 1. Identification - Section 16060. 2. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations of the following. 1. Load Centers a. UL Standards 50 and 67. b. Federal Standards W-P-115A Type II, Class 1. c. NEMA Standard PB-1. 2. Circuit Breakers a. UL Standard 489. b. Federal Standard W-C-375a Amendment No. 4 and W-C-375b. c. NEMA Standard AB-1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. With each load center drawing the following is required. Submittals failing to meet this criteria will be returned without a review or acceptance. 1. Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedures and additional documents for submittals in concert with load center submittals. 2. Show: Main devices and lug sizes; branch circuit device sizes and arrangement; bus ampacities; short circuit data and withstand ratings; dimensions and construction; gutter dimensions; nameplate and legend; protective coating; and all pertinent details of panel, enclosure, cover, and method of securing cover. LOAD CENTERS 16165 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All load centers are to be of the same manufacturer as the switchboards. 2.2 LOAD CENTERS IN GENERAL A. Provide load centers consisting of an assembly of branch circuit switching and protective devices (circuit breakers) mounted inside a dead front enclosure. Provide the number and size of these branch circuit devices as indicated on the circuiting plans and schedules. B. Provide the following modifications and additional equipment as shown on the drawings: 1. Main circuit breakers. 2. Feed through lugs. 3. Cable tap arrangement for feed through cables. 4. Rain-tight hubs for exterior mounted load center. C. Interiors 1. Rigid removable assembly of copper or aluminum bus bars with plug-in branch circuit devices. 2. Bus bars drilled to permit branch circuit devices of all sizes and number of poles to be interchangeable and installed in any spare space of sufficient size, without disturbing adjacent units, without removing main bus or branch circuit connectors and without machining, drilling, or tapping. 3. Arrange bus in sequence or distributed phasing so that multipole circuit breaker can replace any group of single circuit breakers of the same size. 4. Provide neutral bus in each load center. 5. Provide ground bus in each load center. D. Enclosure 1. Bolt-on ground connector to inside of box. 2. Flush mounted in finished areas and where indicated. Surface mount elsewhere. E. Front 1. Doors shall be provided on all panels. LOAD CENTERS 16165 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Heavy code gauge steel as required to maintain panel face flat. 3. Hinged door/back board panel assembly. 4. Factory finished in medium gray enamel or two coats of air-drying lacquer over a rust inhibitor. Paint front finish as directed by Architect. 5. Provide typewritten directory located inside door under durable plastic cover for total number of poles. 6. Welded angle rest at bottom of the cover to facilitate cover installation. 7. No commercial logo on face of load center. F. Terminal Lugs 1. Locate main lugs properly at top or bottom, depending upon where main feeder enters. G. Electrical Ratings 1. Load centers shall be supplied with the quantity of circuit breaker mounting spaces indicated in the load center schedule. 2. Load centers shall be of voltage, phase, number of wires, and with ampacities as indicated on the Drawings and/or panel schedules. The ampacity listed on the load center schedule is a minimum value. The ampacity may be required to be increased due to the quantity of circuit breaker spaces required or due to lug sizes required for larger feeders. 3. Short circuit withstand ratings shall be equal to or greater than those as indicated on the Drawings and/or panel schedules. If series rating is utilized and allowed by code, the Electrical Contractor shall supply factory published data to the Building Department and to the Engineer for review. The drawings are based on a fully rated system, should the Contractor elect to use series rated systems and the inspector having authority requires revised engineered drawings reflecting the series rated systems additional engineering services will be required by the engineer to provide the required drawings. 4. Where required provide load centers having a "service entrance" Type UL label. 5. Load centers shall be equipped with landing lugs sized to accommodate voltage drop compensated feeder conductors. Refer to Electrical One-Line Diagram. If necessary, provide load centers with a higher ampacity than the minimum listed to accommodate larger feeders. If required, contact the factory to provide non-standard lugs. The Contractor may suggest alternate conductor termination methods. H. Circuit Breaker Devices LOAD CENTERS 16165 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Plastic molded case. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible. 2. Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break, with inverse time delay characteristics. Single handle and common tripping multi- pole breakers. 3. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices. 4. Interrupting capacities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Locate next to each breaker or space unit an individual number. 6. Circuit breakers as noted on the panel schedules for switching purposes shall be switch rated. 7. Number of GFCI and AFCI circuit breakers as required on the drawings with space allocations as required. 8. All circuit breakers to be full size, "thin style" are not acceptable. 9. Provide padlocking device for all hardwired mechanical equipment and appliances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount panel 4 feet to panel center but with maximum height of 6 feet 6 inches to top of panel or as directed by Architect/Engineer. B. Where flush mounted, the fire integrity of the wall in which it is installed must be maintained. C. Neatly arrange branch circuit wires and tie together in each gutter with Thomas & Betts nylon "Ty-Raps", or approved equal at minimum intervals. D. Plug all knockouts removed and not utilized. E. For surface mounted load centers maintain 1/4" air spaces. 3.2 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING A. Vacuum all backboxes clean of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance. B. Touch up scratch marks, etc., with matching paint. C. Remove all paint/plaster from load centers. END OF SECTION 16165 LOAD CENTERS 16165 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide disconnect switches in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Setting motors and other equipment. 2. Identification. 3. Mounting heights. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. U.L. Standards #98 (File #4776) and #508. 2. Federal Specification W-S-865C. 3. NEMA Standard KS1-1975. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedures and additional document for submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Heavy-duty, single-throw knife switch with quick-make, quick-break mechanism, capable of full load operations. Meet NEMA and U.S. Government specifications for Class A switches. B. Provide with contact arc-quenching devices, such as magnetic blowouts or snuffing plates. Provide self-aligning switchblades with silver alloy contact areas and designed so that arcing upon making and breaking does not occur on the final contact surfaces. Provide with high-pressure, spring-loaded contact. Mount switch parts on high-grade insulating base. C. Enclosure: NEMA 1 with hinged door, and defeatable interlock when switch is in "On" position and can be positively padlocked in "On" and "Off positions. Utilize NEMA 3R (rain-tight) enclosures for exterior installations. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Size, fusing and number of poles as shown or as required. Where fused, the devices must be provided with UL listed rejection feature to reject all but Class R. fuses. Provide horsepower rated switch to match motor load if no size is shown. Use 3 pole plus solid neutral switches on four wire circuits and 3 pole switches on all other circuits, unless otherwise noted. E. Lugs must be U.L. listed for the type conductors used and be front removable. F. Provide six (6) pole switches for connection to motors with the following starter types: 1. Non-reversing - two step - part winding - star connected. 2. Non-reversing - full voltage - two speed separate winding. 3. Non-reversing - full voltage - two speed single winding. 4. Where otherwise noted. 5. Manufacturer to be the same as that for motor controllers, transformers, switchgear, etc. 2.2 TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide switches that operate at their full rating with fluorescent, tungsten, and resistance loads - and at 80% of their rated capacity with motor loads. B. Switches to be heavy duty and have: 1. Arc-resisting bodies. 2. Slow make-and-break mechanisms. 3. Silver alloy contact buttons. 4. Side or back wiring with up to No. 10 AWG solid conductors. C. Acceptable manufacturers: Square D Class 2510, 11 or 12; with enclosure or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Each motor over 1/2 HP shall be provided with a horsepower-rated safety-type disconnect switch. B. Each piece of equipment utilizing multi-phase power shall be supplied with a safety-type disconnect switch. C. Each piece of equipment utilizing single-phase power but protected at over 30 amperes shall be supplied with a safety-type disconnect switch. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Equipment other than that mentioned above shall utilize a toggle type manual control switch properly sized and rated for the equipment (with thermal overloads where required) it disconnects. E. Factory installed disconnect switches may be used to satisfy the above requirements with the Architect/Engineer's prior approval. 3.2 MOUNTING A. Provide connections and wiring to and from each disconnect switch. Support conduit feeder from ceiling or floor. B. Disconnect switches shall be mounted on adjacent wall or from the floor with independent supports. Switches shall not be mounted on fan housings. END OF SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16175 - MODULAR METER CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide modular meter centers with prewired meter sockets in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Identification - Section 16060. 2. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110. 3. Disconnect Switches - Section 16170. 4. Fuses 600 Volts and Less - Section 16181. 5. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications. 1. Concrete Housekeeping Pads. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. UL and NEMA 250. 2. Local utility standards. 3. Meter mounting heights shall be per local utility requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. With each modular meter center acceptance drawings, the following is required. Submittals failing to meet this criteria will be returned without a review or acceptance. 1. Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedure and additional documents for submittals in concert with modular meter centers. 2. Drawings show in dimensions and mounting arrangements of enclosures, and must note the manufacturer's name and catalog number of all significant components such as circuit breakers. The short circuit rating of complete modular meter centers shall be indicated. 3. Field wiring and connection diagrams. MODULAR METER CENTERS 16175 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Description and/or diagrams of field modifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. The company producing the equipment of this section shall have a minimum of ten years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: A. All modular meter centers are to be of the same manufacturer as the switchboards or as manufactured by American Midwest Power. 2.2 MODULAR METER CENTERS IN GENERAL A. Enclosure shall be constructed of formed and welded code gauge steel, finished with gray baked enamel over a corrosion inhibiting phosphate treatment suitable for indoor or outdoor surface mounting. Meter units shall be provided with individual covers for each meter position. All compartments containing unmetered circuits shall be provided with a sealing means. B. All components shall be factory assembled and all current-carrying parts shall be tin-plated aluminum or silver-plated copper bus bars. Metering cubicles are to permit removal of breakers and metering units without disturbing adjacent units or removing the main bus connectors. C. Sockets shall be rated as indicated on drawings for continuous duty. Meters are to be coordinated with utility company for jaw requirements and positioning. D. Feeder circuits must be able to exit from top or bottom. Meter centers are to be of sizes and arrangements to suit the load and units served. E. The meter center shall have short circuit withstand rating as indicated on the drawings. If series rating is used, and allowed by Code, the Electrical Contractor shall provide factory documentation for review by the Building Department and the Engineer. F. Meter Center circuit breakers shall be able to accommodate voltage drop compensated feeder conductors. Refer to the Electrical One-Line drawing for required wire size. Contractor may suggest alternate wiring methods. G. All modular meter centers installed indoors shall be type NEMA 1. Meter centers installed outdoors shall be NEMA 3R. MODULAR METER CENTERS 16175 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Install modular meter centers on 4 inch high concrete housekeeping pads which shall follow the contour of modular meter centers with 4 inch clear all around. END OF SECTION 16175 MODULAR METER CENTERS 16175 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MODULAR METER CENTERS 16175 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16181 - FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide fuses in accordance with the Contract Document. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. UL Standard #198. 2. UL Standard #977. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete set of shop drawings to include let-through curves for each type of fuse, a schedule of spare fuse cabinets with a listing of fuses provided within each spare fuse cabinet, and dimensioned drawings of each spare fuse cabinet type and size. B. Short circuit current analysis is based upon Bussmann fuse characteristics for let-through currents. If Gould-Shawmut or Littelfuse fuses are to be utilized, it is the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to provide the appropriate fuse curves and let-through values which correspond to the Bussmann values shown on the Drawings. Submit comparative chart of fuse substitutions for Architect/Engineer and for respective Building Department review prior to acceptance of same substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann B. Gould-Shawmut C. Littelfuse 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Ratings a. All fuses shall be labeled as UL Class L or UL Class R (or as indicated on the Drawings), current limiting and rated for up to 200,000 amperes. Time delay Class R fuses shall be so labeled. FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS 16181 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Feeder Circuits a. Fuses over 600 amperes shall be UL Class L (or as indicated on the Drawings). Fuses up to 600 amperes shall be UL Class RK1 (or as indicated on the Drawings). If fuses directly feed motors they shall be UL RK1, labeled Time-delay. 3. Branch circuits a. Fuses shall be UL Class RK1 (or as indicated on the Drawings), Dual- Element, labeled as time-delay. 4. All fuses shall be so selected as to provide a selectively coordinated system. 5. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. 6. All fuses to be of the Class R type. B. Spares: Upon completion of the building, the contractor shall provide the Owner with spare fuses as indicated below: 1. 10 percent (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. 2. Provide appropriately sized Spare fuse cabinets to store the above spares. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. B. All fuses shall be provided by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 16181 FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS 16181 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16400 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARD PARALLEL CONNECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Service Entrance Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work specified in Division 16000. 1. Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035. 2. Identification - Section 16060. 3. Switchboards - Section 16440. 4. Grounding Systems - Section 16450. 1.2 SUMMARY A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a high energy transient voltage surge suppression system (abbreviated as TVSS throughout). The specified system shall provide effective high energy surge current diversion and be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category A, B and C3 environments, as tested by ANSI/IEEE C2.11, C62.45. 1.3 STANDARDS A. The specified system shall be design, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following codes and standards: 1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 2. American National Standards Institute 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41, C62.45) 4. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA20, 70, 75 and 78) 6. NEMA LS1-1992 Guidelines 7. National Electrical Code 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283, 198, 248-1, 489) B. The suppression system shall be UL Listed and labeled under UL 1449 Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the TVSS. The units shall also be listed and labeled to UL 1283 Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters, and CSA Listed. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing metal oxide varistors (MOV). The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner that ensures surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, or silicon avalanche diodes are unacceptable. 1.4 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Nominal system operating voltage shall be: 1. 277/480 VAC, Y Configuration, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground. B. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV): 1. The MCOV shall be greater than 115 percent (%) of nominal voltage, but no more than 130 percent (%). Test certification shall be as outlined in NEMA LS1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.6 and 3.6. C. Operating Frequency: 1. The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 - 63 Hertz. D. Application Ratings - The TVSS shall meet the ratings listed below: Switchboard Ampacity Minimum Device Rating; Surge Current Per Phase/Mode 4000 Amp and greater 400KA/200KA 2000 to 3999 Amp 300KA/150KA Less than 2000 Amp 250KA/125KA E. Protection Modes: Per the definitions in NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraph 2.2.7, all modes shall be protected (e.g., line-to-line, line-to-neutral, line-to-ground and neutral-to- ground). 1.5 LIFE CYCLE TESTING A. The TVSS system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive 20KV, 10KA, IEEE C62.41 category C3 surge current with less than 10% degradation of clamping voltage. The minimum numbers of surges the unit shall be able to protect against are: Surge Rating Per Phase Number of Life Cycle Surges Per Mode Per Phase L-N L-G N-G L-N + L-G 250KA 5,000 5,000 5,000 10,000 300KA 5,500 5,500 5,500 11,000 400KA 6,500 6,500 6,500 13,000 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. All component elements, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring components, shall be individually fused and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity. C. Surge components shall be sand packed and fused. Each suppression element shall utilize UL248-1 recognized, 200 KAIC tested fuses to ensure that the operation of any single fuse does not isolate the filter from the distribution. The filter shall be capable of withstanding the rated single pulse surge current capacity without fuse failure. 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Protection Modes: The TVSS shall provide protection as follows: L-N, L-G, N-G: WYE connected system L-L, L-G: Delta connected system Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral B. UL 1449 Ratings 1. The maximum UL 1449 Listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of protection: System Voltage Without Disconnect With Disconnect 120/208 or 120/240 volt 400 volts 500 volts 208, 240, 277, 230/400, or 277/480 volt 800 volts 1000 volts 346 or 346/600 volt 1200 volts 1500 volts 480 volt 1500 volts 1500 volts 600 volt 2000 volts 2000 volts C. Noise Attenuation 1. EMI-RFI noise rejection/attenuation (per NEMA LS-1-1992 and MIL-STD-E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology) shall be as follows: Attenuation Frequency 50 KHz 100 KHz 1 MHZ 10 MHZ 100 MHZ Insertion Loss (dB) 50 41 31 25 53 For installation that install multiple filters, the filters shall be coordinated to provide minimum noise rejection/attenuation as follows: Attenuation Frequency 50 KHz 100 KHz 1 MHZ 10 MHZ 100 MHZ Insertion Loss (dB) 85 83 68 67 84 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Attenuation Frequency 50 KHz 100 KHz 1 MHZ 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 2. NOTE: Insertion loss data shall be based on a minimum of 100 feet of #4 AWG conductor between filters. 1.7 PERFORMANCE RATINGS A. Calculations for single pulse surge current capacity shall use the component manufacturer's individual component rating multiplied by the respective number of per mode components. Documentation shall be provided with submittals on the Attachment 1 TVSS Submittal Compliance Form. Component manufacturer's ratings shall be derived using the ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Category C1 8 X 20 μ sec, 3000A current waveform. The per mode single pulse surge current rating shall be calculated based upon the component manufacturer's catalog rating for each device. The minimum rated single pulse surge current capacity per mode shall be as follows: Switchboard Ampacity Minimum Device Rating; Surge Current Per Phase/Mode 4000 Amp and greater 400KA/200KA 2000 to 3999 Amp 300KA/150KA Less than 2000 Amp 250KA/125KA 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data/cut sheet detailing exact model number, specifications, features and options. If substitute/alternate products are allowed, they will only be considered if the Attachment 1 TVSS Submittal Compliance Form is fully completed and included in the submittal. Substitutions submitted without the attached will be returned without review. B. Test Data: Certified documentation shall be provided of the product's UL 1449 Second Edition listing, clamping values (to include ratings with internal disconnects, if applicable), surge current fuse testing, independent test lab single pulse surge current capacity testing, and minimum repetitive surge current capacity testing. C. Shop Drawings: Provide electrical and mechanical drawings that include detail on unit dimensions, weights, field connections and mounting provisions. D. Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide one copy of the installation, start-up, operation and maintenance data for each unit supplied. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The specified system shall be tested at the component and fully assembled level, under surge conditions with AC power applied for a minimum of 1 hour. Testing shall TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 include but not be limited to quality control checks, dielectric voltage withstand test per UL and CSA requirements, UL ground continuity tests, and operational tests. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Storage Temperature: -40 to +85ºC (-40 to +187ºF) B. Operating Temperature: -40 to +60ºC (-40 to 140ºF) C. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% D. Audible Noise: less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5m) E. Operating Altitude: 0 to 13,000 feet above sea level. 1.11 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum full seven year parts and labor warranty from the date of initial operation against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL Listing requirements, and any applicable national, state or local electrical codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Current Technology B. Liebert C. Approved substitute 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4/12 with a pocket provided inside the door for storage of unit documents. All monitoring indication must be visible without opening the door. The enclosure maximum dimensions shall be (20) inches high and (18) inches wide and (10) inches deep. 2.3 CONNECTIONS A. The terminals shall be provided to accommodate wire sizes up to #2 AWG. 2.4 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND SERVICEABILITY A. Internal surge current paths shall utilize low-impedance copper bus bar. No plug-in modules or quick-disconnect terminals shall be used in the surge current-carrying paths. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Unit Status Indicators TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Indicator lights with printed labels shall be provided on the hinged front cover to indicate on-line unit status. B. Dry Contacts for Remote Monitoring 1. Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts, one normally open and one normally closed set standard on all units for remote monitoring. C. Phase Loss Monitoring 1. Unit shall be equipped with phase loss monitoring. D. Integral Fused Disconnect Switch if unit is remotely located. 1. The specified system shall include an integral UL listed disconnect switch located in-line with the TVSS system enclosure with an external manual operator. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system, and to withstand, without failure, the unit's published maximum surge current capacity. 2.6 TESTING A. Component Testing and Monitoring 1. Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly monitors individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground (where applicable). B. Built-in Field Test Capability: 1. The unit shall incorporate an integral test point for off-line diagnostic testing to verify operational integrity of the suppression filter system in every mode. Testing shall include injection of an impulse at least two times the nominal system voltage, and provide metering to indicate the resultant clamping voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel TVSS with short and straight conductors as practically possible. The contractor shall twist the TVSS input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the TVSS manufacturer's recommendation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes. END OF SECTION 16400 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Attachment 1 – TVSS Submittal Compliance Form Performance/Feature Specification Requirement Proposed Single Pulse Rating Per Mode L-N L-N L-G L-G N-G N-G Single Pulse Surge Rating Per Phase L-N + L-G L-N + L-G Number of Components Used For Above Rating (Attach Component Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet) Number of MOV’s/Mode L-N L-G N-G Warranty For Damage To TVSS due To Lightning Dispatch Location For Local Support And Start-Up MCOV For ALL Components Volts Volts Individually Fused Elements UL 248-1 Recognized Fuses Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes Protection Modes Provided Category C3 Repetitive Surge Current Capacity Hits/Mode Hits/Mode Hi Frequency Noise Filtering Attenuation 100 KHz dB 100 KHz dB 1 MHZ dB 1 MHZ dB 10 MHZ dB 10 MHZ dB 100 MHZ dB 100 MHZ dB Internal Surge Current Path Copper Bus Bar Field Test Capability with Surge Generator Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes IF YES, HOW? Low Impedance Internal Disconnect Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes Disturbance Counter Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes Microprocessor-Based Diagnostics (% Protection Status, History Events) Required? No X Yes Provided? No Yes TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIONS 16400 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16403 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide emergency power system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Electrical General Provisions - Section 16010 2. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 3. Switchboards - Section 16440 4. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 5. Transfer Switches - Section 16490 C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications. 1. Concrete 2. Main fuel oil tank and gauge 3. Fuel oil piping 4. Exhaust system piping 5. Insulation of exhaust piping. D. Work This Specification 1. Packaged engine generator system. 2. Exhaust silencer and fittings. 3. Fuel fittings and fuel tank. 4. Battery and battery charger. 5. Remote monitoring/control panel. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000/Volts Maximum). 2. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 3. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. ANSI/NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 5. International Building Code – Latest Edition. 6. Town of Vail Building Code Amendments 7. International Fire Code – Latest Edition. 8. (ANSI/NFPA 20 - Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection) 9. ANSI/NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 10. UL 2200 11. UL 864 UUKL 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Engine generator system to provide source of emergency, legally required, and optional standby power. B. System Capacity:600 kW, 750 kVA, at elevation of 8,150 feet above sea level, and ambient temperature between -20°F and 104°F.; standby rating using an engine mounted radiator. Unit capable of 10% overload for 2 hours. C. Operation: In accordance with NFPA 110 and NFPA 99. D. Generator shall be listed in accordance with UL 2200 and where applicable, UL 864 UUKL. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. B. Submit calculations verifying submitted generator is sized properly for the loads served. Obtain copies of one-line diagrams, panel schedules and other pertinent contract documents required for sizing verification. Submittal to include all assumptions such as number of steps and the loads on each step. Multiple step calculations shall require the submittal to indicate the method by which multiple steps are to occur. C. Submit verification that submitted over current protection is selectively coordinated per 2005 NEC, with down stream devices. Obtain copies of one-line diagrams, panel schedules and other pertinent contract documents required for verification. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams. E. Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank and remote annunciator. F. Submit shop drawing plans indicating generator set's overall assembled dimensions. Shop drawings shall take into account all assembled components, including (but not limited to) fuel tank, vibration isolators, day tanks, radiator, exhaust silencer, engine mounted control panel, and air cleaners. G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. B. Accurately record location of engine generator and mechanical and electrical connections. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. B. Include instructions for normal operation, routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and day tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in packaged engine generator system with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of engine generator manufacturer with service facilities within 50 miles of the project site. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept packaged engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify damage. B. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged engine generator system for one year from date of initial system start-up. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. B. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter elements required for the engine generator system. C. Provide (1) oil sampling kit containing (1) sample extraction gun, (10) bottles, (10) postage paid mailers, and (1) written instructions. Additional kits shall be available to the Owner on a purchase basis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cummins/Onan B. Caterpillar C. Approved equal 2.2 ENGINE A. Type: Water cooled inline or V-type, four stroke cycle, compression ignition diesel, internal combustion engine. Engine model QSK23-G7 NR2. B. Fuel System: Appropriate for use of No. 1 or 2 fuel oil. C. Engine Speed: 1800 RPM. D. Governor: Isochronous type to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent, steady state, and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for manual operation and adjustment. E. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer. F. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine- generator control panel. G. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F. (32 degrees C.), and suitable for operation on 480 volts, single phase. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 H. Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110°F. (43°C.). Radiator Air Flow Restriction: 0.5 inches of water (9.34 mm of mercury), maximum. I. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on engine-generator control panel. J. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel base. 2.3 GENERATOR A. Generator: ANSI/NEMA MG 1; three phase, four pole, reconnectible brushless synchronous generator with brushless exciter. B. Rating: 600 kW, 750 kVA, at 0.8 power factor, 480Y/277 volts, 60 Hz. at 1800 RPM. C. Insulation: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, Class F. D. Temperature Rise: 105/80°C. standby. E. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA MG 1; open drip proof. F. Voltage Regulation: Include generator mounted exciter regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation +/- one percent from no load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop +/- 5 percent voltage level, and voltage gain. Regulator shall incorporate 3 phase sensing. G. The generator shall incorporate a PMG type exciter. H. Alternator Feature Code: B660-2. 2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Isolate the generator set at the base by means of combination spring type isolators and neoprene pads. Provide isolators of not less than 98% efficiency and of a sufficient quantity such that each is loaded to not more than 75% of its rated value. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fuel Tanks 1. Sub-Base Fuel Storage Tank a. Provide a maximum 240 gallon dual wall (secondary containment design) sub-base fuel storage tank. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel. The interior and exterior tanks shall be constructed in accordance with U.L. 142. Provide a U.L. 142 name plate label on the exterior of the tank. The name plate label shall be PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 metal and shall be spot welded to the exterior of the tank. The tank shall be designed to meet weight loads of the generator set specification, coordinate weight load and mounting of the generator set with the generator supplier. All Generator Base Tanks shall have the wording "Generator Base Tank" printed on the Name Plate Label. This wording is to assure that the tank was designed for generator use. Sticker labels are not acceptable and will be rejected. b. Include flexible fuel line connections, fuel gauge, check valve, high fuel level alarm contact and indication light, and low fuel level alarm contact and indication light. The tank shall be provided with fuel leak sensors mounted between the inner fuel tank and the outer tank wall. Fuel sensors shall be connected to the generator annunciator panel and shall activate an indication light on the annunicator panel. Coordinate with Division 15 for routing and installation of fuel tank remote fill piping and provide an overfill prevention valve to shut off the flow of fuel into the tank when the fuel level reaches 95%. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. c. Exhaust Silencer: Extreme grade silencer with muffler companion flanges and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting, suitable for horizontal orientation, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with Division 15 for mounting of silencer, routing of exhaust piping, and silencer insulation. Provide approved thermal thimbles where exhaust piping must pass through combustible walls or ceilings. d. Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead-acid storage batteries, with ampere-hours as recommended by the manufacturer. Match battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps. e. Battery warming pads: 120V warming pads for each battery manufactured specifically for maintaining lead-acid storage battery optimum temperature. f. Battery Tray: Plastic coated metal tray treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage of electrolyte. g. Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements. h. Line Circuit Breaker: Circuit breaker on generator output with long time delay/pickup, short time delay/pickup and instantaneous delay, selectively coordinated as required per the current edition of NEC; (number and rating as indicated on the Drawings). Mount unit in enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 i. Engine-Generator Control Panel: ANSI/NEMA 250, Type 1, generator mounted, control panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indications. Include provision for padlock and the following equipment and features: (1) Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz. range, 3-1/2 inch dial., 0.5 percent accuracy. (2) AC Output Voltmeter: 3-1/2 inch dial, 0.5 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. (3) AC Output Ammeter: 3-1/2 inch dial, 0.5 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. (4) Output voltage adjustment. (5) Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspend and overcrank. (6) Run-off-automatic switch. (7) Engine running time meter. (8) Oil pressure gauge. (9) Water temperature gauge. (10) Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to terminal strip. (11) Remote Alarm Contacts: Pre-wired SPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote alarm functions required by NFPA 110. (12) All additional controls, shutdowns and alarms required by NFPA 110 “Control Functions”. j. Provide remote annuciator panel where required by local jurisdiction. k. Remote Engine Status and Control Panel: (NFPA 110) surface mounted panel in fire control room, with brushed stainless steel finish. The remote engine status and control panel shall include the following: (1) Operating status (on-off) and malfunction indication per NFPA 110. (2) Start/stop controls (3) Indication of transfer switches position (normal-emergency). (4) Indicator that generator is automatic mode. (5) Fuel level in main storage tank. (6) Emergency fuel flow. 2.6 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. The appropriate controls shall be supplied in order to achieve a three step starting process. The emergency loads shall be on step one and shall be energized within 10 seconds, the legally required standby loads shall be on step 2 and shall be energized within 60 seconds, and all other loads shall be on step three and shall be energized within 90 seconds. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide a 6" high reinforced concrete pad beneath the generator and a 4" high concrete pad beneath all other related equipment. The generator pad should be reinforced concrete with a 28 day compressive strength of at least 2500 psi. The generator pad should extend at least 6 inches beyond the generator assembly on all sides. Type J or L bolts should be used to anchor the skid or vibration isolators to the pad. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. The Electrical Contractor shall field coordinate the installation of the generator with the General Contractor. Enclosures built around the generator must not interfere with the generator operation. Maintain the manufacturer recommended clearances on the front, sides, and rear of the generator. Under no circumstances shall the generator's radiator be obstructed by the screen wall. Maintain an opening in front of the radiator equal to or greater than the radiator's square footage. 3.4 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS A. Provide a 3/4" conduit with 2-#12 AWG conductors from the generator skid to the emergency ATS and a 3/4" conduit with 2-#12 AWG conductors to the fire pump ATS. B. Provide a 1" conduit with #14 AWG and (2) CAT 5e conductors from the generator skid to the remote monitoring/control panel. Provide quantity of conductors as required for all controls. Include 6 spare conductors and label as spare. C. Provide a 3/4" conduit with 2-#12,1#12G AWG conductors from the battery charger to a 120 volt panelboard. Specific panelboard to be identified by the Engineer. D. Provide a 3/4” conduit with 2#12,1#12G AWG conductors from the battery warming pads to a 120 volt panelboard. Specific panelboard to be identified by the Engineer. E. Provide a 1" conduit from the generator block heater to a 480 volt panelboard. Specific panelboard to be identified by the Engineer. Provide the appropriate size conductors and circuit breaker in the panelboard for the block heater. F. Provide all other necessary raceways, conductors and terminations required for a complete and functional system. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Confirm all of the items listed above with the manufacturer prior to installation of the raceways. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 16065. B. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulation conditions. 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare, start, test, and adjust systems under provisions of Section 16065. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 16065. B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean work area under provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Generator supplier shall provide Owner with a minimum of (4) hours field training and instruction. B. Describe system operation under emergency conditions and restrictions for future load additions. C. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency power. 3.10 WARRANTY A. Equipment furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against defective parts and workmanship for a period of not less than two (2) years from date of initial start- up of the system and shall include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor for the system warranty. END OF SECTION 16403 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16403 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16440 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide service distribution switchboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000: 1. General Electrical Provisions (Equipment Supports) - Section 16010 2. Identification - Section 16060 3. Fuses 600 Volts and Less - Section 16181 4. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Ground fault protection UL 1053. 2. QMQB operators UL E1818. 3. Bolted pressure switches UL 977. 4. Switchboards NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891. 5. Meters ANSI Specification C 39.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. With each switchboard acceptance drawing, the following is required. 1. Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedure and additional documents for submittals in concert with switchboard submittals. 2. Include fully detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include information on type and size of structural supports, metal thicknesses, surface finishes, bus cross sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse, circuit breakers, bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc. 3. Furnish complete schematic wiring diagrams and a full set of equipment wiring diagrams for protective equipment relays, over, pilot lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for all wiring diagrams. SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. All fuse sizes and types must be indicated. 5. All nameplate information must be complete. 6. All One Line Diagrams must be illustrated. 7. All concrete housekeeping pads must be sized and illustrated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each switchboard as a complete and finished product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short- circuit rating shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the Drawings. Such ratings shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each switchboard. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The switchboard manufacturer shall be represented by a local service or organization, available on a 24-hour per day basis fully capable of providing service on all equipment including all O.E.M. equipment. Acceptable manufacturers are: General Electric, Square D, Siemens and Eaton - Cutler Hammer. 2.2 GENERAL A. Electrical Gear must fit in the space provided. See Plans. B. Provide switchboards of the free standing, totally enclosed dead-front safety type, consisting of an assembly of pressure switch and self-contained switch units of the number, size and arrangement shown on the Drawings. C. Each switchboard shall be of the front accessible type where all connections are accessible from the rear. Where indicated on the Drawings as being positioned such that a rear accessible switchboard would have limited or no access provided from accessible equipment where all connections are accessible from the front. D. Carefully check the physical space limitations for each switchboard and furnish switchboards to match those conditions. Nothing in these Specifications shall preclude the use of a custom designed switchboard (as approved by the Engineer) to meet those limitations. Custom equipment must meet UL and NEMA Standards. E. Provide service entrance label where required. F. Provide short circuit rating as shown on the one line diagram(s). SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Switchboard shall have incoming line main devices in individually-mounted construction and the feeder devices in group-mounted construction. The incoming line main device shall be front accessible only. H. The group-mounted devices are to be front-accessible and furnished with vertical wiring gutters on the front of the distribution sections. The gutters are to be furnished with code gage steel formed covers bolted to the structure frame. Unused device space is to be bussed and covered with blank code gage steel. I. Switchboard shall be completely self-supporting structure of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal-enclosed switchboard 90" high. Sides, top and rear covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the switchboard structure. The frame structure members shall be die-formed 12 gage steel bolted together and reinforced at corners with rugged gussets internal and external to the structure members. The switchboard frame is to be suitable for use as floor sills in indoor installations. J. Switchboard shall include protective devices listed on the Drawings and as specified with necessary interconnection, instrumentation and control wiring. K. Feeder devices shall be group-mounted. The operating handle, lever, etc., of each device shall be externally accessible without opening or removal of covers except where a door is furnished over the panel. L. Main, sub-main and tie devices shall be individually-mounted. M. All vertical sections comprising the switchboard shall be front and rear-aligned without exception. N. All steel surfaces are to be chemically cleaned and treated, providing a bond between paint and metal surfaces to help prevent the entrance of moisture and formation of rust under the paint. The switchboard exterior is to be finished with ANSI-61 light gray enamel. O. Control wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard are to be furnished when required. All control wires leaving the switchboard are to be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. P. All hardware used on conductors shall have a high tensile strength, and a suitable protective finish. Q. Switchboard is to be provided with adequate lifting means, and be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floors sills. R. All switchboards installed outdoors shall have a NEMA 3R enclosure. S. Switchboard circuit breaker and fuse lugs shall be able to accommodate voltage drop compensated feeder conductors. Refer to the Electrical One-Line drawing for required wire size. Contractor may suggest alternate wiring methods. SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.3 PULLBOX OVER SWITCHBOARD A. Where required for conduit terminations, service entrance conductors or feeder conductors, provide pullbox of same type of construction and finish as the switchboard. B. Provide (if pullbox is utilized) cable supports for horizontal support of cables. Construct supports of 3/4 inch conduit loosely enclosed by strong fiber tubes. Space supports no more than 24 inches horizontally and 6 inches vertically. 2.4 BUSES A. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout A-B-C left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear. Where special circuiting precludes this arrangement (as accepted by the Architect/Engineer) bus bars shall be permanently labeled. B. Conductor material shall silver plated copper or tin plated aluminum. C. Bus shall be sized at 1,000 amperes per square inch, but in no case less than of sufficient cross section to limit temperature rise to 65 degrees Celsius above an ambient temperature rise of 40 degrees Celsius. D. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt holes drilled and tapped for future extension at both ends of bus bars including neutral and ground bus. The provisions shall include bus bars installed and extended to the extreme side of the section and be fabricated in such a fashion that the addition of a future section would require only the installation of standard bolted splice plates. E. All bus bars shall be rigidly braced to comply with the integrated equipment rating of the switchboard. Tape insulation shall be provided on cross bus of rear connected switchboards. F. A ground bus shall be furnished secured to each vertical section structure, and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. G. The neutral bus in the feeder sections shall not be further than twenty inches from the front of the switchboard. 2.5 FEEDER INSTALLATION AND TERMINATION A. Group cables parallelling one another and arranged so as to permit easy insertion of a clamp-on ammeter on each cable. B. All line and load side conductors emanating from the top of bottom or the switchboards shall be lashed to cable braces provided in the switchboard. Lashing shall be performed as per the manufacturer's recommendations to maintain the integrated equipment rating. Lashing material shall be non-metallic fire and heat resistant with a tensile strength of 2,000 pounds. In general on service entrance cable run and bend the cable in such a manner so as to rest directly against the cable braces. Make six (6) revolutions around the "A" and "B" phase and the six (6) revolutions around the "B" and "C" phase cables. With the remaining lashing material make four (4) to five (5) revolutions between each of the phase cable tying a knot to SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 the cable braces as the last revolution is complete. All revolutions must be as tight as possible to prevent magnetic stress during short circuits. Load cables in general should be lashed with four (4) revolutions around the cable and the brace, then tied in a knot after the last revolution. C. Where bus ducts terminate at switchboards, these conductors (including neutral and grounds) shall be extended to the switchboard bus. The use of cable is unacceptable. 2.6 BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Application: Switches over 800 amps. B. Manually operated and where indicated electrically tripped dead front, totally enclosed in a cabinet. Interlock to prevent access to closed switch. Interlock capable of intentional bypass by knowledgeable personnel. C. Fuse compartment interlocked to prevent access when switch is closed. D. Maximum temperature rise at full load - 30 degrees Centigrade spot temperature. E. Short-Circuit rating: 200,000 amperes Root Mean Square symmetrical. F. Capable of being opened when carrying 750 percent of its rated load. Opening under these conditions requires no major physical effort. G. Arc barriers and replaceable arcing contacts. H. Switch shall be of the charge before closing type. I. U.L. listed for continuous operation. J. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "off" position. 2.7 SELF-CONTAINED SWITCH UNITS A. Application: Switches 800 amperes and below. B. Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front type. Each switch a self-contained unit, externally operated from the front. C. Fuse and switch compartment interlocked to prevent access to the fuse compartment until switch is thrown to "OFF" position. Interlock intentionally releasable by externally applied tool to permit checking switch and fuses under load. D. Switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for Class R fuses. E. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "OFF" position. 2.8 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Circuit breakers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and conform to applicable requirements of NEMA standard AB-1, and appropriate classification of Federal Specification W-G375B. The circuit breaker shall be completely enclosed in a molded case or insulated case as required. 2. The operating mechanism shall be quick make, quick break, and trip free to prevent holding the circuit breaker contacts closed against a fault or abnormal sustained overload. The circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar so that a fault on one pole opens all poles. When tripped, the handle shall assume a position between on and off. The circuit breakers shall have thermal magnetic trip units that provide inverse time delay (overload and instantaneous) short circuit protection. The inverse time delay shall be ambient compensated for circuit breaker ambients of 10-50º C. It will have approximately the same tripping characteristics throughout this temperature range. 3. The circuit breakers shall carry 100% of their ampere rating intermittently and 80% continuously. The ampere, voltage and frequency rating shall be as shown on the plans. B. Main Circuit Breakers and Feeder Breakers over 800 amp. 1. Breaker shall have a Solid State trip with long time delay, short time pickup, short time delay, adjustable instantaneous pickup and fixed instantaneous override. C. Feeder Breakers 800 amp and below. 1. Breakers shall be molded case. 2.9 GROUNDING A. Provide ground bus of at least 33 percent of capacity of switchboard extending along the full length of the switchboard. 2.10 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION A. The ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and on all service disconnect switches rated 1000 amperes or more as required by the NEC. B. The ground fault protection shall consist of the following: 1. Current Sensor - The current sensor shall consist of a zero-sequence current transformer which shall enclose all current carrying conductors, including the neutral conductor if used, of the circuit being protected. 2. Ground Fault Sensor - The ground fault sensor shall continuously sense the output of the current monitor. Should the sensor detect a ground current in excess of the pick-up setting for a duration exceeding the time delay, the sensor will shunt-trip the appropriate device. The sensor shall have an adjustable pick-up of 100 to 1200 amperes and an adjustable time delay from 0.1 to 0.3 seconds. SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Test Panels - Each ground fault sensor shall be provided with a test panel which shall completely test the ground fault system. The test panel shall indicate that a ground fault was sensed or test the system with or without tripping the feeder switch breaker. The test panel shall be installed in the front of the switchboard adjacent to the device being protected. 4. Shunt-Trip - Each device, switch, or circuit breaker, with ground fault protection shall be provided with a shunt-trip which shall automatically open the device when signaled by the sensor. C. Settings 1. The electrical subcontractor shall set each ground fault sensor pick up setting at 800 amps with a 6-cycle time delay unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.11 UTILITY METERING A. Provide utility metering cubicle in accordance with the requirements of the serving utility. B. Utility meters shall not be mounted in or on the switchboard. C. Route 1" conduit from switchboard metering compartment to meter location designated by utility. D. Meter housing by electrical contractor. 2.12 METERING A. Furnish, install and connect in each switchboard a digital meter that will monitor: 1. Ampacity of all phases. 2. Voltage across all phases and to ground. 3. Where bus duct is employed, provide an ammeter for each bus duct. This includes those bus ducts which are routed directly to the switchboard and those which are cable connected. 4. All front plates used for mounting meters, selection switches or other front mounted devices shall be hinged with all wiring installed and laced with flexibility at the hinged side. 2.13 ONE LINE DIAGRAMS A. One line diagrams of the switchboards shall be mounted in the main electric rooms under durable vinyl or plastic cover. The one line diagrams shall show the main devices, all feeders and bussing. Any special operating instructions shall be described. SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. The diagrams shall be mounted in a durable clear plastic, vinyl, or Plexiglas cover, and shall be attached with a frame and removable screws. 2.14 EMERGENCY SWITCHES A. Devices serving the normal side of an automatic transfer switch, exit lights, fire alarm or fire pumps shall have the cover of that device painted high gloss red and suitably labeled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Install switchboards when the area is free and clear of dust and debris. Protect switchboards at the time from dust and moisture. Do not utilize switchboards for temporary lighting and power services. 3.2 Install switchboards on 4 inch high reinforced concrete housekeeping pads which shall follow the contour of switchboards with 4 inch clear all around. The contractor shall provide and install the housekeeping pads. 3.3 Provide channel iron sills below each switchboard where the switchboard frame is not suitable for use as a floor sill. 3.4 At the completion of the work, each switchboard shall be field tested in accordance with Section 16065. 3.5 The person responsible for installing the electrical distribution system shall provide the building owner with a single line diagram of the record drawing for the electrical distribution system which includes the location of check-meting access, schematic diagram of non-HVAC electrical control systems, and electrical equipment manufacturer's operating and maintenance literature. END OF SECTION 16440 SWITCHBOARDS 16440 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide a low impedance grounding system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065. 2. Raceway and Boxes - Section 16110. 3. Wire and Cable - Section 16120. 4. TVSS - Section 16400 5. Dry Type Transformers - Section 16470 6. Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500 7. Lightning Protection System - Section 16601 8. Conduit Rough-In of Special Systems - Section 16735. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratory Standard No. U.L. 467. 2. ANSI C-1 1978. 3. IEEE Standard NO. 142-1982. 4. National Electrical Safety Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete set of shop drawings service grounding methods as called for on the construction documents. GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16450 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install an electrical grounding system as indicated on the construction documents and as specified herein. B. Grounding systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the local authorities, NEC Section 250, and subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. C. All ground wires and bonding jumpers shall be stranded copper installed in conduit. All ground wires shall be without joints and splices over its entire length. 2.2 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. The system neutral shall be grounded at the service entrance only and kept isolated from grounding systems throughout the facility. B. Each system of continuous metallic piping and ductwork shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of the NEC Section 250. C. Bond each section of switchboard housing and service conduits entering switchboards to ground bus. D. PVC conduits and portions of metallic piping and duct systems which are isolated by flexible connections, insulated couplings, etc., shall be bonded to the equipment ground with a flexible bonding jumper, or separate grounding conductor. E. Mechanical equipment shall be bonded to the building equipment grounding system. This shall include but is not limited to, fans, pumps, chillers, etc. F. All raceways (metallic and nonmetallic) shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. Conductor shall be sized in accordance with Section 250 of the NEC. G. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided for separately derived systems and shall be grounded to building steel, cold water pipes, etc., or an alternate grounding means. Equipment grounding shall consist of but not limited to the following: 1. Dry Type Transformers. 2. Outdoor lighting standards. When building steel is not available and a metal underground water pipe in direct contact with the earth for 10 feet or more is not available, a grounding electrode conductor riser shall be installed for the dry type transformers. Riser to be sized based on NEC 250. The secondary conductors of the dry type transformers connected to each riser shall be added together to determine the grounding electrode size. GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16450 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 H. Receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet box by means of a bonding jumper between the outlet box and the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolated ground receptacles, ground wire shall run back to service ground bus. I. Main telephone terminal board and riser terminal boards shall be grounded by installing a bare #6 copper wire riser between the building service ground and the last riser terminal board. At each terminal riser board provide one (1) three foot (3') #6 bare copper wire from the telephone riser ground and terminating at the riser terminal board. J. Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings and other metal noncurrent-carrying parts that are to serve as grounding conductors shall be effectively bonded where necessary to assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces or be connected by means of fittings so designed as to make such removal unnecessary. K. Provide grounding type bushings for conduits terminated through multiple concentric knockouts not fully knocked out, on inside of panelboards. Ground bushing with #12 bar copper to panelboards ground bus. 2.3 SERVICE GROUNDING METHODS A. The following shall be provided and bonded together to form the grounding electrode system: 1. A metal underground water piping system used for grounding shall be in direct contact with the earth for ten feet or more and shall be electrically continuous. Provide bonding jumpers at water meter and at insulating joints. 2. The metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded. 3. Concrete-Encased Electrode. An electrode encased by at least 2 in. of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth, consisting of at least 20 ft. of one or more bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less than ½ in. diameter, or consisting of a least 20 ft. of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4. 4. Ground Ring. A ground ring encircling the building or structure, in direct contact with the earth at a depth below earth surface not less than 2-1/2 ft., consisting of at least 20 ft. of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 2 copper. 5. Ground rods. Ground Rods shall be copper-clad steel not less than ¾ inch in diameter, 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth. The maximum resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, two additional rods shall be installed not less then 10’ apart in an equilateral triangle configuration. GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16450 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Steel reinforcing bars used for grounding shall be encased by at least 2 inches of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth. Reinforcing bars shall be minimum ½ inch diameter and consisting of 20 feet of one or more steel reinforcing bars. B. All grounding electrode conductors shall be copper. C. All bonding jumpers for the above grounding electrode system shall be sized in accordance with NEC Section 250. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Grounding connections and splices shall be brazed molded exothermic welded, bolted clamp terminal or pressure-connector type. Bolted connections and pressure-connectors shall be used for connections to removable equipment. B. Provide a complete test in accordance with Section 16065 of these Specifications. END OF SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16450 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16470 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide dry type transformers in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Finish painting. 2. Equipment Supports. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 1. Comply with Underwriter's Laboratories Standard UL-506, American National Standards Institute C57.12.00-1968, and the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standard ST20-1972. B. Efficiency 1. Transformers shall meet NEMA TP-1-2002 for 15kva and larger. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and manufacture's data for each type and size dry transformer as indicated on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The transformer shall be dry-type with kilovolt-ampere (kva) rating shown, with delta-connected primary and wye-connected secondary, rated 480 volt-208/120 volt, three-phase. Fan cooled induced transformers are not allowed. B. Insulation: All transformers rated 9 KVA and larger shall utilize 220 degrees Centigrade UL approved insulation systems. Transformer temperature rise shall not exceed 115 degrees Centigrade above a 40 degrees Centigrade ambient under full load. C. Coils: Coil conductors to be continuous wound construction with terminations welded without auxiliary flux materials. Wind coils with copper or aluminum magnet wire, vacuum impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Coils to be protected with an outer layer of glass tape or similar quality insulation. Provide each DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16470 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 layer with end-fillers or tie-downs to ensure maximum mechanical strength. Brace tap terminations to magnet wire. Brace primary and secondary magnet wire directly to bus studs or lugs. Windings shall be continuous with no splices. D. Core 1. Manufacture core from a high-grade, non-aging 29 gauge silicon steel with high magnetic permeabilities, low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities well below saturation to allow for a minimum of 10 percent over-voltage excitation. 2. Cut laminations with the direction of the grain and free from burrs. All laminations must be core plated or annealed and firmly butted. The core laminations shall be clamped tightly and compressed to provide quiet operation and to prevent damage during shipment. E. Taps 1. Full-capacity taps shall be provided on the primary side of the transformer having two 2.5 percent above normal and four 2.5 percent below normal. F. Enclosures 1. Provide lifting brackets on all sizes. 2. Ventilated openings shall be such as to avoid accidental access to live parts. 3. Degrease, clean, phosphatize and paint the entire enclosure with one (1) coat of zinc chromate primer and two (2) coats of gray enamel. G. General 1. Enclosure temperature rise shall not exceed 35 C. rise above ambient. The core and coil assembly shall be grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible copper grounding strap of adequate size. Provide transformers up to and including 75 KVA suitable for floor, wall, or ceiling mounting. Transformers exceeding 75 KVA shall be floor mounted only. H. Sound Levels 1. The transformer shall operate at audible sound levels substantially below American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard C89.2. Sound levels shall not exceed 45 decibels (db) for units 15 to 50 kva, 50 db for 51 - to 150- kva units, 55 db for 151-to 300-kva units, and 60 db for units 301 to 500 kva. 2. Core and coil assemblies 30 KVA and larger to be mounted on Korfund vibration isolators designed specifically to reduce 120 Hz sound and multiply harmonics. I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, ITE Siemens, General Electric, Eaton Cutler-Hammer, Acme, and Challenger. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16470 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Resiliently suspend each dry-type transformer on double deflection neoprene in the shear hanger rod isolator assemblies, capable of providing minimum 3/8 inch static deflection. B. Provide grounding conductors from transformer secondary to nearest building ground for each separately derived system. Grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance with NEC Section 250-94 for the derived phase conductors. Install a ground riser as described in Section 16450 if building steel is not available or if an adequately grounded cold water piping system is not available. C. Provide a 4" high reinforced concrete pad beneath all floor mounted transformers. END OF SECTION 16470 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16470 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16470 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16490 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic Transfer Switches 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide transfer switches in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 16000 A. Electrical General Provisions - Section 16010 B. Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035 C. Maintenance Manuals - Section 16045 D. Identification - Section 16060 E. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 F. Package Engine Generator Systems - Section 16403 1.4 REFERENCES A. UL 1008 - Automatic Transfer Switches for use in Emergency Systems. B. Where applicable UL 864 UUKL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in transfer switches with 5 years experience. B. A 2-year warranty shall be provided on this equipment. Manufacturer to state terms of warranty with proposal. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16035 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. B. Indicate dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, internal wiring diagrams, and accessories. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. TRANSFER SWITCHES 16490 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under the provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Contractor shall protect switches from moisture with appropriate coverings and in heaters. Store in a clean, dry interior location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SWITCHES A. Onan OTPC Power Command B. GE Zenith Controls C. Approved Equal 2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Rating: As shown on Drawings, A.I.C. consistent with let through current of circuit breaker in line with A.T.S. B. Power Transfer Module: 3 pole double throw solid neutral rated for continuous duty. Mechanically held electrically operated by solenoid or motor mechanism. Mechanical interlock provided to prevent simultaneous closing to both sources. C. Software Adjustable Time Delays 1. Engine Start 2. Transfer Normal to Emergency 3. Retransfer Emergency to Normal 4. Engine Stop / Cool Down 5. Programmed Transition 6. Delayed Transition D. Accessories: Provide the following: 1. Dry contacts for position indication signal. 2. Normal and stand-by position indicating lights (green - normal; red - emergency). 3. Auxiliary contacts on main shaft; (2) normally open and (2) normally closed for each position TRANSFER SWITCHES 16490 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. NEMA 1 enclosure. NEMA 3R Outdoors 5. Genset Exerciser 6. Load Sequencing 7. Test / Exercise / Bypass Buttons 8. Elevator control module with normally open dry contacts to close 30 to 60 second prior to transfer onto emergency power or back to normal power. Contacts shall open immediately after actual transfer of power. Provide (2) #12 wires from ATS to each elevator controller(s). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install transfer switch in location shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. B. Make all feeder connections to the normal source and emergency source. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare, start, test, and adjust the switch under provisions of Section 16065 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all control sequences to provide operation as specified and required. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean under provisions of Section 16010 and as identified by Division 1 of this specification. END OF SECTION 16490 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16490 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16490 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16500 - LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. This Section specifies requirements for luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all luminaire quantities, lengths and clearances required and shall inform the Architect in writing, at the time the bid submission is made, of any discrepancies or variances found with fixtures or details specified herein or in the Luminaire Schedule and other Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified in Division 16000 1. Electrical General Provisions - Section 16010 2. Identification - Section 16060 3. Testing, Acceptance and Certification - Section 16065 4. Equipment Connections and Coordination - Section 16102 5. Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110 6. Wire and Cable - Section 16120 7. Wiring Devices - Section 16140 8. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 9. Modular Wiring Systems - Section 16520 10. Lighting Control - Section 16930 C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications 1. Fixtures, furnishings, and equipment package 1.2 STANDARDS A. Codes: 1. Luminaires, components, and installation shall be in accordance with the American National Standards Institute, the latest revision of the National LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Electrical Code (N.E.C.) and any applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. 2. All lamps shall be in accordance with the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (Public Law #102-486), and the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007. B. U.L. Listing: 1. All luminaires, ballasts, transformers, and other electrical components shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate requirements of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. and any others that may be applicable. The appropriate Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels shall be affixed to all luminaires. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the characteristics and the appropriate U.L. labeling of all luminaires and their components with the ambient conditions which will exist when the luminaires are installed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data Submittals 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and as described herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall submit data for approval of the Architect, detailed shop drawings and product data for all luminaires specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. No luminaire shall be installed without the approval of its shop drawings, product data and/or sample. 3. Shop drawings and product data shall indicate the name of the project, fixture type, manufacturer's name, luminaire catalog number and catalog numbers for lampholders, ballasts, diffusers, and internal protective components. 4. Prior to fabrication and submittal of the shop drawings and product data, the Contractor shall coordinate luminaires and conduit entries with equipment, ducts, pipes, openings, etc. 5. Submit Manufacturer's dimensioned and scaled shop drawings showing in complete detail the fabrication of all luminaires. These drawings shall include overall detail dimensions, finishes, materials, metal thicknesses, fabrication methods, support methods, ballasts, sockets, thicknesses of diffusers, types of reflectors, provisions for relamping, and all other pertinent information, to show compliance with all Contract Documents. 6. Custom luminaire fabrication details shall be drawn at either full size or half- size scale. Fixture fabrication details shall illustrate a minimum of three (3) critical views indicating all fabrication and assembly methods, materials, and materials' gauges and finishes. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 7. Where luminaires are mounted in continuous rows or in architectural coves, shop drawings shall indicate exact luminaire locations, layout, connecting components, coupling plates, changes in elevation, corner details, assembly methods, and reinforced concrete base details. 8. Submit product data which includes luminaire type, luminaire illustration with mounting details, luminaires certification of suitability for use in locations indicated, and photometric test reports which include the following: a. Complete candlepower summary with graphical and numerical data in 5 degree increments for up and down quadrants and at 22-1/2 degree azimuth increments including normal and parallel. b. Visual comfort probability data c. Coefficients of utilization data d. Luminaire efficiency e. Lamp description f. Lamp lumen output g. Zonal lumens and percentages B. Samples 1. Upon request, submit samples of custom luminaires, modified luminaires, and substitution items for the purpose of ascertaining photometric performance, quality of visible parts and details, maintenance features, methods of installation, and safety features. These samples shall be submitted for approval at no expense to the Owner, with all transportation prepaid. The samples will be returned to the Contractor after the reviews are completed at the expense of the Contractor. C. Substitutions 1. Should the Contractor elect to submit luminaires by manufacturers other than those specified, those luminaires shall be equal to the specified luminaires in all aspects of performance, quality of construction, and suitability to job conditions. 2. Substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and as described herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. The Manufacturer shall submit, upon request, a prototype sample of the substitute luminaire for evaluation of compliance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings will not be acceptable in place of the prototype. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. The Architect will be the sole judge in determining whether the prototype sample complies with the Contract Documents and reserves the right to disqualify any proposed manufacturer or submitted item. 5. Photometric test reports shall be submitted for each luminaire offered in substitution for a luminaire specified. D. Schedule 1. Submit a typewritten list of luminaires indicating the type, general description, manufacturer with address and telephone number, catalog number, applied voltage, ballast type, lamp type, and luminaire quantities. 2. Submit a maintenance and operation schedule and describe tools required, types of cleaners to be used, and replacement parts. 3. Upon request furnish for review by the Architect an itemized schedule of unit equipment costs for all luminaire types to be provided under the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL LUMINAIRE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Manufacture luminaires to the specifications described above, hereafter, and as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and all Contract Documents. Acceptable manufactures are listed in the Luminaire Schedule shown on the Drawings. B. Provide proper thickness of code gauge sheet steel so that all luminaires are rigid, stable, and will resist deflection, twisting and warping under normal installation procedures, relamping, and maintenance. C. All luminaire designs shall include, as applicable, plaster frames, trim rings, shrouds, flanges, backboxes, support hardware, and any other components required for proper installation of the luminaires. D. Luminaires with covers, cones, or diffuser frames, which are to be mounted above twelve feet from the finished floor level, shall be provided with safety chains or other acceptable backup means of support to properly secure such items to main housing. E. Rows of luminaires shall be designed with concealed splice plates and shall be free of light leaks. Components such as reflectors, trims, diffusers and other visible items shall be properly aligned with no overlaps, gaps, or other imperfections. F. All continuous linear luminaires shall be fabricated with the longest lengths consistent with the Contract Documents and with shipping and installation constraints. If the lengths are shorter than those designated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall specifically inform the Architect in the shop drawings prior to ordering the luminaire. G. The Contractor shall coordinate and detail all necessary structural supports and support hardware required by the N.E.C. for the safe attachment of all luminaires to mounting surfaces. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 H. All luminaires shall be designed for installation and proper operation in the actual ventilation and temperature conditions in which the luminaires are installed. I. Provide neoprene gasketing, stops, and barriers where required to prevent light leak and/or water and water vapor penetrations. Luminaires installed in the following locations shall have neoprene gasketing: 1. Locker rooms 2. Aquatic areas 3. Aquatic mechanical equipment rooms 4. Commercial Kitchens 5. Commercial Laundry rooms 6. Exterior J. Provide finished product with smooth clean ground metal edges, trims, and frames as well as tight fitting connections, hinges, and closures. K. Provide access for servicing the installed luminaire and for replacement of electrical parts without removal or disassembly of the luminaire. L. Unless otherwise noted, provide emergency battery packs, emergency quartz restrike, or stand-by systems as required for luminaires connected to emergency circuits. M. High intensity discharge luminaires, connected to emergency circuits, shall be provided with a quartz restrike or stand-by system which is activated during loss of power until the high intensity discharge lamp returns to full light intensity. N. High intensity discharge luminaires shall be completely enclosed, unless otherwise noted. O. Where acrylic is used for lenses, refractors, and diffusers with luminaires with H.I.D. sources, the luminaires shall be designed not to exceed a 65°C. luminaire ambient temperature. P. Incandescent luminaires utilizing tungsten halogen sources shall be designed and constructed so that lamp seal temperatures do not exceed 350°C. at an ambient of 25°C. when tested in accordance with U.L. Standard #57, and shall maintain an operating bulb wall temperature of approximately 600°C. and not less than 250°C. Q. Lead wires for luminaires utilizing tungsten halogen lamps shall be rated for not less than 200°C. operation, and shall be rated for 250°C. when temperature warrants. R. Temperature at any point on reflectors of tungsten halogen luminaires shall not exceed 205°C. S. All incandescent luminaires supplied for recessing in suspended ceiling shall be supplied with prewired junction boxes. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 T. Luminaire doors shall be provided as follows: Positive light seal, concealed safety hinges, and inconspicuous "positive spring loaded" holding latches, which are hingeable from either side and operable without the use of tools. U. Where luminaires are mounted in tandem in continuous uplight or downlight coves, the Contractor shall field coordinate fixture quantity and length required to provide a continuous band of light without gaps to within 6" of row ends. 2.2 RECESSED LUMINAIRES A. Recessed luminaires shall be of a type which coordinate properly with the ceiling construction in which they are to be mounted. Discrepancies between luminaire catalog references appearing in the Contract Documents and actual construction into which they are to be installed shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to the submission of shop drawings. B. Any ferrous parts and supports, other than parts manufactured of stainless steel, shall be completely rustproofed after fabrication, and prior to the application of finish coatings. Rustproofing shall be by means of galvanizing, bonderizing, zinc plating, or by treatment with other industry standard rust preventing process which provide rustproofing qualities equal to the processes mentioned. C. All screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening and latching hardware shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. D. All recessed luminaires shall be provided with approved thermal protection devices to deactivate the luminaire in case of excessive heat build-up. 2.3 PENDANT AND SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES A. Pendant or surface mounted luminaires shall be provided with required mounting devices and accessories, including hickeys, stud-extensions, ball-aligners, canopies and stems. Locations of luminaires in mechanical areas shall be coordinated with the Mechanical Contractor. Mounting stems of pendant luminaires shall be of the correct length to uniformly maintain the luminaire heights shown on the Drawings. Variation in mounting individual luminaires shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Height shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the floor mounting height shown on the Drawings. Luminaires hung in continuous runs shall be installed absolutely level and in line with each other. Hanging devices shall comply with N.E.C. requirements. Unless otherwise noted, use single stem hangers. Chains or threaded rods will only be permitted to support luminaires in those mechanical spaces where no other means of support is attainable, and only if fixtures are installed absolutely level with no looseness for movement the installation is approved by the N.E.C. 2.4 BRACKET MOUNTED LUMINAIRES A. For each bracket mounted luminaire, provide flanged metal stem attached to outlet box, with threaded end suitable for supporting the luminaire rigidly in specified position. Flanged part of the luminaire shall be of broad base type, secured to the outlet box at not less than three points. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.5 FINISHES A. Unless otherwise noted, all finishes shall be as selected by the Architect. B. Luminaire finishes shall be applied in a manner that will assure a durable, wear resistant surface. C. Unless otherwise noted, fluorescent lamp luminaires with baked-on white synthetic enamel finishes shall have a minimum reflectance of 85%. D. All Alzak parabolic reflectors shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of ten years, and, in the event of premature discoloration, shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner. E. Aluminum reflectors shall be finished specular, semi-specular, or diffuse as specified and shall meet or exceed Alzak specifications. F. Reflector finish color shall be as selected by the Architect. G. Unless otherwise specified, all painted surfaces on exterior luminaires shall use fluoropolymer paint with an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed, and material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2.6 LENSES A. Plastic used for lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic as manufactured by Rohm & Haas, Dupont, or acceptable equal. B. Glass used for lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and luminaires shall be tempered for high impact and heat resistance. The glass shall have a transmittance of not less than 88%, unless otherwise indicated. For exterior luminaire use tempered borosilicate glass Corning #7740 or acceptable equal. C. All lenses, louvers, and other light diffusing elements shall be removable and positively held so that hinging or other normal motion will not cause them to drop out. D. All lenses shall be turned over to the Owner clean and free of dust or finger prints. E. Spread lenses shall be provided with notches or locking devices to insure that lens orientation is not disturbed during luminaire lamp replacement or cleaning. F. Unless otherwise noted, metal halide luminaires shall be provided with heat and shock tempered glass enclosures capable of containment of hot quartz arc tube particles as recommended by luminaire and lamp manufacturers. 2.7 LAMPS A. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Philips, or Osram/Sylvania unless otherwise noted. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Provide all lamps as indicated on the Luminaire Schedule and the applicable Contract Documents. C. Lamps of a given type shall be produced by one manufacturer. D. All incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted and rated for 130 volt operation, unless otherwise specified. E. Provide ten percent spare lamps for all lamps specified in the lighting fixture schedule. F. Fluorescent or incandescent lamps not protected by suitable lens diffusers and used in dining areas, kitchens, food servery areas, food display areas, bars, food counters or other applicable eating or drinking areas shall be fully protected with Teflon coating, tube guards, or other means as required by the N.E.C. Teflon coating shall be as provided by Shatter-Shield or equal. 2.8 LAMPHOLDERS A. Lamp sockets shall be rigidly and securely screwed to luminaire housing. B. All lamp sockets shall be suitable for the specified lamps and shall be set so as to allow for specified performance of the luminaire by positioning lamps in optically correct relation to lenses, reflectors, baffles and light diffusers. C. Where adjustable socket positions are provided, socket shall be preset in the factory for the lamp specified. Where different socket positions are specified for the same luminaire, sockets shall be preset as required, and cartons marked accordingly. D. Incandescent lampholders shall have a UL listed, heavy duty porcelain body and a nickel-plated brass screw shell prelubricated with silicone compound. E. Unless otherwise noted, provide medium base sockets for incandescent lamps up to and including 250 watts, and mogul based sockets from 300 watts up to 1500 watts (rated for 1500 watts, 600 volt service). F. Fluorescent lampholders shall be made of heavy white thermoset urea plastic with definite lock-in feature and silver plated contacts. Outdoor lampholders shall be compression type with neoprene gasketing. Sockets with open circuit voltage over 300 volts shall be of the safety type and designed to open supply circuit on lamp removal. G. High intensity discharge lampholder shall have a porcelain body and a nickel-plated brass screw shell, prelubricated with silicone compound. Unless otherwise noted, contacts shall be made of spring-loaded silver-plated phosphor bronze. H. Fluorescent lampholders shall be designed to locate lamps at the optimum distance away from the grounding element for proper lamp start as required for the specified lamp and ballast combination. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.9 WIRING A. Wiring between fluorescent lampholders and associated operating and starting equipment shall be of similar or heavier gauge than the leads furnished with the approved types of ballasts, with equal or better insulating and heat resisting characteristics. B. Wiring shall be protected with tape or tubing at all points where abrasion may occur. C. Wiring shall be concealed within luminaire construction except where the luminaire design or mounting dictates otherwise. D. Connections of wires to terminals of lampholders and other accessories shall be made in a neat and workmanlike manner and be electrically and mechanically secure with no protruding loose strands. The number of wires extending to or from the terminals of a lampholder or other accessory shall not exceed the number which the accessory is designed to accommodate. E. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections, screw points, and rough or sharp edges throughout; and all points or edges over which conductors may pass and be subject to damage or wear shall be rounded or bushed. F. Insulated bushings shall be installed at points of entrance and exit wiring. G. Splices in internal wiring shall be made with approved insulated "Wire Nut" type mechanical connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they will be subjected. H. For 120 volt luminaire wiring, use 300 volt, 150 degree Centigrade non-asbestos wire beginning at separately mounted outlet box unless higher temperature is required by luminaire design. I. For luminaire wiring of units connected to voltages higher than 120 volts use 600 volt, 105 degree Centigrade appliance type (AWM) wire approved for luminaire wiring, beginning at separately mounted outlet box. J. All luminaires shall be completely wired at the factory. K. All luminaires shall be properly grounded as required by applicable codes. 2.10 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS A. All fluorescent and high intensity discharge lamp ballasts shall conform to the following: 1. U.L. and ANSI specifications with labels and/or symbols of approval by the U.L. and certification by C.B.M. as tested by E.T.L. 2. The component parts shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the N.E.C. and other applicable codes. 3. Ballasts shall provide safe and reliable operation of the specified lamps. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Ballasts installed within the same luminaire type shall be identical in all respects. 5. Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be rigidly mounted to the inside of the top of the luminaire housings, with ballast surfaces and housing in complete contact for efficient conduction of ballast heat to prevent overheating or cycling. Ballasts shall be readily removable for replacement. 6. Ballasts shall be designed for operation at 60 Hz. nominal, and shall operate at the nominal voltages indicated on label. 7. Secure ballasts firmly in luminaires to prevent vibrations. 8. Contractor shall provide ballast with operating voltage compatible with branch circuit voltage as shown on Contract Drawings. 9. Ballasts for compact fluorescent and T5 and smaller lamped fixtures shall have an end of life sensing circuit to shut off power to the lamp at the end of lamp life. 10. Unless otherwise noted, all ballasts shall be factory installed and wired. B. All electromagnetic fluorescent ballasts shall conform to the following: 1. Ballasts shall be manufactured by the following manufacturers: Advance, General Electric, Jefferson Electric, or Universal. 2. All ballasts shall be "Class P". 3. Provide the best sound-rating available for the lamps and ballast combination. Ballasts found by the Architect to be unduly noisy shall be replaced, without charge, prior to acceptance of the job. 4. For the operation of nominal rapid-start fluorescent lamps, ballasts shall be 430 Ma., super low-heat, energy saving, sound rated "A", high-power factor, series-sequence type. For the operation of preheat, instant start, and slimline lamps, ballasts shall be of the lead-lag type. 5. Fluorescent luminaires with two (2) lamps or a multiple of two lamps shall have two-lamp ballasts. 6. 430 Ma. outdoor ballasts shall be suitable for operation and starting at 0°F. Indoor and outdoor 800 Ma. and 1,500 Ma. ballasts shall be suitable for operation and starting at -20°F. Indoor 430 Ma. ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 60°F or as specified. C. All electronic ballasts shall conform to the following: 1. Ballasts shall be integrated circuit type as manufactured by Advance (type Mark V) or approved equals by Universal or Osram/Sylvania. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Ballast shall have a frequency of operation of 20 KHz or greater, and operate without visible flicker. 3. Ballasts shall be CSA certified. 4. Ballasts shall have a power factor of 95% or above. 5. Ballasts shall be sound rated "A". 6. Ballasts shall have an average lamp current crest factor below 1.4. 7. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output over operating ranges of 90V to 145V (120V ballasts) and 200V to 320V (277V ballasts), 50/60 Hz. 8. Ballasts shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. 9. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A. 10. Ballasts shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, Part 18, for non-consumer equipment. 11. Where applicable, ballasts shall meet minimum efficacy standards of Public Law No. 100-357, National Appliance Energy Conservation Amendments of 1988, and Canadian Efficiency Standards. D. All fluorescent dimming ballasts shall conform to the following: 1. Ballasts shall be of the Hi-Lume series by Lutron. 2. Electronic dimming ballasts and controls shall be made by the same manufacturer. 3. Dimming shall be smooth and continuous without flicker down to 1% light output (5% light output for T-5 lamps). 4. Ballasts shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level without first flashing at full light. 5. Different lamp lengths of the same lamp type shall dim evenly when controlled by the same dimmer. 6. Ballasts shall be inaudible in a room with 27 decibel ambient noise level, throughout the full dimming range. 7. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with other properly installed electrical equipment. 8. Ballasts shall be Class "P", and meet ANSI C62.41 standards for surge protection. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 9. Ballasts shall have a Class A sound rating. 10. Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than 90%. E. All exterior pole mounted luminaires shall conform to the following: 1. Provide reinforced concrete bases for all exterior pole mounted luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The bases shall be designed to prevent overturning or permanent deflection in sustained winds up to 100 miles per hour with gusts to 130 miles per hour. Take into account the existing soil conditions in sizing the bases and submit shop drawings of base design for approval. 2. Each pole over 8 feet in height shall be manufacturered with an accessible grounding lug. If access is provided via handhole, handhole must be a minimum of 2" x 4" and have raintight cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide luminaires at locations, and of types, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the luminaires. Consult the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for the proper locations of luminaires. Report immediately to the Architect any discrepancy between the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans and the electrical documents. C. Prior to submittal of shop drawings and fabrication, check for adequate headroom and non-interference with other equipment, such as ducts, pipes, and openings. D. Install each luminaire properly and safely. Provide hangers, rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, yokes, support bars and any other equipment required for a complete installation. E. Each luminaire shall be packaged with complete instructions and illustrations showing proper installation procedures. Install luminaire in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendation and instructions. F. Rigidly align continuous rows of luminaires for true in-line appearance, subject to Architect's approval. G. Install pendant luminaires plumb, and at the height from the floor specified or indicated on the Drawings. In cases where conditions make this impractical, refer to the Architect and install as directed. Use ball aligners and canopies on pendant luminaires unless otherwise noted. H. Do not install luminaire parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed luminaires until all plastering, painting or other activities that may mar fittings' finishes have been completed. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 I. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, air controlling elements for air handling luminaires, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tile installation, painting, and general cleanup. J. Exterior poles, bollards, bases, and any other luminaire or luminaire components with scratched or damaged finishes shall be repainted to match specified color or replaced if deemed necessary by the Architect. K. The Contractor shall be required to protect luminaires from damage during installation. The Contractor shall replace, at no extra cost, any broken luminaires, glassware, plastics, lamps, etc. up to the time of final acceptance by the Architect. L. Upon completion of the installation, all lighting equipment must be in perfect operating order and free from defects in condition, operation, and finish. M. Luminaires, lamps, and all other pertinent equipment shall be clean and free from dust, plaster, paint spots, or finger prints. N. Housings installed directly in concrete shall be fabricated of hot dip galvanized steel or cast aluminum. Where cast aluminum housings are used, they shall be given two coats of asphaltum paint prior to installation. O. Provide 1/8" thick x 2" diameter solid neoprene grommets at every mounting point for all luminaire surfaces mounted to concrete structure to prevent direct contact between housing and concrete. P. All mounted wall box dimmers shall be under a separate cover plate. Do not gang with other devices. 3.2 FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. When necessary to meet Code requirements, an enclosure shall be constructed to provide a 1-hour fire rating. B. Attachment devices shall be made of formed, rolled, or cast metal shapes with the required rigidity and strength to maintain continuous alignment of the installed luminaires. C. When necessary to meet Code or specific project requirements, provide special supports for recessed luminaires as follows: 1. Provide earthquake clips. 2. Secure luminaires to building structures with safety chains. D. Provide support as follows: 1. Except as otherwise noted, as a minimum procedure, support luminaires as follows: a. Where weight is less than five pounds, support luminaire from its outlet box by means of an interposed metal strap. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 b. Where weight is from five to fifty pounds, support luminaire from its outlet box by means of hickey or other direct threaded connected. c. Where weight exceeds fifty pounds, support luminaire directly from structural slab, deck, or framing. d. Where luminaires and ceiling are such as to require luminaire support from ceiling opening frames, include in the electric work the members necessary to tie back the ceiling opening frames to ceiling suspension members or slabs so as to provide independent support for the luminaires as noted above. The weight of the luminaire shall not cause any bending in the ceiling system. 2. In conjunction with luminaires weighing less than fifty pounds, the above restriction against supporting from suspended ceiling splines, runners or bars in the plane of the ceiling will be waived for ceilings which have been specifically approved for the weight and arrangement of luminaires being installed. Any support members or other appurtenances however, required to tie in/or adapt the luminaires and their ceiling opening frames (if any) to ceiling in an approved manner shall be included as part of the electric work. 3.3 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENTS A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, and locked, etc., by the Contractor under the supervision of the Architect. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders and scaffolding, etc., required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Architect. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking setscrews, bolts, and nuts shall be tightened securely. B. Where possible, units shall be focused during normal working daytime hours. However, where daylighting interferes with aiming and focusing, the aiming shall be performed at night. 3.4 COORDINATION WITH AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. This Contractor is responsible for coordinating the characteristics and the U.L. labeling of the luminaires and their components with the ambient conditions which will exist when the luminaires are installed. These areas of coordination include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wet location labels. 2. Damp location labels. 3. Low temperature ballasts. 4. Dimming ballasts. 5. Very low heat rise ballasts. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 6. Explosion-proof construction. 7. Plenums and air handling spaces. 8. Fire rated ceilings. 9. Low density ceiling. 10. Insulated ceilings. END OF SECTION 16500 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES 16500 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16601 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (CONTRACTOR DESIGN/BUILD) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall provide the complete and detailed design of the lighting protection system. B. Contractor shall provide a complete lightning protection system meeting all requirements of NFPA 780 and this performance specification. Provide U.L. Master C label. C. Provide all labor, materials and items of service required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Related work specified in Division 16000: 1. Grounding Systems - Section 16450 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest recommendations of the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label Code 96A. 2. NFPA No. 780. B. Certificates: Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master C Label for attachment to the building. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system to be provided shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment manufacturer shall also be a UL-listed and approved manufacturer. B. Detailed design shall be provided by the manufacturers representative who is regularly engaged in designing lighting protection systems. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Ensure that installation including air terminals does not conflict with the operation of other rooftop systems such as window washing equipment. Where required provide alternate components such as spring mounted air terminals to accomplish this coordination. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16601 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Coordinate location of Master C label mounting with Architect/Engineer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's data for the following items in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Shop drawings shall be Autocad format and site specific. Obtain base building AutoCad drawings from the Architect. 2. Provide detailed shop drawings showing the exact location of each item of lightning protection equipment, the routing of conductors, location of ground rods and items to be bonded into the system, etc. 3. Provide details showing all termination, bonding and grounding requirements. 4. All of the Manufacturer’s installation recommendations and requirements shall be indicated on the shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Westdodd Lightning Protection Company B. Mr. Lightning (Independent Protection Co.) C. Heary Brothers D. AC Lightning Security E. Thompson Lightning Protection PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet all of the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. 3.2 AIR TERMINALS A. Locate required number of solid copper 1/2 inch outside diameter nickel tipped air terminals not less than 10 inches above the area protected at intervals (20 feet maximum) about the periphery of the structure and not less than 50 feet on center on cross roof runs. 3.3 CONDUCTORS A. Install all conductors and complementary parts in a concealed manner so completed work is unobtrusive and does not detract from appearance of the structure. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16601 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. All areas of flat roofs are to be cross run with this same size conductor cable so that no area larger than 50 feet by 150 feet remains unprotected. Mount points on cast copper bronze point bases and cable clips to the finished roof to avoid any roof penetrations. C. Conductors shall weigh 375 copper per 1000 feet. Provide interconnect conductors at least six (6) electric paths to ground. Avoid an upward direction for lateral conductors interconnecting air terminals. Turn conductors with a radius of at least 8 inches at an included angle not more acute than a right angle. Space down conductors around building's periphery (maximum 100 feet) as evenly as permitted by architectural features, locations of terminals and grounds. D. Building steel shall not be used as down conductors. 3.4 CONNECTORS AND FASTENERS A. Use approved connectors of proper electric and mechanical characteristics. B. Rigidly and permanently attach conductors and air terminals to the building with fasteners of proper strength and design. C. Cement conductors on flat roofs to avoid roof penetrations. D. All below ground connections to be of the cadweld type. 3.5 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Ground electrodes shall be installed as required and all driven rods shall penetrate earth at least 10'-0". Provide a complete building ground ring where required by NFPA 780. B. Interconnect lightning protection ground to other building grounding electrode systems. 3.6 GROUNDING OF METAL ELEMENTS A. Interconnect and ground to the lightning protection system all mechanical equipment, metal drain covers, ventilators, vent stacks, pipes, roofing or siding, observation lights, spandrels, railings, ridge rolls, valleys, crickets, eaves troughs, downspouts, ladders, ducts, cold water supply piping, and any other metallic object or surface of a size presenting a capacitance hazard, or within 6 feet of any portion of the lightning protection system, including grade mounted items. END OF SECTION 16601 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16601 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16601 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide all materials and labor for the design and installation of a new addressable and analog automatic fire alarm system, hereafter referred to as the system, in The Strata Vail Project in Vail, Colorado. B. The fire alarm system shall have the multiplex capability of transmitting to dispatch type of fire alarm initiating device and its individual location (floor and room name/unit number). The main fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall be located in the Fire Command Room on the First Floor level. The main FACP shall control and communicate to all other FACP’s and Annunciators in the building. C. All work shall be performed in accordance with these specifications and in good practice. No modifications to these specifications will be accepted without the expressed written approval of the Architect. It is the Contractor's responsibility to document Architect’s approval of any such modifications prior to the execution of work. D. The Contractor shall field verify all information contained on these drawings and is responsible for design and installation of the system in accordance with the specifications. The bid drawings do not show all information necessary for installation of the system, but are intended to be used as a guide by the Contractor for the purpose of designing the system and preparing a bid. As such, they indicate: 1. Approximate device locations. 2. Types and minimum quantities of initiating devices and notification appliances. 3. Location of the fire alarm system control unit(s). 4. Location of known electrical/mechanical equipment to be interfaced to, monitored and/or controlled by the new fire alarm system. 1.2 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS A. It is intended that the work performed pursuant to these specifications be complete in every respect, resulting in a system installed entirely in accordance with the applicable codes including Town of Vail (TOV) amendments, standards, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) listings. B. It is further intended that upon completion of this work, the Owner be provided with: 1. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system as installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or expanding the system at a future date. 2. Complete documentation of system testing by the Contractor. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Certification that the entire system has been inspected and tested, is installed entirely in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, manufacturer's recommendations and UL listings, and is in proper working order. The Contractor shall follow acceptance testing requirements as indicated by Section 14.4.1.1 of the 2010 edition of NFPA 72. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install new fire alarm system consisting of: 1. Addressable and analog fire alarm control unit located in the Fire Command Room and a LCD annunciator located at the Front Desk near the Lobby of the building. Fire alarm control units shall be UUKL listed for smoke control and operation of the smoke management system. 2. Power supplies as needed to accommodate audible and visual notification devices. 3. Emergency voice/alarm communications system control panel. 4. Addressable and analog type smoke detectors within elevator machine rooms and elevator lobbies, at the top of elevator shafts, at locations where fire alarm panels are installed, in residences, and in common areas and back of house areas. Follow TOV requirements. 5. Addressable and analog type in-duct smoke detectors in all HVAC units or areas with a capacity of 2,000 cfm or more. This work shall include all materials and wiring for installation of the in-duct detector and associated control wiring for fan shutdown. 6. Addressable and analog type heat detectors in elevator hoist-way, pits, and machine rooms within 2 feet of each automatic sprinkler head. Also in pool equipment and storage rooms, kitchen areas, trash chute rooms, janitor closets and mechanical equipment areas. 7. Addressable and analog type heat detectors throughout Parking Garage areas in accordance with the latest TOV amendments. In these areas susceptible to temperatures below 32oF, these devices will not be within the listing for this use in this environment. Where temperatures below 32oF are probable, rate compensation type conventional heat detection devices with a monitor module for each of these detectors shall be provided. The monitor modules shall be located in a temperature controlled environment. Regardless of use of addressable and intelligent or conventional devices, the location and spacing of heat detectors shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Section 17.6.3.. Structural shop drawings for the Parking Garage areas shall be utilized in complying with the location and spacing requirements. For pricing purposes, the Structural drawings of the Parking Garage areas shall be utilized for location and depth of structural members. 8. Devices, equipment and wiring as necessary to monitor the activation of sprinkler system supervisory and alarm devices. 9. Devices, equipment and wiring as necessary to monitor the system trip, high pressure, low pressure, and tamper supervisory and alarm devices for operation and activation of dry pipe automatic sprinkler systems. 10. Audible (emergency voice/communication speakers) throughout the building(s) and visual notification appliances in all public or general areas including the, meeting rooms, lobbies, corridors, hallways, restrooms, accessible designated guest room sleeping areas and bathrooms, lounges, offices, shops, work areas, and locker rooms. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 11. LCD annunciator and graphic map at location(s) approved by the Town of Vail Fire Department (TOVFD). 12. Provide and install the required TOVFD Radio Amplification System installed throughout the building. 13. Provide and install devices, equipment, and wiring necessary to monitor and display “ON”, “AUTO”, or “OFF” status of all controlled fans and dampers associated with smoke management pressurization systems. Stairs A-South and B-North and Elevators A-1 & A-2 (same shaft) and B-1 & B-2 (same shaft) will be pressurized. 14. Provide and install devices, equipment, and wiring necessary to monitor the activation of special hazard fire suppression systems, if any. Final checkout of inter- connections shall be made by activating the special hazard fire suppression systems(s) detection circuits. The Contractor shall include the services of the special hazard fire suppression systems(s) contractor(s), if needed, to fully test the interconnections. 15. Provide and install devices, equipment, and wiring necessary to transmit fire, trouble, and supervisory signals to a UL listed central station. 16. Provide necessary interface wiring to fan(s) and air handling unit(s), Direct Digital Control (DDC), or Motor Control Center (MCC) electrical panels for start-up or shut down of fans when smoke is detected and/or smoke control mode operation is initiated. 17. Provide and install relays necessary to initiate primary and alternate floor elevator recall and elevator power shunt trip interruption. Confirm primary and alternate floor levels with TOVFD. 18. Provide and install devices, equipment, and wiring necessary to monitor the emergency generator for running conditions, failure to start, and other supervisory conditions. 19. Provide and install redundant/secondary emergency/voice communication risers to comply with survivability requirements and the building requires an emergency/voice communication system. 20. Test and adjust all equipment and systems. 21. Prepare and submit shop drawings, contractor record drawings and other submittals required herein. Provide a Contractor NICET 4, or PE stamp on all sheets of plans and cover sheets of submittals. 22. Warranty all new equipment and systems for two years after final acceptance of the system by the Owner. 23. Obtain, secure, and pay for all permits, plan check approvals, and inspections necessary to perform the work. This shall include any necessary off-hour costs for inspections and witnessing of tests. 24. Provide testing of all devices, and repair as necessary, during the warranty period up to and including the second annual test, as required in NFPA 72. 25. Coordinate all work with other Contractors working in the building or concurrent construction/remodeling or installation of other systems (e.g., adjusting waterflow alarm switch retards by the Sprinkler Contractor). 26. Provide and install devices, equipment, and wiring necessary to monitor carbon monoxide levels in the Parking Garage through the BAS. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. All work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable portions of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards, Guides and Recommended Practices listed herein. The latest editions of these standards shall be used, unless otherwise directed by local authorities. Confirm with the Fire Marshal the following versions of the standards and codes. 1. NFPA 70 - 2010, National Electrical Code® 2. NFPA 72 - 2010, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) 3. 2009 International Building Code (IBC) with Town of Vail Amendments 4. 2009 International Fire Code (IFC) with Town of Vail Amendments B. All work and materials shall conform to all Federal, State and local codes and regulations governing the installation, including the current of the Town of Vail Building and Fire Department amendments. C. All devices, systems, equipment and materials furnished and installed shall be new and listed by UL for their intended use. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the UL listing limitations. Listing requirements for separate voice, fire alarm systems, smoke detectors shall be met. The Contractor shall provide evidence, with submittal, of listings of all proposed equipment and combinations of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for filing of all documents, paying all fees and securing all permits, inspections and approvals necessary for conducting this work. This shall include any costs associated with plan check, off-hour inspections, and fees associated with witnessing of fire alarm tests. Plan check drawings submitted to the City for permit approval shall include all necessary information, including any stamps or seals required for approval. 1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The activation of any sprinkler water-flow switch, area smoke detector, or any other fire alarm initiating device shall: 1. Cause an audible alarm (voice command) to sound and a visual signal to illuminate at the main fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator(s). 2. Initiate the audible and visual notification devices throughout the building or designated building areas as approved by TOVFD. 3. In addition to the operation of sequences above, elevator lobby, shaft and elevator machine room smoke detectors shall also activate the elevator recall system, as required for primary floor elevator recall. Activation of the primary floor lobby smoke detector shall initiate the alternate floor recall relay. Heat detectors in elevator shafts and equipment rooms shall initiate elevator shunt trip operations. B. The activation of any in-duct smoke detector shall activate a supervisory signal at the fire alarm control panel and shut down the respective air-handling unit through the associated control module. Stairwell and hoistway pressurization fan duct detector activation shall be identified on the FACP and fire fighters’ smoke control panel as a supervisory alarm but it shall not shut down pressurization fan operation. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Activation of any smoke detector shall initiate closing of all associated smoke dampers in the same zone (floor by floor) through the associated control module(s). D. The activation of any valve supervisory switch or any other supervisory device shall cause an audible alarm to sound and a visual signal to illuminate at the main fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator(s). Supervisory alarms shall also be reported to the central monitoring station. E. Fire alarm initiating device circuits will be zoned to correspond with automatic sprinkler zones. F. Partial or phased occupancy notification and evacuation may be permitted and will be detailed later in the final sequence of operation as approved by the TOV. G. System trouble signals shall: 1. Cause an audible alarm to sound and a visual signal to illuminate at the main fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator(s), indicating the type of trouble and area of trouble. 2. Trouble signals shall be distinctively different than alarm or supervisory signals. 3. Trouble signals shall also be reported to the central monitoring station. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. The Owner's Fire Protection Consultant shall review and recommend approval/disapproval or take other appropriate action on the Contractor's submittals including shop drawings, samples, and documentation and record drawings. This review is to verify conformance to project specifications and design concepts expressed in the contract documents. This action shall be taken with all reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the work, while allowing adequate time to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals are not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details (i.e., dimensions) or for substantiating installation or performance of equipment or systems designed by the Contractor, all of which remain the Contractor's responsibility to the extent required by the contract documents. The Owner's Fire Protection Consultant's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions of construction, means, methods, techniques, sequences of procedures, or approval of a specific assembly of which the item is a part. B. If submittals, upon review by the Owner, are found not to conform to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall be required to resubmit with modifications. C. Product Data: Submit a detailed equipment list, identifying types, models and quantities of all materials, devices and equipment proposed. This submittal shall include manufacturers' data sheets showing the types and models of all equipment, devices, material and wire proposed. Evidence of UL listings and local approvals shall be submitted with the data sheets. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Fire alarm control equipment and annunciators, including all components, modules, and enclosures. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. All components of voice evacuation and firefighters' communication equipment. 3. Manual fire alarm stations, detectors, auxiliary function relays and solenoids, and notification appliances. 4. Conduit, raceway, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, device backboxes, fittings, hangers, and mounting hardware. 5. Wire, cable, connectors, terminal strips, and electrical tape. 6. Smoke detectors, monitor modules, and control modules. 7. Un-interruptible power supplies and standby batteries. 8. Any other materials, devices or equipment to be provided. 9. Fire alarm schematic riser diagram supplemented with narrative descriptions as necessary for clarity and completeness. 10. Smoke management control equipment including all components, modules, and enclosures. When a data sheet shows more than one product, the proposed product shall be clearly indicated by arrows or other suitable means. D. Samples: Within 30 days of authorization to proceed, the Contractor shall submit samples of all proposed alarm initiating devices, audio/visible notification devices, wire, and cable for approval to the Architect/ Fire Protection Consultant. E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: Prior to start of installation, the Contractor shall obtain and submit copies of all permits, licenses, certificates and approvals necessary to conduct this work. F. Shop Drawings: Prior to installation submit five full sets of shop drawings and data sheets, and installation manuals/instructions detailing the manufacturer's installation recommendations for all equipment to be installed for approval. Installation prior to receipt of approved shop drawings shall be at the risk of the Contractor. Phased submittals of Shop Drawings are not permitted. Complete submittal of Shop Drawings Package is expected for submittal/review by the Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant, BCER Engineering, Inc. (BCER). All drawings shall be electronically produced. No hand drawn submittals will be accepted. The shop drawings shall consist of the following: 1. A drawing legend sheet identifying: a. All symbols used on the drawings, by type of device or equipment, manufacturer, and manufacturers part number. This information shall correspond to the manufacturer's catalog data sheets required elsewhere in this section. b. All conventions, abbreviations and specialized terminology used on the drawings, as necessary to understand and interpret the information contained therein. c. All color codes and conduit, conductor/ circuit and device numbering systems. d. A complete drawing list/index identifying all drawings in the shop drawing package by title, drawing number and Specification cross-reference. e. Provide a Contractor NICET 4, or PE stamp on all sheets of plans and cover sheets of submittals. 2. Clean architectural floor plans drawn to scale and a system riser diagram with a title block on each drawing. The floor plan drawings shall indicate: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. Location of all devices, equipment, risers and electrical power connections. Addressable systems shall indicate device addresses for all addressable components shown on each drawing. b. Number, size, and type of conductors and conduit. c. Typical wiring diagrams for all alarm initiating devices and notification appliances, showing the size and type of conductors, wiring terminations and terminal identifications. d. When remote transmitting panel power is derived from "local" source of building emergency power, the shop drawings shall show wire routing and point of connection (location) to the building "E" circuit. e. Conduit fill calculations, in chart form, indicating the cross-section area percent fill for each type of wire/cable in each size of conduit used in the system. A maximum of 40 percent fill is allowed. 3. The riser diagram shall indicate: a. Number, size, and type of riser conduits/raceways. b. Number, size, and type of conductors in each riser. c. Number of each type of device on each circuit on each floor. 4. Detailed wiring diagrams for all alarm control panels, control panel modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary function relays and solenoids, and annunciators, identifying all required terminations, including terminal identifications. All unsupervised connections and terminations shall be noted "unsupervised." a. These diagrams shall depict and identify all circuit boards, modules, power supplies, standby batteries, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connections thereto, including spare zones and circuits. Where multiple components of a similar type are provided, a unique component number shall identify each. b. These diagrams shall include front-view details of all control panels and annunciators, depicting and identifying all indicators, controls and zone labels, including proposed nomenclature. c. These diagrams shall depict the required information to relative scale, actual size or larger, showing proper special relationships between components, and reflect the corresponding system components as they are to be installed. 5. Standby battery capacity calculations. Battery calculations shall list the type of devices and modules; quantities, unit and extended amperage draw for quiescent and alarm conditions, total amperage draw and battery amp/hour rating. For design criteria, the calculated load shall be the design load, including spare capacity. In addition, the battery capacity used to meet the calculated load shall be a maximum of 80 percent of the amp/hour rating listed by the manufacturer. 6. Voltage drop calculations shall list the percentage of drop for compliance with the local authorities’ requirements. 7. A complete address list identifying each initiating device address and type, notification appliance circuits, remote signaling devices and devices controlling auxiliary functions. 8. Sequence of Operations matrix. This matrix shall indicate specific system functions associated with each type of initiating device including alarm, supervisory and trouble signals. 9. Each drawing shall be cross-referenced to all related drawings and specific drawing details as necessary for the submittal as a whole to clearly depict the proposed installation. Each drawing shall show revision number and date indicated in the title block. Revisions shall be clouded or otherwise highlighted between submissions. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Revisions made without clouding or other highlights will not be reviewed and any approval of the revised drawings will not apply to those unnoted revisions. 10. The Contractor will not be authorized to start installation until all of the shop drawings and data sheets are received, reviewed and approved in writing by the Architect and the Town of Vail Building and Fire Departments. 11. The Fire Protection (Automatic Extinguishment System and Fire Alarm System) Shop Drawing Review by TOVFD shall be required on this project: a. BCER has been commissioned as the Fire Protection Engineer of Record. b. Fire Protection Subcontractor will submit five (5) sets of original Fire Protection Shop Drawings to the General Contractor for circulation and approval. c. The Architect of Record will review Fire Protection shop drawings and add architectural comments, and sign and date with the Architects Shop Drawing Review Stamp. BCER will review for compliance with the specifications and fire protection engineering permit drawings. BCER will either reject/return for additional information or changes to the shop drawings by the subcontractor or approve for submittal of approved drawings to TOVFD for their review, approval and issuance of a permit. BCER may make comments or recommendations to the shop drawings that corrections could be made during construction and installation of the fire protection system. BCER will provide a Shop Drawing Review Stamp and Fire Protection Engineer Stamp as needed. (BCER will keep one original for their records.) d. The Fire Protection Subcontractor (Sprinkler or Fire Alarm) will keep one original for their records and submit four (4) “originals” with wet stamps of the Architect and BCER to TOVFD for review and approval. TOVFD will keep one original for their records upon approval and the three (3) remaining originals will be submitted to the Subcontractor for distribution. A copy of the TOVFD approved set of drawings will be made by the subcontractor and sent to both the Architect and BCER for their records. Distribution of the remaining three (3) original fire protections drawings will be done in accordance with the contract. e. The Fire Protection Contractor will have on site at all times an approved set of fire protection drawings for reference by TOVFD during installation and inspection. f. Modifications to approved fire protection shop drawings will be permitted, as approved by TOVFD. Field approval of the ‘permit” fire protection shop drawings will be provided by BCER. G. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Contractor shall provide the Architect with a loose-leaf manual. The maintenance manual shall contain: 1. A detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, notification signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, intended sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations, and limitations. 2. A detailed description of the operation of the system, including operator responses. The approved sequence of operation shall be placed in, or adjacent to, the operator's control panel. 3. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended or as would be provided under a maintenance contract including a testing and maintenance schedule and detailed testing and maintenance instructions for each type of device FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 installed. 4. Manufacturers' data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed with detailed troubleshooting instructions for each specific type of trouble condition recognized by the system, including opens, grounds, parity errors, "loop failures," etc. These instructions shall include a list of all trouble signals annunciated by the system, a description of the condition(s) which will cause those trouble signals, and step-by-step instructions describing how to isolate those problems and correct them (or call for service, as appropriate). 5. A list of recommended spare parts. 6. Service directory, which includes the main 24-hour emergency service number and at least three alternate numbers that are monitored on a 24-hour basis. 7. Small-scale (11 inches by 17 inches) record drawings of the system. 8. This manual shall be written, compiled and edited specifically for this project and the system installed. Unedited manufacturer's catalog data sheets and/or equipment manuals are unacceptable as content for this submittal. H. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the fire alarm system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the approved shop drawings. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set. These drawings shall be made available to the Engineer of Record, or their representative, upon request. 1. Upon completion of the work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare complete, accurate final record drawings reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the fire alarm system. 2. Upon completion of the work, two sets of record drawings and electronic CAD files shall be submitted to the Architect for review. 3. Following the Architect's review and acceptance of record drawings, and before final approval, one (1) set of reproducible record drawings, one copy on diskette, and four (4) additional sets of bond record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. 4. The record drawings are required to show and to identify quantities of junction boxes, spare conductors, color-coding of conductors, splices, device back boxes, and terminal strips. These drawings shall include a schedule of all connections/terminations, indexed by junction box, device back-box and terminal strip and shall reference wire identification taped numbers as installed. I. Software Documentation 1. Documentation of Software Modifications shall include: a. A complete printout of the system program prior to the change. b. A complete printout of the system program subsequent to the change, with all modifications highlighted. c. A letter prepared and signed by the individual who made the changes, describing each change made, and the reason for that change. This letter shall certify that the preparer has personally reviewed and compared the before and after program printout and verified the correctness of the modification(s). 2. A copy of all software documentation required by this section shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor, in a binder, arranged in chronological order. This binder shall FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the project. 3. Once the fire alarm system is put into service, in whole or in part, and the associated building(s) partially or wholly occupied, no software changes shall be performed without the prior written permission of the Architect. 4. All software changes to the fire alarm system, once it is in service, shall be performed by a certified, manufacturer's representative, trained in the execution of such changes. A complete printout of the system program changes shall be provided. 5. Each revision to the software shall be identified by a unique version number and date. 6. Follow TOVFD requirements for all software modifications. J. System Program Pre-Testing 1. All fire alarm control equipment shall be assembled, connected/interconnected in the manner in which it will be installed in the building, powered, and pre-tested by the Contractor for a minimum of 30 days, prior to delivery to the project site. This period shall be used by the Contractor to prepare and test the system software. The fire alarm control equipment and software shall be delivered to the project site as a complete package, in an operational, tested configuration, with all monitor and control points programmed in permanent memory and disabled in RAM. A letter from the Contractor certifying successful completion of the required program pre-testing shall be supplied to the Architect at the time the equipment is delivered to the site. 2. At least one total reprogramming shall be included in this contract after project conditions, system inter-connections, and required text are finalized. K. Test Record 1. System certification and documentation of system testing required by this Specification shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance test. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period 1. The Contractor shall warranty all materials and workmanship during the installation period and for a period of two years, beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and warranty periods for any damage caused by him or his subcontractors or by defects in his or his subcontractors' work, materials, or equipment. 2. During the warranty period, the Fire Alarm Contractor shall inspect and test the entire fire alarm system in conformance with NFPA 72. All devices shall be tested at a maximum interval of 6 months apart in the first year, with a written report after each test. The warranty period shall include the first and second annual inspections and tests. B. Emergency Service 1. The Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the system, at no cost to the Owner, within four hours of a request for such service by the Owner during both the FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 installation and the warranty periods. This service shall be provided on a 24-hour per day, seven days per week basis. C. Spurious Alarms 1. If the Owner experiences an unacceptable number of spurious or unexplained false alarms during the installation and warranty periods, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary labor, material, and technical expertise to correct the problem to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. The following number of spurious alarms, calculated as a ratio of false alarms to number of initiation devices, shall be considered unacceptable: a. Automatic (system connected) smoke detectors - More than two spurious alarms per 100 detectors per six months during the system warranty period. If this number is calculated to be less than two, two spurious alarms shall be considered unacceptable. Any calculated number shall be rounded up. b. Automatic duct type smoke detectors - More than two spurious alarms per 50 detectors per six months during the system installation and warranty periods. If this number is calculated to be less than two, two spurious alarms shall be considered unacceptable. Any calculated number shall be rounded up. 3. Any spurious alarms shall be considered unacceptable for the following types of equipment: a. Manual fire alarm stations. b. Sprinkler or standpipe system waterflow devices. c. Sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switches. d. Range hood and duct fire suppression system monitoring devices. 1.8 TRAINING A. Conduct two (2) training sessions as required, but not less than four (4) hours each, to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the features, operation, and maintenance of the modified systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled as agreeable to the Owner. B. Training shall include all system operational functions needed by building and security personnel. This shall include, but will not be limited to: 1. Alarm acknowledgement. 2. Interpretation of the scheme used to provide identifiers. 3. System reset. 4. Basic troubleshooting. 1.9 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Three (3) complete sets of any special tools or keys necessary for normal operation and maintenance of the system shall be provided under this work. 1.10 FINAL APPROVAL AND ACCEPTANCE A. Final approval and acceptance of the work will be given by the Owner when: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 11 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. The complete system has been inspected, tested, and approved in writing by the Owner and the Town of Vail Building and Fire Departments. 2. All required submittals, including system operation and maintenance manuals, contractor record drawings, test reports, spare parts, special tools and training have been provided to, reviewed by, and accepted in writing by the Owner. 3. All system software changes stored in RAM have been transferred into permanent memory, and verified in writing, by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The system shall utilize analog point-addressable technology providing a discrete system "address" for each individual initiating device. B. All equipment and system components furnished and installed shall be new and listed by UL for their intended use. The equipment and system components shall be installed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards, the manufacturers' recommendations and within the limitations of the UL listings. All equipment and system components shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. Evidence of UL listing is required. C. System components shall be modular in design to ensure future expansion capability of the system. Spare capacity shall pertain to quantities of devices, circuits, power supplies, amplifiers, conductor capacities (size) and lengths. D. The system shall have spare installed capacity enabling it to support a 30 percent increase in the number of initiating devices, and in the number of control and notification appliances and amplifiers. Spare circuit capacity shall be evenly distributed throughout the system. E. Electromagnetic Interference: All fire alarm control equipment, devices and wiring shall be protected against unwanted radiated electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) which can interfere with normal system processing and possibly cause unwanted alarms. F. The system shall be one of the following manufacturers or equivalent as approved by the Architect and fire protection engineer: 1. Edwards Systems Technology (EST) 2. Notifier 3. Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd. (Siemens) 4. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 12 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. FACP and Equipment: a. Edwards Systems Technology Inc. b. Faraday, LLC. c. Federal Signal Corporation. d. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a GE-Honeywell Company. e. Fire-Lite Alarms; a GE-Honeywell Company. f. Gamewell Company (The). g. Harrington Signal, Inc. h. NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company. i. Protectowire Company, Inc. (The). j. Radionics; a division of Detection Systems, Inc.; a member of the Bosch Group. k. SAFETECH International, Inc. l. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; a Cerberus Division. m. Silent Knight; a GE-Honeywell Company. n. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company. o. Vision Systems - VESDA; a member of Vision Systems Group. 2. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 3. Audible and Visual Signals: a. Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc. b. Commercial Products Group. c. Gentex Corporation. d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company. 2.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. Initiating Device Circuits 1. Fire alarm initiating device circuits, including circuits monitoring smoke and heat detectors, water-flow switches and devices used for detecting activation of special fire suppression systems shall be in accordance with fully addressable multiplex systems. 2. Supervisory initiation circuits, including circuits monitoring smoke control system circuits, valve supervisory switches, fire pump functions, air pressure supervisory switches, magnetic contacts, electrical power supervision and low battery supervision shall be in accordance with fully addressable multiplex systems. B. Signaling Line Circuits FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 13 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Circuits connecting remote annunciation devices with the control panel or circuits, and addressable circuits shall be Class B as described in NFPA 72. 2. The main system riser between remote transmitting panels and the control panel(s), shall be Class B as described in NFPA 72. C. Notification Appliance Circuits 1. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class B to meet the requirements of NFPA 72. D. Firefighters’ Telephone Circuits 1. Firefighters' telephone circuits shall be Class B, supervised with end-of-line resistors. 2.4 POWER SUPPLIES A. Except where otherwise required by local code, all new A/C power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of Section 10.5.7 of NFPA 72. B. All portions of the system shall be designed and equipped on standby (rechargeable) battery power, either directly or by provision of an uninterruptible power supply or supplies. C. Upon failure of normal (A/C) power, the affected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any alarm, trouble or operator acknowledgement signals. D. Operation of any portion of the system on secondary power shall annunciate as a trouble signal, identifying the inoperable power supply(ies). E. Standby batteries shall have sufficient capacity to maintain all portions of the system in a normal, non-alarm condition for a minimum of 24 hours, after which it shall be capable of operating all notification appliances simultaneously for a minimum of 15 minutes. F. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the system. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciate as a trouble signal, identifying the deficient batteries. G. All power supplies, including any UPS, shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 24 hours maximum. H. All batteries shall be maintenance-free type. Wet cell lead acid standby batteries are prohibited. I. Design load connected to any power supply, amplifier and batteries shall not exceed 80 percent of its rated capacity. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 14 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.5 ANNUNCIATION A. The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor and annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. B. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. 1. The integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less than 85 dBA at 10 feet. 2. Alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall initiate recognizably different audible outputs. Trouble and supervisory signals may initiate the same audible output if distinction is by visible annunciation. 3. Integral audible devices shall continue to sound until silenced by a system operator actuating a switch designated for that purpose. 4. Receipt of subsequent alarm or supervisory signals shall cause the integral audible devices to resound. C. The system shall recognize and annunciate the following signals: 1. Fire alarms. 2. Supervisory signals. 3. Trouble conditions. 4. Operator acknowledgement of annunciated signals. 5. System reset. D. All alarm signals, supervisory alarm signals and trouble conditions shall be annunciated by the control panel(s) and by each remote annunciation device. The control panel(s) shall annunciate operator acknowledgement of smoke detection signals and system reset. E. Fire Alarm Signals: Activation of the following devices shall be recognized and annunciated by the system as fire alarms: 1. System type smoke detectors, excluding in-duct smoke detectors. 2. System heat detectors. 3. Water-flow switches. 4. Manual fire alarm stations. 5. Devices monitoring actuation of special suppression systems. F. Supervisory Alarm Signals: The following conditions shall be recognized and annunciated by the system as supervisory alarms: 1. Valve supervisory switch actuation. 2. In-duct smoke detectors. 3. Guest room smoke detectors. Note: Guest room smoke detectors are not single- station, local smoke alarms. 4. A/C power failure. G. Trouble Signals: The system shall also recognize and annunciate the following trouble FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 15 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 conditions: 1. Initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit trouble conditions. 2. Power supply trouble conditions. 3. Remote annunciation device trouble conditions. 4. A smoke detector, with automatic drift compensation feature, requiring maintenance when it reaches 80 percent of its threshold limit for a period of 24 hours. 5. Firefighters’ telephone circuits shall be supervised for opens, grounds, or wire-to-wire shorts. 6. Fan shutdown manual switch left in the “OFF” position. H. Operator Acknowledgement Signals: Silencing of integral audible devices required by these specifications shall be recognized and annunciated by the system as operator acknowledgement of the signal(s) displayed. 2.6 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL(S) A. Fire alarm control panels shall be designed and equipped to provide the following: 1. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and trouble messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. 2. Conventional horns in general alarm shall sound the standard evacuation signal, ANSI S3.41, three pulse temporal pattern. 3. Standby power supplies capable of supporting all dependent devices and equipment as required by these specifications. 4. The control panel(s) shall not be capable of being reset until all alarm conditions have been cleared. 2.7 ANNUNCIATION DEVICES A. Indicating Lamp LED Displays 1. Indicating lamp displays shall indicate all fire and supervisory alarm signals received until such time as the alarm condition is cleared and the display manually reset. 2. Indicating lamp displays shall indicate all trouble signals received until such time as the trouble condition is cleared. 3. Indicating lamp displays shall be clearly labeled using nomenclature approved by the Owner. 4. Operating (electrical) power shall be derived from the control panel(s) via a supervised circuit; 2.8 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS A. Description of Equipment 1. Manual fire alarm stations shall be of the double-action, non-coded, non-plastic type. They shall consist of a housing, fitted with a pull-down lever, which when operated, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 16 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 locks in position to effect activation of an initiating or signaling line circuit. The body of the manual station shall be permanently attached to the back plate assembly. Resetting the station after operation shall require the use of a key or special tool. The manual station shall be suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. 2. Manual fire alarm stations shall annunciate by point and be addressable. 3. Manual fire alarm stations shall be installed so that the handle is 48 inches from the floor. 2.9 EMERGENCY VOICE CONTROL PANEL A. Single channel, one-way emergency communication capability on either an operator selectable zone-by-zone or "all-call" basis via existing public address speakers. Voice control panel shall be capable of interfacing with existing speaker circuits. 2.10 SMOKE DETECTORS - AREA TYPE A. Spot-type smoke detectors shall be system operated, analog photoelectric type plug-in detectors which mount to a twist-lock base. The detector shall contain an alarm indicating LED, which will blink to signal activation of the detector. The detector head shall be equipped with a mesh insect screen to prevent foreign objects from entering the sensing chamber. The initial sensitivity voltage shall be factory set by the manufacturer. Detectors shall be listed by UL as "Smoke-Automatic Fire Detectors," tested according to UL 268. Detectors listed as "Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors," tested according to UL 217 shall not be used. B. Each spot-type smoke detector shall be monitored individually, via an integral, addressable element. The use of addressable zone modules to monitor spot smoke detectors is not acceptable. C. Spot-type smoke detectors shall have provisions for calibrated sensitivity testing consistent with the requirements of NFPA 72. D. Protect smoke detectors and smoke detector bases from dust, dirt, and paint contamination during construction using the manufacturer’s approved covers. Detector covers shall be removed upon completion of the work in the area(s) in which they are installed. E. Holes in the back of detectors and detector back boxes shall be covered with gaskets, sealant or equivalent, and detectors shall be mounted so that airflow from inside the detector back-box or from the periphery of the detector housing shall not prevent the entry of smoke during a fire or test condition. 2.11 SMOKE DETECTORS - IN-DUCT TYPE A. In-duct type smoke detectors shall be installed in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, local requirements and in accordance with the detector manufacturer's installation instructions. In-duct smoke detectors shall be suitable for the full range of air velocity conditions in the air-handling systems in which they are installed, including cold air temperatures on the stairwell and elevator pressurization fans. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 17 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. In-duct smoke detectors shall be of the analog, addressable type, consisting of a plug-in type detector head in a duct-mounted housing equipped with air-sampling tubes providing air flow through the detector housing. In-duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type. In-duct smoke detectors shall be listed or approved for that application. In-duct smoke detector operating voltage shall be 24 VDC. C. Each in-duct smoke detector shall be monitored individually via an integral addressable element. D. In-duct smoke detector housings shall be equipped with a relay for the shutdown of the respective air-handling unit. Provide necessary interlock wiring to air-handling unit starters and motor control centers for shutdown of fans. 2.12 SMOKE DETECTORS – PROJECTED BEAM TYPE A. Projected beam type smoke detectors shall monitor continuously over a given distance and shall consist of separately housed transmitter and receiver units. These detectors shall employ an obscuration detection principle using a projected, invisible, infra-red light beam. B. Projected beam type smoke detectors shall be 4-wire type, powered from a separate, supervised 2-wire power circuit. Detector power circuits shall be supervised using an end- of-line power supervisory relay monitored by a dedicated, addressable monitor module. C. Beam type smoke detectors shall incorporate a bank of alignment LED's on both the transmitter and receiver, allowing the detectors to be properly aligned without special tools. D. Beam type smoke detectors shall incorporate automatic gain control to compensate for gradual signal deterioration resulting from dirt accumulation on lenses. E. Beam type smoke detection shall incorporate a double detector (cross zoned) concept for verification of alarm. 2.13 HEAT DETECTORS A. Where required provide addressable combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with plug-in base and alarm indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature setting except as indicated. Pneumatic, non-indicating rate-of-rise heat detectors shall not be used. 2.14 SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY AND ALARM EQUIPMENT A. Water-flow indicators shall be monitored under this contract to indicate water-flow in each sprinkler system zone. Provide a new addressable monitor module for each water-flow switch. B. Valve supervisory switches shall be monitored under this contract for valves controlling the water supply to the sprinkler systems. Provide a new addressable monitor module for each valve tamper switch. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 18 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.15 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULES A. Provide, install, and test addressable circuit interfaces to non-addressable devices, such as water-flow and valve supervisory devices. B. All circuit interfaces used for supervisory functions shall be mounted within 3 feet of the monitored switch or circuit. C. Circuit interface modules shall also be used for control of various circuits, such as elevator recall and fan controls. These modules shall be provided with DPDT dry contacts for proper interfacing. Where contact ratings are not sufficient to control the required circuit, provide additional relays controlled by the addressable module for proper circuit ratings. D. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules shall be provided where required, in sufficient quantities, for a complete and operational system, whether specifically indicated on the drawings or not. 2.16 AUDIBLE/VISUAL NOTIFICATION DEVICES A. General: Notification devices shall consist of a combination horn and speaker assembled in a common enclosure, or installed in separate enclosures provided proper coverage is provided. Audible signaling devices shall be installed and spaced so as to produce a sound output on alarm, which is clearly audible above the ambient noise level throughout the building. The audible alarm shall be 15 db above the ambient room noise level and at least 85 db at 10 feet from the device. B. Fire alarm speakers shall produce a message with voice intelligibility. C. Visual Signaling Appliances: 1. When visual signaling appliances are mounted on the wall, the word "Fire" shall read from top to bottom. 2. Visual signaling appliances shall be listed in accordance with UL 1971. 3. Strobes of adequate candela ratings shall be provided in accordance with the visual coverage requirements of NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. 4. Mounting heights and locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines. In sleeping rooms when mounted within 24 inches of the ceiling, the candela rating shall be increased to 177 cd in accordance with NFPA 72, Section 18.5.4.6. If the device is mounted more than 24 inches below the ceiling, the candela rating shall be 110 cd. 2.17 SPARE PARTS A. As part of this contract, provide the following spare parts: 1. Automatic detection devices, and addressable circuit modules - Two percent of the installed quantity of each type, but not less than 2. 2. Audible and visual devices - Two percent of the installed quantity of each type, but not less than 2 of each type. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 19 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3. Fuses - Five each for each type, rating and size of fuse used in the system. 4. Keys - A minimum of three sets of keys shall be provided and appropriately identified. 2.18 CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT A. Except as otherwise required by the Town of Vail and/or these Specifications, fire alarm circuit wiring shall conform to the requirements of Article 760 of NFPA 70. Electrical back boxes are required for most devices. B. All fire alarm circuit wiring and fire alarm cables shall be installed in a UL listed and plenum rated metal conduit colored red or approved raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4- inch. Signaling line circuits and initiating line circuits are to be in separate conduit. C. All cable runs shall be continuous between devices, without splices, wherever feasible. All other connections shall be to terminal blocks. Wires connected together shall have the same color insulation. All connections shall be accessible for inspection and servicing and shall be clearly identified on the record drawings. D. Wire and cable shall be sized, twisted and shielded as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, and Article 760 of NFPA 70. E. All conduit shall be grounded by approved ground clamps or other means. F. Where conduit is imbedded in plaster, a type suitable for this use shall be installed. All joints in such imbedded conduit shall be liquid and gas-tight. Continuous run of conduit without joints is preferred for imbedding. G. All electrical enclosures, raceways and conduits shall contain only those electrical circuits associated with the fire detection and alarm system and shall not contain any wire that is unrelated to the system. H. All wiring that is not enclosed by conduit shall be supported and anchored with nylon straps or clamps. The use of staples is prohibited. I. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not be used. J. The use of aluminum wire is prohibited. K. All electrical circuits shall be numerically identified at both ends with wire taped numbers. L. All system conductors, except grounding conductors, shall be solid copper. M. All end-of-line resistors shall be mounted on terminal blocks. N. All devices installed in areas subject to moisture shall be provided with weatherproof enclosures. Provide NEMA 4 or equivalent. 2.19 RETRANSMISSION OF FIRE ALARMS TO CENTRAL STATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 20 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Receipt of any fire alarm signal (initial signal only) shall be automatically retransmitted to the UL listed Central Station. B. All wiring and terminations between the fire alarm system and any on-site equipment necessary for performing this function shall be electrically supervised. Faults in monitored circuits which may prevent retransmission of fire alarm signals to the Central Station shall cause a trouble signal at the Central Station. C. All connections between the protected premises and the Central Station alarm station shall be electrically supervised from the Central Station. 2.20 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULES A. The Contractor shall provide, install, and test addressable circuit interfaces as necessary to comply with cause and effects matrix, whether shown on drawings. B. All circuit interfaces used for supervisory or control functions shall be mounted within 3 feet of this monitored switch or circuit. C. Addressable circuit interface modules shall be provided for monitoring/control of door holder devices, elevator recall, fire/smoke dampers, (open/closed), and fan status (on/off). Contractor shall be responsible for providing addressable modules for control and monitoring of fire/smoke dampers and fan units. Damper status shall monitor units for 100% open and closed positions. Contractor to provide sufficient quantities of modules to provide proper control and status functions. 2.21 FIREFIGHTER'S TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT A. Telephone Jacks 1. Telephone jack stations shall be provided at inside stair entrances, elevator lobbies, and elevator cars, indicated on the drawings. 2. Telephone jack stations shall be a single gang, with spring loaded cover and stainless steel plate with engraved identification as "Fire Emergency Phone Jack". 3. Stations shall be pre-wired with 6-inch long color coded wires. 4. Telephone jack stations are not required if a Radio Amplification System is provided throughout the building and is tested to be acceptable by the Fire Marshal. 2.22 SMOKE MANAGEMENT (PRESSURIZATION) CONTROL A. Designated pressurization fans (stair and elevator enclosures) shall be arranged to activate (pressurize) upon alarm signal from any alarm initiating device upon priority one alarm in the building. Refer to mechanical system contract documents for air handling unit schedule. Stairs A-South, B-North and Elevators A-1 & A-2 (same shaft) and B-1 & B-2 (same shaft) will be pressurized. Exhaust dampers in corridors and on each floor are to be controlled. B. Refer to Fire Alarm and Smoke Management Sequence of Operation Matrix for sequence of smoke pressurization operation as well as the Smoke Management Panel. (Deferred submittal pending approval by TOVFD) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 21 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Coordinate smoke management operation with mechanical system drawings included in the contract document. Fire alarm contractor shall provide new fan override/smoke management panel in accordance with Town of Vail Building Department & Fire Department requirements. The smoke management panel shall also include status indicators/three-way positions switches for each smoke pressurization fan. D. The manual control three-way position switches shall be arranged to operate each fan for each specific pressurization shaft. The manual control switches shall be interfaced to the mechanical system Motor Control Center (MCC) electrical panels via addressable control modules. E. Manual fire alarm stations shall not activate the smoke pressurization system. PART 3 - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The job site supervisor shall examine daily all areas in which the work will be performed on the day prior to beginning work. The supervisor shall immediately report unsatisfactory working conditions to the Engineer of Record for resolution. The supervisor shall not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory working conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. All holes or damage made in any wall, ceiling or floor shall be patched, restoring the walls, ceilings, floors to their original condition, fire resistance and integrity. B. All piping and conduit shall be installed at a height so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway or passageway and shall not interfere with the operation of any existing mechanical or electrical equipment. C. System riser(s) shall be installed in mechanical raceways or conduit, located to avoid physical harm. They shall be routed through protected spaces, such as electrical closets, avoiding locations such as loading docks and less than 7 feet above the floor. D. All fire alarm wiring junction boxes shall be properly identified following code requirements. 3.3 CONCEALMENT A. All wire, cable, conduit, raceways, junction boxes and device backboxes shall be concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts or closets in all finished areas. Conduit, raceways, junction boxes and device backboxes may be exposed in unfinished back-of-house areas or mechanical equipment rooms. B. Accessible conduit, raceways, junction boxes, and other associated items related to the conduit network shall be provided with red bands every 10 feet with junction box covers labeled as fire alarm, unless specifically instructed otherwise. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 22 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.4 TESTING A. Provide written certification that all equipment in accordance with NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Testing and Certification of System Operation: 1. Has been inspected and tested by a manufacturer's certified representative. 2. Is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and UL listings. 3. Is in proper working order. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Upon completion of each installation phase, perform and document on an approved format, system tests as required herein. All acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer of Record or his designated representatives. 1. All conductors, including shielding conductors, shall be tested for continuity, shorts to ground and shorts between pairs. 2. All remote transmitting panel monitor points shall be functionally tested and monitor point identifications verified. 3. All alarm initiating devices shall be functionally tested. 4. All supervisory functions of each initiating device and signaling line circuits shall be functionally tested. 5. All building control functions (i.e. elevator recall) initiated by the fire alarm control panel shall be tested. 6. Receipt of all alarm and trouble signals, initiated during the course of the testing, shall be verified at each annunciation device. 7. Correct labeling of all annunciation device LED's OR LCD's shall be verified. 8. The system CPU and annunciators shall be load tested for 4 hours on standby battery power. 9. All remote transmitting panels shall be load tested for 4 hours on standby battery power. 10. Any additional tests, required by the referenced codes, Standards, or Town of Vail, shall be performed. Documentation of such tests shall include: a. The date and time of each test. b. A reference set of record drawings, numerically identifying the individual components and circuits tested, test locations, and indicating the measured sound level in each location. c. A description of each test performed. d. A checklist of each device and circuit tested, indicating the results of each test. e. The names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test. f. A complete printout of the system program produced by the system printer. This printout shall be produced and dated upon completion of all required testing/verification, including any modifications necessary prior to final acceptance testing. 3.6 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 23 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Make arrangements with the Engineer of Record for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance tests. The Engineer of Record will witness the final acceptance test. B. If after being advised that the work is completed and ready for test, the work has not been completed or the final acceptance tests are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be responsible for the extra expenses for re-inspection and witnessing the retesting of the work. END OF SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 16721 - 24 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16735 - CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections and Instructions to Bidders, apply to this section. B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section: 1. Electrical General Provisions (16010) 2. Identification (16060) 3. Raceways and Boxes (16110) 4. Fire Seals (16122) 5. Poke Through and Flush Floor Outlets – (16132) 6. Wiring Devices (16140) 7. Grounding (16450) 8. Panelboards (16160) 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install Conduit Rough-in Systems including all work incidental thereto as shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following Standards and Codes: 1. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 568B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 569A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 606A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 607A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 5. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 6. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code B. Contact each service provider/utility and provide/coordinate all for their requirement for this installation. CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Cabling – Cabling run within a pathway supported by cable tray, J-hooks, EMT conduit systems, etc. that is installed above an accessible ceiling or within a crawlspace area. B. Pathway – Routing of cabling from termination outlet to telecommunications room. 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK (GENERAL) A. New – Work installed in a new building shall be concealed throughout the building. In General, communications cabling may be installed open above accessible ceilings. 1.6 SCOPE OF WORK (SPECIFIC) A. Telephone, Cable Television Satellite Television and Data Raceway Systems 1. Provide a complete telephone raceway system from the telecommunications company pedestal to all telephone and data outlets. Reference riser diagrams on the drawings for specific information. 2. Provide a complete cable television raceway system from the CATV company pedestal to all CATV outlets. Reference riser diagrams on the drawings for specific information. 3. Provide a complete satellite television raceway system from each building roof satellite location to MDF room, all IDF rooms and to unit structured media centers. B. Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 1. Provide a complete CCTV raceway system including, but not limited to cameras and monitors. C. Card Access Control System 1. Provide a complete card access raceway system, including but not limited to all exterior door, garage entrance and exits, elevators and back of house doors. D. Security Alarm System 1. Provide a complete security alarm raceway system, including but not limited to door contacts on all exterior door, keypads, horns and duress buttons. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES – VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER’S LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS REFPRESENTATIVE A. Flush wall mounted 4-11/16 inches square, 3-5/8” deep pressed galvanized steel minimum. CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Utilize 4-11/16” square, 2-1/8” deep backbox with 4-11/16” square, 1-1/2” deep extension ring to meet backbox depth requirement. 2.2 PLASTER COVER A. Single gang, galvanized steel, for single gang device. B. Two gang, galvanized steel, for two-gang device. 1. Provide steel barrier for devices requiring power/low voltage in same backbox. 2.3 COVER PLATES – VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER’S LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS REPRESENTATIVE A. Same material, finish and color as for wiring devices. B. Single gang for single device with appropriate opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed. C. Two gang for combination NEMA 5 receptacle/device with appropriate opening for receptacle and opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed. D. Two gang as shown on Drawings for special/communications outlets as specified. E. Device opening shall be bushed one-inch when used for wire pull or device type cannot be verified. F. Blank as shown on Drawings or when single device type not used. 2.4 RACEWAYS A. Per appropriate specification section with insulated throats and bushings on all conduit runs and rubber grommeted holes between boxes or box sections. 2.5 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. ¾ Inch AC plywood. 1. Minimum 4’ W x 8’ H x ¾” sheets, of quantity as specified or shown. 2. Void free, mounted to support attached equipment. 3. Paint with fire retardant paint. 2.6 CABINETS A. Same as for panelboard enclosures as specified in Section 16110 and 16160. B. ¾ inch plywood shall cover interior back of the enclosure. 2.7 CABLE MOUNTING HARDWARE A. J-Hooks CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Metallic J-hook bracket (1-1/2” wide) with Velcro strap, capable of being ceiling or support rod mounted. a. Provide manufacturer recommended fasteners as required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers/Series: a. Chatsworth Products, Inc./31422-801. b. Or approved equivalent. B. D-Hooks 1. Aluminum D-hook bracket, vertical or horizontal mounting with end caps. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Mono-Systems #H-533* PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide all labor, tools, materials, services and technical knowledge to provide a complete, reliable, pathway system as specified herein that meets all governing codes and meets or exceeds industry standards as presented. 1. Review drawings for device locations, telecommunications room locations, trunk risers, cable trays, details and special features. 2. Coordinate exact locations of outlets, equipment, etc. prior to rough-in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pathways 1. Meet with the Owner’s Systems/Telecommunications representatives prior to pathway installation. a. Coordinate size of pathways and routing prior to beginning any installation. b. Install a separate pathway for each system that is to be installed. 2. Install all pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569A Standards, associated addenda and technical service bulletins and per manufacturers requirements. a. Install all pathways in a safe, neat, professional workmanlike manner. b. Coordinate size of pathways/raceways such that EIA/TIA maximum fill requirements are not exceeded for that raceway type. Maximum 40% fill. 3. Install nameplates per Section 16060 – Electrical Identification and label all pathways and associated termination points. CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. Provide system identifying nameplate centered on main trunk riser boxes, equipment backboards, ground buses, and cabinets (i.e. TELEPHONE, DATA, CCTV, etc). 4. Provide pathways to conceal all cabling in the facility except where specifically indicated otherwise. 5. Coordinate pathway installation such that it is not supported from new or existing conduits, piping, ductwork, etc. 6. Installs all pathways parallel and perpendicular to building lines and tight to structure. Install pathways such that multiple runs to the same geographic location will utilize similar routing to destination point. 7. Install pathways such that horizontal backbone cabling will be installed in a star topology. 8. Route cabling pathways to the telecommunication room as shown on Drawings. a. In general, communications/special outlet pathways shall be provided to the telecommunications room on the same floor or nearest floor where rooms have not been provided on every floor. 9. Install pathways to avoid elevator shafts, elevator equipment rooms or any areas that contain or store hazardous materials. 10. Install pathways to avoid sources of electromagnetic interface (EMI) for all pathways. a. Maintain one-foot minimum from fluorescent lighting (ballast). b. Maintain four-foot minimum from all transformers. c. Maintain ten-foot minimum from electrical power cabling or distribution panels exceeding 480 volts. d. Maintain one-foot minimum from electrical power cabling. e. Maintain two-inch minimum from electrical power cabling less than 220 volts. f. Shorten distances if sufficient EMI isolation is provided and given prior approval by engineer. 11. Avoid routing pathways in areas subject to excessive environmental conditions. Acceptable conditions are: a. Temperature range: 5°C - 40°C. b. Relative humidity range: 5% - 95%. 12. Do not route pathways through boiler rooms or mechanical rooms. 13. Pathways shall account for building expansion joints. B. Pathways for Exposed Cabling CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. The following systems allow installation of cabling exposed above accessible ceiling or in crawlspaces and will require pathway installation for such cabling unless specified otherwise. a. Structured telecommunications cabling b. Video distribution cabling c. Public Access d. CCTV Cabling e. Satellite Television Cabling f. Security Alarm g. Card Access h. CATV – Cable Television 2. Mount supports 4-feet and 5-feet (alternating) on center using J-hooks, D- hooks or a unistrut trapeze configuration approved by the Engineer. a. Provide a separate pathway for each cabling system to be installed. b. Coordinate support quantities such that a maximum of 30 cables are installed through a single J-hook, etc. (where allowed) to avoid deformation of cables. (1) J-hooks: Maximum of 30 cables installed through a single unit. (2) D-hooks: Maximum of 10 cables installed through a single unit. (3) Provide multiple D-hooks, J-hooks, etc. as required to route all cabling. Provide 60% additional usable pathway space at minimum. (4) Provide separate pathways for each system type utilizing that area. 3. Install cable tray in corridors as identified on the drawings. a. Provide pathway to conduit/raceway entrance from cable tray as required. 4. Utilize all metal mounting hardware in ceiling spaces. 5. Install steel conduit sleeves for systems cabling penetrating walls or through floors into all rooms, through all fire and smoke-rated partitions, etc., and as shown on Drawings. a. Provide separate sleeves for each cabling system to be installed. Refer to required pathways. b. Extend conduit sleeves 3-5 inches on either side of wall/floor. Patch around sleeve as required matching surface. (1) Size sleeve as required per EIA/TIA 569A (40% maximum fill). Provide multiple sleeves as required. Provide a minimum 40% additional usable pathway space. (2) Telecommunications Cabling: CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 (a). Install 4” conduit sleeves minimum for all telephone, data and CATV cabling sleeves penetrating firewalls above corridor ceilings of quantities shown on drawings. (b). Install 2” (or as required by Owner’s low voltage consultant) conduit sleeves minimum for all telephone, data and CATV data cabling sleeves into each room in ceiling spaces. c. Provide bushings on all sleeves. d. Provide firestopping in sleeve according to ASTM E814. Coordinate firestopping with cable installation. C. Raceways 1. Refer to Section 16110 – Raceways for basic routing and installation requirements. 2. Furnish and install trunk riser raceways, junction boxes, outlet box raceways and outlet boxes as specified, required or shown on Drawings. 3. Stub riser and extend special outlet box raceways into accessible corridor ceiling and mount/terminate at cable tray system. 4. Each special outlet box shall have a dedicated conduit for cable installation. Special outlet boxes shall not be connected together with conduit between boxes. 5. Minimum outlet box conduit size shall be 1 inch. a. Refer to ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-A for minimum conduit size requirements. Maximum 40% fill. 6. Mark each conduit end for identification and destination of raceway. 7. Install all raceways such that the cabling manufacturer’s minimum bend radius is not exceeded. Coordinate with all systems. 8. Furnish and install 200 pound test, braided nylon pull-cords in all empty conduits and as shown on Drawing details. 9. Provide complete conduit/raceway systems in areas with exposed structure for all cable systems where cabling cannot be concealed. 10. Provide complete conduit/raceway systems in areas with non-accessible ceilings for all cable systems where cabling cannot be concealed. 11. Utilize surface raceway in finished areas where cabling cannot be concealed. 12. Multi-channel surface raceway, where shown on Drawings, may be fed with one (1) conduit for special outlets and one (1) conduit for power to feed multiple outlets. Refer to ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-A and NFPA 70 for conduit size requirements. CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 13. Provide a separate, enclosed raceway system for fiber optic cabling. 14. Conduit segment length shall be nor more than 100 feet with a maximum of two 90 degree bends. Additional junction/pull boxes shall be installed to allow more bends of length of conduit. Refer to EIA/TIA 569-A. 15. Install telecommunications raceways to within six (6) inches of equipment boards, data racks and termination units. 16. Provide exterior/interior conduit as shown on Drawings for the Utility Company i.e. each service provider. D. Outlet Boxes 1. Install special/communication outlets flush in new wall construction. Provide conduit stub as indicated above. 2. Utilize installation methods for special/communication outlets in the following order as available in renovation areas. a. Install special/communication outlets flush in existing wall in a single/double gang back-box. Fish wall as required. Cabling may be run exposed in wall cavity. Mount outlets alongside associated power receptacles where applicable. b. Install special outlets in a single/double gang surface-mounted metal back-box fed with surface mounted metal raceway in renovated areas that cannot be fished and or not require adjacent power receptacles. c. Mount special/communications outlets in multi-channel metal surface raceway in renovation areas with associated power receptacle adjacent to outlet. Provide all mounting bracket hardware and accessories. (1) Locate surface raceway outlets with required spacing as shown on drawings. d. Feed surface raceway in rooms, offices, etc. from conduit extended into corridor space. Cabling may be exposed above accessible corridor/room ceilings. Cabling shall be installed in conduit in corridors in areas without accessible ceilings. 3. Mount outlet boxes at device height as specified or as required by the Architect. 4. Coordinate location of devices that require associated power to be adjacent to same receptacles. 5. Install blank coverplates where device type is not installed. Coordinate such locations with Owner. E. Equipment Backboards CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Provide ½ inch spacers between wall and backboards. Mount backboard rigid to wall to support intended equipment. Start 6 inches above finished floor. 2. Paint equipment and cabinet backboards with two (2) coats of white enamel (fire retardant) on all sides. 3. Provide and install a 120-volt double duplex receptacle on the lower left corner of backboard. 4. Ground Equipment backboards and cabinets to nearest telecommunications grounding busbar per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607. F. J-Hook Installation 1. Provide pathway (minimum of 4 J-hooks mounted horizontally) in accessible ceiling space mounted a maximum of 4 feet on center. Mount pathway tight to structure and allow accessible installation of cabling. 2. Furnish and install single mounted J-hooks from individual conduits serving outlet boxes, mounted 4 feet on center maximum. G. Telecommunications Rooms 1. Provide pathway systems for each cabling system routed into telecommunications room. a. Install a minimum of three 4-inch conduits/sleeves exiting each telecommunications room in 2 locations to properly route cabling to corridor pathway. b. Provide a minimum of three 4 inch steel conduits/sleeves extending between stacked telecommunications rooms. (1) Provide an additional 4 inch steel conduit sleeve at each telecommunication room for each telecommunications room on the same floor. 2. Provide equipment backboards on all walls in the telecommunications room. Start 6 inches above finished floor. 3. Avoid routing cabling alongside electrical rooms by installing cable pathways/telecommunications room conduit sleeves to maximize the distance from sources of EMI such as transformers, power panels, fluorescent lighting, etc. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Consult with appropriate system specifications, system manufacturers, and Owner’s low voltage consultant or representative prior to installation to determine special device plate, distance limitations, routing and raceway requirements for the following communication/special systems: 1. Audio-Visual CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 a. Broadcast Television b. Computer Video Distribution 2. Building Automation 3. Information Management a. Structured Telecommunications Cabling b. Control Dictation c. Personal Register/Silent Page d. Physiological Monitoring 4. Security a. Card Access/Door Control b. Closed Circuit Television c. Entrance Intercom d. Lobby Door Control e. Perimeter Door Monitoring/Control f. Infant Security 5. Telecommunications a. Internal Telephone b. Public Telephone c. Telecommunications Service 6. Cable Television or Satellite B. Comply with all requirements of the specifications for all raceways, boxes, cover plates, etc., and specific installation considerations. END OF SECTION 16735 CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16735 - 10 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16858 - ROOF, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install an electric snowmelt system for freeze damage protection as indicated on the drawings and described herein. B. The system shall consist of individual self-regulating heating cables installed in roof valleys, gutters, downspouts and patio drains, thermostats, and contactors. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT A. The self-regulating heater cable shall consist of a flat flexible electric heating strip of parallel circuit construction, consisting of a continuous inner core of self-regulating conductive polymer material. This core shall be insulated with a fluoropolymer inner jacket that is highly corrosion resistant. The inner jacket shall be covered with tinned copper shield and a corrosion resistant modified polyolefin outer jacket. B. The self-regulating heater shall increase its heat output with a decrease in temperature and decrease its heat output with an increase in temperature. A constant wattage heater is not acceptable. C. The electric power connection to the heater shall be made in accessible weather proof junction boxes. Heating cables requiring hot to cold lead junctions shall not be acceptable. D. The self-regulating heater shall be installed as indicated on the plans. E. The self-regulating heater in combination with the interconnect components shall have a U.L. system listing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. The heater shall be Raychem model EM2-XR, Bylin RIM System, or Approved equal. The heater shall carry a U.L. listing as a snowmelting system. Raychem EEMK-XJB junction boxes, EMK-XP power connection kits, EMK-XCT cable ties, SNMC snow melt caution sign, and GMK-DH downspout hanger shall be used as required. B. The thermostat shall be remote bulb type, with a fixed temperature setting of 40°. Raychem catalog #AMC-F5. C. The contactor shall be mechanically held type with control module. ASCO #917 and #47 module. ROOF, GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS 16858 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Heater shall be laid in gutters and held in place with coated aluminum adhesive tape; shall be suspended in downspouts either as a loop or a single length and held in place by a hanger kit; and shall be attached to roofs using roof clip kits. B. Protect the heater from damage and install according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 TESTS A. After installation, test the dielectric jacket's insulation resistance and continuity with a 1000 VDC megger. Insulation resistance from the conductors to the shield shall be between 20 and 1000 megohms. END OF SECTION 16858 ROOF, GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS 16858 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16930 - LIGHTING CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install an architectural lighting dimming and addressable control system as specified herein for the areas indicated on the drawings and load schedules. System shall consist of factory preassembled dimming cabinets, low voltage control stations and/or interface panels, and solid-state high frequency fixture packs (where applicable). Systems shall also provide a preassembled addressable relay system for on-off control. Additional items may also be required and are described herein and/or shown on the drawings. B. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 16000 A. Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035 B. Electric General Provisions - Section 16050 C. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 D. Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16035. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16035. C. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for maintenance and repair data under provisions of Section 16035. D. Submit all mechanical and electrical notes and construction details for both dimming panels and controls. E. Submit a dimming load schedule which indicates a clear understanding of the actual loads per circuit, which circuits are on their respective control zones, which circuits are on emergency (if applicable), and the corresponding circuit numbers (per the electrical drawings). F. Submit an interconnection diagram showing a detail of each control, which zones are on that control, the interconnect wiring between controls and dimming panel(s), and the dimming panel(s). Provide one diagram per each dimming panel location. Block diagrams involving cross-referencing to catalog specification and application sheets will not be acceptable. LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Submit catalog literature with performance specifications which indicate compliance to the specification herein. H. Manufacturer shall provide any additional information or demonstrations as required by Architect/Engineer to demonstrate conformance with specific products of this specification. All demonstrations shall be at a location, time, and in a manner chosen by the Architect/Engineer. I. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to the Specification by supplying a document indicating equipment submitted meets or exceeds each line item in the Specification, or exceptions taken. J. The owner shall be supplied with two sets of "as-built" drawings at the completion of the installation. These drawings shall be part of an operations and maintenance manual covering all major items installed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in architectural lighting control systems with a minimum of 5 years continuous experience in manufacturing such equipment. B. The entire dimming system shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label on each dimming panel. Additionally, each dimming, non-dimming, or motor module shall be specifically listed by UL for control of the type of load (i.e., incandescent, low voltage, fluorescent, neon/cold-cathode, HID, motor). C. All lighting control equipment compatibility – dimming panels, relay panels, dimming ballasts, control processor, control interfaces, and control stations – shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPECIFIC PRODUCTS A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. ETC 2. Acceptable substitute B. The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for dimming systems which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 2.2 DIMMING CABINETS A. Cabinets shall be ETC Unison or Sensor wall or floor mounted NEMA-1 grade, constructed of sheet steel plates not less than #14 U.S. gauge. Contractor shall reinforce wall as required for wall-mounted panels. B. Cabinets shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be required to provide input feed wiring, load wiring, and control wiring which LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 terminates to a set of clearly marked low voltage terminals. No other wiring or assembly by the Contractor shall be permitted. C. Cabinets shall contain input and output circuit breakers to provide primary line side protection and outgoing branch circuit protection for each dimming module. Circuit breakers shall contain a visual trip indicator and shall be rated at 10,000 AIC (120V) or 14,000 AIC (277V). D. Cabinets shall contain current carrying terminals with factory installed brass or copper jumpers. These jumpers will enable power to completely bypass the dimmer modules for temporary power during installation and any future service work. Bypass jumpers shall be clearly and permanently labeled and shall be reusable at any time. Low voltage control signal methods bypass shall not be acceptable. Alternatively, the Contractor may provide a switch panel with a specification grade SPST switch wired in parallel with each dimming module. Provide one switch per module with a capacity equal to the input breaker rating of the dimmer module. Engrave each switch wall-plate NORMAL in the switch open position, and BYPASS in the switch closed position. Provide details of this switch panel with the dimming system submittals. E. Cabinets shall be cooled exclusively by means of free convection, unaided by fans, in an ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F). To provide the utmost in reliability, cabinets which normally use cooling fans must have their capacity derated accordingly and as such may require either larger panels or a greater number of panels than shown on the drawings. All additional labor and material costs due to requiring additional panels shall be included in the Contractors bid. Alternately, fans may be used with the following additional provisions: 1. The manufacturer shall provide a service contract beginning from the day the standard warranty ends until 10 years from the date of purchase. The service contract shall provide for bi-annual replacement of all fans and annual cleaning of all filters by a factory service technician. A label not less than 3" x 5" shall be affixed to each dimming panel and shall clearly state that the panel is covered by an extended service contract on these items, with appropriate spaces for logging the service work performed. 2. Provide a copy of the service contract, as well as a copy of the label described above, with the other information required for submission purposes. 3. Cost for the above service contract to be included in the base bid. 2.3 DIMMING MODULES A. Silicon thyristors shall be used to control the power furnished to the loads. The complete load current shall be carried by these devices. They shall be capable of withstanding surges, without impairment to performance, of 600V, 3000A as specified by EEEI Std. 587-1980. In addition, under fully loaded operating conditions, all devices shall operate at a minimum 20 degrees C safety margin below the component temperature rating. LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. A positive air gap relay shall be employed with each dimmer to ensure that the load circuits are open when the "off" function is selected at a control station. Use of semiconductors to accomplish this result shall not be acceptable. These relays need not be integral to the dimming module but must be integral to the dimming cabinet. Dimming manufacturer shall provide and warrant both the relays and the necessary control interface(s) as part of the dimming system. C. All dimming modules shall be voltage regulated to maintain a constant firing angle under a plus or minus 20% change in line voltage. D. All dimming modules shall provide smooth and continuous Square Law dimming curve throughout the entire dimming range. E. All dimmers designed for use with inductive loads shall include the following additional features: 1. The maximum allowable asymmetry in the load waveform shall be +1 VDC. 2. The dimmer shall incorporate circuitry to prevent the lights from momentarily "flashing" when the dimmer is turned off. F. Quantities and sizes of each type of dimmer module shall be provided to control each type of load shown on the load schedules and/or drawings. G. Incandescent and Low Voltage - Magnetic Transformer: 1. Filtering shall be provided in each dimmer so that current rise time shall be at least 580 milliseconds at 50% rated dimmer capacity as measured from 10-90% of the load current waveform at a 90 degree conduction angle, and at no point rise faster than 30 mA/millisecond. Manufacturers shall provide additional filters as required to meet this specification. These filters need not be integral to the dimming module, but must be integral to the dimming cabinet. 2. Modules shall provide a dimming range from 100% to 0% (blackout). Minimum light levels shall be user adjustable in order to compensate for different loading of each dimmer module. H. Low Voltage - Electronic Transformer: 1. Dimming performance shall not adversely affect sound rating of electronic transformer. In addition, no flicker or interaction shall occur at any point in the dimming range. 2. Modules shall provide a dimming range from 100% to 0% (blackout). Minimum light levels shall be user adjustable in order to compensate for different loading of each dimmer module. I. Fluorescent - Mark VII - Solid State Dimming Ballasts: Fluorescent modules shall be rated to control 430 mA rapid start (3',4'), 800 mA high output (3', 4', 8'), or 265 mA t-8 (3',4",5") and single ended twin tube, 75 compact fluorescent lamps at 120 VAC. Module shall be rated to control 430 mA rapid start (4' only) at 277 VAC. All LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 lamps on the same circuit must have the same current rating (i.e. 800 mA), but may be different lengths. The dimming performance shall be as follows: 1. Dimming range from 100% to 20% light output. 2. One- and two-lamp ballasts track evenly, with no perceptible difference in light levels for the same type lamp. 3. Different lamp lengths on the same circuit track evenly, with no difference in light levels for the same type lamps. 4. Ballasts shall be inaudible with no apparent humming or buzzing at any point in the dimming range. 5. No electrical noise shall be generated which could interfere with any other properly installed electrical equipment. 6. Minimum light levels shall be user adjustable in order to compensate for different loading of each dimmer module. A zero percent control input from any control station shall turn the respective dimmer "off" completely. 7. The lamp sockets for the compact fluorescents shall be those specifically approved for dimming service by the dimming manufacturer. 2.4 EMERGENCY FULL-ON SYSTEM A. All circuits listed as emergency shall be connected to their respective circuit breakers in the emergency dimming panel or via relays in the dimming panel as shown on the drawings and/or dimming load schedule. They shall be controlled simultaneously with other lighting circuits within that control zone during the presence of normal utility power. Upon loss of normal power and the subsequent presence of emergency power, the circuit listed as emergency shall immediately go to a full-on condition. All local control stations shall be inoperable during this period. Once normal power is restored, all lighting zones shall revert back to their status prior to the emergency condition (restoration to some other "default" level is not acceptable). The emergency full-on mechanism may be accomplished by either of the following methods (reference power riser diagram to determine which type of emergency power is available). 1. Control Input Switching - The emergency electronics shall switch both the intensity signal and the on/off signal of each dimmer connected to an emergency circuit between the local control stations and a "full-on" constant- drive supply. This type of emergency full-on may be used with either a normal/emergency generator or a constant hot secondary utility feed and shall only require a signal normal/emergency feeder be bought to the Emergency Dimmer Panel (EDP). 2. Load Power Switching - The emergency electronics shall switch both the hot and neutral leg of each emergency feed via a two-pole, double throw emergency transfer relay per emergency circuit. These transfer relays shall be UL 1008 listed as emergency transfer relays, and shall be the only type of relay acceptable for load power switching of emergency circuits. This type of LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 emergency full-on may be used with either a normal/emergency generator feed, a constant hot secondary utility feed, a UPS system, or an emergency only feed. A 20A circuit feed is required from the emergency lighting panel to the Emergency Bypass Panel (EBP) per emergency circuit. 2.5 CONTROLS - DIMMING SYSTEMS A. Controls shall be low voltage type as specified here and as listed below and/or shown on the drawings. Controls shall use low voltage Class II wiring, electronically isolated from power wiring by means of a UL listed Class II transformer. A separate set of terminals shall be provided for each control station termination at the dimming panel and/or interface panels. B. Faceplates shall be machined from a single piece of 1/8" thick metal base (minimum) or faceplates can be fabricated in injection molded lexan polycarbonate. Faceplates shall have square corners, with edges bevelled with a 45 degree chamfer. Pushbuttons shall be low-profile, oblong shaped, with a L.E.D. next to each pushbutton, and with up to nine (9) pushbuttons arranged on a single gang size faceplate. The face plate color shall be custom painted to match paint chip sample supplied by the Architect prior to release for construction. C. Controls shall be engraved with appropriate zone and/or scene descriptions, furnished to the manufacturer prior to fabrication. Size and style of engraving type shall be determined by the Architect. Any silkscreened borders, logos, graduations, etc. shall be a graphic process that chemically bonds the graphics to the metal faceplate, resisting removal by scratching, cleaning, etc. D. All control stations shall provide power-failure memory. Should power be interrupted to the control station and subsequently returned, the lights shall come back on to the same levels set prior to the power interruption. Restoration to some other default level in not acceptable, unless specifically noted elsewhere. E. Fire Alarm and Security Alarm Interface: Provide central interface to accept maintained and dry contact closures to initiate alarm conditions. Upon receipt of such inputs, designated local control stations will be locked out to prevent unauthorized removal of the alarm condition, and designated lighting circuits shall come to full-on condition. A key switch operated control station shall re-enable the local controls once the alarm condition has been removed. Electrical contractor shall coordinate contact requirements with fire alarm and security contractor. 2.6 CONTROLS - GENERAL AREA LIGHTING A. General Description: Provide a complete, microcomputer-based low voltage switching system as detailed and scheduled on the Drawings. System shall consist of low voltage relay panels as described below, and wall switches connected to relay panel via low voltage conductors. Relays in panel shall function to switch on and off light fixtures and other designated electrical loads in response to wall switches and user-defined time-of-day schedules. B. Hardware: Low voltage relay panels shall each contain the number of load relays as scheduled on the Drawings. In addition, each relay panel shall also include all power supplies, logic tested for operation as described below. Each panel shall be LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 housed in a single NEMA I wall mounted steel enclosure. In addition to the low voltage wiring area, two line voltage wiring compartments shall be provided. Each relay shall have a single set of contacts rated for 20 amps at 120 or 277 volts. LED indicators shall be included within the panel to display status of each relay (on or off). Relays and logic circuits shall use quick connectors on all factory wiring for ease of replacement. All logic functions, schedules, and switch definitions shall be protected from loss of power for periods up to 10 years. Relay panel shall be provided with a low voltage receptacle Type RJ 11 for connection of a separate hand held controller for schedule and switch definition. One hand held controller is required for operation of all low voltage relay panels. Hand held controller shall have an environmentally sealed keypad, 3 ft control line for connection to relay panel, and a four-line, 20-character per line LCD display window which clearly details user instructions. C. Operation: Low voltage relay panel shall switch relays on and off in response to commands from local wall switches, user-defined time-of-day schedules, and immediate commands from the hand held controller. Wall switches may be both maintained and momentary action, mixed within one relay panel. Wall switches shall be capable of providing any of the following actions: On only On/Off On/Off, with time override off (2 to 999 minutes delay) should the switch be left on. 1. Wall switch circuits shall operate at 5 volts nominal, and shall be classified as a class 2 control circuit in accordance with NEC Article 725. 2. Time-of-day schedules shall be developed within the logic circuits of each relay panel. Each panel shall have the capacity for nine (9) separate daily schedules, including one holiday schedule. Weekly schedules and 20 holiday schedules shall be developed from combinations of the daily schedules, up to one year in advance. At the end of one year, the schedule shall automatically repeat. Schedules shall contain provisions for daylight savings time and leap year adjustments. 3. Prior to turning off lights from any time-based command (scheduled off or timed override switch off), the relay panel shall momentarily "flash" lights to indicate that occupants have one minute to initiate an override command. 4. Wall switch functions shall be defined by entries made using the hand held controller. Any wall switch may be configured to operate in combination of relays. Timed overrides associated with wall switches shall also be set using the hand held controller. The hand held controller shall be used to set operating schedules, review status of any relay, define switch functions, change a relay's status (on/off), and perform system diagnostics. Prompt messages shall be provided at each step on the LCD screen. 2.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. All components used in the dimming system shall be inspected following Military Standard 105D or equivalent. LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. The completely assembled dimming system shall be operated at full-rated load for a minimum of five hours before shipment. C. Finished system shall be fully tested for proper operation of all control functions per system approved submittals. D. Equipment manuals shall include certification by the manufacturer of the successful completion of the tests described in Section 2.06 Paragraphs B and C above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The system shall be installed utilizing complete manufacturer's shop drawings and in accordance with these specifications. B. Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the Contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control wiring for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place until all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits, or other wiring defects. C. All dimmed incandescent circuits shall be two wire with separate neutrals. All dimmed fluorescent circuits shall be three wire with two hots and separate neutrals. 3.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely checked out by a factory-trained engineer. The checkout shall be performed upon notification by the Contractor that the system installation is complete and that all loads have been tested live for continuity, are free from defects, and that all control wiring has been connected and checked for proper continuity. 3.3 WARRANTY AND WARRANTY SERVICE A. Manufacturer shall provide full two (2) year warranty and second year service contract on system. B. Warranty/Service Contract coverage shall begin from date of system startup; Warranty/Service Contract Service shall be performed by a factory-trained engineer. END OF SECTION 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 16940 - CONTACTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 16000 A. Electric General Provisions - Section 16010 B. Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035 C. Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065 D. Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500 1.3 SUMMARY A. This section includes contacts rated 600V and under. It includes the following items: 1. Lighting Contactors. 2. Elevator Contactors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16035. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16035. C. Comply with all mechanical and electrical notes and construction details for contactors. D. Submit a contactor schedule which indicates a clear understanding of the actual loads per contactor, and the corresponding circuit numbers (per the electrical drawings). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contactors shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label on each contactor. Additionally, each contactor shall be specifically listed by UL for control of the type of load (i.e., incandescent, low voltage, fluorescent, neon/cold-cathode, HID, motor) and elevator. CONTACTORS 16940 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Westinghouse 2. Square D 3. General Electric 4. ASCO B. Lighting Contactors 1. Provide the number of poles specified on the Drawings. 2. Contacts shall be mechanically or electrically held as required for the specific control device. 3. Coil shall operate at 120V. 4. Type of load to be served: Lighting. 5. Enclosure to be a NEMA 1. 6. Each set of contacts to be rated for a minimum of 20 amps at 120 or 277 volts or at the voltage specified on the Drawings. Coordinate with the Drawings for quantity of contacts. 2.2 ELEVATOR CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers 1. Bussmann – Power Module Switch – PS Series 2. LittelFuse – Power Switch LPS Series 3. Approved equal showing compliance to specification herein including 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating as manufactured by: a. Cutler – Hammer b. General Electric c. Square-D Co. B. Elevator Contactors 1. Description: Mechanically held fused switch with shunt-trip capabilities constructed, listed and certified to current elevator standards. 2. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 hertz. 3. Coil Wire: 2 wire. CONTACTORS 16940 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 4. Poles: 3 5. Frame Size: Ampere rating as shown on drawings. 6. Enclosure: NEMA 3R. 7. Switch Fuse Holder Type: Class J. 8. Fuse Size: Per elevator manufacturer requirements coordinated by Division 16. 9. AIC Rating: 200,000 with Class J fuses. 10. Trip Reset: Manual. 11. Required Accessories: a. Shunt-trip capability at 120V AC from remote fire-alarm signal. b. 120V AC isolation relay for shunt-trip activation. c. Fused control transformer at 120V AC secondary. Primary voltage to match elevator voltage. d. Test keyswitch mounted on enclosure front with 6 key sets to simulate fire alarm trip signal. e. Red “on” pilot light mounted on enclusre front. f. Single pole normally closed (1P NC) mechanical interlock (required for use with hydrolic elevators with automatic recall and battery lowering option). g. Fire alarm voltage monitoring per NFPA 72. h. Labeled terminal block. i. Auxiliary Contactacts: One normally open and one normally closed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The system shall be installed utilizing complete manufacturer's shop drawings and in accordance with these specifications. B. Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the Contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control wiring for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place until all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits, or other wiring defects. C. Each contactor shall be installed individually in a NEMA enclosure appropriate for the conditions. D. Division 16, together with equipment suppliers and other Divisions, shall coordinate their equipment operational voltages and controls for proper operation of elevator contactors. Division 16 shall provide any necessary auxiliary equipment for system interfaces. The auxiliary equipment shall provide for, but not be limited to: CONTACTORS 16940 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Remote tripping and resetting interfaces. 2. Elevator Contactor Fire Alarm Interfaces for: a. Shunt-trip activation b. “Loss of Control Voltage” monitoring (fire alarm supervisory or trouble alarm). 3. Elevator contactor hydraulic elevator (battery) recall control disable. 4. Elevator protective fuse size and type. END OF SECTION 16940 CONTACTORS 16940 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 19591 - SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: Provide all materials and labor for the design, engineering and installation of a new smoke management system, hereafter referred to as the system, at the Strata Vail Project in Vail, Colorado. B. Vail Fire and Emergency Services (VFES) has detail requirements for fire protection system designs and submittals that should be obtained from Fire Marshal, Mike McGee at (970) 479-2135. There are local amendments for the adopted fire code and these amendments need to be confirmed by the contractor. It is our understanding, and confirmed in discussions with the fire department, that the building will not be classified as a high-rise. However a smoke management system has been required by the fire department that includes the stairwell and elevator hoist-way pressurization of two stairwells (A-South and B-North) and two elevator hoist-ways (A-1/A-2 and B-1/B-2). 1.2 SUMMARY OF GENERAL SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. It is anticipated that a letter of agreement between the Town of Vail and Strata officials will be established to clarify the requirements for smoke management system (SMS). The SMS is not for the entire building and is not intended to comply with all the requirements of Section 909 of the 2003 IBC for a smoke control system. B. Designated stairways and elevator shafts will be pressurized, however there are no zoned or floor smoke control provided between floors or use areas. The fire alarm system will be required to be designed to accommodate the SMS function described in this specification with reference to the SMS matrix of operation, line diagram and narrative on sequence of operation and testing. C. Provide a graphic annunciation and controls for the Smoke Management System in the fire command room. The Fire Fighter Smoke Management Control Panel will be UUKL Listed for smoke control and will include the following designations in accordance with the 2003 International Building Code. D. Provide necessary interface wiring to fan(s) and air handling unit(s), Direct Digital Control (DDC), or Motor Control Center (MCC) electrical panels for start up or shut down of fans when smoke is detected by the automatic smoke detector and/or sprinkler water-flow and/or the smoke control module is initiated. Provide a minimum of one digital (dry contact) output per smoke control zone. There are 4 stairways and 4 elevator shafts that are pressurized. Refer to the mechanical drawings for smoke management system details. E. Provide and install devices, equipment and wiring necessary to monitor and control the Smoke Management System (SMS). Refer to the mechanical drawings and specifications for pressurized stairways and elevator shafts. Also refer to the SMS line diagram and matrix of operation. F. Test and adjust all equipment and systems. Smoke Management System 19591 - 1 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 G. Prepare and submit shop drawings, permit drawings, record drawings and other submittals required herein. H. Warranty all new equipment and systems for two years after final acceptance of the system. I. Obtain, secure, and pay for all permits, plan check approvals, and inspections necessary to perform the work. This shall include any necessary off-hour costs for inspections and witnessing of tests. J. Provide testing of all devices, and repair as necessary, during the warranty period up to and including the first annual tests, as required in NFPA. K. The 2003 IFC/IBC has the following requirements for the building in this project. 1. The smoke management system will be zoned to correspond with automatic sprinkler and fire alarm zones. 2. The smoke management system will work in unison with the fire alarm and fire protection systems. 1.3 FIREFIGHTERS SMOKE MANAGEMENT PANEL A. The Firefighters Smoke Management Panel will be a UUKL Listed Smoke Control Panel with the following features. (The Smoke Management Panel specific layout and hand control switches are to be approved by the fire protection engineer of record). The following specific requirements are to be incorporated into the Smoke Management Panel: HAND-OFF-AUTO SWITCHES Hand control switches are to be mounted on the Smoke Management Panel and shall be at least 1 ½ inches in diameter. Positions are to be indicating as shown below: Auto Position – In the automatic position the fans and dampers or vents are in the “STANDBY or READY POSITION” available to operate automatically upon receipt of a priority 1 alarm for the fire alarm control panel. Manual On Position – Fans and dampers or vents can be manually operated in the pressurization mode with or without a priority 1 fire alarm condition. The Manual On Position switch can also override a supervisory signal from another fire alarm initiating device such as a duct detector. Off Position – In this position the fan and damper or vents are disabled and will not operate in response to a priority 1 alarm from the fire alarm control panel. Status Indicator Lights – The status indicator lights are to be in accordance with International Building Code as guided below. WHITE INDICATOR LIGHT – Fans and damper or vent in standby or ready mode indicating no faults and the Hand Off Auto Switch is in the AUTO POSITION. Smoke Management System 19591 - 2 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RED INDICATOR LIGHT – If the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the “Auto” position and a priority 1 alarm is received the fan will shut down on a supervisory signal from associated duct detector OR if the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the OFF position. GREEN INDICATOR LIGHT – Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the AUTO POSITION and a priority 1 alarm has been received and the fan is running with dampers or vents modulating during the smoke management sequencing OR Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the MANUAL ON POSITION with or without a priority 1 alarm condition and the fan is operating. YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHT – Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the AUTO position and no priority 1 alarm condition, but the system detects that either the fan or damper/vent is not in the standby or ready position. Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the AUTO position with a priority 1 alarm. This indicator light occurs if either the fan or dampers/vents are not operating properly. Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the MANUAL on position, but either the fan or damper/vent is not operating correctly. Note: In the normal condition, all status lights will be white and all Hand-Off-Auto switches will be in the AUTO position. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable portions of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards, Guides and Recommended Practices listed herein. B. All work and materials shall conform to all Federal, State and local codes and regulations governing the installation, including the current editions of the Town of Vail Building and Fire Department. C. All devices, systems, equipment and materials furnished and installed shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) for their intended use. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the UL listing limitations. D. The Smoke Management System (SMS) shall utilize UL-864-UUKL listed components to consist of the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), the smoke management panel and any other components utilized in Divisions 15 and 16 to obtain this listing. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for filing of all documents, paying all fees and securing all permits, inspections and approvals necessary for conducting this work. This shall include any costs associated with plan check, off-hour inspections, and fees associated with witnessing of fire alarm tests. Plan check drawings submitted to the City for permit approval shall include all necessary information, including any stamps or seals required for approval. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Smoke Management System 19591 - 3 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 A. Product Data: Submit a detailed equipment list, identifying types, models and quantities of all materials, devices and equipment proposed. This submittal shall include manufacturers' data sheets showing the types and models of all equipment, devices, material and wire proposed. Evidence of UL listings and local approvals shall be submitted with the data sheets. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Fire alarm control equipment and annunciators, including all components, modules, and enclosures. 2. Smoke detectors, monitor modules, control modules, and notification appliances. 3. Standby batteries. 4. Any other materials, devices or equipment to be provided. B. Shop Drawings: Prior to installation submit five full sets of shop drawings and data sheets, and installation manuals/instructions detailing the manufacturer's installation recommendations for all equipment to be installed for approval. Installation prior to receipt of approved shop drawings shall be at the risk of the Contractor. The shop drawings shall consist of the following: 1. A drawing legend sheet identifying: a) All symbols used on the drawings, by type of device or equipment, manufacturer, and manufacturers part number. This information shall correspond to the manufacturer's catalog data sheets required elsewhere in this section. b) All conventions, abbreviations and specialized terminology used on the drawings, as necessary to understand and interpret the information contained therein. c) All color codes and conduit, conductor/ circuit and device numbering systems. d) A complete drawing list/index identifying all drawings in the shop drawing package by title, drawing number and Specification cross-reference. 2. Clean architectural floor plans drawn to scale and a system riser diagram with a title block on each drawing. The floor plan drawings shall indicate: a) Location of all devices, equipment, risers and electrical power connections. b) Number, size, and type of conductors and conduit. 3. Sequence of Operations matrix. This matrix shall indicate specific system functions associated with each type of initiating device including alarm, supervisory and trouble signals. C. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall contain: 1. A detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, notification signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, intended sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations, and limitations. 2. A detailed description of the operation of the system, including operator responses. Smoke Management System 19591 - 4 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 The approved sequence of operation shall be placed in, or adjacent to, the operator's control panel. 3. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended or as would be provided under a maintenance contract including a testing and maintenance schedule and detailed testing and maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. 4. Manufacturers' data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed. 5. A list of recommended spare parts. 6. Service directory, which includes the main 24-hour emergency service number and at least three alternate numbers that are monitored on a 24-hour basis. 7. Small-scale (11 inches by 17 inches) record drawings of the system. D. Record Drawings: Shall be provided and maintained on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the smoke management system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the approved shop drawings. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set. These drawings shall be made available to the Engineer of Record, or their representative, upon request. 1. Upon completion of the work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare complete, accurate final record drawings reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the fire alarm system. 2. Upon completion of the work, two sets of blue-line record drawings and electronic shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record for review. 3. Following the Fire Protection Engineer of Record's review and acceptance of the blue-line record drawings, and before final approval, one (1) set of reproducible mylar record drawings, one copy on diskette, and four (4) additional sets of blue-line record drawings shall be delivered to the Fire Protection Engineer of Record. 1.6 WARRANTY AND EMERGENCY SERVICE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Architect. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or equipment. B. Emergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four (4) hours of a request by the Architect or owner for such service. This service shall be provided on a 24-hour per day, seven days per week basis. Smoke Management System 19591 - 5 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.7 TRAINING A. Conduct two (2) training sessions as required, but not less than four (4) hours each, to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the features, operation, and maintenance of the modified systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled as agreeable to the Owner. B. Training shall include all system operational functions needed by building and security personnel. This shall include, but will not be limited to: 1. Alarm acknowledgement. 2. Interpretation of the scheme used to provide identifiers. 3. System reset. 4. Basic troubleshooting. 1.8 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Three (3) complete sets of any special tools or keys necessary for normal operation and maintenance of the system shall be provided under this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment and system components furnished and installed shall be new and listed by UL for their intended use. The equipment and system components shall be installed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards, the manufacturers' recommendations and within the limitations of the UL listings. All equipment and system components shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. 2.2 SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) A. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing electrical power (120VAC) to the motorized fire/smoke dampers (provided by the Mechanical Contractor) to control operation of the dampers. Electrical power to fire/smoke dampers shall be derived from the building emergency power circuits. Dampers shall be powered in the open position and fail in the closed position. Refer to the mechanical drawings for specific locations and types of dampers. B. Fire alarm contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the smoke/fire damper integral limit switches for open and closed positions by the fire alarm system. Damper status indication shall be provided at the Smoke Management System (SMS) control/annunciator panel. In the Fire Command Center. C. Fire alarm contractor shall provide a relay (wired normally closed, in series) at each motorized damper to control damper position. D. Motorized dampers shall be provided by the mechanical contractor. Refer to mechanical system contract drawings for location of fire/smoke dampers. E. Fire/smoke dampers shall be arranged to open/close upon alarm signal per the Smoke Smoke Management System 19591 - 6 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Management System (SMS) matrix of operation within the fire alarm zone served by the associated air handling unit. Refer to mechanical system contract documents for air handling unit schedule and SMS mode of operation. F. Refer to the Sequence of Operation Matrix with the fire alarm and SMS diagrams for sequence of SMS operation. G. Coordinate SMS operation with the mechanical system drawings included in the contract document. Fire alarm contractor shall provide a Graphic Annunciator an override/ smoke management panel in accordance with Section 909.16 of the 2003 IBC and the Town of Vail Fire Marshal requirements. H. Manual control three-way position switches shall be arranged to operate all fans, automatic closing doors and dampers for each specific stairway or elevator hoist-way pressurization system. The manual control switches shall be interfaced to the mechanical system Direct Digital Control (DDC) panels via a relay panel or Motor Control Center (MCC) electrical panels by addressable control modules. I. Differential pressure switches for monitoring smoke control fan units shall be provided by the mechanical contractor. Fire Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the differential pressure switches to indicate actual air flow. J. Stairways indicated on the mechanical drawings shall be provided with pressurization systems. There are no vestibules provided for the pressurized stairways. Stairways only have to have a minimum 0.05 inches of water pressure difference between the stairways and connecting corridor. Compliance with Section 909.20.5 of the 2003 IBC requiring a 0.15 inches of water pressure difference is not required, since the building is not classified as a high-rise according to the Town of Vail and does not require smoke-proof enclosures according to Section 1019.1.8 of the 2003 IBC. K. Elevator hoist-ways indicated on the mechanical drawings shall be provided with pressurization systems. L. Elevator hoist-way machine rooms above the pressurized elevator hoist-ways indicated on the mechanical drawings shall be provided with pressurization systems. M. Controls for the SMS stair and elevator hoist-way pressurization systems shall be provided in the Fire Command Center. 2.3 WARRANTY A. All materials and workmanship during the installation period and for a period of one year, beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Engineer of Record, shall be provided with a warranty. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and warranty periods for any damage. B. All devices shall be tested at minimum intervals as required by these standards, with a written report after each test. C. Provide emergency repair service for the new portion of the system, at no cost to the Smoke Management System 19591 - 7 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Owner, within four hours of a request for such service by the Owner during both the installation and the warranty periods. The service shall be provided on a 24-hour per day, seven days per week basis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The job site supervisor shall examine daily all areas in which the work will be performed on the day prior to beginning work. The supervisor shall immediately report unsatisfactory working conditions to the Engineer of Record for resolution. The supervisor shall not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory working conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. All holes or damage made in any wall, ceiling or floor shall be patched, restoring the walls, ceilings, and floors to their original condition, fire resistance and integrity. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Upon completion of each installation phase, perform and document on an approved format, system tests as required herein. All acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer of Record or his designated representatives. B. All conductors, including shielding conductors, shall be tested for continuity, shorts to ground and shorts between pairs. C. All alarm initiating devices shall be functionally tested. D. All building control functions (i.e. elevator recall, door hold open or unlocking, the Smoke Management System-SMS, etc.) initiated by the fire alarm control panel shall be tested. E. Any additional tests, required by the referenced codes, Standards, or Town of Vail, shall be performed. Documentation of such tests shall include: 1. The date and time of each test. 2. A reference set of record drawings, numerically identifying the individual components and circuits tested, test locations, and indicating the measured sound level in each location. 3. A description of each test performed. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Make arrangements with the Engineer of Record for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance tests. The Engineer of Record will witness the final acceptance test. Smoke Management System 19591 - 8 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO STRATA VAIL PERMIT RESUBMITTAL VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. If after being advised that the work is completed and ready for test, the work has not been completed or the final acceptance tests are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be responsible for the extra expenses for re-inspection and witnessing the retesting of the work. 3.5 RECEIVING AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all receiving, handling and storage of his materials at the job site. Use of loading docks, service driveways, and freight elevators shall be coordinated with the Architect. 3.6 RUBBISH REMOVAL A. Contractor shall remove rubbish and debris resulting from his work on a daily basis from the work site. Rubbish not removed by the Contractor may be removed by the Architect and back-charged to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 19591 Smoke Management System 19591 - 9 BCER Engineering, Inc. Arvada, CO